78
+ − 1 ;;; Do NOT edit this file!
+ − 2 ;;; It is automatically generated using "make autoloads"
+ − 3 ;;; See update-autoloads.sh and autoload.el for more details.
+ − 4
+ − 5
+ − 6 ;;;### (autoloads (batch-byte-recompile-directory batch-byte-recompile-directory-norecurse batch-byte-compile display-call-tree byte-compile-sexp byte-compile compile-defun byte-compile-file byte-recompile-file byte-recompile-directory byte-force-recompile) "bytecomp" "bytecomp/bytecomp.el")
+ − 7
+ − 8 (autoload 'byte-force-recompile "bytecomp" "\
+ − 9 Recompile every `.el' file in DIRECTORY that already has a `.elc' file.
+ − 10 Files in subdirectories of DIRECTORY are processed also." t nil)
+ − 11
+ − 12 (autoload 'byte-recompile-directory "bytecomp" "\
+ − 13 Recompile every `.el' file in DIRECTORY that needs recompilation.
+ − 14 This is if a `.elc' file exists but is older than the `.el' file.
+ − 15 Files in subdirectories of DIRECTORY are processed also unless argument
+ − 16 NORECURSION is non-nil.
+ − 17
+ − 18 If the `.elc' file does not exist, normally the `.el' file is *not* compiled.
+ − 19 But a prefix argument (optional second arg) means ask user,
+ − 20 for each such `.el' file, whether to compile it. Prefix argument 0 means
+ − 21 don't ask and compile the file anyway.
+ − 22
+ − 23 A nonzero prefix argument also means ask about each subdirectory.
+ − 24
+ − 25 If the fourth argument FORCE is non-nil,
+ − 26 recompile every `.el' file that already has a `.elc' file." t nil)
+ − 27
+ − 28 (autoload 'byte-recompile-file "bytecomp" "\
+ − 29 Recompile a file of Lisp code named FILENAME if it needs recompilation.
+ − 30 This is if the `.elc' file exists but is older than the `.el' file.
+ − 31
+ − 32 If the `.elc' file does not exist, normally the `.el' file is *not*
+ − 33 compiled. But a prefix argument (optional second arg) means ask user
+ − 34 whether to compile it. Prefix argument 0 don't ask and recompile anyway." t nil)
+ − 35
+ − 36 (autoload 'byte-compile-file "bytecomp" "\
+ − 37 Compile a file of Lisp code named FILENAME into a file of byte code.
+ − 38 The output file's name is made by appending `c' to the end of FILENAME.
+ − 39 With prefix arg (noninteractively: 2nd arg), load the file after compiling." t nil)
+ − 40
+ − 41 (autoload 'compile-defun "bytecomp" "\
+ − 42 Compile and evaluate the current top-level form.
+ − 43 Print the result in the minibuffer.
+ − 44 With argument, insert value in current buffer after the form." t nil)
+ − 45
+ − 46 (autoload 'byte-compile "bytecomp" "\
+ − 47 If FORM is a symbol, byte-compile its function definition.
+ − 48 If FORM is a lambda or a macro, byte-compile it as a function." nil nil)
+ − 49
+ − 50 (autoload 'byte-compile-sexp "bytecomp" "\
+ − 51 Compile and return SEXP." nil nil)
+ − 52
+ − 53 (autoload 'display-call-tree "bytecomp" "\
+ − 54 Display a call graph of a specified file.
+ − 55 This lists which functions have been called, what functions called
+ − 56 them, and what functions they call. The list includes all functions
+ − 57 whose definitions have been compiled in this Emacs session, as well as
+ − 58 all functions called by those functions.
+ − 59
+ − 60 The call graph does not include macros, inline functions, or
+ − 61 primitives that the byte-code interpreter knows about directly (eq,
+ − 62 cons, etc.).
+ − 63
+ − 64 The call tree also lists those functions which are not known to be called
+ − 65 \(that is, to which no calls have been compiled), and which cannot be
+ − 66 invoked interactively." t nil)
+ − 67
+ − 68 (autoload 'batch-byte-compile "bytecomp" "\
+ − 69 Run `byte-compile-file' on the files remaining on the command line.
+ − 70 Use this from the command line, with `-batch';
+ − 71 it won't work in an interactive Emacs.
+ − 72 Each file is processed even if an error occurred previously.
+ − 73 For example, invoke \"emacs -batch -f batch-byte-compile $emacs/ ~/*.el\"" nil nil)
+ − 74
+ − 75 (autoload 'batch-byte-recompile-directory-norecurse "bytecomp" "\
+ − 76 Same as `batch-byte-recompile-directory' but without recursion." nil nil)
+ − 77
+ − 78 (autoload 'batch-byte-recompile-directory "bytecomp" "\
+ − 79 Runs `byte-recompile-directory' on the dirs remaining on the command line.
+ − 80 Must be used only with `-batch', and kills Emacs on completion.
+ − 81 For example, invoke `xemacs -batch -f batch-byte-recompile-directory .'." nil nil)
+ − 82
+ − 83 ;;;***
+ − 84
+ − 85 ;;;### (autoloads (disassemble) "disass" "bytecomp/disass.el")
+ − 86
+ − 87 (autoload 'disassemble "disass" "\
+ − 88 Print disassembled code for OBJECT in (optional) BUFFER.
+ − 89 OBJECT can be a symbol defined as a function, or a function itself
+ − 90 \(a lambda expression or a compiled-function object).
+ − 91 If OBJECT is not already compiled, we compile it, but do not
+ − 92 redefine OBJECT if it is a symbol." t nil)
+ − 93
+ − 94 ;;;***
+ − 95
+ − 96 ;;;### (autoloads nil "cal-dst" "calendar/cal-dst.el")
+ − 97
+ − 98 (put 'calendar-daylight-savings-starts 'risky-local-variable t)
+ − 99
+ − 100 (put 'calendar-daylight-savings-ends 'risky-local-variable t)
+ − 101
+ − 102 ;;;***
+ − 103
+ − 104 ;;;### (autoloads nil "cal-x" "calendar/cal-x.el")
+ − 105
+ − 106 (defvar calendar-setup 'one-frame "\
+ − 107 The frame set up of the calendar.
+ − 108 The choices are `one-frame' (calendar and diary together in one separate,
+ − 109 dediciated frame) or `two-frames' (calendar and diary in separate, dedicated
+ − 110 frames); with any other value the current frame is used.")
+ − 111
+ − 112 ;;;***
+ − 113
+ − 114 ;;;### (autoloads (list-yahrzeit-dates calendar) "calendar" "calendar/calendar.el")
+ − 115
+ − 116 (defvar calendar-week-start-day 0 "\
+ − 117 *The day of the week on which a week in the calendar begins.
+ − 118 0 means Sunday (default), 1 means Monday, and so on.")
+ − 119
+ − 120 (defvar calendar-offset 0 "\
+ − 121 *The offset of the principal month from the center of the calendar window.
+ − 122 0 means the principal month is in the center (default), -1 means on the left,
+ − 123 +1 means on the right. Larger (or smaller) values push the principal month off
+ − 124 the screen.")
+ − 125
+ − 126 (defvar view-diary-entries-initially nil "\
+ − 127 *Non-nil means display current date's diary entries on entry.
+ − 128 The diary is displayed in another window when the calendar is first displayed,
+ − 129 if the current date is visible. The number of days of diary entries displayed
+ − 130 is governed by the variable `number-of-diary-entries'.")
+ − 131
+ − 132 (defvar number-of-diary-entries 1 "\
+ − 133 *Specifies how many days of diary entries are to be displayed initially.
+ − 134 This variable affects the diary display when the command M-x diary is used,
+ − 135 or if the value of the variable `view-diary-entries-initially' is t. For
+ − 136 example, if the default value 1 is used, then only the current day's diary
+ − 137 entries will be displayed. If the value 2 is used, then both the current
+ − 138 day's and the next day's entries will be displayed.
+ − 139
+ − 140 The value can also be a vector such as [0 2 2 2 2 4 1]; this value
+ − 141 says to display no diary entries on Sunday, the display the entries
+ − 142 for the current date and the day after on Monday through Thursday,
+ − 143 display Friday through Monday's entries on Friday, and display only
+ − 144 Saturday's entries on Saturday.
+ − 145
+ − 146 This variable does not affect the diary display with the `d' command
+ − 147 from the calendar; in that case, the prefix argument controls the
+ − 148 number of days of diary entries displayed.")
+ − 149
+ − 150 (defvar mark-diary-entries-in-calendar nil "\
+ − 151 *Non-nil means mark dates with diary entries, in the calendar window.
+ − 152 The marking symbol is specified by the variable `diary-entry-marker'.")
+ − 153
+ − 154 (defvar view-calendar-holidays-initially nil "\
+ − 155 *Non-nil means display holidays for current three month period on entry.
+ − 156 The holidays are displayed in another window when the calendar is first
+ − 157 displayed.")
+ − 158
+ − 159 (defvar mark-holidays-in-calendar nil "\
+ − 160 *Non-nil means mark dates of holidays in the calendar window.
+ − 161 The marking symbol is specified by the variable `calendar-holiday-marker'.")
+ − 162
+ − 163 (defvar all-hebrew-calendar-holidays nil "\
+ − 164 *If nil, show only major holidays from the Hebrew calendar.
+ − 165 This means only those Jewish holidays that appear on secular calendars.
+ − 166
+ − 167 If t, show all the holidays that would appear in a complete Hebrew calendar.")
+ − 168
+ − 169 (defvar all-christian-calendar-holidays nil "\
+ − 170 *If nil, show only major holidays from the Christian calendar.
+ − 171 This means only those Christian holidays that appear on secular calendars.
+ − 172
+ − 173 If t, show all the holidays that would appear in a complete Christian
+ − 174 calendar.")
+ − 175
+ − 176 (defvar all-islamic-calendar-holidays nil "\
+ − 177 *If nil, show only major holidays from the Islamic calendar.
+ − 178 This means only those Islamic holidays that appear on secular calendars.
+ − 179
+ − 180 If t, show all the holidays that would appear in a complete Islamic
+ − 181 calendar.")
+ − 182
+ − 183 (defvar calendar-load-hook nil "\
+ − 184 *List of functions to be called after the calendar is first loaded.
+ − 185 This is the place to add key bindings to `calendar-mode-map'.")
+ − 186
+ − 187 (defvar initial-calendar-window-hook nil "\
+ − 188 *List of functions to be called when the calendar window is first opened.
+ − 189 The functions invoked are called after the calendar window is opened, but
+ − 190 once opened is never called again. Leaving the calendar with the `q' command
+ − 191 and reentering it will cause these functions to be called again.")
+ − 192
+ − 193 (defvar today-visible-calendar-hook nil "\
+ − 194 *List of functions called whenever the current date is visible.
+ − 195 This can be used, for example, to replace today's date with asterisks; a
+ − 196 function `calendar-star-date' is included for this purpose:
+ − 197 (setq today-visible-calendar-hook 'calendar-star-date)
+ − 198 It can also be used to mark the current date with `calendar-today-marker';
+ − 199 a function is also provided for this:
+ − 200 (setq today-visible-calendar-hook 'calendar-mark-today)
+ − 201
+ − 202 The corresponding variable `today-invisible-calendar-hook' is the list of
+ − 203 functions called when the calendar function was called when the current
+ − 204 date is not visible in the window.
+ − 205
+ − 206 Other than the use of the provided functions, the changing of any
+ − 207 characters in the calendar buffer by the hooks may cause the failure of the
+ − 208 functions that move by days and weeks.")
+ − 209
+ − 210 (defvar today-invisible-calendar-hook nil "\
+ − 211 *List of functions called whenever the current date is not visible.
+ − 212
+ − 213 The corresponding variable `today-visible-calendar-hook' is the list of
+ − 214 functions called when the calendar function was called when the current
+ − 215 date is visible in the window.
+ − 216
+ − 217 Other than the use of the provided functions, the changing of any
+ − 218 characters in the calendar buffer by the hooks may cause the failure of the
+ − 219 functions that move by days and weeks.")
+ − 220
+ − 221 (defvar diary-file "~/diary" "\
+ − 222 *Name of the file in which one's personal diary of dates is kept.
+ − 223
+ − 224 The file's entries are lines in any of the forms
+ − 225
+ − 226 MONTH/DAY
+ − 227 MONTH/DAY/YEAR
+ − 228 MONTHNAME DAY
+ − 229 MONTHNAME DAY, YEAR
+ − 230 DAYNAME
+ − 231
+ − 232 at the beginning of the line; the remainder of the line is the diary entry
+ − 233 string for that date. MONTH and DAY are one or two digit numbers, YEAR is
+ − 234 a number and may be written in full or abbreviated to the final two digits.
+ − 235 If the date does not contain a year, it is generic and applies to any year.
+ − 236 DAYNAME entries apply to any date on which is on that day of the week.
+ − 237 MONTHNAME and DAYNAME can be spelled in full, abbreviated to three
+ − 238 characters (with or without a period), capitalized or not. Any of DAY,
+ − 239 MONTH, or MONTHNAME, YEAR can be `*' which matches any day, month, or year,
+ − 240 respectively.
+ − 241
+ − 242 The European style (in which the day precedes the month) can be used
+ − 243 instead, if you execute `european-calendar' when in the calendar, or set
+ − 244 `european-calendar-style' to t in your .emacs file. The European forms are
+ − 245
+ − 246 DAY/MONTH
+ − 247 DAY/MONTH/YEAR
+ − 248 DAY MONTHNAME
+ − 249 DAY MONTHNAME YEAR
+ − 250 DAYNAME
+ − 251
+ − 252 To revert to the default American style from the European style, execute
+ − 253 `american-calendar' in the calendar.
+ − 254
+ − 255 A diary entry can be preceded by the character
+ − 256 `diary-nonmarking-symbol' (ordinarily `&') to make that entry
+ − 257 nonmarking--that is, it will not be marked on dates in the calendar
+ − 258 window but will appear in a diary window.
+ − 259
+ − 260 Multiline diary entries are made by indenting lines after the first with
+ − 261 either a TAB or one or more spaces.
+ − 262
+ − 263 Lines not in one the above formats are ignored. Here are some sample diary
+ − 264 entries (in the default American style):
+ − 265
+ − 266 12/22/1988 Twentieth wedding anniversary!!
+ − 267 &1/1. Happy New Year!
+ − 268 10/22 Ruth's birthday.
+ − 269 21: Payday
+ − 270 Tuesday--weekly meeting with grad students at 10am
+ − 271 Supowit, Shen, Bitner, and Kapoor to attend.
+ − 272 1/13/89 Friday the thirteenth!!
+ − 273 &thu 4pm squash game with Lloyd.
+ − 274 mar 16 Dad's birthday
+ − 275 April 15, 1989 Income tax due.
+ − 276 &* 15 time cards due.
+ − 277
+ − 278 If the first line of a diary entry consists only of the date or day name with
+ − 279 no trailing blanks or punctuation, then that line is not displayed in the
+ − 280 diary window; only the continuation lines is shown. For example, the
+ − 281 single diary entry
+ − 282
+ − 283 02/11/1989
+ − 284 Bill Blattner visits Princeton today
+ − 285 2pm Cognitive Studies Committee meeting
+ − 286 2:30-5:30 Lizzie at Lawrenceville for `Group Initiative'
+ − 287 4:00pm Jamie Tappenden
+ − 288 7:30pm Dinner at George and Ed's for Alan Ryan
+ − 289 7:30-10:00pm dance at Stewart Country Day School
+ − 290
+ − 291 will appear in the diary window without the date line at the beginning. This
+ − 292 facility allows the diary window to look neater, but can cause confusion if
+ − 293 used with more than one day's entries displayed.
+ − 294
+ − 295 Diary entries can be based on Lisp sexps. For example, the diary entry
+ − 296
+ − 297 %%(diary-block 11 1 1990 11 10 1990) Vacation
+ − 298
+ − 299 causes the diary entry \"Vacation\" to appear from November 1 through November
+ − 300 10, 1990. Other functions available are `diary-float', `diary-anniversary',
+ − 301 `diary-cyclic', `diary-day-of-year', `diary-iso-date', `diary-french-date',
+ − 302 `diary-hebrew-date', `diary-islamic-date', `diary-mayan-date',
+ − 303 `diary-yahrzeit', `diary-sunrise-sunset', `diary-phases-of-moon',
+ − 304 `diary-parasha', `diary-omer', `diary-rosh-hodesh', and
+ − 305 `diary-sabbath-candles'. See the documentation for the function
+ − 306 `list-sexp-diary-entries' for more details.
+ − 307
+ − 308 Diary entries based on the Hebrew and/or the Islamic calendar are also
+ − 309 possible, but because these are somewhat slow, they are ignored
+ − 310 unless you set the `nongregorian-diary-listing-hook' and the
+ − 311 `nongregorian-diary-marking-hook' appropriately. See the documentation
+ − 312 for these functions for details.
+ − 313
+ − 314 Diary files can contain directives to include the contents of other files; for
+ − 315 details, see the documentation for the variable `list-diary-entries-hook'.")
+ − 316
+ − 317 (defvar diary-nonmarking-symbol "&" "\
+ − 318 *Symbol indicating that a diary entry is not to be marked in the calendar.")
+ − 319
+ − 320 (defvar hebrew-diary-entry-symbol "H" "\
+ − 321 *Symbol indicating a diary entry according to the Hebrew calendar.")
+ − 322
+ − 323 (defvar islamic-diary-entry-symbol "I" "\
+ − 324 *Symbol indicating a diary entry according to the Islamic calendar.")
+ − 325
+ − 326 (defvar diary-include-string "#include" "\
+ − 327 *The string indicating inclusion of another file of diary entries.
+ − 328 See the documentation for the function `include-other-diary-files'.")
+ − 329
+ − 330 (defvar sexp-diary-entry-symbol "%%" "\
+ − 331 *The string used to indicate a sexp diary entry in diary-file.
+ − 332 See the documentation for the function `list-sexp-diary-entries'.")
+ − 333
+ − 334 (defvar abbreviated-calendar-year t "\
+ − 335 *Interpret a two-digit year DD in a diary entry as either 19DD or 20DD.
+ − 336 For the Gregorian calendar; similarly for the Hebrew and Islamic calendars.
+ − 337 If this variable is nil, years must be written in full.")
+ − 338
+ − 339 (defvar european-calendar-style nil "\
+ − 340 *Use the European style of dates in the diary and in any displays.
+ − 341 If this variable is t, a date 1/2/1990 would be interpreted as February 1,
+ − 342 1990. The accepted European date styles are
+ − 343
+ − 344 DAY/MONTH
+ − 345 DAY/MONTH/YEAR
+ − 346 DAY MONTHNAME
+ − 347 DAY MONTHNAME YEAR
+ − 348 DAYNAME
+ − 349
+ − 350 Names can be capitalized or not, written in full, or abbreviated to three
+ − 351 characters with or without a period.")
+ − 352
+ − 353 (defvar american-date-diary-pattern '((month "/" day "[^/0-9]") (month "/" day "/" year "[^0-9]") (monthname " *" day "[^,0-9]") (monthname " *" day ", *" year "[^0-9]") (dayname "\\W")) "\
+ − 354 *List of pseudo-patterns describing the American patterns of date used.
+ − 355 See the documentation of `diary-date-forms' for an explanation.")
+ − 356
+ − 357 (defvar european-date-diary-pattern '((day "/" month "[^/0-9]") (day "/" month "/" year "[^0-9]") (backup day " *" monthname "\\W+\\<[^*0-9]") (day " *" monthname " *" year "[^0-9]") (dayname "\\W")) "\
+ − 358 *List of pseudo-patterns describing the European patterns of date used.
+ − 359 See the documentation of `diary-date-forms' for an explanation.")
+ − 360
+ − 361 (defvar european-calendar-display-form '((if dayname (concat dayname ", ")) day " " monthname " " year) "\
+ − 362 *Pseudo-pattern governing the way a date appears in the European style.
+ − 363 See the documentation of calendar-date-display-form for an explanation.")
+ − 364
+ − 365 (defvar american-calendar-display-form '((if dayname (concat dayname ", ")) monthname " " day ", " year) "\
+ − 366 *Pseudo-pattern governing the way a date appears in the American style.
+ − 367 See the documentation of `calendar-date-display-form' for an explanation.")
+ − 368
+ − 369 (defvar print-diary-entries-hook 'lpr-buffer "\
+ − 370 *List of functions called after a temporary diary buffer is prepared.
+ − 371 The buffer shows only the diary entries currently visible in the diary
+ − 372 buffer. The default just does the printing. Other uses might include, for
+ − 373 example, rearranging the lines into order by day and time, saving the buffer
+ − 374 instead of deleting it, or changing the function used to do the printing.")
+ − 375
+ − 376 (defvar list-diary-entries-hook nil "\
+ − 377 *List of functions called after diary file is culled for relevant entries.
+ − 378 It is to be used for diary entries that are not found in the diary file.
+ − 379
+ − 380 A function `include-other-diary-files' is provided for use as the value of
+ − 381 this hook. This function enables you to use shared diary files together
+ − 382 with your own. The files included are specified in the diary file by lines
+ − 383 of the form
+ − 384
+ − 385 #include \"filename\"
+ − 386
+ − 387 This is recursive; that is, #include directives in files thus included are
+ − 388 obeyed. You can change the \"#include\" to some other string by changing
+ − 389 the variable `diary-include-string'. When you use `include-other-diary-files'
+ − 390 as part of the list-diary-entries-hook, you will probably also want to use the
+ − 391 function `mark-included-diary-files' as part of `mark-diary-entries-hook'.
+ − 392
+ − 393 For example, you could use
+ − 394
+ − 395 (setq list-diary-entries-hook
+ − 396 '(include-other-diary-files sort-diary-entries))
+ − 397 (setq diary-display-hook 'fancy-diary-display)
+ − 398
+ − 399 in your `.emacs' file to cause the fancy diary buffer to be displayed with
+ − 400 diary entries from various included files, each day's entries sorted into
+ − 401 lexicographic order.")
+ − 402
+ − 403 (defvar diary-hook nil "\
+ − 404 *List of functions called after the display of the diary.
+ − 405 Can be used for appointment notification.")
+ − 406
+ − 407 (defvar diary-display-hook nil "\
+ − 408 *List of functions that handle the display of the diary.
+ − 409 If nil (the default), `simple-diary-display' is used. Use `ignore' for no
+ − 410 diary display.
+ − 411
+ − 412 Ordinarily, this just displays the diary buffer (with holidays indicated in
+ − 413 the mode line), if there are any relevant entries. At the time these
+ − 414 functions are called, the variable `diary-entries-list' is a list, in order
+ − 415 by date, of all relevant diary entries in the form of ((MONTH DAY YEAR)
+ − 416 STRING), where string is the diary entry for the given date. This can be
+ − 417 used, for example, a different buffer for display (perhaps combined with
+ − 418 holidays), or produce hard copy output.
+ − 419
+ − 420 A function `fancy-diary-display' is provided as an alternative
+ − 421 choice for this hook; this function prepares a special noneditable diary
+ − 422 buffer with the relevant diary entries that has neat day-by-day arrangement
+ − 423 with headings. The fancy diary buffer will show the holidays unless the
+ − 424 variable `holidays-in-diary-buffer' is set to nil. Ordinarily, the fancy
+ − 425 diary buffer will not show days for which there are no diary entries, even
+ − 426 if that day is a holiday; if you want such days to be shown in the fancy
+ − 427 diary buffer, set the variable `diary-list-include-blanks' to t.")
+ − 428
+ − 429 (defvar nongregorian-diary-listing-hook nil "\
+ − 430 *List of functions called for listing diary file and included files.
+ − 431 As the files are processed for diary entries, these functions are used to cull
+ − 432 relevant entries. You can use either or both of `list-hebrew-diary-entries'
+ − 433 and `list-islamic-diary-entries'. The documentation for these functions
+ − 434 describes the style of such diary entries.")
+ − 435
+ − 436 (defvar mark-diary-entries-hook nil "\
+ − 437 *List of functions called after marking diary entries in the calendar.
+ − 438
+ − 439 A function `mark-included-diary-files' is also provided for use as the
+ − 440 mark-diary-entries-hook; it enables you to use shared diary files together
+ − 441 with your own. The files included are specified in the diary file by lines
+ − 442 of the form
+ − 443 #include \"filename\"
+ − 444 This is recursive; that is, #include directives in files thus included are
+ − 445 obeyed. You can change the \"#include\" to some other string by changing the
+ − 446 variable `diary-include-string'. When you use `mark-included-diary-files' as
+ − 447 part of the mark-diary-entries-hook, you will probably also want to use the
+ − 448 function `include-other-diary-files' as part of `list-diary-entries-hook'.")
+ − 449
+ − 450 (defvar nongregorian-diary-marking-hook nil "\
+ − 451 *List of functions called for marking diary file and included files.
+ − 452 As the files are processed for diary entries, these functions are used to cull
+ − 453 relevant entries. You can use either or both of `mark-hebrew-diary-entries'
+ − 454 and `mark-islamic-diary-entries'. The documentation for these functions
+ − 455 describes the style of such diary entries.")
+ − 456
+ − 457 (defvar diary-list-include-blanks nil "\
+ − 458 *If nil, do not include days with no diary entry in the list of diary entries.
+ − 459 Such days will then not be shown in the fancy diary buffer, even if they
+ − 460 are holidays.")
+ − 461
+ − 462 (defvar holidays-in-diary-buffer t "\
+ − 463 *Non-nil means include holidays in the diary display.
+ − 464 The holidays appear in the mode line of the diary buffer, or in the
+ − 465 fancy diary buffer next to the date. This slows down the diary functions
+ − 466 somewhat; setting it to nil makes the diary display faster.")
+ − 467
+ − 468 (defvar general-holidays '((holiday-fixed 1 1 "New Year's Day") (holiday-float 1 1 3 "Martin Luther King Day") (holiday-fixed 2 2 "Ground Hog Day") (holiday-fixed 2 14 "Valentine's Day") (holiday-float 2 1 3 "President's Day") (holiday-fixed 3 17 "St. Patrick's Day") (holiday-fixed 4 1 "April Fool's Day") (holiday-float 5 0 2 "Mother's Day") (holiday-float 5 1 -1 "Memorial Day") (holiday-fixed 6 14 "Flag Day") (holiday-float 6 0 3 "Father's Day") (holiday-fixed 7 4 "Independence Day") (holiday-float 9 1 1 "Labor Day") (holiday-float 10 1 2 "Columbus Day") (holiday-fixed 10 31 "Halloween") (holiday-fixed 11 11 "Veteran's Day") (holiday-float 11 4 4 "Thanksgiving")) "\
+ − 469 *General holidays. Default value is for the United States.
+ − 470 See the documentation for `calendar-holidays' for details.")
+ − 471
+ − 472 (put 'general-holidays 'risky-local-variable t)
+ − 473
+ − 474 (defvar local-holidays nil "\
+ − 475 *Local holidays.
+ − 476 See the documentation for `calendar-holidays' for details.")
+ − 477
+ − 478 (put 'local-holidays 'risky-local-variable t)
+ − 479
+ − 480 (defvar other-holidays nil "\
+ − 481 *User defined holidays.
+ − 482 See the documentation for `calendar-holidays' for details.")
+ − 483
+ − 484 (put 'other-holidays 'risky-local-variable t)
+ − 485
+ − 486 (defvar hebrew-holidays-1 '((holiday-rosh-hashanah-etc) (if all-hebrew-calendar-holidays (holiday-julian 11 (let* ((m displayed-month) (y displayed-year) (year)) (increment-calendar-month m y -1) (let ((year (extract-calendar-year (calendar-julian-from-absolute (calendar-absolute-from-gregorian (list m 1 y)))))) (if (zerop (% (1+ year) 4)) 22 21))) "\"Tal Umatar\" (evening)"))))
+ − 487
+ − 488 (put 'hebrew-holidays-1 'risky-local-variable t)
+ − 489
+ − 490 (defvar hebrew-holidays-2 '((if all-hebrew-calendar-holidays (holiday-hanukkah) (holiday-hebrew 9 25 "Hanukkah")) (if all-hebrew-calendar-holidays (holiday-hebrew 10 (let ((h-year (extract-calendar-year (calendar-hebrew-from-absolute (calendar-absolute-from-gregorian (list displayed-month 28 displayed-year)))))) (if (= (% (calendar-absolute-from-hebrew (list 10 10 h-year)) 7) 6) 11 10)) "Tzom Teveth")) (if all-hebrew-calendar-holidays (holiday-hebrew 11 15 "Tu B'Shevat"))))
+ − 491
+ − 492 (put 'hebrew-holidays-2 'risky-local-variable t)
+ − 493
+ − 494 (defvar hebrew-holidays-3 '((if all-hebrew-calendar-holidays (holiday-hebrew 11 (let ((m displayed-month) (y displayed-year)) (increment-calendar-month m y 1) (let* ((h-year (extract-calendar-year (calendar-hebrew-from-absolute (calendar-absolute-from-gregorian (list m (calendar-last-day-of-month m y) y))))) (s-s (calendar-hebrew-from-absolute (if (= (% (calendar-absolute-from-hebrew (list 7 1 h-year)) 7) 6) (calendar-dayname-on-or-before 6 (calendar-absolute-from-hebrew (list 11 17 h-year))) (calendar-dayname-on-or-before 6 (calendar-absolute-from-hebrew (list 11 16 h-year)))))) (day (extract-calendar-day s-s))) day)) "Shabbat Shirah"))))
+ − 495
+ − 496 (put 'hebrew-holidays-3 'risky-local-variable t)
+ − 497
+ − 498 (defvar hebrew-holidays-4 '((holiday-passover-etc) (if (and all-hebrew-calendar-holidays (let* ((m displayed-month) (y displayed-year) (year)) (increment-calendar-month m y -1) (let ((year (extract-calendar-year (calendar-julian-from-absolute (calendar-absolute-from-gregorian (list m 1 y)))))) (= 21 (% year 28))))) (holiday-julian 3 26 "Kiddush HaHamah")) (if all-hebrew-calendar-holidays (holiday-tisha-b-av-etc))))
+ − 499
+ − 500 (put 'hebrew-holidays-4 'risky-local-variable t)
+ − 501
+ − 502 (defvar hebrew-holidays (append hebrew-holidays-1 hebrew-holidays-2 hebrew-holidays-3 hebrew-holidays-4) "\
+ − 503 *Jewish holidays.
+ − 504 See the documentation for `calendar-holidays' for details.")
+ − 505
+ − 506 (put 'hebrew-holidays 'risky-local-variable t)
+ − 507
+ − 508 (defvar christian-holidays '((if all-christian-calendar-holidays (holiday-fixed 1 6 "Epiphany")) (holiday-easter-etc) (if all-christian-calendar-holidays (holiday-greek-orthodox-easter)) (if all-christian-calendar-holidays (holiday-fixed 8 15 "Assumption")) (if all-christian-calendar-holidays (holiday-advent)) (holiday-fixed 12 25 "Christmas") (if all-christian-calendar-holidays (holiday-julian 12 25 "Eastern Orthodox Christmas"))) "\
+ − 509 *Christian holidays.
+ − 510 See the documentation for `calendar-holidays' for details.")
+ − 511
+ − 512 (put 'christian-holidays 'risky-local-variable t)
+ − 513
+ − 514 (defvar islamic-holidays '((holiday-islamic 1 1 (format "Islamic New Year %d" (let ((m displayed-month) (y displayed-year)) (increment-calendar-month m y 1) (extract-calendar-year (calendar-islamic-from-absolute (calendar-absolute-from-gregorian (list m (calendar-last-day-of-month m y) y))))))) (if all-islamic-calendar-holidays (holiday-islamic 1 10 "Ashura")) (if all-islamic-calendar-holidays (holiday-islamic 3 12 "Mulad-al-Nabi")) (if all-islamic-calendar-holidays (holiday-islamic 7 26 "Shab-e-Mi'raj")) (if all-islamic-calendar-holidays (holiday-islamic 8 15 "Shab-e-Bara't")) (holiday-islamic 9 1 "Ramadan Begins") (if all-islamic-calendar-holidays (holiday-islamic 9 27 "Shab-e Qadr")) (if all-islamic-calendar-holidays (holiday-islamic 10 1 "Id-al-Fitr")) (if all-islamic-calendar-holidays (holiday-islamic 12 10 "Id-al-Adha"))) "\
+ − 515 *Islamic holidays.
+ − 516 See the documentation for `calendar-holidays' for details.")
+ − 517
+ − 518 (put 'islamic-holidays 'risky-local-variable t)
+ − 519
+ − 520 (defvar solar-holidays '((if (fboundp 'atan) (solar-equinoxes-solstices)) (if (progn (require 'cal-dst) t) (funcall 'holiday-sexp calendar-daylight-savings-starts '(format "Daylight Savings Time Begins %s" (if (fboundp 'atan) (solar-time-string (/ calendar-daylight-savings-starts-time (float 60)) calendar-standard-time-zone-name) "")))) (funcall 'holiday-sexp calendar-daylight-savings-ends '(format "Daylight Savings Time Ends %s" (if (fboundp 'atan) (solar-time-string (/ calendar-daylight-savings-ends-time (float 60)) calendar-daylight-time-zone-name) "")))) "\
+ − 521 *Sun-related holidays.
+ − 522 See the documentation for `calendar-holidays' for details.")
+ − 523
+ − 524 (put 'solar-holidays 'risky-local-variable t)
+ − 525
+ − 526 (defvar calendar-holidays (append general-holidays local-holidays other-holidays christian-holidays hebrew-holidays islamic-holidays solar-holidays) "\
+ − 527 *List of notable days for the command M-x holidays.
+ − 528
+ − 529 Additional holidays are easy to add to the list, just put them in the list
+ − 530 `other-holidays' in your .emacs file. Similarly, by setting any of
+ − 531 `general-holidays', `local-holidays' `christian-holidays', `hebrew-holidays',
+ − 532 `islamic-holidays', or `solar-holidays' to nil in your .emacs file, you can
+ − 533 eliminate unwanted categories of holidays. The intention is that (in the US)
+ − 534 `local-holidays' be set in site-init.el and `other-holidays' be set by the
+ − 535 user.
+ − 536
+ − 537 Entries on the list are expressions that return (possibly empty) lists of
+ − 538 items of the form ((month day year) string) of a holiday in the in the
+ − 539 three-month period centered around `displayed-month' of `displayed-year'.
+ − 540 Several basic functions are provided for this purpose:
+ − 541
+ − 542 (holiday-fixed MONTH DAY STRING) is a fixed date on the Gregorian calendar
+ − 543 (holiday-float MONTH DAYNAME K STRING &optional day) is the Kth DAYNAME in
+ − 544 MONTH on the Gregorian calendar (0 for Sunday,
+ − 545 etc.); K<0 means count back from the end of the
+ − 546 month. An optional parameter DAY means the Kth
+ − 547 DAYNAME after/before MONTH DAY.
+ − 548 (holiday-hebrew MONTH DAY STRING) a fixed date on the Hebrew calendar
+ − 549 (holiday-islamic MONTH DAY STRING) a fixed date on the Islamic calendar
+ − 550 (holiday-julian MONTH DAY STRING) a fixed date on the Julian calendar
+ − 551 (holiday-sexp SEXP STRING) SEXP is a Gregorian-date-valued expression
+ − 552 in the variable `year'; if it evaluates to
+ − 553 a visible date, that's the holiday; if it
+ − 554 evaluates to nil, there's no holiday. STRING
+ − 555 is an expression in the variable `date'.
+ − 556
+ − 557 For example, to add Bastille Day, celebrated in France on July 14, add
+ − 558
+ − 559 (holiday-fixed 7 14 \"Bastille Day\")
+ − 560
+ − 561 to the list. To add Hurricane Supplication Day, celebrated in the Virgin
+ − 562 Islands on the fourth Monday in August, add
+ − 563
+ − 564 (holiday-float 8 1 4 \"Hurricane Supplication Day\")
+ − 565
+ − 566 to the list (the last Monday would be specified with `-1' instead of `4').
+ − 567 To add the last day of Hanukkah to the list, use
+ − 568
+ − 569 (holiday-hebrew 10 2 \"Last day of Hanukkah\")
+ − 570
+ − 571 since the Hebrew months are numbered with 1 starting from Nisan, while to
+ − 572 add the Islamic feast celebrating Mohammed's birthday use
+ − 573
+ − 574 (holiday-islamic 3 12 \"Mohammed's Birthday\")
+ − 575
+ − 576 since the Islamic months are numbered from 1 starting with Muharram. To
+ − 577 add Thomas Jefferson's birthday, April 2, 1743 (Julian), use
+ − 578
+ − 579 (holiday-julian 4 2 \"Jefferson's Birthday\")
+ − 580
+ − 581 To include a holiday conditionally, use the sexp form or a conditional. For
+ − 582 example, to include American presidential elections, which occur on the first
+ − 583 Tuesday after the first Monday in November of years divisible by 4, add
+ − 584
+ − 585 (holiday-sexp
+ − 586 (if (zerop (% year 4))
+ − 587 (calendar-gregorian-from-absolute
+ − 588 (1+ (calendar-dayname-on-or-before
+ − 589 1 (+ 6 (calendar-absolute-from-gregorian
+ − 590 (list 11 1 year)))))))
+ − 591 \"US Presidential Election\")
+ − 592
+ − 593 or
+ − 594
+ − 595 (if (zerop (% displayed-year 4))
+ − 596 (holiday-fixed 11
+ − 597 (extract-calendar-day
+ − 598 (calendar-gregorian-from-absolute
+ − 599 (1+ (calendar-dayname-on-or-before
+ − 600 1 (+ 6 (calendar-absolute-from-gregorian
+ − 601 (list 11 1 displayed-year)))))))
+ − 602 \"US Presidential Election\"))
+ − 603
+ − 604 to the list. To include the phases of the moon, add
+ − 605
+ − 606 (lunar-phases)
+ − 607
+ − 608 to the holiday list, where `lunar-phases' is an Emacs-Lisp function that
+ − 609 you've written to return a (possibly empty) list of the relevant VISIBLE dates
+ − 610 with descriptive strings such as
+ − 611
+ − 612 (((2 6 1989) \"New Moon\") ((2 12 1989) \"First Quarter Moon\") ... ).")
+ − 613
+ − 614 (put 'calendar-holidays 'risky-local-variable t)
+ − 615
+ − 616 (autoload 'calendar "calendar" "\
+ − 617 Display a three-month calendar in another window.
+ − 618 The three months appear side by side, with the current month in the middle
+ − 619 surrounded by the previous and next months. The cursor is put on today's date.
+ − 620
+ − 621 If called with an optional prefix argument, prompts for month and year.
+ − 622
+ − 623 This function is suitable for execution in a .emacs file; appropriate setting
+ − 624 of the variable `view-diary-entries-initially' will cause the diary entries for
+ − 625 the current date to be displayed in another window. The value of the variable
+ − 626 `number-of-diary-entries' controls the number of days of diary entries
+ − 627 displayed upon initial display of the calendar.
+ − 628
+ − 629 An optional prefix argument ARG causes the calendar displayed to be ARG
+ − 630 months in the future if ARG is positive or in the past if ARG is negative;
+ − 631 in this case the cursor goes on the first day of the month.
+ − 632
+ − 633 Once in the calendar window, future or past months can be moved into view.
+ − 634 Arbitrary months can be displayed, or the calendar can be scrolled forward
+ − 635 or backward.
+ − 636
+ − 637 The cursor can be moved forward or backward by one day, one week, one month,
+ − 638 or one year. All of these commands take prefix arguments which, when negative,
+ − 639 cause movement in the opposite direction. For convenience, the digit keys
+ − 640 and the minus sign are automatically prefixes. The window is replotted as
+ − 641 necessary to display the desired date.
+ − 642
+ − 643 Diary entries can be marked on the calendar or displayed in another window.
+ − 644
+ − 645 Use M-x describe-mode for details of the key bindings in the calendar window.
+ − 646
+ − 647 The Gregorian calendar is assumed.
+ − 648
+ − 649 After loading the calendar, the hooks given by the variable
+ − 650 `calendar-load-hook' are run. This is the place to add key bindings to the
+ − 651 calendar-mode-map.
+ − 652
+ − 653 After preparing the calendar window initially, the hooks given by the variable
+ − 654 `initial-calendar-window-hook' are run.
+ − 655
+ − 656 The hooks given by the variable `today-visible-calendar-hook' are run
+ − 657 everytime the calendar window gets scrolled, if the current date is visible
+ − 658 in the window. If it is not visible, the hooks given by the variable
+ − 659 `today-invisible-calendar-hook' are run. Thus, for example, setting
+ − 660 `today-visible-calendar-hook' to 'calendar-star-date will cause today's date
+ − 661 to be replaced by asterisks to highlight it whenever it is in the window." t nil)
+ − 662
+ − 663 (autoload 'list-yahrzeit-dates "calendar" "\
+ − 664 List Yahrzeit dates for *Gregorian* DEATH-DATE from START-YEAR to END-YEAR.
+ − 665 When called interactively from the calendar window, the date of death is taken
+ − 666 from the cursor position." t nil)
+ − 667
+ − 668 ;;;***
+ − 669
+ − 670 ;;;### (autoloads (diary) "diary-lib" "calendar/diary-lib.el")
+ − 671
+ − 672 (autoload 'diary "diary-lib" "\
+ − 673 Generate the diary window for ARG days starting with the current date.
+ − 674 If no argument is provided, the number of days of diary entries is governed
+ − 675 by the variable `number-of-diary-entries'. This function is suitable for
+ − 676 execution in a `.emacs' file." t nil)
+ − 677
+ − 678 ;;;***
+ − 679
+ − 680 ;;;### (autoloads (holidays) "holidays" "calendar/holidays.el")
+ − 681
+ − 682 (autoload 'holidays "holidays" "\
+ − 683 Display the holidays for last month, this month, and next month.
+ − 684 If called with an optional prefix argument, prompts for month and year.
+ − 685
+ − 686 This function is suitable for execution in a .emacs file." t nil)
+ − 687
+ − 688 ;;;***
+ − 689
+ − 690 ;;;### (autoloads (phases-of-moon) "lunar" "calendar/lunar.el")
+ − 691
+ − 692 (autoload 'phases-of-moon "lunar" "\
+ − 693 Display the quarters of the moon for last month, this month, and next month.
+ − 694 If called with an optional prefix argument, prompts for month and year.
+ − 695
+ − 696 This function is suitable for execution in a .emacs file." t nil)
+ − 697
+ − 698 ;;;***
+ − 699
+ − 700 ;;;### (autoloads (solar-equinoxes-solstices sunrise-sunset) "solar" "calendar/solar.el")
+ − 701
+ − 702 (defvar calendar-time-display-form '(12-hours ":" minutes am-pm (if time-zone " (") time-zone (if time-zone ")")) "\
+ − 703 *The pseudo-pattern that governs the way a time of day is formatted.
+ − 704
+ − 705 A pseudo-pattern is a list of expressions that can involve the keywords
+ − 706 `12-hours', `24-hours', and `minutes', all numbers in string form,
+ − 707 and `am-pm' and `time-zone', both alphabetic strings.
+ − 708
+ − 709 For example, the form
+ − 710
+ − 711 '(24-hours \":\" minutes
+ − 712 (if time-zone \" (\") time-zone (if time-zone \")\"))
+ − 713
+ − 714 would give military-style times like `21:07 (UTC)'.")
+ − 715
+ − 716 (defvar calendar-latitude nil "\
+ − 717 *Latitude of `calendar-location-name' in degrees.
+ − 718
+ − 719 The value can be either a decimal fraction (one place of accuracy is
+ − 720 sufficient), + north, - south, such as 40.7 for New York City, or the value
+ − 721 can be a vector [degrees minutes north/south] such as [40 50 north] for New
+ − 722 York City.
+ − 723
+ − 724 This variable should be set in site-local.el.")
+ − 725
+ − 726 (defvar calendar-longitude nil "\
+ − 727 *Longitude of `calendar-location-name' in degrees.
+ − 728
+ − 729 The value can be either a decimal fraction (one place of accuracy is
+ − 730 sufficient), + east, - west, such as -73.9 for New York City, or the value
+ − 731 can be a vector [degrees minutes east/west] such as [73 55 west] for New
+ − 732 York City.
+ − 733
+ − 734 This variable should be set in site-local.el.")
+ − 735
+ − 736 (defvar calendar-location-name '(let ((float-output-format "%.1f")) (format "%s%s, %s%s" (if (numberp calendar-latitude) (abs calendar-latitude) (+ (aref calendar-latitude 0) (/ (aref calendar-latitude 1) 60.0))) (if (numberp calendar-latitude) (if (> calendar-latitude 0) "N" "S") (if (equal (aref calendar-latitude 2) 'north) "N" "S")) (if (numberp calendar-longitude) (abs calendar-longitude) (+ (aref calendar-longitude 0) (/ (aref calendar-longitude 1) 60.0))) (if (numberp calendar-longitude) (if (> calendar-longitude 0) "E" "W") (if (equal (aref calendar-latitude 2) 'east) "E" "W")))) "\
+ − 737 *Expression evaluating to name of `calendar-longitude', calendar-latitude'.
+ − 738 For example, \"New York City\". Default value is just the latitude, longitude
+ − 739 pair.
+ − 740
+ − 741 This variable should be set in site-local.el.")
+ − 742
+ − 743 (autoload 'sunrise-sunset "solar" "\
+ − 744 Local time of sunrise and sunset for today. Accurate to +/- 2 minutes.
+ − 745 If called with an optional prefix argument, prompt for date.
+ − 746
+ − 747 If called with an optional double prefix argument, prompt for longitude,
+ − 748 latitude, time zone, and date, and always use standard time.
+ − 749
+ − 750 This function is suitable for execution in a .emacs file." t nil)
+ − 751
+ − 752 (autoload 'solar-equinoxes-solstices "solar" "\
+ − 753 Date and time of equinoxes and solstices, if visible in the calendar window.
+ − 754 Requires floating point." nil nil)
+ − 755
+ − 756 ;;;***
+ − 757
+ − 758 ;;;### (autoloads (comint-dynamic-list-completions comint-dynamic-complete comint-run make-comint) "comint" "comint/comint.el")
+ − 759
+ − 760 (autoload 'make-comint "comint" "\
+ − 761 Make a comint process NAME in a buffer, running PROGRAM.
+ − 762 The name of the buffer is made by surrounding NAME with `*'s.
+ − 763 PROGRAM should be either a string denoting an executable program to create
+ − 764 via `start-process', or a cons pair of the form (HOST . SERVICE) denoting a TCP
+ − 765 connection to be opened via `open-network-stream'. If there is already a
+ − 766 running process in that buffer, it is not restarted. Optional third arg
+ − 767 STARTFILE is the name of a file to send the contents of to the process.
+ − 768
+ − 769 If PROGRAM is a string, any more args are arguments to PROGRAM." nil nil)
+ − 770
+ − 771 (autoload 'comint-run "comint" "\
+ − 772 Run PROGRAM in a comint buffer and switch to it.
+ − 773 The buffer name is made by surrounding the file name of PROGRAM with `*'s.
+ − 774 The file name is used to make a symbol name, such as `comint-sh-hook', and any
+ − 775 hooks on this symbol are run in the buffer.
+ − 776 See `make-comint' and `comint-exec'." t nil)
+ − 777
+ − 778 (autoload 'comint-dynamic-complete "comint" "\
+ − 779 Dynamically perform completion at point.
+ − 780 Calls the functions in `comint-dynamic-complete-functions' to perform
+ − 781 completion until a function returns non-nil, at which point completion is
+ − 782 assumed to have occurred." t nil)
+ − 783
+ − 784 (autoload 'comint-dynamic-list-completions "comint" "\
+ − 785 List in help buffer sorted COMPLETIONS.
+ − 786 Typing SPC flushes the help buffer." nil nil)
+ − 787
+ − 788 ;;;***
+ − 789
+ − 790 ;;;### (autoloads (gdb) "gdb" "comint/gdb.el")
+ − 791
+ − 792 (defvar gdb-command-name "gdb" "\
+ − 793 Pathname for executing gdb.")
+ − 794
+ − 795 (autoload 'gdb "gdb" "\
+ − 796 Run gdb on program FILE in buffer *gdb-FILE*.
+ − 797 The directory containing FILE becomes the initial working directory
+ − 798 and source-file directory for GDB. If you wish to change this, use
+ − 799 the GDB commands `cd DIR' and `directory'." t nil)
+ − 800
+ − 801 ;;;***
+ − 802
+ − 803 ;;;### (autoloads (gdbsrc) "gdbsrc" "comint/gdbsrc.el")
+ − 804
+ − 805 (autoload 'gdbsrc "gdbsrc" "\
+ − 806 Activates a gdb session with gdbsrc-mode turned on. A numeric prefix
+ − 807 argument can be used to specify a running process to attach, and a non-numeric
+ − 808 prefix argument will cause you to be prompted for a core file to debug." t nil)
+ − 809
+ − 810 ;;;***
+ − 811
+ − 812 ;;;### (autoloads (perldb xdb dbx sdb) "gud" "comint/gud.el")
+ − 813
+ − 814 (autoload 'sdb "gud" "\
+ − 815 Run sdb on program FILE in buffer *gud-FILE*.
+ − 816 The directory containing FILE becomes the initial working directory
+ − 817 and source-file directory for your debugger." t nil)
+ − 818
+ − 819 (autoload 'dbx "gud" "\
+ − 820 Run dbx on program FILE in buffer *gud-FILE*.
+ − 821 The directory containing FILE becomes the initial working directory
+ − 822 and source-file directory for your debugger." t nil)
+ − 823
+ − 824 (autoload 'xdb "gud" "\
+ − 825 Run xdb on program FILE in buffer *gud-FILE*.
+ − 826 The directory containing FILE becomes the initial working directory
+ − 827 and source-file directory for your debugger.
+ − 828
+ − 829 You can set the variable 'gud-xdb-directories' to a list of program source
+ − 830 directories if your program contains sources from more than one directory." t nil)
+ − 831
+ − 832 (autoload 'perldb "gud" "\
+ − 833 Run perldb on program FILE in buffer *gud-FILE*.
+ − 834 The directory containing FILE becomes the initial working directory
+ − 835 and source-file directory for your debugger." t nil)
+ − 836
+ − 837 ;;;***
+ − 838
+ − 839 ;;;### (autoloads nil "inf-lisp" "comint/inf-lisp.el")
+ − 840
+ − 841 (add-hook 'same-window-buffer-names "*inferior-lisp*")
+ − 842
+ − 843 ;;;***
+ − 844
+ − 845 ;;;### (autoloads (rlogin) "rlogin" "comint/rlogin.el")
+ − 846
+ − 847 (add-hook 'same-window-regexps "^\\*rlogin-.*\\*\\(\\|<[0-9]+>\\)")
+ − 848
+ − 849 (autoload 'rlogin "rlogin" "\
+ − 850 Open a network login connection to HOST via the `rlogin' program.
+ − 851 Input is sent line-at-a-time to the remote connection.
+ − 852
+ − 853 Communication with the remote host is recorded in a buffer `*rlogin-HOST*'
+ − 854 \(or `*rlogin-USER@HOST*' if the remote username differs).
+ − 855 If a prefix argument is given and the buffer `*rlogin-HOST*' already exists,
+ − 856 a new buffer with a different connection will be made.
+ − 857
+ − 858 When called from a program, if the optional second argument is a string or
+ − 859 buffer, it names the buffer to use.
+ − 860
+ − 861 The variable `rlogin-program' contains the name of the actual program to
+ − 862 run. It can be a relative or absolute path.
+ − 863
+ − 864 The variable `rlogin-explicit-args' is a list of arguments to give to
+ − 865 the rlogin when starting. They are added after any arguments given in
+ − 866 INPUT-ARGS.
+ − 867
+ − 868 If the default value of `rlogin-directory-tracking-mode' is t, then the
+ − 869 default directory in that buffer is set to a remote (FTP) file name to
+ − 870 access your home directory on the remote machine. Occasionally this causes
+ − 871 an error, if you cannot access the home directory on that machine. This
+ − 872 error is harmless as long as you don't try to use that default directory.
+ − 873
+ − 874 If `rlogin-directory-tracking-mode' is neither t nor nil, then the default
+ − 875 directory is initially set up to your (local) home directory.
+ − 876 This is useful if the remote machine and your local machine
+ − 877 share the same files via NFS. This is the default.
+ − 878
+ − 879 If you wish to change directory tracking styles during a session, use the
+ − 880 function `rlogin-directory-tracking-mode' rather than simply setting the
+ − 881 variable." t nil)
+ − 882
+ − 883 ;;;***
+ − 884
+ − 885 ;;;### (autoloads (shell) "shell" "comint/shell.el")
+ − 886
+ − 887 (defvar shell-prompt-pattern (purecopy "^[^#$%>\n]*[#$%>] *") "\
+ − 888 Regexp to match prompts in the inferior shell.
+ − 889 Defaults to \"^[^#$%>\\n]*[#$%>] *\", which works pretty well.
+ − 890 This variable is used to initialise `comint-prompt-regexp' in the
+ − 891 shell buffer.
+ − 892
+ − 893 The pattern should probably not match more than one line. If it does,
+ − 894 shell-mode may become confused trying to distinguish prompt from input
+ − 895 on lines which don't start with a prompt.
+ − 896
+ − 897 This is a fine thing to set in your `.emacs' file.")
+ − 898
+ − 899 (autoload 'shell "shell" "\
+ − 900 Run an inferior shell, with I/O through buffer *shell*.
+ − 901 If buffer exists but shell process is not running, make new shell.
+ − 902 If buffer exists and shell process is running,
+ − 903 just switch to buffer `*shell*'.
+ − 904 Program used comes from variable `explicit-shell-file-name',
+ − 905 or (if that is nil) from the ESHELL environment variable,
+ − 906 or else from SHELL if there is no ESHELL.
+ − 907 If a file `~/.emacs_SHELLNAME' exists, it is given as initial input
+ − 908 (Note that this may lose due to a timing error if the shell
+ − 909 discards input when it starts up.)
+ − 910 The buffer is put in Shell mode, giving commands for sending input
+ − 911 and controlling the subjobs of the shell. See `shell-mode'.
+ − 912 See also the variable `shell-prompt-pattern'.
+ − 913
+ − 914 The shell file name (sans directories) is used to make a symbol name
+ − 915 such as `explicit-csh-args'. If that symbol is a variable,
+ − 916 its value is used as a list of arguments when invoking the shell.
+ − 917 Otherwise, one argument `-i' is passed to the shell.
+ − 918
+ − 919 \(Type \\[describe-mode] in the shell buffer for a list of commands.)" t nil)
+ − 920
+ − 921 (add-hook 'same-window-buffer-names "*shell*")
+ − 922
+ − 923 ;;;***
+ − 924
+ − 925 ;;;### (autoloads (rsh telnet) "telnet" "comint/telnet.el")
+ − 926
+ − 927 (add-hook 'same-window-regexps "\\*telnet-.*\\*\\(\\|<[0-9]+>\\)")
+ − 928
+ − 929 (autoload 'telnet "telnet" "\
+ − 930 Open a network login connection to host named HOST (a string).
+ − 931 With a prefix argument, prompts for the port name or number as well.
+ − 932 Communication with HOST is recorded in a buffer `*HOST-telnet*'.
+ − 933 Normally input is edited in Emacs and sent a line at a time.
+ − 934 See also `\\[rsh]'." t nil)
+ − 935
+ − 936 (add-hook 'same-window-regexps "\\*rsh-[^-]*\\*\\(\\|<[0-9]*>\\)")
+ − 937
+ − 938 (autoload 'rsh "telnet" "\
+ − 939 Open a network login connection to host named HOST (a string).
+ − 940 Communication with HOST is recorded in a buffer `*rsh-HOST*'.
+ − 941 Normally input is edited in Emacs and sent a line at a time.
+ − 942 See also `\\[telnet]'." t nil)
+ − 943
+ − 944 ;;;***
+ − 945
+ − 946 ;;;### (autoloads (ange-ftp-hook-function) "ange-ftp" "dired/ange-ftp.el")
+ − 947
+ − 948 (defvar ange-ftp-path-format '("^/\\(\\([^@/:]*\\)@\\)?\\([^@/:]*\\):\\(.*\\)" 3 2 4) "\
+ − 949 *Format of a fully expanded remote pathname. This is a cons
+ − 950 \(REGEXP . (HOST USER PATH)), where REGEXP is a regular expression matching
+ − 951 the full remote pathname, and HOST, USER, and PATH are the numbers of
+ − 952 parenthesized expressions in REGEXP for the components (in that order).")
+ − 953
+ − 954 (autoload 'ange-ftp-hook-function "ange-ftp" nil nil nil)
+ − 955
+ − 956 (or (assoc (car ange-ftp-path-format) file-name-handler-alist) (setq file-name-handler-alist (cons (cons (car ange-ftp-path-format) 'ange-ftp-hook-function) file-name-handler-alist)))
+ − 957
+ − 958 ;;;***
+ − 959
+ − 960 ;;;### (autoloads (dired-make-permissions-interactive) "dired-chmod" "dired/dired-chmod.el")
+ − 961
+ − 962 (autoload 'dired-make-permissions-interactive "dired-chmod" nil nil nil)
+ − 963
+ − 964 ;;;***
+ − 965
+ − 966 ;;;### (autoloads (dired-cwd-make-magic) "dired-cwd" "dired/dired-cwd.el")
+ − 967
+ − 968 (autoload 'dired-cwd-make-magic "dired-cwd" "\
+ − 969 Modify COMMAND so that it's working directory is the current dired directory.
+ − 970 This works by binding `default-directory' to `(default-directory)'s value.
+ − 971 See also function `default-directory'." t nil)
+ − 972
+ − 973 ;;;***
+ − 974
+ − 975 ;;;### (autoloads (dired-do-rename-list dired-do-rename-numeric) "dired-num" "dired/dired-num.el")
+ − 976
+ − 977 (autoload 'dired-do-rename-numeric "dired-num" "\
+ − 978 Rename all marked (or next ARG) files using numbers.
+ − 979 You are prompted for a format string, e.g \"part_%d_of_8\", and a starting
+ − 980 number, e.g. 1. If there are 8 marked files, this example will rename them to
+ − 981
+ − 982 part_1_of_8
+ − 983 part_2_of_8
+ − 984 ...
+ − 985 part_8_of_8" t nil)
+ − 986
+ − 987 (autoload 'dired-do-rename-list "dired-num" "\
+ − 988 Rename all marked (or next ARG) files using elements from LIST.
+ − 989 You are prompted for a format string, e.g \"x_%s\", and the list,
+ − 990 e.g. '(foo bar zod). This example will rename the marked files to
+ − 991
+ − 992 x_foo
+ − 993 x_bar
+ − 994 x_zod
+ − 995
+ − 996 It is an error if LIST has not as many elements as there are files." t nil)
+ − 997
+ − 998 ;;;***
+ − 999
+ − 1000 ;;;### (autoloads (dired-rcs-mark-rcs-files dired-rcs-mark-rcs-locked-files) "dired-rcs" "dired/dired-rcs.el")
+ − 1001
+ − 1002 (autoload 'dired-rcs-mark-rcs-locked-files "dired-rcs" "\
+ − 1003 Mark all files that are under RCS control and RCS-locked.
+ − 1004 With prefix argument, unflag all those files.
+ − 1005 Mentions RCS files for which a working file was not found in this buffer.
+ − 1006 Type \\[dired-why] to see them again." t nil)
+ − 1007
+ − 1008 (autoload 'dired-rcs-mark-rcs-files "dired-rcs" "\
+ − 1009 Mark all files that are under RCS control.
+ − 1010 With prefix argument, unflag all those files.
+ − 1011 Mentions RCS files for which a working file was not found in this buffer.
+ − 1012 Type \\[dired-why] to see them again." t nil)
+ − 1013
+ − 1014 ;;;***
+ − 1015
+ − 1016 ;;;### (autoloads (dired-extra-startup) "dired-x" "dired/dired-x.el")
+ − 1017
+ − 1018 (autoload 'dired-extra-startup "dired-x" "\
+ − 1019 Automatically put on dired-mode-hook to get extra dired features:
+ − 1020 \\<dired-mode-map>
+ − 1021 \\[dired-vm] -- VM on folder
+ − 1022 \\[dired-rmail] -- Rmail on folder
+ − 1023 \\[dired-do-insert-subdir] -- insert all marked subdirs
+ − 1024 \\[dired-do-find-file] -- visit all marked files simultaneously
+ − 1025 \\[dired-set-marker-char], \\[dired-restore-marker-char] -- change and display dired-marker-char dynamically.
+ − 1026 \\[dired-omit-toggle] -- toggle omitting of files
+ − 1027 \\[dired-mark-sexp] -- mark by lisp expression
+ − 1028 \\[dired-do-unmark] -- replace existing marker with another.
+ − 1029 \\[dired-mark-rcs-files] -- mark all RCS controlled files
+ − 1030 \\[dired-mark-files-compilation-buffer] -- mark compilation files
+ − 1031 \\[dired-copy-filename-as-kill] -- copy the file or subdir names into the kill ring.
+ − 1032 You can feed it to other commands using \\[yank].
+ − 1033
+ − 1034 For more features, see variables
+ − 1035
+ − 1036 dired-omit-files
+ − 1037 dired-omit-extenstions
+ − 1038 dired-dangerous-shell-command
+ − 1039 dired-mark-keys
+ − 1040 dired-local-variables-file
+ − 1041 dired-find-subdir
+ − 1042 dired-guess-have-gnutar
+ − 1043 dired-auto-shell-command-alist
+ − 1044
+ − 1045 See also functions
+ − 1046
+ − 1047 dired-sort-on-size
+ − 1048 dired-do-relsymlink
+ − 1049 dired-flag-extension
+ − 1050 dired-virtual
+ − 1051 dired-jump-back
+ − 1052 dired-jump-back-other-window
+ − 1053 " t nil)
+ − 1054
+ − 1055 ;;;***
+ − 1056
+ − 1057 ;;;### (autoloads (dired-noselect dired-other-frame dired-other-window dired) "dired" "dired/dired.el")
+ − 1058
+ − 1059 (defvar dired-listing-switches (purecopy "-al") "\
+ − 1060 *Switches passed to ls for dired. MUST contain the `l' option.
+ − 1061 Can contain even `F', `b', `i' and `s'.")
+ − 1062
+ − 1063 (defvar dired-chown-program (purecopy (if (memq system-type '(dgux-unix hpux usg-unix-v silicon-graphics-unix irix)) "chown" "/etc/chown")) "\
+ − 1064 *Name of chown command (usully `chown' or `/etc/chown').")
+ − 1065
+ − 1066 (defvar dired-ls-program (purecopy "ls") "\
+ − 1067 *Absolute or relative name of the ls program used by dired.")
+ − 1068
+ − 1069 (defvar dired-ls-F-marks-symlinks t "\
+ − 1070 *Informs dired about how ls -lF marks symbolic links.
+ − 1071 Set this to t if `dired-ls-program' with -lF marks the symbolic link
+ − 1072 itself with a trailing @ (usually the case under Ultrix).
+ − 1073
+ − 1074 Example: if `ln -s foo bar; ls -F bar' gives `bar -> foo', set it to
+ − 1075 nil, if it gives `bar@ -> foo', set it to t.
+ − 1076
+ − 1077 Dired checks if there is really a @ appended. Thus, if you have a
+ − 1078 marking ls program on one host and a non-marking on another host, and
+ − 1079 don't care about symbolic links which really end in a @, you can
+ − 1080 always set this variable to t.")
+ − 1081
+ − 1082 (defvar dired-trivial-filenames (purecopy "^\\.\\.?$\\|^#") "\
+ − 1083 *Regexp of files to skip when moving point to the first file of a new directory listing.
+ − 1084 Nil means move to the subdir line, t means move to first file.")
+ − 1085
+ − 1086 (defvar dired-keep-marker-move t "\
+ − 1087 If t, moved marked files are marked if their originals were.
+ − 1088 If a character, those files (marked or not) are marked with that character.")
+ − 1089
+ − 1090 (defvar dired-keep-marker-copy ?C "\
+ − 1091 If t, copied files are marked if their source files were.
+ − 1092 If a character, those files are always marked with that character.")
+ − 1093
+ − 1094 (defvar dired-keep-marker-hardlink ?H "\
+ − 1095 If t, hard-linked files are marked if the linked-to files were.
+ − 1096 If a character, those files are always marked with that character.")
+ − 1097
+ − 1098 (defvar dired-keep-marker-symlink ?Y "\
+ − 1099 If t, symlinked marked files are marked if the linked-to files were.
+ − 1100 If a character, those files are always marked with that character.")
+ − 1101
+ − 1102 (defvar dired-dwim-target nil "\
+ − 1103 *If non-nil, dired tries to guess a default target directory:
+ − 1104 If there is a dired buffer displayed in the next window, use
+ − 1105 its current subdir, instead of the current subdir of this dired
+ − 1106 buffer.
+ − 1107
+ − 1108 The target is used in the prompt for file copy, move etc.")
+ − 1109
+ − 1110 (defvar dired-copy-preserve-time nil "\
+ − 1111 *If non-nil, Dired preserves the last-modified time in a file copy.
+ − 1112 \(This works on only some systems.)\\<dired-mode-map>
+ − 1113 Use `\\[dired-do-copy]' with a zero prefix argument to toggle its value.")
+ − 1114
+ − 1115 (define-key ctl-x-map "d" 'dired)
+ − 1116
+ − 1117 (autoload 'dired "dired" "\
+ − 1118 \"Edit\" directory DIRNAME--delete, rename, print, etc. some files in it.
+ − 1119 With an optional prefix argument you can specify the ls SWITCHES that are used.
+ − 1120 Dired displays a list of files in DIRNAME (which may also have
+ − 1121 shell wildcards appended to select certain files).
+ − 1122 You can move around in it with the usual commands.
+ − 1123 You can flag files for deletion with \\<dired-mode-map>\\[dired-flag-file-deleted] and then delete them by
+ − 1124 typing \\[dired-do-deletions].
+ − 1125 Type \\[describe-mode] after entering dired for more info.
+ − 1126
+ − 1127 If DIRNAME is already in a dired buffer, that buffer is used without refresh." t nil)
+ − 1128
+ − 1129 (define-key ctl-x-4-map "d" 'dired-other-window)
+ − 1130
+ − 1131 (autoload 'dired-other-window "dired" "\
+ − 1132 \"Edit\" directory DIRNAME. Like `dired' but selects in another window." t nil)
+ − 1133
+ − 1134 (define-key ctl-x-5-map "d" 'dired-other-frame)
+ − 1135
+ − 1136 (autoload 'dired-other-frame "dired" "\
+ − 1137 \"Edit\" directory DIRNAME. Like `dired' but makes a new frame." t nil)
+ − 1138
+ − 1139 (autoload 'dired-noselect "dired" "\
+ − 1140 Like `dired' but returns the dired buffer as value, does not select it." nil nil)
+ − 1141
+ − 1142 ;;;***
+ − 1143
+ − 1144 ;;;### (autoloads (find-grep-dired find-name-dired find-dired) "find-dired" "dired/find-dired.el")
+ − 1145
+ − 1146 (defvar find-ls-option (purecopy (if (eq system-type 'berkeley-unix) '("-ls" . "-gilsb") '("-exec ls -ld {} \\;" . "-ld"))) "\
+ − 1147 *Description of the option to `find' to produce an `ls -l'-type listing.
+ − 1148 This is a cons of two strings (FIND-OPTION . LS-SWITCHES). FIND-OPTION
+ − 1149 gives the option (or options) to `find' that produce the desired output.
+ − 1150 LS-SWITCHES is a list of `ls' switches to tell dired how to parse the output.")
+ − 1151
+ − 1152 (defvar find-grep-options (purecopy (if (eq system-type 'berkeley-unix) "-s" "-q")) "\
+ − 1153 *Option to grep to be as silent as possible.
+ − 1154 On Berkeley systems, this is `-s'; on Posix, and with GNU grep, `-q' does it.
+ − 1155 On other systems, the closest you can come is to use `-l'.")
+ − 1156
+ − 1157 (defvar find-dired-multiple-buffers nil "\
+ − 1158 *If non-nil, generates a new buffer for each find")
+ − 1159
+ − 1160 (autoload 'find-dired "find-dired" "\
+ − 1161 Run `find' and go into dired-mode on a buffer of the output.
+ − 1162 The command run (after changing into DIR) is
+ − 1163
+ − 1164 find . \\( ARGS \\) -ls" t nil)
+ − 1165
+ − 1166 (autoload 'find-name-dired "find-dired" "\
+ − 1167 Search DIR recursively for files matching the globbing pattern PATTERN,
+ − 1168 and run dired on those files.
+ − 1169 PATTERN is a shell wildcard (not an Emacs regexp) and need not be quoted.
+ − 1170 The command run (after changing into DIR) is
+ − 1171
+ − 1172 find . -name 'PATTERN' -ls" t nil)
+ − 1173
+ − 1174 (autoload 'find-grep-dired "find-dired" "\
+ − 1175 Find files in DIR containing a regexp ARG and start Dired on output.
+ − 1176 The command run (after changing into DIR) is
+ − 1177
+ − 1178 find . -type f -exec test -r {} \\; -exec egrep -s ARG {} \\; -ls
+ − 1179
+ − 1180 Thus ARG can also contain additional grep options." t nil)
+ − 1181
+ − 1182 ;;;***
+ − 1183
+ − 1184 ;;;### (autoloads (edebug-eval-top-level-form def-edebug-spec) "edebug" "edebug/edebug.el")
+ − 1185
+ − 1186 (autoload 'def-edebug-spec "edebug" "\
+ − 1187 Set the edebug-form-spec property of SYMBOL according to SPEC.
+ − 1188 Both SYMBOL and SPEC are unevaluated. The SPEC can be 0, t, a symbol
+ − 1189 \(naming a function), or a list." nil 'macro)
+ − 1190
+ − 1191 (defalias 'edebug-defun 'edebug-eval-top-level-form)
+ − 1192
+ − 1193 (autoload 'edebug-eval-top-level-form "edebug" "\
+ − 1194 Evaluate a top level form, such as a defun or defmacro.
+ − 1195 This is like `eval-defun', but the code is always instrumented for Edebug.
+ − 1196 Print its name in the minibuffer and leave point where it is,
+ − 1197 or if an error occurs, leave point after it with mark at the original point." t nil)
+ − 1198
+ − 1199 ;;;***
+ − 1200
+ − 1201 ;;;### (autoloads (ediff-show-registry) "ediff-mult" "ediff/ediff-mult.el")
+ − 1202
+ − 1203 (autoload 'ediff-show-registry "ediff-mult" "\
+ − 1204 Display Ediff's registry." t nil)
+ − 1205
+ − 1206 (defalias 'eregistry 'ediff-show-registry)
+ − 1207
+ − 1208 ;;;***
+ − 1209
+ − 1210 ;;;### (autoloads (ediff-toggle-multiframe) "ediff-util" "ediff/ediff-util.el")
+ − 1211
+ − 1212 (autoload 'ediff-toggle-multiframe "ediff-util" "\
+ − 1213 Switch from the multiframe display to single-frame display and back.
+ − 1214 For a permanent change, set the variable `ediff-window-setup-function',
+ − 1215 which see." t nil)
+ − 1216
+ − 1217 ;;;***
+ − 1218
+ − 1219 ;;;### (autoloads (ediff-documentation ediff-version ediff-revision ediff-patch-buffer ediff-patch-file run-ediff-from-cvs-buffer ediff-merge-revisions-with-ancestor ediff-merge-revisions ediff-merge-buffers-with-ancestor ediff-merge-buffers ediff-merge-files-with-ancestor ediff-merge-files ediff-regions-linewise ediff-regions-wordwise ediff-windows-linewise ediff-windows-wordwise ediff-merge-directory-revisions-with-ancestor ediff-merge-directory-revisions ediff-merge-directories-with-ancestor ediff-merge-directories ediff-directories3 ediff-directory-revisions ediff-directories ediff-buffers3 ediff-buffers ediff-files3 ediff-files) "ediff" "ediff/ediff.el")
+ − 1220
+ − 1221 (autoload 'ediff-files "ediff" "\
+ − 1222 Run Ediff on a pair of files, FILE-A and FILE-B." t nil)
+ − 1223
+ − 1224 (autoload 'ediff-files3 "ediff" "\
+ − 1225 Run Ediff on three files, FILE-A, FILE-B, and FILE-C." t nil)
+ − 1226
+ − 1227 (defalias 'ediff3 'ediff-files3)
+ − 1228
+ − 1229 (defalias 'ediff 'ediff-files)
+ − 1230
+ − 1231 (autoload 'ediff-buffers "ediff" "\
+ − 1232 Run Ediff on a pair of buffers, BUFFER-A and BUFFER-B." t nil)
+ − 1233
+ − 1234 (defalias 'ebuffers 'ediff-buffers)
+ − 1235
+ − 1236 (autoload 'ediff-buffers3 "ediff" "\
+ − 1237 Run Ediff on three buffers, BUFFER-A, BUFFER-B, and BUFFER-C." t nil)
+ − 1238
+ − 1239 (defalias 'ebuffers3 'ediff-buffers3)
+ − 1240
+ − 1241 (autoload 'ediff-directories "ediff" "\
+ − 1242 Run Ediff on a pair of directories, DIR1 and DIR2, comparing files that have
+ − 1243 the same name in both. The third argument, REGEXP, is a regular expression that
+ − 1244 can be used to filter out certain file names." t nil)
+ − 1245
+ − 1246 (defalias 'edirs 'ediff-directories)
+ − 1247
+ − 1248 (autoload 'ediff-directory-revisions "ediff" "\
+ − 1249 Run Ediff on a directory, DIR1, comparing its files with their revisions.
+ − 1250 The second argument, REGEXP, is a regular expression that filters the file
+ − 1251 names. Only the files that are under revision control are taken into account." t nil)
+ − 1252
+ − 1253 (defalias 'edir-revisions 'ediff-directory-revisions)
+ − 1254
+ − 1255 (autoload 'ediff-directories3 "ediff" "\
+ − 1256 Run Ediff on three directories, DIR1, DIR2, and DIR3, comparing files that
+ − 1257 have the same name in all three. The last argument, REGEXP, is a regular
+ − 1258 expression that can be used to filter out certain file names." t nil)
+ − 1259
+ − 1260 (defalias 'edirs3 'ediff-directories3)
+ − 1261
+ − 1262 (autoload 'ediff-merge-directories "ediff" "\
+ − 1263 Run Ediff on a pair of directories, DIR1 and DIR2, merging files that have
+ − 1264 the same name in both. The third argument, REGEXP, is a regular expression that
+ − 1265 can be used to filter out certain file names." t nil)
+ − 1266
+ − 1267 (defalias 'edirs-merge 'ediff-merge-directories)
+ − 1268
+ − 1269 (autoload 'ediff-merge-directories-with-ancestor "ediff" "\
+ − 1270 Merge files in directories DIR1 and DIR2 using files in ANCESTOR-DIR as ancestors.
+ − 1271 Ediff merges files that have identical names in DIR1, DIR2. If a pair of files
+ − 1272 in DIR1 and DIR2 doesn't have an ancestor in ANCESTOR-DIR, Ediff will merge
+ − 1273 without ancestor. The fourth argument, REGEXP, is a regular expression that
+ − 1274 can be used to filter out certain file names." t nil)
+ − 1275
+ − 1276 (autoload 'ediff-merge-directory-revisions "ediff" "\
+ − 1277 Run Ediff on a directory, DIR1, merging its files with their revisions.
+ − 1278 The second argument, REGEXP, is a regular expression that filters the file
+ − 1279 names. Only the files that are under revision control are taken into account." t nil)
+ − 1280
+ − 1281 (defalias 'edir-merge-revisions 'ediff-merge-directory-revisions)
+ − 1282
+ − 1283 (autoload 'ediff-merge-directory-revisions-with-ancestor "ediff" "\
+ − 1284 Run Ediff on a directory, DIR1, merging its files with their revisions and ancestors.
+ − 1285 The second argument, REGEXP, is a regular expression that filters the file
+ − 1286 names. Only the files that are under revision control are taken into account." t nil)
+ − 1287
+ − 1288 (defalias 'edir-merge-revisions-with-ancestor 'ediff-merge-directory-revisions-with-ancestor)
+ − 1289
+ − 1290 (defalias 'edirs-merge-with-ancestor 'ediff-merge-directories-with-ancestor)
+ − 1291
+ − 1292 (autoload 'ediff-windows-wordwise "ediff" "\
+ − 1293 Compare WIND-A and WIND-B, which are selected by clicking, wordwise.
+ − 1294 With prefix argument, DUMB-MODE, or on a non-windowing display, works as
+ − 1295 follows:
+ − 1296 If WIND-A is nil, use selected window.
+ − 1297 If WIND-B is nil, use window next to WIND-A." t nil)
+ − 1298
+ − 1299 (autoload 'ediff-windows-linewise "ediff" "\
+ − 1300 Compare WIND-A and WIND-B, which are selected by clicking, linewise.
+ − 1301 With prefix argument, DUMB-MODE, or on a non-windowing display, works as
+ − 1302 follows:
+ − 1303 If WIND-A is nil, use selected window.
+ − 1304 If WIND-B is nil, use window next to WIND-A." t nil)
+ − 1305
+ − 1306 (autoload 'ediff-regions-wordwise "ediff" "\
+ − 1307 Run Ediff on a pair of regions in two different buffers.
+ − 1308 Regions (i.e., point and mark) are assumed to be set in advance.
+ − 1309 This function is effective only for relatively small regions, up to 200
+ − 1310 lines. For large regions, use `ediff-regions-linewise'." t nil)
+ − 1311
+ − 1312 (autoload 'ediff-regions-linewise "ediff" "\
+ − 1313 Run Ediff on a pair of regions in two different buffers.
+ − 1314 Regions (i.e., point and mark) are assumed to be set in advance.
+ − 1315 Each region is enlarged to contain full lines.
+ − 1316 This function is effective for large regions, over 100-200
+ − 1317 lines. For small regions, use `ediff-regions-wordwise'." t nil)
+ − 1318
+ − 1319 (defalias 'ediff-merge 'ediff-merge-files)
+ − 1320
+ − 1321 (autoload 'ediff-merge-files "ediff" "\
+ − 1322 Merge two files without ancestor." t nil)
+ − 1323
+ − 1324 (autoload 'ediff-merge-files-with-ancestor "ediff" "\
+ − 1325 Merge two files with ancestor." t nil)
+ − 1326
+ − 1327 (defalias 'ediff-merge-with-ancestor 'ediff-merge-files-with-ancestor)
+ − 1328
+ − 1329 (autoload 'ediff-merge-buffers "ediff" "\
+ − 1330 Merge buffers without ancestor." t nil)
+ − 1331
+ − 1332 (autoload 'ediff-merge-buffers-with-ancestor "ediff" "\
+ − 1333 Merge buffers with ancestor." t nil)
+ − 1334
+ − 1335 (autoload 'ediff-merge-revisions "ediff" "\
+ − 1336 Run Ediff by merging two revisions of a file.
+ − 1337 The file is the optional FILE argument or the file visited by the current
+ − 1338 buffer." t nil)
+ − 1339
+ − 1340 (autoload 'ediff-merge-revisions-with-ancestor "ediff" "\
+ − 1341 Run Ediff by merging two revisions of a file with a common ancestor.
+ − 1342 The file is the optional FILE argument or the file visited by the current
+ − 1343 buffer." t nil)
+ − 1344
+ − 1345 (autoload 'run-ediff-from-cvs-buffer "ediff" "\
+ − 1346 Run Ediff-merge on appropriate revisions of the selected file.
+ − 1347 First run after `M-x cvs-update'. Then place the cursor on a lide describing a
+ − 1348 file and then run `run-ediff-from-cvs-buffer'." t nil)
+ − 1349
+ − 1350 (autoload 'ediff-patch-file "ediff" "\
+ − 1351 Run Ediff by patching SOURCE-FILENAME." t nil)
+ − 1352
+ − 1353 (autoload 'ediff-patch-buffer "ediff" "\
+ − 1354 Run Ediff by patching BUFFER-NAME." t nil)
+ − 1355
+ − 1356 (defalias 'epatch 'ediff-patch-file)
+ − 1357
+ − 1358 (defalias 'epatch-buffer 'ediff-patch-buffer)
+ − 1359
+ − 1360 (autoload 'ediff-revision "ediff" "\
+ − 1361 Run Ediff by comparing versions of a file.
+ − 1362 The file is an optional FILE argument or the file visited by the current
+ − 1363 buffer. Use `vc.el' or `rcs.el' depending on `ediff-version-control-package'." t nil)
+ − 1364
+ − 1365 (autoload 'ediff-version "ediff" "\
+ − 1366 Return string describing the version of Ediff.
+ − 1367 When called interactively, displays the version." t nil)
+ − 1368
+ − 1369 (autoload 'ediff-documentation "ediff" "\
+ − 1370 Display Ediff's manual.
+ − 1371 With optional NODE, goes to that node." t nil)
+ − 1372
+ − 1373 ;;;***
+ − 1374
+ − 1375 ;;;### (autoloads (electric-buffer-list) "ebuff-menu" "electric/ebuff-menu.el")
+ − 1376
+ − 1377 (autoload 'electric-buffer-list "ebuff-menu" "\
+ − 1378 Pops up a buffer describing the set of Emacs buffers.
+ − 1379 Vaguely like ITS lunar select buffer; combining typeoutoid buffer
+ − 1380 listing with menuoid buffer selection.
+ − 1381
+ − 1382 If the very next character typed is a space then the buffer list
+ − 1383 window disappears. Otherwise, one may move around in the buffer list
+ − 1384 window, marking buffers to be selected, saved or deleted.
+ − 1385
+ − 1386 To exit and select a new buffer, type a space when the cursor is on
+ − 1387 the appropriate line of the buffer-list window. Other commands are
+ − 1388 much like those of buffer-menu-mode.
+ − 1389
+ − 1390 Calls value of `electric-buffer-menu-mode-hook' on entry if non-nil.
+ − 1391
+ − 1392 Non-null optional arg FILES-ONLY means mention only file buffers.
+ − 1393 When called from Lisp code, FILES-ONLY may be a regular expression,
+ − 1394 in which case only buffers whose names match that expression are listed,
+ − 1395 or an arbitrary predicate function.
+ − 1396
+ − 1397 \\{electric-buffer-menu-mode-map}" t nil)
+ − 1398
+ − 1399 ;;;***
+ − 1400
+ − 1401 ;;;### (autoloads (electric-command-history Electric-command-history-redo-expression) "echistory" "electric/echistory.el")
+ − 1402
+ − 1403 (autoload 'Electric-command-history-redo-expression "echistory" "\
+ − 1404 Edit current history line in minibuffer and execute result.
+ − 1405 With prefix arg NOCONFIRM, execute current line as-is without editing." t nil)
+ − 1406
+ − 1407 (autoload 'electric-command-history "echistory" "\
+ − 1408 \\<electric-history-map>Major mode for examining and redoing commands from `command-history'.
+ − 1409 This pops up a window with the Command History listing.
+ − 1410 The number of command listed is controlled by `list-command-history-max'.
+ − 1411 The command history is filtered by `list-command-history-filter' if non-nil.
+ − 1412 Combines typeout Command History list window with menu like selection
+ − 1413 of an expression from the history for re-evaluation in the *original* buffer.
+ − 1414
+ − 1415 The history displayed is filtered by `list-command-history-filter' if non-nil.
+ − 1416
+ − 1417 Like Emacs-Lisp mode except that characters do not insert themselves and
+ − 1418 Tab and Linefeed do not indent. Instead these commands are provided:
+ − 1419 \\{electric-history-map}
+ − 1420
+ − 1421 Calls the value of `electric-command-history-hook' if that is non-nil.
+ − 1422 The Command History listing is recomputed each time this mode is invoked." t nil)
+ − 1423
+ − 1424 ;;;***
+ − 1425
+ − 1426 ;;;### (autoloads (electric-helpify with-electric-help) "ehelp" "electric/ehelp.el")
+ − 1427
+ − 1428 (autoload 'with-electric-help "ehelp" "\
+ − 1429 Pop up an \"electric\" help buffer.
+ − 1430 The arguments are THUNK &optional BUFFER NOERASE MINHEIGHT.
+ − 1431 THUNK is a function of no arguments which is called to initialize the
+ − 1432 contents of BUFFER. BUFFER defaults to `*Help*'. BUFFER will be
+ − 1433 erased before THUNK is called unless NOERASE is non-nil. THUNK will
+ − 1434 be called while BUFFER is current and with `standard-output' bound to
+ − 1435 the buffer specified by BUFFER.
+ − 1436
+ − 1437 If THUNK returns nil, we display BUFFER starting at the top, and
+ − 1438 shrink the window to fit. If THUNK returns non-nil, we don't do those things.
+ − 1439
+ − 1440 After THUNK has been called, this function \"electrically\" pops up a window
+ − 1441 in which BUFFER is displayed and allows the user to scroll through that buffer
+ − 1442 in electric-help-mode. The window's height will be at least MINHEIGHT if
+ − 1443 this value is non-nil.
+ − 1444
+ − 1445 If THUNK returns nil, we display BUFFER starting at the top, and
+ − 1446 shrink the window to fit. If THUNK returns non-nil, we don't do those
+ − 1447 things.
+ − 1448
+ − 1449 When the user exits (with `electric-help-exit', or otherwise) the help
+ − 1450 buffer's window disappears (i.e., we use `save-window-excursion')
+ − 1451 BUFFER is put into `default-major-mode' (or `fundamental-mode') when we exit." nil nil)
+ − 1452
+ − 1453 (autoload 'electric-helpify "ehelp" nil nil nil)
+ − 1454
+ − 1455 ;;;***
+ − 1456
+ − 1457 ;;;### (autoloads (Helper-help Helper-describe-bindings) "helper" "electric/helper.el")
+ − 1458
+ − 1459 (autoload 'Helper-describe-bindings "helper" "\
+ − 1460 Describe local key bindings of current mode." t nil)
+ − 1461
+ − 1462 (autoload 'Helper-help "helper" "\
+ − 1463 Provide help for current mode." t nil)
+ − 1464
+ − 1465 ;;;***
+ − 1466
+ − 1467 ;;;### (autoloads (edt-emulation-on) "edt" "emulators/edt.el")
+ − 1468
+ − 1469 (autoload 'edt-emulation-on "edt" "\
+ − 1470 Turn on EDT Emulation." t nil)
+ − 1471
+ − 1472 ;;;***
+ − 1473
+ − 1474 ;;;### (autoloads (convert-mocklisp-buffer) "mlconvert" "emulators/mlconvert.el")
+ − 1475
+ − 1476 (autoload 'convert-mocklisp-buffer "mlconvert" "\
+ − 1477 Convert buffer of Mocklisp code to real Lisp that GNU Emacs can run." t nil)
+ − 1478
+ − 1479 ;;;***
+ − 1480
+ − 1481 ;;;### (autoloads (teco-command) "teco" "emulators/teco.el")
+ − 1482
+ − 1483 (autoload 'teco-command "teco" "\
+ − 1484 Read and execute a Teco command string." t nil)
+ − 1485
+ − 1486 ;;;***
+ − 1487
+ − 1488 ;;;### (autoloads (tpu-edt-on) "tpu-edt" "emulators/tpu-edt.el")
+ − 1489
+ − 1490 (fset 'tpu-edt-mode 'tpu-edt-on)
+ − 1491
+ − 1492 (fset 'tpu-edt 'tpu-edt-on)
+ − 1493
+ − 1494 (autoload 'tpu-edt-on "tpu-edt" "\
+ − 1495 Turn on TPU/edt emulation." t nil)
+ − 1496
+ − 1497 ;;;***
+ − 1498
+ − 1499 ;;;### (autoloads (tpu-set-cursor-bound tpu-set-cursor-free tpu-set-scroll-margins) "tpu-extras" "emulators/tpu-extras.el")
+ − 1500
+ − 1501 (autoload 'tpu-set-scroll-margins "tpu-extras" "\
+ − 1502 Set scroll margins." t nil)
+ − 1503
+ − 1504 (autoload 'tpu-set-cursor-free "tpu-extras" "\
+ − 1505 Allow the cursor to move freely about the screen." t nil)
+ − 1506
+ − 1507 (autoload 'tpu-set-cursor-bound "tpu-extras" "\
+ − 1508 Constrain the cursor to the flow of the text." t nil)
+ − 1509
+ − 1510 ;;;***
+ − 1511
+ − 1512 ;;;### (autoloads (wordstar-mode) "ws-mode" "emulators/ws-mode.el")
+ − 1513
+ − 1514 (autoload 'wordstar-mode "ws-mode" "\
+ − 1515 Major mode with WordStar-like key bindings.
+ − 1516
+ − 1517 BUGS:
+ − 1518 - Help menus with WordStar commands (C-j just calls help-for-help)
+ − 1519 are not implemented
+ − 1520 - Options for search and replace
+ − 1521 - Show markers (C-k h) is somewhat strange
+ − 1522 - Search and replace (C-q a) is only available in forward direction
+ − 1523
+ − 1524 No key bindings beginning with ESC are installed, they will work
+ − 1525 Emacs-like.
+ − 1526
+ − 1527 The key bindings are:
+ − 1528
+ − 1529 C-a backward-word
+ − 1530 C-b fill-paragraph
+ − 1531 C-c scroll-up-line
+ − 1532 C-d forward-char
+ − 1533 C-e previous-line
+ − 1534 C-f forward-word
+ − 1535 C-g delete-char
+ − 1536 C-h backward-char
+ − 1537 C-i indent-for-tab-command
+ − 1538 C-j help-for-help
+ − 1539 C-k ordstar-C-k-map
+ − 1540 C-l ws-repeat-search
+ − 1541 C-n open-line
+ − 1542 C-p quoted-insert
+ − 1543 C-r scroll-down-line
+ − 1544 C-s backward-char
+ − 1545 C-t kill-word
+ − 1546 C-u keyboard-quit
+ − 1547 C-v overwrite-mode
+ − 1548 C-w scroll-down
+ − 1549 C-x next-line
+ − 1550 C-y kill-complete-line
+ − 1551 C-z scroll-up
+ − 1552
+ − 1553 C-k 0 ws-set-marker-0
+ − 1554 C-k 1 ws-set-marker-1
+ − 1555 C-k 2 ws-set-marker-2
+ − 1556 C-k 3 ws-set-marker-3
+ − 1557 C-k 4 ws-set-marker-4
+ − 1558 C-k 5 ws-set-marker-5
+ − 1559 C-k 6 ws-set-marker-6
+ − 1560 C-k 7 ws-set-marker-7
+ − 1561 C-k 8 ws-set-marker-8
+ − 1562 C-k 9 ws-set-marker-9
+ − 1563 C-k b ws-begin-block
+ − 1564 C-k c ws-copy-block
+ − 1565 C-k d save-buffers-kill-emacs
+ − 1566 C-k f find-file
+ − 1567 C-k h ws-show-markers
+ − 1568 C-k i ws-indent-block
+ − 1569 C-k k ws-end-block
+ − 1570 C-k p ws-print-block
+ − 1571 C-k q kill-emacs
+ − 1572 C-k r insert-file
+ − 1573 C-k s save-some-buffers
+ − 1574 C-k t ws-mark-word
+ − 1575 C-k u ws-exdent-block
+ − 1576 C-k C-u keyboard-quit
+ − 1577 C-k v ws-move-block
+ − 1578 C-k w ws-write-block
+ − 1579 C-k x kill-emacs
+ − 1580 C-k y ws-delete-block
+ − 1581
+ − 1582 C-o c wordstar-center-line
+ − 1583 C-o b switch-to-buffer
+ − 1584 C-o j justify-current-line
+ − 1585 C-o k kill-buffer
+ − 1586 C-o l list-buffers
+ − 1587 C-o m auto-fill-mode
+ − 1588 C-o r set-fill-column
+ − 1589 C-o C-u keyboard-quit
+ − 1590 C-o wd delete-other-windows
+ − 1591 C-o wh split-window-horizontally
+ − 1592 C-o wo other-window
+ − 1593 C-o wv split-window-vertically
+ − 1594
+ − 1595 C-q 0 ws-find-marker-0
+ − 1596 C-q 1 ws-find-marker-1
+ − 1597 C-q 2 ws-find-marker-2
+ − 1598 C-q 3 ws-find-marker-3
+ − 1599 C-q 4 ws-find-marker-4
+ − 1600 C-q 5 ws-find-marker-5
+ − 1601 C-q 6 ws-find-marker-6
+ − 1602 C-q 7 ws-find-marker-7
+ − 1603 C-q 8 ws-find-marker-8
+ − 1604 C-q 9 ws-find-marker-9
+ − 1605 C-q a ws-query-replace
+ − 1606 C-q b ws-to-block-begin
+ − 1607 C-q c end-of-buffer
+ − 1608 C-q d end-of-line
+ − 1609 C-q f ws-search
+ − 1610 C-q k ws-to-block-end
+ − 1611 C-q l ws-undo
+ − 1612 C-q p ws-last-cursorp
+ − 1613 C-q r beginning-of-buffer
+ − 1614 C-q C-u keyboard-quit
+ − 1615 C-q w ws-last-error
+ − 1616 C-q y ws-kill-eol
+ − 1617 C-q DEL ws-kill-bol
+ − 1618 " t nil)
+ − 1619
+ − 1620 ;;;***
+ − 1621
+ − 1622 ;;;### (autoloads nil "loaddefs-eos" "eos/loaddefs-eos.el")
+ − 1623
+ − 1624 ;;;***
+ − 1625
+ − 1626 ;;;### (autoloads (blackbox) "blackbox" "games/blackbox.el")
+ − 1627
+ − 1628 (autoload 'blackbox "blackbox" "\
+ − 1629 Play blackbox. Optional prefix argument is the number of balls;
+ − 1630 the default is 4.
+ − 1631
+ − 1632 What is blackbox?
+ − 1633
+ − 1634 Blackbox is a game of hide and seek played on an 8 by 8 grid (the
+ − 1635 Blackbox). Your opponent (Emacs, in this case) has hidden several
+ − 1636 balls (usually 4) within this box. By shooting rays into the box and
+ − 1637 observing where they emerge it is possible to deduce the positions of
+ − 1638 the hidden balls. The fewer rays you use to find the balls, the lower
+ − 1639 your score.
+ − 1640
+ − 1641 Overview of play:
+ − 1642
+ − 1643 \\<blackbox-mode-map>To play blackbox, type \\[blackbox]. An optional prefix argument
+ − 1644 specifies the number of balls to be hidden in the box; the default is
+ − 1645 four.
+ − 1646
+ − 1647 The cursor can be moved around the box with the standard cursor
+ − 1648 movement keys.
+ − 1649
+ − 1650 To shoot a ray, move the cursor to the edge of the box and press SPC.
+ − 1651 The result will be determined and the playfield updated.
+ − 1652
+ − 1653 You may place or remove balls in the box by moving the cursor into the
+ − 1654 box and pressing \\[bb-romp].
+ − 1655
+ − 1656 When you think the configuration of balls you have placed is correct,
+ − 1657 press \\[bb-done]. You will be informed whether you are correct or
+ − 1658 not, and be given your score. Your score is the number of letters and
+ − 1659 numbers around the outside of the box plus five for each incorrectly
+ − 1660 placed ball. If you placed any balls incorrectly, they will be
+ − 1661 indicated with `x', and their actual positions indicated with `o'.
+ − 1662
+ − 1663 Details:
+ − 1664
+ − 1665 There are three possible outcomes for each ray you send into the box:
+ − 1666
+ − 1667 Detour: the ray is deflected and emerges somewhere other than
+ − 1668 where you sent it in. On the playfield, detours are
+ − 1669 denoted by matching pairs of numbers -- one where the
+ − 1670 ray went in, and the other where it came out.
+ − 1671
+ − 1672 Reflection: the ray is reflected and emerges in the same place
+ − 1673 it was sent in. On the playfield, reflections are
+ − 1674 denoted by the letter `R'.
+ − 1675
+ − 1676 Hit: the ray strikes a ball directly and is absorbed. It does
+ − 1677 not emerge from the box. On the playfield, hits are
+ − 1678 denoted by the letter `H'.
+ − 1679
+ − 1680 The rules for how balls deflect rays are simple and are best shown by
+ − 1681 example.
+ − 1682
+ − 1683 As a ray approaches a ball it is deflected ninety degrees. Rays can
+ − 1684 be deflected multiple times. In the diagrams below, the dashes
+ − 1685 represent empty box locations and the letter `O' represents a ball.
+ − 1686 The entrance and exit points of each ray are marked with numbers as
+ − 1687 described under \"Detour\" above. Note that the entrance and exit
+ − 1688 points are always interchangeable. `*' denotes the path taken by the
+ − 1689 ray.
+ − 1690
+ − 1691 Note carefully the relative positions of the ball and the ninety
+ − 1692 degree deflection it causes.
+ − 1693
+ − 1694 1
+ − 1695 - * - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
+ − 1696 - * - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
+ − 1697 1 * * - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - O - - - - O -
+ − 1698 - - O - - - - - - - O - - - - - - - * * * * - -
+ − 1699 - - - - - - - - - - - * * * * * 2 3 * * * - - * - -
+ − 1700 - - - - - - - - - - - * - - - - - - - O - * - -
+ − 1701 - - - - - - - - - - - * - - - - - - - - * * - -
+ − 1702 - - - - - - - - - - - * - - - - - - - - * - O -
+ − 1703 2 3
+ − 1704
+ − 1705 As mentioned above, a reflection occurs when a ray emerges from the same point
+ − 1706 it was sent in. This can happen in several ways:
+ − 1707
+ − 1708
+ − 1709 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
+ − 1710 - - - - O - - - - - O - O - - - - - - - - - - -
+ − 1711 R * * * * - - - - - - - * - - - - O - - - - - - -
+ − 1712 - - - - O - - - - - - * - - - - R - - - - - - - -
+ − 1713 - - - - - - - - - - - * - - - - - - - - - - - -
+ − 1714 - - - - - - - - - - - * - - - - - - - - - - - -
+ − 1715 - - - - - - - - R * * * * - - - - - - - - - - - -
+ − 1716 - - - - - - - - - - - - O - - - - - - - - - - -
+ − 1717
+ − 1718 In the first example, the ray is deflected downwards by the upper
+ − 1719 ball, then left by the lower ball, and finally retraces its path to
+ − 1720 its point of origin. The second example is similar. The third
+ − 1721 example is a bit anomalous but can be rationalized by realizing the
+ − 1722 ray never gets a chance to get into the box. Alternatively, the ray
+ − 1723 can be thought of as being deflected downwards and immediately
+ − 1724 emerging from the box.
+ − 1725
+ − 1726 A hit occurs when a ray runs straight into a ball:
+ − 1727
+ − 1728 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
+ − 1729 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - O - - -
+ − 1730 - - - - - - - - - - - - O - - - H * * * * - - - -
+ − 1731 - - - - - - - - H * * * * O - - - - - - * - - - -
+ − 1732 - - - - - - - - - - - - O - - - - - - O - - - -
+ − 1733 H * * * O - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
+ − 1734 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
+ − 1735 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
+ − 1736
+ − 1737 Be sure to compare the second example of a hit with the first example of
+ − 1738 a reflection." t nil)
+ − 1739
+ − 1740 ;;;***
+ − 1741
+ − 1742 ;;;### (autoloads (conx-load conx conx-region conx-buffer) "conx" "games/conx.el")
+ − 1743
+ − 1744 (autoload 'conx-buffer "conx" "\
+ − 1745 Absorb the text in the current buffer into the tree." t nil)
+ − 1746
+ − 1747 (autoload 'conx-region "conx" "\
+ − 1748 Absorb the text in the current region into the tree." t nil)
+ − 1749
+ − 1750 (autoload 'conx "conx" "\
+ − 1751 Generate some random sentences in the *conx* buffer." t nil)
+ − 1752
+ − 1753 (autoload 'conx-load "conx" "\
+ − 1754 Load in a CONX database written by the \\[conx-save] command.
+ − 1755 This clears the database currently in memory." t nil)
+ − 1756
+ − 1757 ;;;***
+ − 1758
+ − 1759 ;;;### (autoloads (shuffle-vector cookie-snarf cookie-insert cookie) "cookie1" "games/cookie1.el")
+ − 1760
+ − 1761 (autoload 'cookie "cookie1" "\
+ − 1762 Return a random phrase from PHRASE-FILE. When the phrase file
+ − 1763 is read in, display STARTMSG at beginning of load, ENDMSG at end." nil nil)
+ − 1764
+ − 1765 (autoload 'cookie-insert "cookie1" "\
+ − 1766 Insert random phrases from PHRASE-FILE; COUNT of them. When the phrase file
+ − 1767 is read in, display STARTMSG at beginning of load, ENDMSG at end." nil nil)
+ − 1768
+ − 1769 (autoload 'cookie-snarf "cookie1" "\
+ − 1770 Reads in the PHRASE-FILE, returns it as a vector of strings.
+ − 1771 Emit STARTMSG and ENDMSG before and after. Caches the result; second
+ − 1772 and subsequent calls on the same file won't go to disk." nil nil)
+ − 1773
+ − 1774 (autoload 'shuffle-vector "cookie1" "\
+ − 1775 Randomly permute the elements of VECTOR (all permutations equally likely)" nil nil)
+ − 1776
+ − 1777 ;;;***
+ − 1778
+ − 1779 ;;;### (autoloads (dissociated-press) "dissociate" "games/dissociate.el")
+ − 1780
+ − 1781 (autoload 'dissociated-press "dissociate" "\
+ − 1782 Dissociate the text of the current buffer.
+ − 1783 Output goes in buffer named *Dissociation*,
+ − 1784 which is redisplayed each time text is added to it.
+ − 1785 Every so often the user must say whether to continue.
+ − 1786 If ARG is positive, require ARG chars of continuity.
+ − 1787 If ARG is negative, require -ARG words of continuity.
+ − 1788 Default is 2." t nil)
+ − 1789
+ − 1790 ;;;***
+ − 1791
+ − 1792 ;;;### (autoloads (doctor) "doctor" "games/doctor.el")
+ − 1793
+ − 1794 (autoload 'doctor "doctor" "\
+ − 1795 Switch to *doctor* buffer and start giving psychotherapy." t nil)
+ − 1796
+ − 1797 ;;;***
+ − 1798
+ − 1799 ;;;### (autoloads (dunnet) "dunnet" "games/dunnet.el")
+ − 1800
+ − 1801 (autoload 'dunnet "dunnet" "\
+ − 1802 Switch to *dungeon* buffer and start game." t nil)
+ − 1803
+ − 1804 ;;;***
+ − 1805
+ − 1806 ;;;### (autoloads (flame) "flame" "games/flame.el")
+ − 1807
+ − 1808 (autoload 'flame "flame" "\
+ − 1809 Generate ARG (default 1) sentences of half-crazed gibberish." t nil)
+ − 1810
+ − 1811 ;;;***
+ − 1812
+ − 1813 ;;;### (autoloads (gomoku) "gomoku" "games/gomoku.el")
+ − 1814
+ − 1815 (autoload 'gomoku "gomoku" "\
+ − 1816 Start a Gomoku game between you and Emacs.
+ − 1817 If a game is in progress, this command allow you to resume it.
+ − 1818 If optional arguments N and M are given, an N by M board is used.
+ − 1819
+ − 1820 You and Emacs play in turn by marking a free square. You mark it with X
+ − 1821 and Emacs marks it with O. The winner is the first to get five contiguous
+ − 1822 marks horizontally, vertically or in diagonal.
+ − 1823 You play by moving the cursor over the square you choose and hitting
+ − 1824 \\<gomoku-mode-map>\\[gomoku-human-plays].
+ − 1825 Use \\[describe-mode] for more info." t nil)
+ − 1826
+ − 1827 ;;;***
+ − 1828
+ − 1829 ;;;### (autoloads (hanoi) "hanoi" "games/hanoi.el")
+ − 1830
+ − 1831 (autoload 'hanoi "hanoi" "\
+ − 1832 Towers of Hanoi diversion. Argument is number of rings." t nil)
+ − 1833
+ − 1834 ;;;***
+ − 1835
+ − 1836 ;;;### (autoloads (life) "life" "games/life.el")
+ − 1837
+ − 1838 (autoload 'life "life" "\
+ − 1839 Run Conway's Life simulation.
+ − 1840 The starting pattern is randomly selected. Prefix arg (optional first
+ − 1841 arg non-nil from a program) is the number of seconds to sleep between
+ − 1842 generations (this defaults to 1)." t nil)
+ − 1843
+ − 1844 ;;;***
+ − 1845
+ − 1846 ;;;### (autoloads (mpuz) "mpuz" "games/mpuz.el")
+ − 1847
+ − 1848 (autoload 'mpuz "mpuz" "\
+ − 1849 Multiplication puzzle with GNU Emacs." t nil)
+ − 1850
+ − 1851 ;;;***
+ − 1852
+ − 1853 ;;;### (autoloads (snarf-spooks spook) "spook" "games/spook.el")
+ − 1854
+ − 1855 (autoload 'spook "spook" "\
+ − 1856 Adds that special touch of class to your outgoing mail." t nil)
+ − 1857
+ − 1858 (autoload 'snarf-spooks "spook" "\
+ − 1859 Return a vector containing the lines from `spook-phrases-file'." nil nil)
+ − 1860
+ − 1861 ;;;***
+ − 1862
+ − 1863 ;;;### (autoloads (psychoanalyze-pinhead apropos-zippy insert-zippyism yow) "yow" "games/yow.el")
+ − 1864
+ − 1865 (autoload 'yow "yow" "\
+ − 1866 Return or display a random Zippy quotation. With prefix arg, insert it." t nil)
+ − 1867
+ − 1868 (autoload 'insert-zippyism "yow" "\
+ − 1869 Prompt with completion for a known Zippy quotation, and insert it at point." t nil)
+ − 1870
+ − 1871 (autoload 'apropos-zippy "yow" "\
+ − 1872 Return a list of all Zippy quotes matching REGEXP.
+ − 1873 If called interactively, display a list of matches." t nil)
+ − 1874
+ − 1875 (autoload 'psychoanalyze-pinhead "yow" "\
+ − 1876 Zippy goes to the analyst." t nil)
+ − 1877
+ − 1878 ;;;***
+ − 1879
+ − 1880 ;;;### (autoloads (gnus-earcon-display) "earcon" "gnus/earcon.el")
+ − 1881
+ − 1882 (autoload 'gnus-earcon-display "earcon" "\
+ − 1883 Play sounds in message buffers." t nil)
+ − 1884
+ − 1885 ;;;***
+ − 1886
+ − 1887 ;;;### (autoloads (gnus-cache-generate-nov-databases gnus-cache-generate-active gnus-jog-cache) "gnus-cache" "gnus/gnus-cache.el")
+ − 1888
+ − 1889 (autoload 'gnus-jog-cache "gnus-cache" "\
+ − 1890 Go through all groups and put the articles into the cache." t nil)
+ − 1891
+ − 1892 (autoload 'gnus-cache-generate-active "gnus-cache" "\
+ − 1893 Generate the cache active file." t nil)
+ − 1894
+ − 1895 (autoload 'gnus-cache-generate-nov-databases "gnus-cache" "\
+ − 1896 Generate NOV files recursively starting in DIR." t nil)
+ − 1897
+ − 1898 ;;;***
+ − 1899
+ − 1900 ;;;### (autoloads (gnus-sound-play) "gnus-sound" "gnus/gnus-sound.el")
+ − 1901
+ − 1902 (autoload 'gnus-sound-play "gnus-sound" "\
+ − 1903 Play a sound through the speaker." t nil)
+ − 1904
+ − 1905 ;;;***
+ − 1906
+ − 1907 ;;;### (autoloads (gnus-batch-brew-soup) "gnus-soup" "gnus/gnus-soup.el")
+ − 1908
+ − 1909 (autoload 'gnus-batch-brew-soup "gnus-soup" "\
+ − 1910 Brew a SOUP packet from groups mention on the command line.
+ − 1911 Will use the remaining command line arguments as regular expressions
+ − 1912 for matching on group names.
+ − 1913
+ − 1914 For instance, if you want to brew on all the nnml groups, as well as
+ − 1915 groups with \"emacs\" in the name, you could say something like:
+ − 1916
+ − 1917 $ emacs -batch -f gnus-batch-brew-soup ^nnml \".*emacs.*\"" t nil)
+ − 1918
+ − 1919 ;;;***
+ − 1920
+ − 1921 ;;;### (autoloads (gnus-batch-score gnus-fetch-group gnus gnus-other-frame gnus-slave gnus-no-server gnus-slave-no-server gnus-add-configuration gnus-update-format) "gnus" "gnus/gnus.el")
+ − 1922
+ − 1923 (autoload 'gnus-update-format "gnus" "\
+ − 1924 Update the format specification near point." t nil)
+ − 1925
+ − 1926 (autoload 'gnus-add-configuration "gnus" "\
+ − 1927 Add the window configuration CONF to `gnus-buffer-configuration'." nil nil)
+ − 1928
+ − 1929 (autoload 'gnus-slave-no-server "gnus" "\
+ − 1930 Read network news as a slave, without connecting to local server" t nil)
+ − 1931
+ − 1932 (autoload 'gnus-no-server "gnus" "\
+ − 1933 Read network news.
+ − 1934 If ARG is a positive number, Gnus will use that as the
+ − 1935 startup level. If ARG is nil, Gnus will be started at level 2.
+ − 1936 If ARG is non-nil and not a positive number, Gnus will
+ − 1937 prompt the user for the name of an NNTP server to use.
+ − 1938 As opposed to `gnus', this command will not connect to the local server." t nil)
+ − 1939
+ − 1940 (autoload 'gnus-slave "gnus" "\
+ − 1941 Read news as a slave." t nil)
+ − 1942
+ − 1943 (autoload 'gnus-other-frame "gnus" "\
+ − 1944 Pop up a frame to read news." t nil)
+ − 1945
+ − 1946 (autoload 'gnus "gnus" "\
+ − 1947 Read network news.
+ − 1948 If ARG is non-nil and a positive number, Gnus will use that as the
+ − 1949 startup level. If ARG is non-nil and not a positive number, Gnus will
+ − 1950 prompt the user for the name of an NNTP server to use." t nil)
+ − 1951
+ − 1952 (autoload 'gnus-fetch-group "gnus" "\
+ − 1953 Start Gnus if necessary and enter GROUP.
+ − 1954 Returns whether the fetching was successful or not." t nil)
+ − 1955
+ − 1956 (defalias 'gnus-batch-kill 'gnus-batch-score)
+ − 1957
+ − 1958 (autoload 'gnus-batch-score "gnus" "\
+ − 1959 Run batched scoring.
+ − 1960 Usage: emacs -batch -l gnus -f gnus-batch-score <newsgroups> ...
+ − 1961 Newsgroups is a list of strings in Bnews format. If you want to score
+ − 1962 the comp hierarchy, you'd say \"comp.all\". If you would not like to
+ − 1963 score the alt hierarchy, you'd say \"!alt.all\"." t nil)
+ − 1964
+ − 1965 ;;;***
+ − 1966
+ − 1967 ;;;### (autoloads (unbold-region bold-region message-news-other-frame message-news-other-window message-mail-other-frame message-mail-other-window message-bounce message-resend message-forward message-recover message-supersede message-cancel-news message-followup message-wide-reply message-reply message-news message-mail message-mode) "message" "gnus/message.el")
+ − 1968
+ − 1969 (defvar message-fcc-handler-function 'rmail-output "\
+ − 1970 *A function called to save outgoing articles.
+ − 1971 This function will be called with the name of the file to store the
+ − 1972 article in. The default function is `rmail-output' which saves in Unix
+ − 1973 mailbox format.")
+ − 1974
+ − 1975 (defvar message-courtesy-message "The following message is a courtesy copy of an article\nthat has been posted as well.\n\n" "\
+ − 1976 *This is inserted at the start of a mailed copy of a posted message.
+ − 1977 If this variable is nil, no such courtesy message will be added.")
+ − 1978
+ − 1979 (defvar message-ignored-bounced-headers "^\\(Received\\|Return-Path\\):" "\
+ − 1980 *Regexp that matches headers to be removed in resent bounced mail.")
+ − 1981
+ − 1982 (defvar message-from-style 'default "\
+ − 1983 *Specifies how \"From\" headers look.
+ − 1984
+ − 1985 If `nil', they contain just the return address like:
+ − 1986 king@grassland.com
+ − 1987 If `parens', they look like:
+ − 1988 king@grassland.com (Elvis Parsley)
+ − 1989 If `angles', they look like:
+ − 1990 Elvis Parsley <king@grassland.com>
+ − 1991
+ − 1992 Otherwise, most addresses look like `angles', but they look like
+ − 1993 `parens' if `angles' would need quoting and `parens' would not.")
+ − 1994
+ − 1995 (defvar message-syntax-checks nil "\
+ − 1996 Controls what syntax checks should not be performed on outgoing posts.
+ − 1997 To disable checking of long signatures, for instance, add
+ − 1998 `(signature . disabled)' to this list.
+ − 1999
+ − 2000 Don't touch this variable unless you really know what you're doing.
+ − 2001
+ − 2002 Checks include subject-cmsg multiple-headers sendsys message-id from
+ − 2003 long-lines control-chars size new-text redirected-followup signature
+ − 2004 approved sender empty empty-headers message-id from subject.")
+ − 2005
+ − 2006 (defvar message-required-news-headers '(From Newsgroups Subject Date Message-ID (optional . Organization) Lines (optional . X-Newsreader)) "\
+ − 2007 *Headers to be generated or prompted for when posting an article.
+ − 2008 RFC977 and RFC1036 require From, Date, Newsgroups, Subject,
+ − 2009 Message-ID. Organization, Lines, In-Reply-To, Expires, and
+ − 2010 X-Newsreader are optional. If don't you want message to insert some
+ − 2011 header, remove it from this list.")
+ − 2012
+ − 2013 (defvar message-required-mail-headers '(From Subject Date (optional . In-Reply-To) Message-ID Lines (optional . X-Mailer)) "\
+ − 2014 *Headers to be generated or prompted for when mailing a message.
+ − 2015 RFC822 required that From, Date, To, Subject and Message-ID be
+ − 2016 included. Organization, Lines and X-Mailer are optional.")
+ − 2017
+ − 2018 (defvar message-deletable-headers '(Message-ID Date) "\
+ − 2019 *Headers to be deleted if they already exist and were generated by message previously.")
+ − 2020
+ − 2021 (defvar message-ignored-news-headers "^NNTP-Posting-Host:\\|^Xref:\\|^Bcc:\\|^Gcc:\\|^Fcc:" "\
+ − 2022 *Regexp of headers to be removed unconditionally before posting.")
+ − 2023
+ − 2024 (defvar message-ignored-mail-headers "^Gcc:\\|^Fcc:" "\
+ − 2025 *Regexp of headers to be removed unconditionally before mailing.")
+ − 2026
+ − 2027 (defvar message-ignored-supersedes-headers "^Path:\\|^Date\\|^NNTP-Posting-Host:\\|^Xref:\\|^Lines:\\|^Received:\\|^X-From-Line:\\|Return-Path:\\|^Supersedes:" "\
+ − 2028 *Header lines matching this regexp will be deleted before posting.
+ − 2029 It's best to delete old Path and Date headers before posting to avoid
+ − 2030 any confusion.")
+ − 2031
+ − 2032 (defvar message-signature-separator "^-- *$" "\
+ − 2033 Regexp matching the signature separator.")
+ − 2034
+ − 2035 (defvar message-interactive nil "\
+ − 2036 Non-nil means when sending a message wait for and display errors.
+ − 2037 nil means let mailer mail back a message to report errors.")
+ − 2038
+ − 2039 (defvar message-generate-new-buffers t "\
+ − 2040 *Non-nil means that a new message buffer will be created whenever `mail-setup' is called.
+ − 2041 If this is a function, call that function with three parameters: The type,
+ − 2042 the to address and the group name. (Any of these may be nil.) The function
+ − 2043 should return the new buffer name.")
+ − 2044
+ − 2045 (defvar message-kill-buffer-on-exit nil "\
+ − 2046 *Non-nil means that the message buffer will be killed after sending a message.")
+ − 2047
+ − 2048 (defvar message-user-organization-file "/usr/lib/news/organization" "\
+ − 2049 *Local news organization file.")
+ − 2050
+ − 2051 (defvar message-signature-before-forwarded-message t "\
+ − 2052 *If non-nil, put the signature before any included forwarded message.")
+ − 2053
+ − 2054 (defvar message-included-forward-headers "^From:\\|^Newsgroups:\\|^Subject:\\|^Date:\\|^Followup-To:\\|^Reply-To:\\|^Organization:\\|^Summary:\\|^Keywords:\\|^To:\\|^Cc:\\|^Posted-To:\\|^Mail-Copies-To:\\|^Apparently-To:\\|^Gnus-Warning:\\|^Resent-\\|^Message-ID:\\|^References:" "\
+ − 2055 *Regexp matching headers to be included in forwarded messages.")
+ − 2056
+ − 2057 (defvar message-ignored-resent-headers "^Return-receipt" "\
+ − 2058 *All headers that match this regexp will be deleted when resending a message.")
+ − 2059
+ − 2060 (defvar message-ignored-cited-headers "." "\
+ − 2061 Delete these headers from the messages you yank.")
+ − 2062
+ − 2063 (defvar message-send-mail-function 'message-send-mail-with-sendmail "\
+ − 2064 Function to call to send the current buffer as mail.
+ − 2065 The headers should be delimited by a line whose contents match the
+ − 2066 variable `mail-header-separator'.
+ − 2067
+ − 2068 Legal values include `message-send-mail-with-mh' and
+ − 2069 `message-send-mail-with-sendmail', which is the default.")
+ − 2070
+ − 2071 (defvar message-send-news-function 'message-send-news "\
+ − 2072 Function to call to send the current buffer as news.
+ − 2073 The headers should be delimited by a line whose contents match the
+ − 2074 variable `mail-header-separator'.")
+ − 2075
+ − 2076 (defvar message-reply-to-function nil "\
+ − 2077 Function that should return a list of headers.
+ − 2078 This function should pick out addresses from the To, Cc, and From headers
+ − 2079 and respond with new To and Cc headers.")
+ − 2080
+ − 2081 (defvar message-wide-reply-to-function nil "\
+ − 2082 Function that should return a list of headers.
+ − 2083 This function should pick out addresses from the To, Cc, and From headers
+ − 2084 and respond with new To and Cc headers.")
+ − 2085
+ − 2086 (defvar message-followup-to-function nil "\
+ − 2087 Function that should return a list of headers.
+ − 2088 This function should pick out addresses from the To, Cc, and From headers
+ − 2089 and respond with new To and Cc headers.")
+ − 2090
+ − 2091 (defvar message-use-followup-to 'ask "\
+ − 2092 *Specifies what to do with Followup-To header.
+ − 2093 If nil, ignore the header. If it is t, use its value, but query before
+ − 2094 using the \"poster\" value. If it is the symbol `ask', query the user
+ − 2095 whether to ignore the \"poster\" value. If it is the symbol `use',
+ − 2096 always use the value.")
+ − 2097
+ − 2098 (defvar message-post-method (cond ((and (boundp 'gnus-post-method) gnus-post-method) gnus-post-method) ((boundp 'gnus-select-method) gnus-select-method) (t '(nnspool ""))) "\
+ − 2099 Method used to post news.")
+ − 2100
+ − 2101 (defvar message-generate-headers-first nil "\
+ − 2102 *If non-nil, generate all possible headers before composing.")
+ − 2103
+ − 2104 (defvar message-citation-line-function 'message-insert-citation-line "\
+ − 2105 *Function called to insert the \"Whomever writes:\" line.")
+ − 2106
+ − 2107 (defvar message-yank-prefix "> " "\
+ − 2108 *Prefix inserted on the lines of yanked messages.
+ − 2109 nil means use indentation.")
+ − 2110
+ − 2111 (defvar message-cite-function 'message-cite-original "\
+ − 2112 *Function for citing an original message.")
+ − 2113
+ − 2114 (defvar message-indent-citation-function 'message-indent-citation "\
+ − 2115 *Function for modifying a citation just inserted in the mail buffer.
+ − 2116 This can also be a list of functions. Each function can find the
+ − 2117 citation between (point) and (mark t). And each function should leave
+ − 2118 point and mark around the citation text as modified.")
+ − 2119
+ − 2120 (defvar message-signature t "\
+ − 2121 *String to be inserted at the end of the message buffer.
+ − 2122 If t, the `message-signature-file' file will be inserted instead.
+ − 2123 If a function, the result from the function will be used instead.
+ − 2124 If a form, the result from the form will be used instead.")
+ − 2125
+ − 2126 (defvar message-signature-file "~/.signature" "\
+ − 2127 *File containing the text inserted at end of message. buffer.")
+ − 2128
+ − 2129 (defvar message-default-headers nil "\
+ − 2130 *A string containing header lines to be inserted in outgoing messages.
+ − 2131 It is inserted before you edit the message, so you can edit or delete
+ − 2132 these lines.")
+ − 2133
+ − 2134 (defvar message-default-mail-headers nil "\
+ − 2135 *A string of header lines to be inserted in outgoing mails.")
+ − 2136
+ − 2137 (defvar message-default-news-headers nil "\
+ − 2138 *A string of header lines to be inserted in outgoing news articles.")
+ − 2139
+ − 2140 (autoload 'message-mode "message" "\
+ − 2141 Major mode for editing mail and news to be sent.
+ − 2142 Like Text Mode but with these additional commands:
+ − 2143 C-c C-s message-send (send the message) C-c C-c message-send-and-exit
+ − 2144 C-c C-f move to a header field (and create it if there isn't):
+ − 2145 C-c C-f C-t move to To C-c C-f C-s move to Subject
+ − 2146 C-c C-f C-c move to Cc C-c C-f C-b move to Bcc
+ − 2147 C-c C-f C-f move to Fcc C-c C-f C-r move to Reply-To
+ − 2148 C-c C-f C-u move to Summary C-c C-f C-n move to Newsgroups
+ − 2149 C-c C-f C-k move to Keywords C-c C-f C-d move to Distribution
+ − 2150 C-c C-f C-o move to Followup-To
+ − 2151 C-c C-t message-insert-to (add a To header to a news followup)
+ − 2152 C-c C-n message-insert-newsgroups (add a Newsgroup header to a news reply)
+ − 2153 C-c C-b message-goto-body (move to beginning of message text).
+ − 2154 C-c C-i message-goto-signature (move to the beginning of the signature).
+ − 2155 C-c C-w message-insert-signature (insert `message-signature-file' file).
+ − 2156 C-c C-y message-yank-original (insert current message, if any).
+ − 2157 C-c C-q message-fill-yanked-message (fill what was yanked).
+ − 2158 C-c C-r message-ceasar-buffer-body (rot13 the message body)." t nil)
+ − 2159
+ − 2160 (autoload 'message-mail "message" "\
+ − 2161 Start editing a mail message to be sent." t nil)
+ − 2162
+ − 2163 (autoload 'message-news "message" "\
+ − 2164 Start editing a news article to be sent." t nil)
+ − 2165
+ − 2166 (autoload 'message-reply "message" "\
+ − 2167 Start editing a reply to the article in the current buffer." t nil)
+ − 2168
+ − 2169 (autoload 'message-wide-reply "message" nil t nil)
+ − 2170
+ − 2171 (autoload 'message-followup "message" nil t nil)
+ − 2172
+ − 2173 (autoload 'message-cancel-news "message" "\
+ − 2174 Cancel an article you posted." t nil)
+ − 2175
+ − 2176 (autoload 'message-supersede "message" "\
+ − 2177 Start composing a message to supersede the current message.
+ − 2178 This is done simply by taking the old article and adding a Supersedes
+ − 2179 header line with the old Message-ID." t nil)
+ − 2180
+ − 2181 (autoload 'message-recover "message" "\
+ − 2182 Reread contents of current buffer from its last auto-save file." t nil)
+ − 2183
+ − 2184 (autoload 'message-forward "message" "\
+ − 2185 Forward the current message via mail.
+ − 2186 Optional NEWS will use news to forward instead of mail." t nil)
+ − 2187
+ − 2188 (autoload 'message-resend "message" "\
+ − 2189 Resend the current article to ADDRESS." t nil)
+ − 2190
+ − 2191 (autoload 'message-bounce "message" "\
+ − 2192 Re-mail the current message.
+ − 2193 This only makes sense if the current message is a bounce message than
+ − 2194 contains some mail you have written which has been bounced back to
+ − 2195 you." t nil)
+ − 2196
+ − 2197 (autoload 'message-mail-other-window "message" "\
+ − 2198 Like `message-mail' command, but display mail buffer in another window." t nil)
+ − 2199
+ − 2200 (autoload 'message-mail-other-frame "message" "\
+ − 2201 Like `message-mail' command, but display mail buffer in another frame." t nil)
+ − 2202
+ − 2203 (autoload 'message-news-other-window "message" "\
+ − 2204 Start editing a news article to be sent." t nil)
+ − 2205
+ − 2206 (autoload 'message-news-other-frame "message" "\
+ − 2207 Start editing a news article to be sent." t nil)
+ − 2208
+ − 2209 (autoload 'bold-region "message" "\
+ − 2210 Bold all nonblank characters in the region.
+ − 2211 Works by overstriking characters.
+ − 2212 Called from program, takes two arguments START and END
+ − 2213 which specify the range to operate on." t nil)
+ − 2214
+ − 2215 (autoload 'unbold-region "message" "\
+ − 2216 Remove all boldness (overstruck characters) in the region.
+ − 2217 Called from program, takes two arguments START and END
+ − 2218 which specify the range to operate on." t nil)
+ − 2219
+ − 2220 ;;;***
+ − 2221
+ − 2222 ;;;### (autoloads (nnfolder-generate-active-file) "nnfolder" "gnus/nnfolder.el")
+ − 2223
+ − 2224 (autoload 'nnfolder-generate-active-file "nnfolder" "\
+ − 2225 Look for mbox folders in the nnfolder directory and make them into groups." t nil)
+ − 2226
+ − 2227 ;;;***
+ − 2228
+ − 2229 ;;;### (autoloads (nnkiboze-generate-groups) "nnkiboze" "gnus/nnkiboze.el")
+ − 2230
+ − 2231 (autoload 'nnkiboze-generate-groups "nnkiboze" "\
+ − 2232 Usage: emacs -batch -l nnkiboze -f nnkiboze-generate-groups
+ − 2233 Finds out what articles are to be part of the nnkiboze groups." t nil)
+ − 2234
+ − 2235 ;;;***
+ − 2236
+ − 2237 ;;;### (autoloads (nnml-generate-nov-databases) "nnml" "gnus/nnml.el")
+ − 2238
+ − 2239 (autoload 'nnml-generate-nov-databases "nnml" "\
+ − 2240 Generate nov databases in all nnml directories." t nil)
+ − 2241
+ − 2242 ;;;***
+ − 2243
+ − 2244 ;;;### (autoloads (nnsoup-revert-variables nnsoup-set-variables nnsoup-pack-replies) "nnsoup" "gnus/nnsoup.el")
+ − 2245
+ − 2246 (autoload 'nnsoup-pack-replies "nnsoup" "\
+ − 2247 Make an outbound package of SOUP replies." t nil)
+ − 2248
+ − 2249 (autoload 'nnsoup-set-variables "nnsoup" "\
+ − 2250 Use the SOUP methods for posting news and mailing mail." t nil)
+ − 2251
+ − 2252 (autoload 'nnsoup-revert-variables "nnsoup" "\
+ − 2253 Revert posting and mailing methods to the standard Emacs methods." t nil)
+ − 2254
+ − 2255 ;;;***
+ − 2256
+ − 2257 ;;;### (autoloads (gnus-score-mode) "score-mode" "gnus/score-mode.el")
+ − 2258
+ − 2259 (autoload 'gnus-score-mode "score-mode" "\
+ − 2260 Mode for editing Gnus score files.
+ − 2261 This mode is an extended emacs-lisp mode.
+ − 2262
+ − 2263 \\{gnus-score-mode-map}" t nil)
+ − 2264
+ − 2265 ;;;***
+ − 2266
+ − 2267 ;;;### (autoloads (gnus-smiley-display smiley-buffer smiley-region) "smiley" "gnus/smiley.el")
+ − 2268
+ − 2269 (autoload 'smiley-region "smiley" "\
+ − 2270 Smilify the region between point and mark." t nil)
+ − 2271
+ − 2272 (autoload 'smiley-buffer "smiley" nil t nil)
+ − 2273
+ − 2274 (autoload 'gnus-smiley-display "smiley" nil t nil)
+ − 2275
+ − 2276 ;;;***
+ − 2277
+ − 2278 ;;;### (autoloads (hm--html-minor-mode hm--html-mode) "hm--html-mode" "hm--html-menus/hm--html-mode.el")
+ − 2279
+ − 2280 (autoload 'hm--html-mode "hm--html-mode" "\
+ − 2281 Major mode for editing HTML hypertext documents.
+ − 2282 Special commands:\\{hm--html-mode-map}
+ − 2283 Turning on hm--html-mode calls the value of the variable hm--html-mode-hook,
+ − 2284 if that value is non-nil." t nil)
+ − 2285
+ − 2286 (autoload 'hm--html-minor-mode "hm--html-mode" "\
+ − 2287 Toggle hm--html-minor-mode.
+ − 2288 With arg, turn hm--html-minor-mode on iff arg is positive." t nil)
+ − 2289
+ − 2290 ;;;***
+ − 2291
+ − 2292 ;;;### (autoloads (html-view-get-display html-view-goto-url html-view-view-buffer html-view-view-file html-view-start-mosaic) "html-view" "hm--html-menus/html-view.el")
+ − 2293
+ − 2294 (autoload 'html-view-start-mosaic "html-view" "\
+ − 2295 Start Mosaic." t nil)
+ − 2296
+ − 2297 (autoload 'html-view-view-file "html-view" "\
+ − 2298 View an html file with Mosaic." t nil)
+ − 2299
+ − 2300 (autoload 'html-view-view-buffer "html-view" "\
+ − 2301 View html buffer with Mosaic.
+ − 2302 If BUFFER-TO-VIEW is nil, then the current buffer is used." t nil)
+ − 2303
+ − 2304 (autoload 'html-view-goto-url "html-view" "\
+ − 2305 Goto an URL in Mosaic." t nil)
+ − 2306
+ − 2307 (autoload 'html-view-get-display "html-view" "\
+ − 2308 Get the display for Mosaic." t nil)
+ − 2309
+ − 2310 ;;;***
+ − 2311
+ − 2312 ;;;### (autoloads (hmail:compose) "hmail" "hyperbole/hmail.el")
+ − 2313
+ − 2314 (autoload 'hmail:compose "hmail" "\
+ − 2315 Compose mail with ADDRESS and evaluation of EXPR.
+ − 2316 Optional SUBJECT and HELP message may also be given." t nil)
+ − 2317
+ − 2318 ;;;***
+ − 2319
+ − 2320 ;;;### (autoloads (Info-handle-in-note smart-info-assist smart-info) "hmous-info" "hyperbole/hmous-info.el")
+ − 2321
+ − 2322 (autoload 'smart-info "hmous-info" "\
+ − 2323 Walks through Info documentation networks using one key or mouse key.
+ − 2324
+ − 2325 If key is pressed within:
+ − 2326 (1) the first line of an Info Menu Entry or Cross Reference, the desired node
+ − 2327 is found;
+ − 2328 (2) the Up, Next, or Previous entries of a Node Header (first line),
+ − 2329 the desired node is found;
+ − 2330 (3) the File entry of a Node Header (first line),
+ − 2331 the 'Top' node within that file is found;
+ − 2332 (4) at the end of the current node, the Next node is found (this will
+ − 2333 descend subtrees if the function 'Info-global-next' is bound);
+ − 2334 (5) anywhere else (e.g. at the end of a line), the current node entry is
+ − 2335 scrolled up one windowful.
+ − 2336
+ − 2337 Returns t if key is pressed within an Info Node Header, Cross Reference,
+ − 2338 or a Menu; otherwise returns nil." t nil)
+ − 2339
+ − 2340 (autoload 'smart-info-assist "hmous-info" "\
+ − 2341 Walks through Info documentation networks using one assist-key or mouse assist-key.
+ − 2342
+ − 2343 If assist-key is pressed within:
+ − 2344 (1) the first line of an Info Menu Entry or Cross Reference, the desired node
+ − 2345 is found;
+ − 2346 (2) the Up, Next, or Previous entries of a Node Header (first line),
+ − 2347 the last node in the history list is found;
+ − 2348 (3) the File entry of a Node Header (first line),
+ − 2349 the 'DIR' root-level node is found;
+ − 2350 (4) at the end of the current node, the Previous node is found (this will
+ − 2351 return from subtrees if the function 'Info-global-prev is bound);
+ − 2352 (5) anywhere else (e.g. at the end of a line), the current node entry is
+ − 2353 scrolled down one windowful.
+ − 2354
+ − 2355 Returns t if assist-key is pressed within an Info Node Header, Cross Reference,
+ − 2356 or a Menu; otherwise returns nil." t nil)
+ − 2357
+ − 2358 (autoload 'Info-handle-in-note "hmous-info" "\
+ − 2359 Follows an Info cross-reference.
+ − 2360 If point is within the first line of an Info note (cross-reference), follows
+ − 2361 cross-reference and returns t; otherwise returns nil." nil nil)
+ − 2362
+ − 2363 ;;;***
+ − 2364
+ − 2365 ;;;### (autoloads (smart-tags-file smart-tags-file-path smart-objc-oobr smart-objc smart-fortran-at-tag-p smart-c++-oobr smart-c++ smart-c-at-tag-p smart-asm-at-tag-p) "hmouse-tag" "hyperbole/hmouse-tag.el")
+ − 2366
+ − 2367 (autoload 'smart-asm-at-tag-p "hmouse-tag" "\
+ − 2368 Return assembly tag name that point is within, else nil." nil nil)
+ − 2369
+ − 2370 (autoload 'smart-c-at-tag-p "hmouse-tag" "\
+ − 2371 Return C tag name that point is within, else nil." nil nil)
+ − 2372
+ − 2373 (autoload 'smart-c++ "hmouse-tag" "\
+ − 2374 Jumps to the definition of optional C++ IDENTIFIER or the one at point.
+ − 2375 Optional second arg NEXT means jump to next matching C++ tag.
+ − 2376
+ − 2377 It assumes that its caller has already checked that the key was pressed in an
+ − 2378 appropriate buffer and has moved the cursor to the selected buffer.
+ − 2379
+ − 2380 If:
+ − 2381 (1) on a '#include' statement, the include file is displayed;
+ − 2382 Look for include file in directory lists 'smart-c-cpp-include-dirs'
+ − 2383 and 'smart-c-include-dirs'.
+ − 2384 (2) on a C++ identifier, the identifier definition is displayed,
+ − 2385 assuming the identifier is found within an 'etags' generated tag file
+ − 2386 in the current directory or any of its ancestor directories.
+ − 2387 (3) if 'smart-c-use-lib-man' is non-nil, the C++ identifier is
+ − 2388 recognized as a library symbol, and a man page is found for the
+ − 2389 identifier, then the man page is displayed." t nil)
+ − 2390
+ − 2391 (autoload 'smart-c++-oobr "hmouse-tag" "\
+ − 2392 Jumps to the definition of selected C++ construct via OO-Browser support.
+ − 2393 Optional JUNK is ignored. Does nothing if the OO-Browser is not available.
+ − 2394
+ − 2395 It assumes that its caller has already checked that the key was pressed in an
+ − 2396 appropriate buffer and has moved the cursor to the selected buffer.
+ − 2397
+ − 2398 If key is pressed:
+ − 2399 (1) on a '#include' statement, the include file is displayed;
+ − 2400 Look for include file in directory lists 'smart-c-cpp-include-dirs'
+ − 2401 and 'smart-c-include-dirs'.
+ − 2402 (2) within a method declaration, its definition is displayed;
+ − 2403 (3) on a class name, the class definition is shown.
+ − 2404
+ − 2405 (2) and (3) require that an OO-Browser Environment has been loaded with
+ − 2406 the {M-x br-env-load RTN} command." t nil)
+ − 2407
+ − 2408 (autoload 'smart-fortran-at-tag-p "hmouse-tag" "\
+ − 2409 Return Fortran tag name that point is within, else nil." nil nil)
+ − 2410
+ − 2411 (autoload 'smart-objc "hmouse-tag" "\
+ − 2412 Jumps to the definition of optional Objective-C IDENTIFIER or the one at point.
+ − 2413 Optional second arg NEXT means jump to next matching Objective-C tag.
+ − 2414
+ − 2415 It assumes that its caller has already checked that the key was pressed in an
+ − 2416 appropriate buffer and has moved the cursor to the selected buffer.
+ − 2417
+ − 2418 If:
+ − 2419 (1) on a '#include' statement, the include file is displayed;
+ − 2420 Look for include file in directory lists 'smart-c-cpp-include-dirs'
+ − 2421 and 'smart-c-include-dirs'.
+ − 2422 (2) on an Objective-C identifier, the identifier definition is displayed,
+ − 2423 assuming the identifier is found within an 'etags' generated tag file
+ − 2424 in the current directory or any of its ancestor directories.
+ − 2425 (3) if 'smart-c-use-lib-man' is non-nil, the Objective-C identifier is
+ − 2426 recognized as a library symbol, and a man page is found for the
+ − 2427 identifier, then the man page is displayed." t nil)
+ − 2428
+ − 2429 (autoload 'smart-objc-oobr "hmouse-tag" "\
+ − 2430 Jumps to the definition of selected Objective-C construct via OO-Browser support.
+ − 2431 Optional JUNK is ignored. Does nothing if the OO-Browser is not available.
+ − 2432
+ − 2433 It assumes that its caller has already checked that the key was pressed in an
+ − 2434 appropriate buffer and has moved the cursor to the selected buffer.
+ − 2435
+ − 2436 If key is pressed:
+ − 2437 (1) on a '#include' statement, the include file is displayed;
+ − 2438 Look for include file in directory lists 'smart-c-cpp-include-dirs'
+ − 2439 and 'smart-c-include-dirs'.
+ − 2440 (2) within a method declaration, its definition is displayed;
+ − 2441 (3) on a class name, the class definition is shown.
+ − 2442
+ − 2443 (2) and (3) require that an OO-Browser Environment has been loaded with
+ − 2444 the {M-x br-env-load RTN} command." t nil)
+ − 2445
+ − 2446 (autoload 'smart-tags-file-path "hmouse-tag" "\
+ − 2447 Expand relative FILE name by looking it up in the nearest tags file.
+ − 2448 Return FILE unchanged if it exists relative to the current directory or
+ − 2449 cannot be expanded via a tags file." nil nil)
+ − 2450
+ − 2451 (autoload 'smart-tags-file "hmouse-tag" "\
+ − 2452 Return appropriate tags file name for CURR-FILENAME or 'tags-file-name'." nil nil)
+ − 2453
+ − 2454 ;;;***
+ − 2455
+ − 2456 ;;;### (autoloads (var:append) "hvar" "hyperbole/hvar.el")
+ − 2457
+ − 2458 (autoload 'var:append "hvar" "\
+ − 2459 Appends to value held by VAR-SYMBOL-NAME, LIST-TO-ADD. Returns new value.
+ − 2460 If VAR-SYMBOL-NAME is unbound, it is set to LIST-TO-ADD.
+ − 2461 Often used to append to 'hook' variables." nil nil)
+ − 2462
+ − 2463 ;;;***
+ − 2464
+ − 2465 ;;;### (autoloads (hypb:configuration) "hypb" "hyperbole/hypb.el")
+ − 2466
+ − 2467 (autoload 'hypb:configuration "hypb" "\
+ − 2468 Insert Emacs configuration information at the end of optional OUT-BUF or the current buffer." nil nil)
+ − 2469
+ − 2470 ;;;***
+ − 2471
+ − 2472 ;;;### (autoloads nil "hyperbole" "hyperbole/hyperbole.el")
+ − 2473
+ − 2474 (defvar action-key-url-function 'w3-fetch "\
+ − 2475 Value is a function of one argument, a url, which displays the url referent.
+ − 2476 Possible values are:
+ − 2477 w3-fetch - display using the W3 Emacs web browser;
+ − 2478 highlight-headers-follow-url-netscape - display in Netscape;
+ − 2479 highlight-headers-follow-url-mosaic - display in Mosaic.")
+ − 2480
+ − 2481 (defvar kimport:mode-alist '((t . kimport:text) (outline-mode . kimport:star-outline)) "\
+ − 2482 Alist of (major-mode . importation-function) elements.
+ − 2483 This determines the type of importation done on a file when `kimport:file' is
+ − 2484 called if the major mode of the import file matches the car of an element in
+ − 2485 this list. If there is no match, then `kimport:suffix-alist' is checked. If
+ − 2486 that yields no match, the element in this list whose car is 't is used. It
+ − 2487 normally does an import of a koutline or text file.
+ − 2488
+ − 2489 Each importation-function must take two arguments, a buffer/file to import
+ − 2490 and a buffer/file into which to insert the imported elements and a third
+ − 2491 optional argument, CHILDREN-P, which when non-nil means insert imported cells
+ − 2492 as the initial set of children of the current cell, if any.
+ − 2493
+ − 2494 outline-mode - imported as an Emacs outline whose entries begin with
+ − 2495 asterisks;
+ − 2496 .kot
+ − 2497 .kotl - imported as a structured koutline
+ − 2498
+ − 2499 all others - imported as text.")
+ − 2500
+ − 2501 (defvar kimport:suffix-alist '(("\\.otl$" . kimport:star-outline) ("\\.aug$" . kimport:aug-post-outline)) "\
+ − 2502 Alist of (buffer-name-suffix-regexp . importation-function) elements.
+ − 2503 This determines the type of importation done on a file when `kimport:file' is
+ − 2504 called. Each importation-function must take two arguments, a buffer/file to
+ − 2505 import and a buffer/file into which to insert the imported elements and a
+ − 2506 third optional argument, CHILDREN-P, which when non-nil means insert imported
+ − 2507 cells as the initial set of children of the current cell, if any.
+ − 2508
+ − 2509 .otl - imported as an Emacs outline whose entries begin with asterisks;
+ − 2510 .kot
+ − 2511 .kotl - imported as a structured koutline
+ − 2512 .aug - imported as an Augment post-numbered outline.")
+ − 2513
+ − 2514 ;;;***
+ − 2515
+ − 2516 ;;;### (autoloads (wconfig-yank-pop wconfig-ring-save wconfig-delete-pop wconfig-restore-by-name wconfig-delete-by-name wconfig-add-by-name) "wconfig" "hyperbole/wconfig.el")
+ − 2517
+ − 2518 (autoload 'wconfig-add-by-name "wconfig" "\
+ − 2519 Saves the current window configuration under the string NAME.
+ − 2520 When called interactively and a window configuration already exists under
+ − 2521 NAME, confirms whether or not to replace it." t nil)
+ − 2522
+ − 2523 (autoload 'wconfig-delete-by-name "wconfig" "\
+ − 2524 Deletes window configuration saved under NAME." t nil)
+ − 2525
+ − 2526 (autoload 'wconfig-restore-by-name "wconfig" "\
+ − 2527 Restores window configuration saved under NAME." t nil)
+ − 2528
+ − 2529 (autoload 'wconfig-delete-pop "wconfig" "\
+ − 2530 Replaces current window config with most recently saved config in ring.
+ − 2531 Then deletes this new configuration from the ring." t nil)
+ − 2532
+ − 2533 (autoload 'wconfig-ring-save "wconfig" "\
+ − 2534 Saves the current window configuration onto the save ring.
+ − 2535 Use {\\[wconfig-yank-pop]} to restore it at a later time." t nil)
+ − 2536
+ − 2537 (autoload 'wconfig-yank-pop "wconfig" "\
+ − 2538 Replaces current window config with prefix arg Nth prior one in save ring.
+ − 2539 Interactively, default value of N = 1, meaning the last saved window
+ − 2540 configuration is displayed.
+ − 2541
+ − 2542 The sequence of window configurations wraps around, so that after the oldest
+ − 2543 one comes the newest one." t nil)
+ − 2544
+ − 2545 ;;;***
+ − 2546
+ − 2547 ;;;### (autoloads (rolo-logic) "wrolo-logic" "hyperbole/wrolo-logic.el")
+ − 2548
+ − 2549 (autoload 'rolo-logic "wrolo-logic" "\
+ − 2550 Apply FUNC to all entries in optional IN-BUFS, display entries where FUNC is non-nil.
+ − 2551 If IN-BUFS is nil, 'rolo-file-list' is used. If optional COUNT-ONLY is
+ − 2552 non-nil, don't display entries, return count of matching entries only. If
+ − 2553 optional INCLUDE-SUB-ENTRIES flag is non-nil, FUNC will be applied across all
+ − 2554 sub-entries at once. Default is to apply FUNC to each entry and sub-entry
+ − 2555 separately. Entries are displayed with all of their sub-entries unless
+ − 2556 INCLUDE-SUB-ENTRIES is nil and optional NO-SUB-ENTRIES-OUT flag is non-nil.
+ − 2557 FUNC should use the free variables 'start' and 'end' which contain the limits
+ − 2558 of the region on which it should operate. Returns number of applications of
+ − 2559 FUNC that return non-nil." t nil)
+ − 2560
+ − 2561 ;;;***
+ − 2562
+ − 2563 ;;;### (autoloads (rolo-yank rolo-sort rolo-kill rolo-grep rolo-fgrep rolo-edit rolo-display-matches rolo-add) "wrolo" "hyperbole/wrolo.el")
+ − 2564
+ − 2565 (autoload 'rolo-add "wrolo" "\
+ − 2566 Adds a new entry in personal rolodex for NAME.
+ − 2567 Last name first is best, e.g. \"Smith, John\".
+ − 2568 With prefix argument, prompts for optional FILE to add entry within.
+ − 2569 NAME may be of the form: parent/child to insert child below a parent
+ − 2570 entry which begins with the parent string." t nil)
+ − 2571
+ − 2572 (autoload 'rolo-display-matches "wrolo" "\
+ − 2573 Display optional DISPLAY-BUF buffer of previously found rolodex matches.
+ − 2574 If DISPLAY-BUF is nil, use the value in 'rolo-display-buffer'.
+ − 2575 Second arg RETURN-TO-BUFFER is the buffer to leave point within after the display." t nil)
+ − 2576
+ − 2577 (autoload 'rolo-edit "wrolo" "\
+ − 2578 Edits a rolodex entry given by optional NAME within 'rolo-file-list'.
+ − 2579 With prefix argument, prompts for optional FILE to locate entry within.
+ − 2580 With no NAME arg, simply displays FILE or first entry in 'rolo-file-list' in an
+ − 2581 editable mode. NAME may be of the form: parent/child to edit child below a
+ − 2582 parent entry which begins with the parent string." t nil)
+ − 2583
+ − 2584 (autoload 'rolo-fgrep "wrolo" "\
+ − 2585 Display rolodex entries matching STRING.
+ − 2586 To a maximum of optional prefix arg MAX-MATCHES, in file(s) from optional
+ − 2587 ROLO-FILE or rolo-file-list. Default is to find all matching entries. Each
+ − 2588 entry is displayed with all of its sub-entries. Optional COUNT-ONLY non-nil
+ − 2589 means don't retrieve and don't display matching entries. Optional NO-DISPLAY
+ − 2590 non-nil means retrieve entries but don't display.
+ − 2591
+ − 2592 Nil value of MAX-MATCHES means find all matches, t value means find all matches
+ − 2593 but omit file headers, negative values mean find up to the inverse of that
+ − 2594 number of entries and omit file headers.
+ − 2595
+ − 2596 Returns number of entries matched. See also documentation for the variable
+ − 2597 rolo-file-list." t nil)
+ − 2598
+ − 2599 (autoload 'rolo-grep "wrolo" "\
+ − 2600 Display rolodex entries matching REGEXP.
+ − 2601 To a maximum of prefix arg MAX-MATCHES, in buffer(s) from optional ROLO-BUFS or
+ − 2602 rolo-file-list. Default is to find all matching entries. Each entry is
+ − 2603 displayed with all of its sub-entries. Optional COUNT-ONLY non-nil means don't
+ − 2604 retrieve and don't display matching entries. Optional NO-DISPLAY non-nil
+ − 2605 means retrieve entries but don't display.
+ − 2606
+ − 2607 Nil value of MAX-MATCHES means find all matches, t value means find all matches
+ − 2608 but omit file headers, negative values mean find up to the inverse of that
+ − 2609 number of entries and omit file headers.
+ − 2610
+ − 2611 Returns number of entries matched. See also documentation for the variable
+ − 2612 rolo-file-list." t nil)
+ − 2613
+ − 2614 (autoload 'rolo-kill "wrolo" "\
+ − 2615 Kills a rolodex entry given by NAME within 'rolo-file-list'.
+ − 2616 With prefix argument, prompts for optional FILE to locate entry within.
+ − 2617 NAME may be of the form: parent/child to kill child below a parent entry
+ − 2618 which begins with the parent string.
+ − 2619 Returns t if entry is killed, nil otherwise." t nil)
+ − 2620
+ − 2621 (autoload 'rolo-sort "wrolo" "\
+ − 2622 Sorts up to 14 levels of entries in ROLO-FILE (default is personal rolo).
+ − 2623 Assumes entries are delimited by one or more '*'characters.
+ − 2624 Returns list of number of groupings at each entry level." t nil)
+ − 2625
+ − 2626 (autoload 'rolo-yank "wrolo" "\
+ − 2627 Inserts at point the first rolodex entry matching NAME.
+ − 2628 With optional prefix arg, REGEXP-P, treats NAME as a regular expression instead
+ − 2629 of a string." t nil)
+ − 2630
+ − 2631 ;;;***
+ − 2632
+ − 2633 ;;;### (autoloads (iso-accents-mode) "iso-acc" "iso/iso-acc.el")
+ − 2634
+ − 2635 (autoload 'iso-accents-mode "iso-acc" "\
+ − 2636 Toggle ISO Accents mode, in which accents modify the following letter.
+ − 2637 This permits easy insertion of accented characters according to ISO-8859-1.
+ − 2638 When Iso-accents mode is enabled, accent character keys
+ − 2639 \(`, ', \", ^, / and ~) do not self-insert; instead, they modify the following
+ − 2640 letter key so that it inserts an ISO accented letter.
+ − 2641
+ − 2642 You can customize ISO Accents mode to a particular language
+ − 2643 with the command `iso-accents-customize'.
+ − 2644
+ − 2645 Special combinations: ~c gives a c with cedilla,
+ − 2646 ~d gives an Icelandic eth (d with dash).
+ − 2647 ~t gives an Icelandic thorn.
+ − 2648 \"s gives German sharp s.
+ − 2649 /a gives a with ring.
+ − 2650 /e gives an a-e ligature.
+ − 2651 ~< and ~> give guillemots.
+ − 2652 ~! gives an inverted exclamation mark.
+ − 2653 ~? gives an inverted question mark.
+ − 2654
+ − 2655 With an argument, a positive argument enables ISO Accents mode,
+ − 2656 and a negative argument disables it." t nil)
+ − 2657
+ − 2658 ;;;***
+ − 2659
+ − 2660 ;;;### (autoloads (mc-deactivate-passwd mc-install-write-mode mc-install-read-mode) "mailcrypt" "mailcrypt/mailcrypt.el")
+ − 2661
+ − 2662 (autoload 'mc-install-read-mode "mailcrypt" nil t nil)
+ − 2663
+ − 2664 (autoload 'mc-install-write-mode "mailcrypt" nil t nil)
+ − 2665
+ − 2666 (autoload 'mc-deactivate-passwd "mailcrypt" "\
+ − 2667 *Deactivate the passphrase cache." t nil)
+ − 2668
+ − 2669 ;;;***
+ − 2670
+ − 2671 ;;;### (autoloads (mc-pgp-fetch-key mc-scheme-pgp) "mc-pgp" "mailcrypt/mc-pgp.el")
+ − 2672
+ − 2673 (autoload 'mc-scheme-pgp "mc-pgp" nil nil nil)
+ − 2674
+ − 2675 (autoload 'mc-pgp-fetch-key "mc-pgp" "\
+ − 2676 Attempt to fetch a key for addition to PGP keyring. Interactively,
+ − 2677 prompt for string matching key to fetch.
+ − 2678
+ − 2679 Non-interactively, ID must be a pair. The CAR must be a bare Email
+ − 2680 address and the CDR a keyID (with \"0x\" prefix). Either, but not
+ − 2681 both, may be nil.
+ − 2682
+ − 2683 Return t if we think we were successful; nil otherwise. Note that nil
+ − 2684 is not necessarily an error, since we may have merely fired off an Email
+ − 2685 request for the key." t nil)
+ − 2686
+ − 2687 ;;;***
+ − 2688
+ − 2689 ;;;### (autoloads (mc-remailer-insert-response-block mc-remailer-encrypt-for-chain mc-remailer-insert-pseudonym) "mc-remail" "mailcrypt/mc-remail.el")
+ − 2690
+ − 2691 (autoload 'mc-remailer-insert-pseudonym "mc-remail" "\
+ − 2692 Insert pseudonym as a From field in the hash-mark header.
+ − 2693
+ − 2694 See the documentation for the variable `mc-remailer-pseudonyms' for
+ − 2695 more information." t nil)
+ − 2696
+ − 2697 (autoload 'mc-remailer-encrypt-for-chain "mc-remail" "\
+ − 2698 Encrypt message for a remailer chain, prompting for chain to use.
+ − 2699
+ − 2700 With \\[universal-argument], pause before each encryption." t nil)
+ − 2701
+ − 2702 (autoload 'mc-remailer-insert-response-block "mc-remail" "\
+ − 2703 Insert response block at point, prompting for chain to use.
+ − 2704
+ − 2705 With \\[universal-argument], enter a recursive edit of the innermost
+ − 2706 layer of the block before encrypting it." t nil)
+ − 2707
+ − 2708 ;;;***
+ − 2709
+ − 2710 ;;;### (autoloads (mc-mh-snarf-keys mc-mh-verify-signature mc-mh-decrypt-message mc-gnus-decrypt-message mc-gnus-snarf-keys mc-gnus-verify-signature mc-vm-snarf-keys mc-vm-decrypt-message mc-vm-verify-signature mc-rmail-decrypt-message mc-rmail-verify-signature mc-rmail-summary-snarf-keys mc-rmail-summary-decrypt-message mc-rmail-summary-verify-signature mc-snarf-keys mc-snarf mc-insert-public-key mc-verify-signature mc-verify mc-sign-message mc-sign mc-decrypt-message mc-decrypt mc-encrypt-message mc-encrypt mc-cleanup-recipient-headers) "mc-toplev" "mailcrypt/mc-toplev.el")
+ − 2711
+ − 2712 (autoload 'mc-cleanup-recipient-headers "mc-toplev" nil nil nil)
+ − 2713
+ − 2714 (autoload 'mc-encrypt "mc-toplev" "\
+ − 2715 *Encrypt the current buffer.
+ − 2716
+ − 2717 Exact behavior depends on current major mode.
+ − 2718
+ − 2719 With \\[universal-argument], prompt for User ID to sign as.
+ − 2720
+ − 2721 With \\[universal-argument] \\[universal-argument], prompt for encryption scheme to use." t nil)
+ − 2722
+ − 2723 (autoload 'mc-encrypt-message "mc-toplev" "\
+ − 2724 *Encrypt a message for RECIPIENTS using the given encryption SCHEME.
+ − 2725 RECIPIENTS is a comma separated string. If SCHEME is nil, use the value
+ − 2726 of `mc-default-scheme'. Returns t on success, nil otherwise." nil nil)
+ − 2727
+ − 2728 (autoload 'mc-decrypt "mc-toplev" "\
+ − 2729 *Decrypt a message in the current buffer.
+ − 2730
+ − 2731 Exact behavior depends on current major mode." t nil)
+ − 2732
+ − 2733 (autoload 'mc-decrypt-message "mc-toplev" "\
+ − 2734 Decrypt whatever message is in the current buffer.
+ − 2735 Returns a pair (SUCCEEDED . VERIFIED) where SUCCEEDED is t if the encryption
+ − 2736 succeeded and VERIFIED is t if it had a valid signature." nil nil)
+ − 2737
+ − 2738 (autoload 'mc-sign "mc-toplev" "\
+ − 2739 *Sign a message in the current buffer.
+ − 2740
+ − 2741 Exact behavior depends on current major mode.
+ − 2742
+ − 2743 With one prefix arg, prompts for private key to use, with two prefix args,
+ − 2744 also prompts for encryption scheme to use. With negative prefix arg,
+ − 2745 inhibits clearsigning (pgp)." t nil)
+ − 2746
+ − 2747 (autoload 'mc-sign-message "mc-toplev" "\
+ − 2748 Clear sign the message." nil nil)
+ − 2749
+ − 2750 (autoload 'mc-verify "mc-toplev" "\
+ − 2751 *Verify a message in the current buffer.
+ − 2752
+ − 2753 Exact behavior depends on current major mode." t nil)
+ − 2754
+ − 2755 (autoload 'mc-verify-signature "mc-toplev" "\
+ − 2756 *Verify the signature of the signed message in the current buffer.
+ − 2757 Show the result as a message in the minibuffer. Returns t if the signature
+ − 2758 is verified." nil nil)
+ − 2759
+ − 2760 (autoload 'mc-insert-public-key "mc-toplev" "\
+ − 2761 *Insert your public key at point.
+ − 2762 With one prefix arg, prompts for user id to use. With two prefix
+ − 2763 args, prompts for encryption scheme." t nil)
+ − 2764
+ − 2765 (autoload 'mc-snarf "mc-toplev" "\
+ − 2766 *Add all public keys in the buffer to your keyring.
+ − 2767
+ − 2768 Exact behavior depends on current major mode." t nil)
+ − 2769
+ − 2770 (autoload 'mc-snarf-keys "mc-toplev" "\
+ − 2771 *Add all public keys in the buffer to your keyring." t nil)
+ − 2772
+ − 2773 (autoload 'mc-rmail-summary-verify-signature "mc-toplev" "\
+ − 2774 *Verify the signature in the current message." t nil)
+ − 2775
+ − 2776 (autoload 'mc-rmail-summary-decrypt-message "mc-toplev" "\
+ − 2777 *Decrypt the contents of this message" t nil)
+ − 2778
+ − 2779 (autoload 'mc-rmail-summary-snarf-keys "mc-toplev" "\
+ − 2780 *Adds keys from current message to public key ring" t nil)
+ − 2781
+ − 2782 (autoload 'mc-rmail-verify-signature "mc-toplev" "\
+ − 2783 *Verify the signature in the current message." t nil)
+ − 2784
+ − 2785 (autoload 'mc-rmail-decrypt-message "mc-toplev" "\
+ − 2786 *Decrypt the contents of this message" t nil)
+ − 2787
+ − 2788 (autoload 'mc-vm-verify-signature "mc-toplev" "\
+ − 2789 *Verify the signature in the current VM message" t nil)
+ − 2790
+ − 2791 (autoload 'mc-vm-decrypt-message "mc-toplev" "\
+ − 2792 *Decrypt the contents of the current VM message" t nil)
+ − 2793
+ − 2794 (autoload 'mc-vm-snarf-keys "mc-toplev" "\
+ − 2795 *Snarf public key from the contents of the current VM message" t nil)
+ − 2796
+ − 2797 (autoload 'mc-gnus-verify-signature "mc-toplev" nil t nil)
+ − 2798
+ − 2799 (autoload 'mc-gnus-snarf-keys "mc-toplev" nil t nil)
+ − 2800
+ − 2801 (autoload 'mc-gnus-decrypt-message "mc-toplev" nil t nil)
+ − 2802
+ − 2803 (autoload 'mc-mh-decrypt-message "mc-toplev" "\
+ − 2804 Decrypt the contents of the current MH message in the show buffer." t nil)
+ − 2805
+ − 2806 (autoload 'mc-mh-verify-signature "mc-toplev" "\
+ − 2807 *Verify the signature in the current MH message." t nil)
+ − 2808
+ − 2809 (autoload 'mc-mh-snarf-keys "mc-toplev" nil t nil)
+ − 2810
+ − 2811 ;;;***
+ − 2812
+ − 2813 ;;;### (autoloads (mh-letter-mode mh-smail-other-window mh-smail-batch mh-smail) "mh-comp" "mh-e/mh-comp.el")
+ − 2814
+ − 2815 (autoload 'mh-smail "mh-comp" "\
+ − 2816 Compose and send mail with the MH mail system.
+ − 2817 This function is an entry point to mh-e, the Emacs front end
+ − 2818 to the MH mail system.
+ − 2819
+ − 2820 See documentation of `\\[mh-send]' for more details on composing mail." t nil)
+ − 2821
+ − 2822 (autoload 'mh-smail-batch "mh-comp" "\
+ − 2823 Set up a mail composition draft with the MH mail system.
+ − 2824 This function is an entry point to mh-e, the Emacs front end
+ − 2825 to the MH mail system. This function does not prompt the user
+ − 2826 for any header fields, and thus is suitable for use by programs
+ − 2827 that want to create a mail buffer.
+ − 2828 Users should use `\\[mh-smail]' to compose mail." nil nil)
+ − 2829
+ − 2830 (autoload 'mh-smail-other-window "mh-comp" "\
+ − 2831 Compose and send mail in other window with the MH mail system.
+ − 2832 This function is an entry point to mh-e, the Emacs front end
+ − 2833 to the MH mail system.
+ − 2834
+ − 2835 See documentation of `\\[mh-send]' for more details on composing mail." t nil)
+ − 2836
+ − 2837 (autoload 'mh-letter-mode "mh-comp" "\
+ − 2838 Mode for composing letters in mh-e.\\<mh-letter-mode-map>
+ − 2839 When you have finished composing, type \\[mh-send-letter] to send the message
+ − 2840 using the MH mail handling system.
+ − 2841 See the documentation for \\[mh-edit-mhn] for information on composing MIME
+ − 2842 messages.
+ − 2843
+ − 2844 \\{mh-letter-mode-map}
+ − 2845
+ − 2846 Variables controlling this mode (defaults in parentheses):
+ − 2847
+ − 2848 mh-delete-yanked-msg-window (nil)
+ − 2849 If non-nil, \\[mh-yank-cur-msg] will delete any windows displaying
+ − 2850 the yanked message.
+ − 2851
+ − 2852 mh-yank-from-start-of-msg (t)
+ − 2853 If non-nil, \\[mh-yank-cur-msg] will include the entire message.
+ − 2854 If `body', just yank the body (no header).
+ − 2855 If nil, only the portion of the message following the point will be yanked.
+ − 2856 If there is a region, this variable is ignored.
+ − 2857
+ − 2858 mh-ins-buf-prefix (\"> \")
+ − 2859 String to insert before each non-blank line of a message as it is
+ − 2860 inserted in a draft letter.
+ − 2861
+ − 2862 mh-signature-file-name (\"~/.signature\")
+ − 2863 File to be inserted into message by \\[mh-insert-signature].
+ − 2864
+ − 2865 Upon invoking mh-letter-mode, text-mode-hook and mh-letter-mode-hook are
+ − 2866 invoked with no args, if those values are non-nil." t nil)
+ − 2867
+ − 2868 ;;;***
+ − 2869
+ − 2870 ;;;### (autoloads (mh-version mh-rmail) "mh-e" "mh-e/mh-e.el")
+ − 2871
+ − 2872 (autoload 'mh-rmail "mh-e" "\
+ − 2873 Inc(orporate) new mail with MH, or, with arg, scan an MH mail folder.
+ − 2874 This function is an entry point to mh-e, the Emacs front end
+ − 2875 to the MH mail system." t nil)
+ − 2876
+ − 2877 (autoload 'mh-version "mh-e" "\
+ − 2878 Display version information about mh-e and the MH mail handling system." t nil)
+ − 2879
+ − 2880 ;;;***
+ − 2881
+ − 2882 ;;;### (autoloads nil "mh-mime" "mh-e/mh-mime.el")
+ − 2883
+ − 2884 (defvar mh-mime-content-types '(("text/plain") ("text/richtext") ("multipart/mixed") ("multipart/alternative") ("multipart/digest") ("multipart/parallel") ("message/rfc822") ("message/partial") ("message/external-body") ("application/octet-stream") ("application/postscript") ("image/jpeg") ("image/gif") ("audio/basic") ("video/mpeg")) "\
+ − 2885 Legal MIME content types. See documentation for \\[mh-edit-mhn].")
+ − 2886
+ − 2887 ;;;***
+ − 2888
+ − 2889 ;;;### (autoloads nil "mh-utils" "mh-e/mh-utils.el")
+ − 2890
+ − 2891 (put 'mh-progs 'risky-local-variable t)
+ − 2892
+ − 2893 (put 'mh-lib 'risky-local-variable t)
+ − 2894
+ − 2895 ;;;***
+ − 2896
+ − 2897 ;;;### (autoloads nil "abbrev" "modes/abbrev.el")
+ − 2898
+ − 2899 ;;;***
+ − 2900
+ − 2901 ;;;### (autoloads (ada-make-filename-from-adaname ada-mode) "ada-mode" "modes/ada-mode.el")
+ − 2902
+ − 2903 (autoload 'ada-mode "ada-mode" "\
+ − 2904 Ada Mode is the major mode for editing Ada code.
+ − 2905
+ − 2906 Bindings are as follows: (Note: 'LFD' is control-j.)
+ − 2907
+ − 2908 Indent line '\\[ada-tab]'
+ − 2909 Indent line, insert newline and indent the new line. '\\[newline-and-indent]'
+ − 2910
+ − 2911 Re-format the parameter-list point is in '\\[ada-format-paramlist]'
+ − 2912 Indent all lines in region '\\[ada-indent-region]'
+ − 2913 Call external pretty printer program '\\[ada-call-pretty-printer]'
+ − 2914
+ − 2915 Adjust case of identifiers and keywords in region '\\[ada-adjust-case-region]'
+ − 2916 Adjust case of identifiers and keywords in buffer '\\[ada-adjust-case-buffer]'
+ − 2917
+ − 2918 Call EXTERNAL pretty printer (if you have one) '\\[ada-call-pretty-printer]'
+ − 2919
+ − 2920 Fill comment paragraph '\\[ada-fill-comment-paragraph]'
+ − 2921 Fill comment paragraph and justify each line '\\[ada-fill-comment-paragraph-justify]'
+ − 2922 Fill comment paragraph, justify and append postfix '\\[ada-fill-comment-paragraph-postfix]'
+ − 2923
+ − 2924 Next func/proc/task '\\[ada-next-procedure]' Previous func/proc/task '\\[ada-previous-procedure]'
+ − 2925 Next package '\\[ada-next-package]' Previous package '\\[ada-previous-package]'
+ − 2926
+ − 2927 Goto matching start of current 'end ...;' '\\[ada-move-to-start]'
+ − 2928 Goto end of current block '\\[ada-move-to-end]'
+ − 2929
+ − 2930 Comments are handled using standard GNU Emacs conventions, including:
+ − 2931 Start a comment '\\[indent-for-comment]'
+ − 2932 Comment region '\\[comment-region]'
+ − 2933 Uncomment region '\\[ada-uncomment-region]'
+ − 2934 Continue comment on next line '\\[indent-new-comment-line]'
+ − 2935
+ − 2936 If you use imenu.el:
+ − 2937 Display index-menu of functions & procedures '\\[imenu]'
+ − 2938
+ − 2939 If you use find-file.el:
+ − 2940 Switch to other file (Body <-> Spec) '\\[ff-find-other-file]'
+ − 2941 or '\\[ff-mouse-find-other-file]
+ − 2942 Switch to other file in other window '\\[ada-ff-other-window]'
+ − 2943 or '\\[ff-mouse-find-other-file-other-window]
+ − 2944 If you use this function in a spec and no body is available, it gets created
+ − 2945 with body stubs.
+ − 2946
+ − 2947 If you use ada-xref.el:
+ − 2948 Goto declaration: '\\[ada-point-and-xref]' on the identifier
+ − 2949 or '\\[ada-goto-declaration]' with point on the identifier
+ − 2950 Complete identifier: '\\[ada-complete-identifier]'
+ − 2951 Execute Gnatf: '\\[ada-gnatf-current]'" t nil)
+ − 2952
+ − 2953 (autoload 'ada-make-filename-from-adaname "ada-mode" "\
+ − 2954 Determine the filename of a package/procedure from its own Ada name." t nil)
+ − 2955
+ − 2956 ;;;***
+ − 2957
+ − 2958 ;;;### (autoloads (archive-mode) "arc-mode" "modes/arc-mode.el")
+ − 2959
+ − 2960 (autoload 'archive-mode "arc-mode" "\
+ − 2961 Major mode for viewing an archive file in a dired-like way.
+ − 2962 You can move around using the usual cursor motion commands.
+ − 2963 Letters no longer insert themselves.
+ − 2964 Type `e' to pull a file out of the archive and into its own buffer;
+ − 2965 or click mouse-2 on the file's line in the archive mode buffer.
+ − 2966
+ − 2967 If you edit a sub-file of this archive (as with the `e' command) and
+ − 2968 save it, the contents of that buffer will be saved back into the
+ − 2969 archive.
+ − 2970
+ − 2971 \\{archive-mode-map}" nil nil)
+ − 2972
+ − 2973 ;;;***
+ − 2974
+ − 2975 ;;;### (autoloads (asm-mode) "asm-mode" "modes/asm-mode.el")
+ − 2976
+ − 2977 (autoload 'asm-mode "asm-mode" "\
+ − 2978 Major mode for editing typical assembler code.
+ − 2979 Features a private abbrev table and the following bindings:
+ − 2980
+ − 2981 \\[asm-colon] outdent a preceding label, tab to next tab stop.
+ − 2982 \\[tab-to-tab-stop] tab to next tab stop.
+ − 2983 \\[asm-newline] newline, then tab to next tab stop.
+ − 2984 \\[asm-comment] smart placement of assembler comments.
+ − 2985
+ − 2986 The character used for making comments is set by the variable
+ − 2987 `asm-comment-char' (which defaults to `?;').
+ − 2988
+ − 2989 Alternatively, you may set this variable in `asm-mode-set-comment-hook',
+ − 2990 which is called near the beginning of mode initialization.
+ − 2991
+ − 2992 Turning on Asm mode runs the hook `asm-mode-hook' at the end of initialization.
+ − 2993
+ − 2994 Special commands:
+ − 2995 \\{asm-mode-map}
+ − 2996 " t nil)
+ − 2997
+ − 2998 ;;;***
+ − 2999
+ − 3000 ;;;### (autoloads (awk-mode) "awk-mode" "modes/awk-mode.el")
+ − 3001
+ − 3002 (autoload 'awk-mode "awk-mode" "\
+ − 3003 Major mode for editing AWK code.
+ − 3004 This is much like C mode except for the syntax of comments. It uses
+ − 3005 the same keymap as C mode and has the same variables for customizing
+ − 3006 indentation. It has its own abbrev table and its own syntax table.
+ − 3007
+ − 3008 Turning on AWK mode calls the value of the variable `awk-mode-hook'
+ − 3009 with no args, if that value is non-nil." t nil)
+ − 3010
+ − 3011 ;;;***
+ − 3012
+ − 3013 ;;;### (autoloads (bibtex-mode) "bibtex" "modes/bibtex.el")
+ − 3014
+ − 3015 (autoload 'bibtex-mode "bibtex" "\
+ − 3016 Major mode for editing bibtex files.
+ − 3017
+ − 3018 \\{bibtex-mode-map}
+ − 3019
+ − 3020 A command such as \\[bibtex-Book] will outline the fields for a BibTeX book entry.
+ − 3021
+ − 3022 The optional fields start with the string OPT, and thus ignored by BibTeX.
+ − 3023 The OPT string may be removed from a field with \\[bibtex-remove-OPT].
+ − 3024 \\[bibtex-kill-optional-field] kills the current optional field entirely.
+ − 3025 \\[bibtex-remove-double-quotes] removes the double-quotes around the text of
+ − 3026 the current field. \\[bibtex-empty-field] replaces the text of the current
+ − 3027 field with the default \"\".
+ − 3028
+ − 3029 The command \\[bibtex-clean-entry] cleans the current entry, i.e. (i) removes
+ − 3030 double-quotes from entirely numerical fields, (ii) removes OPT from all
+ − 3031 non-empty optional fields, (iii) removes all empty optional fields, and (iv)
+ − 3032 checks that no non-optional fields are empty.
+ − 3033
+ − 3034 Use \\[bibtex-find-text] to position the dot at the end of the current field.
+ − 3035 Use \\[bibtex-next-field] to move to end of the next field.
+ − 3036
+ − 3037 The following may be of interest as well:
+ − 3038
+ − 3039 Functions:
+ − 3040 find-bibtex-duplicates
+ − 3041 find-bibtex-entry-location
+ − 3042 hide-bibtex-entry-bodies
+ − 3043 sort-bibtex-entries
+ − 3044 validate-bibtex-buffer
+ − 3045
+ − 3046 Variables:
+ − 3047 bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts
+ − 3048 bibtex-entry-field-alist
+ − 3049 bibtex-include-OPTannote
+ − 3050 bibtex-include-OPTcrossref
+ − 3051 bibtex-include-OPTkey
+ − 3052 bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries
+ − 3053 bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields
+ − 3054
+ − 3055 Fields:
+ − 3056 address
+ − 3057 Publisher's address
+ − 3058 annote
+ − 3059 Long annotation used for annotated bibliographies (begins sentence)
+ − 3060 author
+ − 3061 Name(s) of author(s), in BibTeX name format
+ − 3062 booktitle
+ − 3063 Book title when the thing being referenced isn't the whole book.
+ − 3064 For book entries, the title field should be used instead.
+ − 3065 chapter
+ − 3066 Chapter number
+ − 3067 crossref
+ − 3068 The database key of the entry being cross referenced.
+ − 3069 edition
+ − 3070 Edition of a book (e.g., \"second\")
+ − 3071 editor
+ − 3072 Name(s) of editor(s), in BibTeX name format.
+ − 3073 If there is also an author field, then the editor field should be
+ − 3074 for the book or collection that the work appears in
+ − 3075 howpublished
+ − 3076 How something strange has been published (begins sentence)
+ − 3077 institution
+ − 3078 Sponsoring institution
+ − 3079 journal
+ − 3080 Journal name (macros are provided for many)
+ − 3081 key
+ − 3082 Alphabetizing and labeling key (needed when no author or editor)
+ − 3083 month
+ − 3084 Month (macros are provided)
+ − 3085 note
+ − 3086 To help the reader find a reference (begins sentence)
+ − 3087 number
+ − 3088 Number of a journal or technical report
+ − 3089 organization
+ − 3090 Organization (sponsoring a conference)
+ − 3091 pages
+ − 3092 Page number or numbers (use `--' to separate a range)
+ − 3093 publisher
+ − 3094 Publisher name
+ − 3095 school
+ − 3096 School name (for theses)
+ − 3097 series
+ − 3098 The name of a series or set of books.
+ − 3099 An individual book will also have its own title
+ − 3100 title
+ − 3101 The title of the thing being referenced
+ − 3102 type
+ − 3103 Type of a technical report (e.g., \"Research Note\") to be used
+ − 3104 instead of the default \"Technical Report\"
+ − 3105 volume
+ − 3106 Volume of a journal or multivolume work
+ − 3107 year
+ − 3108 Year---should contain only numerals
+ − 3109 ---------------------------------------------------------
+ − 3110 Entry to this mode calls the value of bibtex-mode-hook if that value is
+ − 3111 non-nil." t nil)
+ − 3112
+ − 3113 ;;;***
+ − 3114
+ − 3115 ;;;### (autoloads (c-set-style java-mode objc-mode c++-mode c-mode) "cc-mode" "modes/cc-mode.el")
+ − 3116
+ − 3117 (autoload 'c-mode "cc-mode" "\
+ − 3118 Major mode for editing K&R and ANSI C code.
+ − 3119 To submit a problem report, enter `\\[c-submit-bug-report]' from a
+ − 3120 c-mode buffer. This automatically sets up a mail buffer with version
+ − 3121 information already added. You just need to add a description of the
+ − 3122 problem, including a reproducible test case and send the message.
+ − 3123
+ − 3124 To see what version of cc-mode you are running, enter `\\[c-version]'.
+ − 3125
+ − 3126 The hook variable `c-mode-hook' is run with no args, if that value is
+ − 3127 bound and has a non-nil value. Also the hook `c-mode-common-hook' is
+ − 3128 run first.
+ − 3129
+ − 3130 Key bindings:
+ − 3131 \\{c-mode-map}" t nil)
+ − 3132
+ − 3133 (autoload 'c++-mode "cc-mode" "\
+ − 3134 Major mode for editing C++ code.
+ − 3135 To submit a problem report, enter `\\[c-submit-bug-report]' from a
+ − 3136 c++-mode buffer. This automatically sets up a mail buffer with
+ − 3137 version information already added. You just need to add a description
+ − 3138 of the problem, including a reproducible test case, and send the
+ − 3139 message.
+ − 3140
+ − 3141 To see what version of cc-mode you are running, enter `\\[c-version]'.
+ − 3142
+ − 3143 The hook variable `c++-mode-hook' is run with no args, if that
+ − 3144 variable is bound and has a non-nil value. Also the hook
+ − 3145 `c-mode-common-hook' is run first.
+ − 3146
+ − 3147 Key bindings:
+ − 3148 \\{c++-mode-map}" t nil)
+ − 3149
+ − 3150 (autoload 'objc-mode "cc-mode" "\
+ − 3151 Major mode for editing Objective C code.
+ − 3152 To submit a problem report, enter `\\[c-submit-bug-report]' from an
+ − 3153 objc-mode buffer. This automatically sets up a mail buffer with
+ − 3154 version information already added. You just need to add a description
+ − 3155 of the problem, including a reproducible test case, and send the
+ − 3156 message.
+ − 3157
+ − 3158 To see what version of cc-mode you are running, enter `\\[c-version]'.
+ − 3159
+ − 3160 The hook variable `objc-mode-hook' is run with no args, if that value
+ − 3161 is bound and has a non-nil value. Also the hook `c-mode-common-hook'
+ − 3162 is run first.
+ − 3163
+ − 3164 Key bindings:
+ − 3165 \\{objc-mode-map}" t nil)
+ − 3166
+ − 3167 (autoload 'java-mode "cc-mode" "\
+ − 3168 Major mode for editing Java code.
+ − 3169 To submit a problem report, enter `\\[c-submit-bug-report]' from an
+ − 3170 java-mode buffer. This automatically sets up a mail buffer with
+ − 3171 version information already added. You just need to add a description
+ − 3172 of the problem, including a reproducible test case and send the
+ − 3173 message.
+ − 3174
+ − 3175 To see what version of cc-mode you are running, enter `\\[c-version]'.
+ − 3176
+ − 3177 The hook variable `java-mode-hook' is run with no args, if that value
+ − 3178 is bound and has a non-nil value. Also the common hook
+ − 3179 `c-mode-common-hook' is run first. Note that this mode automatically
+ − 3180 sets the \"java\" style before calling any hooks so be careful if you
+ − 3181 set styles in `c-mode-common-hook'.
+ − 3182
+ − 3183 Key bindings:
+ − 3184 \\{java-mode-map}" t nil)
+ − 3185
+ − 3186 (autoload 'c-set-style "cc-mode" "\
+ − 3187 Set cc-mode variables to use one of several different indentation styles.
+ − 3188 STYLENAME is a string representing the desired style from the list of
+ − 3189 styles described in the variable `c-style-alist'. See that variable
+ − 3190 for details of setting up styles." t nil)
+ − 3191
+ − 3192 (fset 'set-c-style 'c-set-style)
+ − 3193
+ − 3194 ;;;***
+ − 3195
+ − 3196 ;;;### (autoloads (common-lisp-indent-function) "cl-indent" "modes/cl-indent.el")
+ − 3197
+ − 3198 (autoload 'common-lisp-indent-function "cl-indent" nil nil nil)
+ − 3199
+ − 3200 ;;;***
+ − 3201
+ − 3202 ;;;### (autoloads (c-macro-expand) "cmacexp" "modes/cmacexp.el")
+ − 3203
+ − 3204 (autoload 'c-macro-expand "cmacexp" "\
+ − 3205 Expand C macros in the region, using the C preprocessor.
+ − 3206 Normally display output in temp buffer, but
+ − 3207 prefix arg means replace the region with it.
+ − 3208
+ − 3209 `c-macro-preprocessor' specifies the preprocessor to use.
+ − 3210 Prompt for arguments to the preprocessor (e.g. `-DDEBUG -I ./include')
+ − 3211 if the user option `c-macro-prompt-flag' is non-nil.
+ − 3212
+ − 3213 Noninteractive args are START, END, SUBST.
+ − 3214 For use inside Lisp programs, see also `c-macro-expansion'." t nil)
+ − 3215
+ − 3216 ;;;***
+ − 3217
+ − 3218 ;;;### (autoloads (eiffel-mode) "eiffel3" "modes/eiffel3.el")
+ − 3219
+ − 3220 (autoload 'eiffel-mode "eiffel3" "\
+ − 3221 Major mode for editing Eiffel programs." t nil)
+ − 3222
+ − 3223 ;;;***
+ − 3224
+ − 3225 ;;;### (autoloads (enriched-decode enriched-encode enriched-mode) "enriched" "modes/enriched.el")
+ − 3226
+ − 3227 (autoload 'enriched-mode "enriched" "\
+ − 3228 Minor mode for editing text/enriched files.
+ − 3229 These are files with embedded formatting information in the MIME standard
+ − 3230 text/enriched format.
+ − 3231 Turning the mode on runs `enriched-mode-hook'.
+ − 3232
+ − 3233 More information about Enriched mode is available in the file
+ − 3234 etc/enriched.doc in the Emacs distribution directory.
+ − 3235
+ − 3236 Commands:
+ − 3237
+ − 3238 \\<enriched-mode-map>\\{enriched-mode-map}" t nil)
+ − 3239
+ − 3240 (autoload 'enriched-encode "enriched" nil nil nil)
+ − 3241
+ − 3242 (autoload 'enriched-decode "enriched" nil nil nil)
+ − 3243
+ − 3244 ;;;***
+ − 3245
+ − 3246 ;;;### (autoloads (executable-self-display executable-set-magic) "executable" "modes/executable.el")
+ − 3247
+ − 3248 (autoload 'executable-set-magic "executable" "\
+ − 3249 Set this buffer's interpreter to INTERPRETER with optional ARGUMENT.
+ − 3250 The variables `executable-magicless-file-regexp', `executable-prefix',
+ − 3251 `executable-insert', `executable-query' and `executable-chmod' control
+ − 3252 when and how magic numbers are inserted or replaced and scripts made
+ − 3253 executable." t nil)
+ − 3254
+ − 3255 (autoload 'executable-self-display "executable" "\
+ − 3256 Turn a text file into a self-displaying Un*x command.
+ − 3257 The magic number of such a command displays all lines but itself." t nil)
+ − 3258
+ − 3259 ;;;***
+ − 3260
+ − 3261 ;;;### (autoloads (f90-mode) "f90" "modes/f90.el")
+ − 3262
+ − 3263 (autoload 'f90-mode "f90" "\
+ − 3264 Major mode for editing Fortran 90 code in free format.
+ − 3265
+ − 3266 \\[f90-indent-new-line] corrects current indentation and creates new indented line.
+ − 3267 \\[f90-indent-line] indents the current line correctly.
+ − 3268 \\[f90-indent-subprogram] indents the current subprogram.
+ − 3269
+ − 3270 Type `? or `\\[help-command] to display a list of built-in abbrevs for F90 keywords.
+ − 3271
+ − 3272 Key definitions:
+ − 3273 \\{f90-mode-map}
+ − 3274
+ − 3275 Variables controlling indentation style and extra features:
+ − 3276
+ − 3277 f90-do-indent
+ − 3278 Extra indentation within do blocks. (default 3)
+ − 3279 f90-if-indent
+ − 3280 Extra indentation within if/select case/where/forall blocks. (default 3)
+ − 3281 f90-type-indent
+ − 3282 Extra indentation within type/interface/block-data blocks. (default 3)
+ − 3283 f90-program-indent
+ − 3284 Extra indentation within program/module/subroutine/function blocks.
+ − 3285 (default 2)
+ − 3286 f90-continuation-indent
+ − 3287 Extra indentation applied to continuation lines. (default 5)
+ − 3288 f90-comment-region
+ − 3289 String inserted by \\[f90-comment-region] at start of each line in
+ − 3290 region. (default \"!!!$\")
+ − 3291 f90-indented-comment-re
+ − 3292 Regexp determining the type of comment to be intended like code.
+ − 3293 (default \"!\")
+ − 3294 f90-directive-comment-re
+ − 3295 Regexp of comment-like directive like \"!HPF\\\\$\", not to be indented.
+ − 3296 (default \"!hpf\\\\$\")
+ − 3297 f90-break-delimiters
+ − 3298 Regexp holding list of delimiters at which lines may be broken.
+ − 3299 (default \"[-+*/><=,% \\t]\")
+ − 3300 f90-break-before-delimiters
+ − 3301 Non-nil causes `f90-do-auto-fill' to break lines before delimiters.
+ − 3302 (default t)
+ − 3303 f90-beginning-ampersand
+ − 3304 Automatic insertion of & at beginning of continuation lines. (default t)
+ − 3305 f90-smart-end
+ − 3306 From an END statement, check and fill the end using matching block start.
+ − 3307 Allowed values are 'blink, 'no-blink, and nil, which determine
+ − 3308 whether to blink the matching beginning.) (default 'blink)
+ − 3309 f90-auto-keyword-case
+ − 3310 Automatic change of case of keywords. (default nil)
+ − 3311 The possibilities are 'downcase-word, 'upcase-word, 'capitalize-word.
+ − 3312 f90-leave-line-no
+ − 3313 Do not left-justify line numbers. (default nil)
+ − 3314 f90-startup-message
+ − 3315 Set to nil to inhibit message first time F90 mode is used. (default t)
+ − 3316 f90-keywords-re
+ − 3317 List of keywords used for highlighting/upcase-keywords etc.
+ − 3318
+ − 3319 Turning on F90 mode calls the value of the variable `f90-mode-hook'
+ − 3320 with no args, if that value is non-nil." t nil)
+ − 3321
+ − 3322 ;;;***
+ − 3323
+ − 3324 ;;;### (autoloads (follow-delete-other-windows-and-split follow-mode turn-off-follow-mode turn-on-follow-mode) "follow" "modes/follow.el")
+ − 3325
+ − 3326 (add-minor-mode 'follow-mode nil 'follow-mode-map)
+ − 3327
+ − 3328 (autoload 'turn-on-follow-mode "follow" "\
+ − 3329 Turn on Follow mode. Please see the function `follow-mode'." t nil)
+ − 3330
+ − 3331 (autoload 'turn-off-follow-mode "follow" "\
+ − 3332 Turn off Follow mode. Please see the function `follow-mode'." t nil)
+ − 3333
+ − 3334 (autoload 'follow-mode "follow" "\
+ − 3335 Minor mode which combines windows into one tall virtual window.
+ − 3336
+ − 3337 The feeling of a \"virtual window\" has been accomplished by the use
+ − 3338 of two major techniques:
+ − 3339
+ − 3340 * The windows always displays adjacent sections of the buffer.
+ − 3341 This means that whenever one window is moved, all the
+ − 3342 others will follow. (Hence the name Follow Mode.)
+ − 3343
+ − 3344 * Should the point (cursor) end up outside a window, another
+ − 3345 window displaying that point is selected, if possible. This
+ − 3346 makes it possible to walk between windows using normal cursor
+ − 3347 movement commands.
+ − 3348
+ − 3349 Follow mode comes to its prime when used on a large screen and two
+ − 3350 side-by-side window are used. The user can, with the help of Follow
+ − 3351 mode, use two full-height windows as though they would have been
+ − 3352 one. Imagine yourself editing a large function, or section of text,
+ − 3353 and beeing able to use 144 lines instead of the normal 72... (your
+ − 3354 mileage may vary).
+ − 3355
+ − 3356 To split one large window into two side-by-side windows, the commands
+ − 3357 `\\[split-window-horizontally]' or `M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split' can be used.
+ − 3358
+ − 3359 Only windows displayed in the same frame follow each-other.
+ − 3360
+ − 3361 If the variable `follow-intercept-processes' is non-nil, Follow mode
+ − 3362 will listen to the output of processes and redisplay accordingly.
+ − 3363 \(This is the default.)
+ − 3364
+ − 3365 When Follow mode is switched on, the hook `follow-mode-hook'
+ − 3366 is called. When turned off, `follow-mode-off-hook' is called.
+ − 3367
+ − 3368 Keys specific to Follow mode:
+ − 3369 \\{follow-mode-map}" t nil)
+ − 3370
+ − 3371 (autoload 'follow-delete-other-windows-and-split "follow" "\
+ − 3372 Create two side by side windows and enter Follow Mode.
+ − 3373
+ − 3374 Execute this command to display as much as possible of the text
+ − 3375 in the selected window. All other windows, in the current
+ − 3376 frame, are deleted and the selected window is split in two
+ − 3377 side-by-side windows. Follow Mode is activated, hence the
+ − 3378 two windows always will display two successive pages.
+ − 3379 \(If one window is moved, the other one will follow.)
+ − 3380
+ − 3381 If ARG is positive, the leftmost window is selected. If it negative,
+ − 3382 the rightmost is selected. If ARG is nil, the leftmost window is
+ − 3383 selected if the original window is the first one in the frame.
+ − 3384
+ − 3385 To bind this command to a hotkey, place the following line
+ − 3386 in your `~/.emacs' file, replacing [f7] by your favourite key:
+ − 3387 (global-set-key [f7] 'follow-delete-other-windows-and-split)" t nil)
+ − 3388
+ − 3389 ;;;***
+ − 3390
+ − 3391 ;;;### (autoloads (fortran-mode) "fortran" "modes/fortran.el")
+ − 3392
+ − 3393 (defvar fortran-tab-mode-default nil "\
+ − 3394 *Default tabbing/carriage control style for empty files in Fortran mode.
+ − 3395 A value of t specifies tab-digit style of continuation control.
+ − 3396 A value of nil specifies that continuation lines are marked
+ − 3397 with a character in column 6.")
+ − 3398
+ − 3399 (autoload 'fortran-mode "fortran" "\
+ − 3400 Major mode for editing Fortran code.
+ − 3401 \\[fortran-indent-line] indents the current Fortran line correctly.
+ − 3402 DO statements must not share a common CONTINUE.
+ − 3403
+ − 3404 Type ;? or ;\\[help-command] to display a list of built-in abbrevs for Fortran keywords.
+ − 3405
+ − 3406 Key definitions:
+ − 3407 \\{fortran-mode-map}
+ − 3408
+ − 3409 Variables controlling indentation style and extra features:
+ − 3410
+ − 3411 comment-start
+ − 3412 Normally nil in Fortran mode. If you want to use comments
+ − 3413 starting with `!', set this to the string \"!\".
+ − 3414 fortran-do-indent
+ − 3415 Extra indentation within do blocks. (default 3)
+ − 3416 fortran-if-indent
+ − 3417 Extra indentation within if blocks. (default 3)
+ − 3418 fortran-structure-indent
+ − 3419 Extra indentation within structure, union, map and interface blocks.
+ − 3420 (default 3)
+ − 3421 fortran-continuation-indent
+ − 3422 Extra indentation applied to continuation statements. (default 5)
+ − 3423 fortran-comment-line-extra-indent
+ − 3424 Amount of extra indentation for text within full-line comments. (default 0)
+ − 3425 fortran-comment-indent-style
+ − 3426 nil means don't change indentation of text in full-line comments,
+ − 3427 fixed means indent that text at `fortran-comment-line-extra-indent' beyond
+ − 3428 the value of `fortran-minimum-statement-indent-fixed' (for fixed
+ − 3429 format continuation style) or `fortran-minimum-statement-indent-tab'
+ − 3430 (for TAB format continuation style).
+ − 3431 relative means indent at `fortran-comment-line-extra-indent' beyond the
+ − 3432 indentation for a line of code.
+ − 3433 (default 'fixed)
+ − 3434 fortran-comment-indent-char
+ − 3435 Single-character string to be inserted instead of space for
+ − 3436 full-line comment indentation. (default \" \")
+ − 3437 fortran-minimum-statement-indent-fixed
+ − 3438 Minimum indentation for Fortran statements in fixed format mode. (def.6)
+ − 3439 fortran-minimum-statement-indent-tab
+ − 3440 Minimum indentation for Fortran statements in TAB format mode. (default 9)
+ − 3441 fortran-line-number-indent
+ − 3442 Maximum indentation for line numbers. A line number will get
+ − 3443 less than this much indentation if necessary to avoid reaching
+ − 3444 column 5. (default 1)
+ − 3445 fortran-check-all-num-for-matching-do
+ − 3446 Non-nil causes all numbered lines to be treated as possible \"continue\"
+ − 3447 statements. (default nil)
+ − 3448 fortran-blink-matching-if
+ − 3449 Non-nil causes \\[fortran-indent-line] on an ENDIF statement to blink on
+ − 3450 matching IF. Also, from an ENDDO statement, blink on matching DO [WHILE]
+ − 3451 statement. (default nil)
+ − 3452 fortran-continuation-string
+ − 3453 Single-character string to be inserted in column 5 of a continuation
+ − 3454 line. (default \"$\")
+ − 3455 fortran-comment-region
+ − 3456 String inserted by \\[fortran-comment-region] at start of each line in
+ − 3457 region. (default \"c$$$\")
+ − 3458 fortran-electric-line-number
+ − 3459 Non-nil causes line number digits to be moved to the correct column
+ − 3460 as typed. (default t)
+ − 3461 fortran-break-before-delimiters
+ − 3462 Non-nil causes `fortran-fill' breaks lines before delimiters.
+ − 3463 (default t)
+ − 3464 fortran-startup-message
+ − 3465 Set to nil to inhibit message first time Fortran mode is used.
+ − 3466
+ − 3467 Turning on Fortran mode calls the value of the variable `fortran-mode-hook'
+ − 3468 with no args, if that value is non-nil." t nil)
+ − 3469
+ − 3470 ;;;***
+ − 3471
+ − 3472 ;;;### (autoloads (hide-ifdef-mode) "hideif" "modes/hideif.el")
+ − 3473
+ − 3474 (add-minor-mode 'hide-ifdef-mode " Ifdef")
+ − 3475
+ − 3476 (autoload 'hide-ifdef-mode "hideif" "\
+ − 3477 Toggle Hide-Ifdef mode. This is a minor mode, albeit a large one.
+ − 3478 With ARG, turn Hide-Ifdef mode on if arg is positive, off otherwise.
+ − 3479 In Hide-Ifdef mode, code within #ifdef constructs that the C preprocessor
+ − 3480 would eliminate may be hidden from view. Several variables affect
+ − 3481 how the hiding is done:
+ − 3482
+ − 3483 hide-ifdef-env
+ − 3484 An association list of defined and undefined symbols for the
+ − 3485 current buffer. Initially, the global value of `hide-ifdef-env'
+ − 3486 is used.
+ − 3487
+ − 3488 hide-ifdef-define-alist
+ − 3489 An association list of defined symbol lists.
+ − 3490 Use `hide-ifdef-set-define-alist' to save the current `hide-ifdef-env'
+ − 3491 and `hide-ifdef-use-define-alist' to set the current `hide-ifdef-env'
+ − 3492 from one of the lists in `hide-ifdef-define-alist'.
+ − 3493
+ − 3494 hide-ifdef-lines
+ − 3495 Set to non-nil to not show #if, #ifdef, #ifndef, #else, and
+ − 3496 #endif lines when hiding.
+ − 3497
+ − 3498 hide-ifdef-initially
+ − 3499 Indicates whether `hide-ifdefs' should be called when Hide-Ifdef mode
+ − 3500 is activated.
+ − 3501
+ − 3502 hide-ifdef-read-only
+ − 3503 Set to non-nil if you want to make buffers read only while hiding.
+ − 3504 After `show-ifdefs', read-only status is restored to previous value.
+ − 3505
+ − 3506 \\{hide-ifdef-mode-map}" t nil)
+ − 3507
+ − 3508 (defvar hide-ifdef-initially nil "\
+ − 3509 *Non-nil means call `hide-ifdefs' when Hide-Ifdef mode is first activated.")
+ − 3510
+ − 3511 (defvar hide-ifdef-read-only nil "\
+ − 3512 *Set to non-nil if you want buffer to be read-only while hiding text.")
+ − 3513
+ − 3514 (defvar hide-ifdef-lines nil "\
+ − 3515 *Non-nil means hide the #ifX, #else, and #endif lines.")
+ − 3516
+ − 3517 ;;;***
+ − 3518
+ − 3519 ;;;### (autoloads (hs-minor-mode hs-hide-block hs-hide-all) "hideshow" "modes/hideshow.el")
+ − 3520
+ − 3521 (defvar hs-minor-mode nil "\
+ − 3522 Non-nil if using hideshow mode as a minor mode of some other mode.
+ − 3523 Use the command `hs-minor-mode' to toggle this variable.")
+ − 3524
+ − 3525 (autoload 'hs-hide-all "hideshow" "\
+ − 3526 Hides all top-level blocks, displaying only first and last lines.
+ − 3527 It moves point to the beginning of the line, and it runs the normal hook
+ − 3528 `hs-hide-hook'. See documentation for `run-hooks'." t nil)
+ − 3529
+ − 3530 (autoload 'hs-hide-block "hideshow" "\
+ − 3531 Selects a block and hides it. With prefix arg, reposition at end.
+ − 3532 Block is defined as a sexp for lispish modes, mode-specific otherwise.
+ − 3533 Comments are blocks, too. Upon completion, point is at repositioned and
+ − 3534 the normal hook `hs-hide-hook' is run. See documentation for `run-hooks'." t nil)
+ − 3535
+ − 3536 (autoload 'hs-minor-mode "hideshow" "\
+ − 3537 Toggle hideshow minor mode.
+ − 3538 With ARG, turn hideshow minor mode on if ARG is positive, off otherwise.
+ − 3539 When hideshow minor mode is on, the menu bar is augmented with hideshow
+ − 3540 commands and the hideshow commands are enabled. The variables
+ − 3541 `selective-display' and `selective-display-ellipses' are set to t.
+ − 3542 Last, the normal hook `hs-minor-mode-hook' is run; see the doc for `run-hooks'.
+ − 3543
+ − 3544 Turning hideshow minor mode off reverts the menu bar and the
+ − 3545 variables to default values and disables the hideshow commands." t nil)
+ − 3546
+ − 3547 (add-minor-mode 'hs-minor-mode " hs" 'hs-minor-mode-map)
+ − 3548
+ − 3549 ;;;***
+ − 3550
+ − 3551 ;;;### (autoloads (icon-mode) "icon" "modes/icon.el")
+ − 3552
+ − 3553 (autoload 'icon-mode "icon" "\
+ − 3554 Major mode for editing Icon code.
+ − 3555 Expression and list commands understand all Icon brackets.
+ − 3556 Tab indents for Icon code.
+ − 3557 Paragraphs are separated by blank lines only.
+ − 3558 Delete converts tabs to spaces as it moves back.
+ − 3559 \\{icon-mode-map}
+ − 3560 Variables controlling indentation style:
+ − 3561 icon-tab-always-indent
+ − 3562 Non-nil means TAB in Icon mode should always reindent the current line,
+ − 3563 regardless of where in the line point is when the TAB command is used.
+ − 3564 icon-auto-newline
+ − 3565 Non-nil means automatically newline before and after braces
+ − 3566 inserted in Icon code.
+ − 3567 icon-indent-level
+ − 3568 Indentation of Icon statements within surrounding block.
+ − 3569 The surrounding block's indentation is the indentation
+ − 3570 of the line on which the open-brace appears.
+ − 3571 icon-continued-statement-offset
+ − 3572 Extra indentation given to a substatement, such as the
+ − 3573 then-clause of an if or body of a while.
+ − 3574 icon-continued-brace-offset
+ − 3575 Extra indentation given to a brace that starts a substatement.
+ − 3576 This is in addition to `icon-continued-statement-offset'.
+ − 3577 icon-brace-offset
+ − 3578 Extra indentation for line if it starts with an open brace.
+ − 3579 icon-brace-imaginary-offset
+ − 3580 An open brace following other text is treated as if it were
+ − 3581 this far to the right of the start of its line.
+ − 3582
+ − 3583 Turning on Icon mode calls the value of the variable `icon-mode-hook'
+ − 3584 with no args, if that value is non-nil." t nil)
+ − 3585
+ − 3586 ;;;***
+ − 3587
+ − 3588 ;;;### (autoloads (imenu imenu-add-to-menubar) "imenu" "modes/imenu.el")
+ − 3589
+ − 3590 (defvar imenu-generic-expression nil "\
+ − 3591 The regex pattern to use for creating a buffer index.
+ − 3592
+ − 3593 If non-nil this pattern is passed to `imenu-create-index-with-pattern'
+ − 3594 to create a buffer index.
+ − 3595
+ − 3596 It is an alist with elements that look like this: (MENU-TITLE
+ − 3597 REGEXP INDEX).
+ − 3598
+ − 3599 MENU-TITLE is a string used as the title for the submenu or nil if the
+ − 3600 entries are not nested.
+ − 3601
+ − 3602 REGEXP is a regexp that should match a construct in the buffer that is
+ − 3603 to be displayed in the menu; i.e., function or variable definitions,
+ − 3604 etc. It contains a substring which is the name to appear in the
+ − 3605 menu. See the info section on Regexps for more information.
+ − 3606
+ − 3607 INDEX points to the substring in REGEXP that contains the name (of the
+ − 3608 function, variable or type) that is to appear in the menu.
+ − 3609
+ − 3610 For emacs-lisp-mode for example PATTERN would look like:
+ − 3611
+ − 3612 '((nil \"^\\\\s-*(def\\\\(un\\\\|subst\\\\|macro\\\\|advice\\\\)\\\\s-+\\\\([-A-Za-z0-9+]+\\\\)\" 2)
+ − 3613 (\"*Vars*\" \"^\\\\s-*(def\\\\(var\\\\|const\\\\)\\\\s-+\\\\([-A-Za-z0-9+]+\\\\)\" 2)
+ − 3614 (\"*Types*\" \"^\\\\s-*(def\\\\(type\\\\|struct\\\\|class\\\\|ine-condition\\\\)\\\\s-+\\\\([-A-Za-z0-9+]+\\\\)\" 2))
+ − 3615
+ − 3616 The variable is buffer-local.")
+ − 3617
+ − 3618 (make-variable-buffer-local 'imenu-generic-expression)
+ − 3619
+ − 3620 (autoload 'imenu-add-to-menubar "imenu" "\
+ − 3621 Adds an `imenu' entry to the menu bar for the current buffer.
+ − 3622 NAME is a string used to name the menu bar item.
+ − 3623 See the command `imenu' for more information." t nil)
+ − 3624
+ − 3625 (autoload 'imenu "imenu" "\
+ − 3626 Jump to a place in the buffer chosen using a buffer menu or mouse menu.
+ − 3627 See `imenu-choose-buffer-index' for more information." t nil)
+ − 3628
+ − 3629 ;;;***
+ − 3630
+ − 3631 ;;;### (autoloads (ksh-mode) "ksh-mode" "modes/ksh-mode.el")
+ − 3632
+ − 3633 (autoload 'ksh-mode "ksh-mode" "\
+ − 3634 ksh-mode $Revision: 1.3 $ - Major mode for editing (Bourne, Korn or Bourne again)
+ − 3635 shell scripts.
+ − 3636 Special key bindings and commands:
+ − 3637 \\{ksh-mode-map}
+ − 3638 Variables controlling indentation style:
+ − 3639 ksh-indent
+ − 3640 Indentation of ksh statements with respect to containing block.
+ − 3641 Default value is 2.
+ − 3642 ksh-case-indent
+ − 3643 Additional indentation for statements under case items.
+ − 3644 Default value is nil which will align the statements one position
+ − 3645 past the \")\" of the pattern.
+ − 3646 ksh-case-item-offset
+ − 3647 Additional indentation for case items within a case statement.
+ − 3648 Default value is 2.
+ − 3649 ksh-group-offset
+ − 3650 Additional indentation for keywords \"do\" and \"then\".
+ − 3651 Default value is -2.
+ − 3652 ksh-brace-offset
+ − 3653 Additional indentation of \"{\" under functions or brace groupings.
+ − 3654 Default value is 0.
+ − 3655 ksh-multiline-offset
+ − 3656 Additional indentation of line that is preceded of a line ending with a
+ − 3657 \\ to make it continue on next line.
+ − 3658 ksh-tab-always-indent
+ − 3659 Controls the operation of the TAB key. If t (the default), always
+ − 3660 reindent the current line. If nil, indent the current line only if
+ − 3661 point is at the left margin or in the line's indentation; otherwise
+ − 3662 insert a tab.
+ − 3663 ksh-match-and-tell
+ − 3664 If non-nil echo in the minibuffer the matching compound command
+ − 3665 for the \"done\", \"}\", \"fi\", or \"esac\". Default value is t.
+ − 3666
+ − 3667 ksh-align-to-keyword
+ − 3668 Controls whether nested constructs align from the keyword or
+ − 3669 the current indentation. If non-nil, indentation will be relative to
+ − 3670 the column the keyword starts. If nil, indentation will be relative to
+ − 3671 the current indentation of the line the keyword is on.
+ − 3672 The default value is non-nil.
+ − 3673
+ − 3674 ksh-comment-regexp
+ − 3675 Regular expression used to recognize comments. Customize to support
+ − 3676 ksh-like languages. Default value is \" \\s *#\".
+ − 3677
+ − 3678 Style Guide.
+ − 3679 By setting
+ − 3680 (setq ksh-indent default-tab-width)
+ − 3681 (setq ksh-group-offset 0)
+ − 3682
+ − 3683 The following style is obtained:
+ − 3684
+ − 3685 if [ -z $foo ]
+ − 3686 then
+ − 3687 bar # <-- ksh-group-offset is additive to ksh-indent
+ − 3688 foo
+ − 3689 fi
+ − 3690
+ − 3691 By setting
+ − 3692 (setq ksh-indent default-tab-width)
+ − 3693 (setq ksh-group-offset (- 0 ksh-indent))
+ − 3694
+ − 3695 The following style is obtained:
+ − 3696
+ − 3697 if [ -z $foo ]
+ − 3698 then
+ − 3699 bar
+ − 3700 foo
+ − 3701 fi
+ − 3702
+ − 3703 By setting
+ − 3704 (setq ksh-case-item-offset 1)
+ − 3705 (setq ksh-case-indent nil)
+ − 3706
+ − 3707 The following style is obtained:
+ − 3708
+ − 3709 case x in *
+ − 3710 foo) bar # <-- ksh-case-item-offset
+ − 3711 baz;; # <-- ksh-case-indent aligns with \")\"
+ − 3712 foobar) foo
+ − 3713 bar;;
+ − 3714 esac
+ − 3715
+ − 3716 By setting
+ − 3717 (setq ksh-case-item-offset 1)
+ − 3718 (setq ksh-case-indent 6)
+ − 3719
+ − 3720 The following style is obtained:
+ − 3721
+ − 3722 case x in *
+ − 3723 foo) bar # <-- ksh-case-item-offset
+ − 3724 baz;; # <-- ksh-case-indent
+ − 3725 foobar) foo
+ − 3726 bar;;
+ − 3727 esac
+ − 3728
+ − 3729
+ − 3730 Installation:
+ − 3731
+ − 3732 (setq ksh-mode-hook
+ − 3733 (function (lambda ()
+ − 3734 (font-lock-mode 1) ;; font-lock the buffer
+ − 3735 (setq ksh-indent 8)
+ − 3736 (setq ksh-group-offset -8)
+ − 3737 (setq ksh-brace-offset -8)
+ − 3738 (setq ksh-tab-always-indent t)
+ − 3739 (setq ksh-match-and-tell t)
+ − 3740 (setq ksh-align-to-keyword t) ;; Turn on keyword alignment
+ − 3741 )))" t nil)
+ − 3742
+ − 3743 ;;;***
+ − 3744
+ − 3745 ;;;### (autoloads (m4-mode) "m4-mode" "modes/m4-mode.el")
+ − 3746
+ − 3747 (autoload 'm4-mode "m4-mode" "\
+ − 3748 A major-mode to edit m4 macro files
+ − 3749 \\{m4-mode-map}
+ − 3750 " t nil)
+ − 3751
+ − 3752 ;;;***
+ − 3753
+ − 3754 ;;;### (autoloads (define-mail-alias build-mail-aliases mail-aliases-setup) "mail-abbrevs" "modes/mail-abbrevs.el")
+ − 3755
+ − 3756 (defvar mail-abbrev-mailrc-file nil "\
+ − 3757 Name of file with mail aliases. If nil, ~/.mailrc is used.")
+ − 3758
+ − 3759 (defvar mail-aliases nil "\
+ − 3760 Word-abbrev table of mail address aliases.
+ − 3761 If this is nil, it means the aliases have not yet been initialized and
+ − 3762 should be read from the .mailrc file. (This is distinct from there being
+ − 3763 no aliases, which is represented by this being a table with no entries.)")
+ − 3764
+ − 3765 (autoload 'mail-aliases-setup "mail-abbrevs" nil nil nil)
+ − 3766
+ − 3767 (autoload 'build-mail-aliases "mail-abbrevs" "\
+ − 3768 Read mail aliases from .mailrc and set mail-aliases." nil nil)
+ − 3769
+ − 3770 (autoload 'define-mail-alias "mail-abbrevs" "\
+ − 3771 Define NAME as a mail-alias that translates to DEFINITION.
+ − 3772 If DEFINITION contains multiple addresses, separate them with commas." t nil)
+ − 3773
+ − 3774 ;;;***
+ − 3775
+ − 3776 ;;;### (autoloads (makefile-mode) "make-mode" "modes/make-mode.el")
+ − 3777
+ − 3778 (autoload 'makefile-mode "make-mode" "\
+ − 3779 Major mode for editing Makefiles.
+ − 3780 This function ends by invoking the function(s) `makefile-mode-hook'.
+ − 3781
+ − 3782 \\{makefile-mode-map}
+ − 3783
+ − 3784 In the browser, use the following keys:
+ − 3785
+ − 3786 \\{makefile-browser-map}
+ − 3787
+ − 3788 Makefile mode can be configured by modifying the following variables:
+ − 3789
+ − 3790 makefile-browser-buffer-name:
+ − 3791 Name of the macro- and target browser buffer.
+ − 3792
+ − 3793 makefile-target-colon:
+ − 3794 The string that gets appended to all target names
+ − 3795 inserted by `makefile-insert-target'.
+ − 3796 \":\" or \"::\" are quite common values.
+ − 3797
+ − 3798 makefile-macro-assign:
+ − 3799 The string that gets appended to all macro names
+ − 3800 inserted by `makefile-insert-macro'.
+ − 3801 The normal value should be \" = \", since this is what
+ − 3802 standard make expects. However, newer makes such as dmake
+ − 3803 allow a larger variety of different macro assignments, so you
+ − 3804 might prefer to use \" += \" or \" := \" .
+ − 3805
+ − 3806 makefile-tab-after-target-colon:
+ − 3807 If you want a TAB (instead of a space) to be appended after the
+ − 3808 target colon, then set this to a non-nil value.
+ − 3809
+ − 3810 makefile-browser-leftmost-column:
+ − 3811 Number of blanks to the left of the browser selection mark.
+ − 3812
+ − 3813 makefile-browser-cursor-column:
+ − 3814 Column in which the cursor is positioned when it moves
+ − 3815 up or down in the browser.
+ − 3816
+ − 3817 makefile-browser-selected-mark:
+ − 3818 String used to mark selected entries in the browser.
+ − 3819
+ − 3820 makefile-browser-unselected-mark:
+ − 3821 String used to mark unselected entries in the browser.
+ − 3822
+ − 3823 makefile-browser-auto-advance-after-selection-p:
+ − 3824 If this variable is set to a non-nil value the cursor
+ − 3825 will automagically advance to the next line after an item
+ − 3826 has been selected in the browser.
+ − 3827
+ − 3828 makefile-pickup-everything-picks-up-filenames-p:
+ − 3829 If this variable is set to a non-nil value then
+ − 3830 `makefile-pickup-everything' also picks up filenames as targets
+ − 3831 (i.e. it calls `makefile-find-filenames-as-targets'), otherwise
+ − 3832 filenames are omitted.
+ − 3833
+ − 3834 makefile-cleanup-continuations-p:
+ − 3835 If this variable is set to a non-nil value then makefile-mode
+ − 3836 will assure that no line in the file ends with a backslash
+ − 3837 (the continuation character) followed by any whitespace.
+ − 3838 This is done by silently removing the trailing whitespace, leaving
+ − 3839 the backslash itself intact.
+ − 3840 IMPORTANT: Please note that enabling this option causes makefile-mode
+ − 3841 to MODIFY A FILE WITHOUT YOUR CONFIRMATION when \"it seems necessary\".
+ − 3842
+ − 3843 makefile-browser-hook:
+ − 3844 A function or list of functions to be called just before the
+ − 3845 browser is entered. This is executed in the makefile buffer.
+ − 3846
+ − 3847 makefile-special-targets-list:
+ − 3848 List of special targets. You will be offered to complete
+ − 3849 on one of those in the minibuffer whenever you enter a `.'.
+ − 3850 at the beginning of a line in Makefile mode." t nil)
+ − 3851
+ − 3852 ;;;***
+ − 3853
+ − 3854 ;;;### (autoloads (modula-2-mode) "modula2" "modes/modula2.el")
+ − 3855
+ − 3856 (autoload 'modula-2-mode "modula2" "\
+ − 3857 This is a mode intended to support program development in Modula-2.
+ − 3858 All control constructs of Modula-2 can be reached by typing C-c
+ − 3859 followed by the first character of the construct.
+ − 3860 \\<m2-mode-map>
+ − 3861 \\[m2-begin] begin \\[m2-case] case
+ − 3862 \\[m2-definition] definition \\[m2-else] else
+ − 3863 \\[m2-for] for \\[m2-header] header
+ − 3864 \\[m2-if] if \\[m2-module] module
+ − 3865 \\[m2-loop] loop \\[m2-or] or
+ − 3866 \\[m2-procedure] procedure Control-c Control-w with
+ − 3867 \\[m2-record] record \\[m2-stdio] stdio
+ − 3868 \\[m2-type] type \\[m2-until] until
+ − 3869 \\[m2-var] var \\[m2-while] while
+ − 3870 \\[m2-export] export \\[m2-import] import
+ − 3871 \\[m2-begin-comment] begin-comment \\[m2-end-comment] end-comment
+ − 3872 \\[suspend-emacs] suspend Emacs \\[m2-toggle] toggle
+ − 3873 \\[m2-compile] compile \\[m2-next-error] next-error
+ − 3874 \\[m2-link] link
+ − 3875
+ − 3876 `m2-indent' controls the number of spaces for each indentation.
+ − 3877 `m2-compile-command' holds the command to compile a Modula-2 program.
+ − 3878 `m2-link-command' holds the command to link a Modula-2 program." t nil)
+ − 3879
+ − 3880 ;;;***
+ − 3881
+ − 3882 ;;;### (autoloads (electric-nroff-mode nroff-mode) "nroff-mode" "modes/nroff-mode.el")
+ − 3883
+ − 3884 (autoload 'nroff-mode "nroff-mode" "\
+ − 3885 Major mode for editing text intended for nroff to format.
+ − 3886 \\{nroff-mode-map}
+ − 3887 Turning on Nroff mode runs `text-mode-hook', then `nroff-mode-hook'.
+ − 3888 Also, try `nroff-electric-mode', for automatically inserting
+ − 3889 closing requests for requests that are used in matched pairs." t nil)
+ − 3890
+ − 3891 (autoload 'electric-nroff-mode "nroff-mode" "\
+ − 3892 Toggle `nroff-electric-newline' minor mode.
+ − 3893 `nroff-electric-newline' forces Emacs to check for an nroff request at the
+ − 3894 beginning of the line, and insert the matching closing request if necessary.
+ − 3895 This command toggles that mode (off->on, on->off), with an argument,
+ − 3896 turns it on iff arg is positive, otherwise off." t nil)
+ − 3897
+ − 3898 (defvar nroff-electric-mode nil "\
+ − 3899 Non-nil if in electric-nroff minor mode.")
+ − 3900
+ − 3901 (add-minor-mode 'nroff-electric-mode " Electric" nil nil 'electric-nroff-mode)
+ − 3902
+ − 3903 ;;;***
+ − 3904
+ − 3905 ;;;### (autoloads (outl-mouse-minor-mode outl-mouse-mode) "outl-mouse" "modes/outl-mouse.el")
+ − 3906
+ − 3907 (autoload 'outl-mouse-mode "outl-mouse" "\
+ − 3908 Calls outline-mode, with outl-mouse extensions" t nil)
+ − 3909
+ − 3910 (autoload 'outl-mouse-minor-mode "outl-mouse" "\
+ − 3911 Toggles outline-minor-mode, with outl-mouse extensions" t nil)
+ − 3912
+ − 3913 ;;;***
+ − 3914
+ − 3915 ;;;### (autoloads (outline-minor-mode outline-mode) "outline" "modes/outline.el")
+ − 3916
+ − 3917 (defvar outline-minor-mode nil "\
+ − 3918 Non-nil if using Outline mode as a minor mode of some other mode.")
+ − 3919
+ − 3920 (make-variable-buffer-local 'outline-minor-mode)
+ − 3921
+ − 3922 (put 'outline-minor-mode 'permanent-local t)
+ − 3923
+ − 3924 (add-minor-mode 'outline-minor-mode " Outl")
+ − 3925
+ − 3926 (autoload 'outline-mode "outline" "\
+ − 3927 Set major mode for editing outlines with selective display.
+ − 3928 Headings are lines which start with asterisks: one for major headings,
+ − 3929 two for subheadings, etc. Lines not starting with asterisks are body lines.
+ − 3930
+ − 3931 Body text or subheadings under a heading can be made temporarily
+ − 3932 invisible, or visible again. Invisible lines are attached to the end
+ − 3933 of the heading, so they move with it, if the line is killed and yanked
+ − 3934 back. A heading with text hidden under it is marked with an ellipsis (...).
+ − 3935
+ − 3936 Commands:\\<outline-mode-map>
+ − 3937 \\[outline-next-visible-heading] outline-next-visible-heading move by visible headings
+ − 3938 \\[outline-previous-visible-heading] outline-previous-visible-heading
+ − 3939 \\[outline-forward-same-level] outline-forward-same-level similar but skip subheadings
+ − 3940 \\[outline-backward-same-level] outline-backward-same-level
+ − 3941 \\[outline-up-heading] outline-up-heading move from subheading to heading
+ − 3942
+ − 3943 \\[hide-body] make all text invisible (not headings).
+ − 3944 \\[show-all] make everything in buffer visible.
+ − 3945
+ − 3946 The remaining commands are used when point is on a heading line.
+ − 3947 They apply to some of the body or subheadings of that heading.
+ − 3948 \\[hide-subtree] hide-subtree make body and subheadings invisible.
+ − 3949 \\[show-subtree] show-subtree make body and subheadings visible.
+ − 3950 \\[show-children] show-children make direct subheadings visible.
+ − 3951 No effect on body, or subheadings 2 or more levels down.
+ − 3952 With arg N, affects subheadings N levels down.
+ − 3953 \\[hide-entry] make immediately following body invisible.
+ − 3954 \\[show-entry] make it visible.
+ − 3955 \\[hide-leaves] make body under heading and under its subheadings invisible.
+ − 3956 The subheadings remain visible.
+ − 3957 \\[show-branches] make all subheadings at all levels visible.
+ − 3958
+ − 3959 The variable `outline-regexp' can be changed to control what is a heading.
+ − 3960 A line is a heading if `outline-regexp' matches something at the
+ − 3961 beginning of the line. The longer the match, the deeper the level.
+ − 3962
+ − 3963 Turning on outline mode calls the value of `text-mode-hook' and then of
+ − 3964 `outline-mode-hook', if they are non-nil." t nil)
+ − 3965
+ − 3966 (autoload 'outline-minor-mode "outline" "\
+ − 3967 Toggle Outline minor mode.
+ − 3968 With arg, turn Outline minor mode on if arg is positive, off otherwise.
+ − 3969 See the command `outline-mode' for more information on this mode." t nil)
+ − 3970
+ − 3971 ;;;***
+ − 3972
+ − 3973 ;;;### (autoloads (pascal-mode) "pascal" "modes/pascal.el")
+ − 3974
+ − 3975 (autoload 'pascal-mode "pascal" "\
+ − 3976 Major mode for editing Pascal code. \\<pascal-mode-map>
+ − 3977 TAB indents for Pascal code. Delete converts tabs to spaces as it moves back.
+ − 3978
+ − 3979 \\[pascal-complete-word] completes the word around current point with respect to position in code
+ − 3980 \\[pascal-show-completions] shows all possible completions at this point.
+ − 3981
+ − 3982 Other useful functions are:
+ − 3983
+ − 3984 \\[pascal-mark-defun] - Mark function.
+ − 3985 \\[pascal-insert-block] - insert begin ... end;
+ − 3986 \\[pascal-star-comment] - insert (* ... *)
+ − 3987 \\[pascal-comment-area] - Put marked area in a comment, fixing nested comments.
+ − 3988 \\[pascal-uncomment-area] - Uncomment an area commented with \\[pascal-comment-area].
+ − 3989 \\[pascal-beg-of-defun] - Move to beginning of current function.
+ − 3990 \\[pascal-end-of-defun] - Move to end of current function.
+ − 3991 \\[pascal-goto-defun] - Goto function prompted for in the minibuffer.
+ − 3992 \\[pascal-outline] - Enter pascal-outline-mode (see also pascal-outline).
+ − 3993
+ − 3994 Variables controlling indentation/edit style:
+ − 3995
+ − 3996 pascal-indent-level (default 3)
+ − 3997 Indentation of Pascal statements with respect to containing block.
+ − 3998 pascal-case-indent (default 2)
+ − 3999 Indentation for case statements.
+ − 4000 pascal-auto-newline (default nil)
+ − 4001 Non-nil means automatically newline after simcolons and the punctation mark
+ − 4002 after an end.
+ − 4003 pascal-tab-always-indent (default t)
+ − 4004 Non-nil means TAB in Pascal mode should always reindent the current line,
+ − 4005 regardless of where in the line point is when the TAB command is used.
+ − 4006 pascal-auto-endcomments (default t)
+ − 4007 Non-nil means a comment { ... } is set after the ends which ends cases and
+ − 4008 functions. The name of the function or case will be set between the braces.
+ − 4009 pascal-auto-lineup (default t)
+ − 4010 List of contexts where auto lineup of :'s or ='s hould be done.
+ − 4011
+ − 4012 See also the user variables pascal-type-keywords, pascal-start-keywords and
+ − 4013 pascal-separator-keywords.
+ − 4014
+ − 4015 Turning on Pascal mode calls the value of the variable pascal-mode-hook with
+ − 4016 no args, if that value is non-nil." t nil)
+ − 4017
+ − 4018 ;;;***
+ − 4019
+ − 4020 ;;;### (autoloads (perl-mode) "perl-mode" "modes/perl-mode.el")
+ − 4021
+ − 4022 (autoload 'perl-mode "perl-mode" "\
+ − 4023 Major mode for editing Perl code.
+ − 4024 Expression and list commands understand all Perl brackets.
+ − 4025 Tab indents for Perl code.
+ − 4026 Comments are delimited with # ... \\n.
+ − 4027 Paragraphs are separated by blank lines only.
+ − 4028 Delete converts tabs to spaces as it moves back.
+ − 4029 \\{perl-mode-map}
+ − 4030 Variables controlling indentation style:
+ − 4031 perl-tab-always-indent
+ − 4032 Non-nil means TAB in Perl mode should always indent the current line,
+ − 4033 regardless of where in the line point is when the TAB command is used.
+ − 4034 perl-tab-to-comment
+ − 4035 Non-nil means that for lines which don't need indenting, TAB will
+ − 4036 either delete an empty comment, indent an existing comment, move
+ − 4037 to end-of-line, or if at end-of-line already, create a new comment.
+ − 4038 perl-nochange
+ − 4039 Lines starting with this regular expression are not auto-indented.
+ − 4040 perl-indent-level
+ − 4041 Indentation of Perl statements within surrounding block.
+ − 4042 The surrounding block's indentation is the indentation
+ − 4043 of the line on which the open-brace appears.
+ − 4044 perl-continued-statement-offset
+ − 4045 Extra indentation given to a substatement, such as the
+ − 4046 then-clause of an if or body of a while.
+ − 4047 perl-continued-brace-offset
+ − 4048 Extra indentation given to a brace that starts a substatement.
+ − 4049 This is in addition to `perl-continued-statement-offset'.
+ − 4050 perl-brace-offset
+ − 4051 Extra indentation for line if it starts with an open brace.
+ − 4052 perl-brace-imaginary-offset
+ − 4053 An open brace following other text is treated as if it were
+ − 4054 this far to the right of the start of its line.
+ − 4055 perl-label-offset
+ − 4056 Extra indentation for line that is a label.
+ − 4057
+ − 4058 Various indentation styles: K&R BSD BLK GNU LW
+ − 4059 perl-indent-level 5 8 0 2 4
+ − 4060 perl-continued-statement-offset 5 8 4 2 4
+ − 4061 perl-continued-brace-offset 0 0 0 0 -4
+ − 4062 perl-brace-offset -5 -8 0 0 0
+ − 4063 perl-brace-imaginary-offset 0 0 4 0 0
+ − 4064 perl-label-offset -5 -8 -2 -2 -2
+ − 4065
+ − 4066 Turning on Perl mode runs the normal hook `perl-mode-hook'." t nil)
+ − 4067
+ − 4068 ;;;***
+ − 4069
+ − 4070 ;;;### (autoloads (picture-mode) "picture" "modes/picture.el")
+ − 4071
+ − 4072 (autoload 'picture-mode "picture" "\
+ − 4073 Switch to Picture mode, in which a quarter-plane screen model is used.
+ − 4074 Printing characters replace instead of inserting themselves with motion
+ − 4075 afterwards settable by these commands:
+ − 4076 C-c < Move left after insertion.
+ − 4077 C-c > Move right after insertion.
+ − 4078 C-c ^ Move up after insertion.
+ − 4079 C-c . Move down after insertion.
+ − 4080 C-c ` Move northwest (nw) after insertion.
+ − 4081 C-c ' Move northeast (ne) after insertion.
+ − 4082 C-c / Move southwest (sw) after insertion.
+ − 4083 C-c \\ Move southeast (se) after insertion.
+ − 4084 The current direction is displayed in the modeline. The initial
+ − 4085 direction is right. Whitespace is inserted and tabs are changed to
+ − 4086 spaces when required by movement. You can move around in the buffer
+ − 4087 with these commands:
+ − 4088 \\[picture-move-down] Move vertically to SAME column in previous line.
+ − 4089 \\[picture-move-up] Move vertically to SAME column in next line.
+ − 4090 \\[picture-end-of-line] Move to column following last non-whitespace character.
+ − 4091 \\[picture-forward-column] Move right inserting spaces if required.
+ − 4092 \\[picture-backward-column] Move left changing tabs to spaces if required.
+ − 4093 C-c C-f Move in direction of current picture motion.
+ − 4094 C-c C-b Move in opposite direction of current picture motion.
+ − 4095 Return Move to beginning of next line.
+ − 4096 You can edit tabular text with these commands:
+ − 4097 M-Tab Move to column beneath (or at) next interesting character.
+ − 4098 `Indents' relative to a previous line.
+ − 4099 Tab Move to next stop in tab stop list.
+ − 4100 C-c Tab Set tab stops according to context of this line.
+ − 4101 With ARG resets tab stops to default (global) value.
+ − 4102 See also documentation of variable picture-tab-chars
+ − 4103 which defines \"interesting character\". You can manually
+ − 4104 change the tab stop list with command \\[edit-tab-stops].
+ − 4105 You can manipulate text with these commands:
+ − 4106 C-d Clear (replace) ARG columns after point without moving.
+ − 4107 C-c C-d Delete char at point - the command normally assigned to C-d.
+ − 4108 \\[picture-backward-clear-column] Clear (replace) ARG columns before point, moving back over them.
+ − 4109 \\[picture-clear-line] Clear ARG lines, advancing over them. The cleared
+ − 4110 text is saved in the kill ring.
+ − 4111 \\[picture-open-line] Open blank line(s) beneath current line.
+ − 4112 You can manipulate rectangles with these commands:
+ − 4113 C-c C-k Clear (or kill) a rectangle and save it.
+ − 4114 C-c C-w Like C-c C-k except rectangle is saved in named register.
+ − 4115 C-c C-y Overlay (or insert) currently saved rectangle at point.
+ − 4116 C-c C-x Like C-c C-y except rectangle is taken from named register.
+ − 4117 \\[copy-rectangle-to-register] Copies a rectangle to a register.
+ − 4118 \\[advertised-undo] Can undo effects of rectangle overlay commands
+ − 4119 commands if invoked soon enough.
+ − 4120 You can return to the previous mode with:
+ − 4121 C-c C-c Which also strips trailing whitespace from every line.
+ − 4122 Stripping is suppressed by supplying an argument.
+ − 4123
+ − 4124 Entry to this mode calls the value of picture-mode-hook if non-nil.
+ − 4125
+ − 4126 Note that Picture mode commands will work outside of Picture mode, but
+ − 4127 they are not defaultly assigned to keys." t nil)
+ − 4128
+ − 4129 (defalias 'edit-picture 'picture-mode)
+ − 4130
+ − 4131 ;;;***
+ − 4132
+ − 4133 ;;;### (autoloads (postscript-mode) "postscript" "modes/postscript.el")
+ − 4134
+ − 4135 (autoload 'postscript-mode "postscript" "\
+ − 4136 Major mode for editing PostScript files.
+ − 4137
+ − 4138 \\[ps-execute-buffer] will send the contents of the buffer to the NeWS
+ − 4139 server using psh(1). \\[ps-execute-region] sends the current region.
+ − 4140 \\[ps-shell] starts an interactive psh(1) window which will be used for
+ − 4141 subsequent \\[ps-execute-buffer] or \\[ps-execute-region] commands.
+ − 4142
+ − 4143 In this mode, TAB and \\[indent-region] attempt to indent code
+ − 4144 based on the position of {}, [], and begin/end pairs. The variable
+ − 4145 ps-indent-level controls the amount of indentation used inside
+ − 4146 arrays and begin/end pairs.
+ − 4147
+ − 4148 \\{ps-mode-map}
+ − 4149
+ − 4150 \\[postscript-mode] calls the value of the variable postscript-mode-hook
+ − 4151 with no args, if that value is non-nil." t nil)
+ − 4152
+ − 4153 ;;;***
+ − 4154
+ − 4155 ;;;### (autoloads (run-prolog inferior-prolog-mode prolog-mode) "prolog" "modes/prolog.el")
+ − 4156
+ − 4157 (autoload 'prolog-mode "prolog" "\
+ − 4158 Major mode for editing Prolog code for Prologs.
+ − 4159 Blank lines and `%%...' separate paragraphs. `%'s start comments.
+ − 4160 Commands:
+ − 4161 \\{prolog-mode-map}
+ − 4162 Entry to this mode calls the value of `prolog-mode-hook'
+ − 4163 if that value is non-nil." t nil)
+ − 4164
+ − 4165 (autoload 'inferior-prolog-mode "prolog" "\
+ − 4166 Major mode for interacting with an inferior Prolog process.
+ − 4167
+ − 4168 The following commands are available:
+ − 4169 \\{inferior-prolog-mode-map}
+ − 4170
+ − 4171 Entry to this mode calls the value of `prolog-mode-hook' with no arguments,
+ − 4172 if that value is non-nil. Likewise with the value of `comint-mode-hook'.
+ − 4173 `prolog-mode-hook' is called after `comint-mode-hook'.
+ − 4174
+ − 4175 You can send text to the inferior Prolog from other buffers
+ − 4176 using the commands `send-region', `send-string' and \\[prolog-consult-region].
+ − 4177
+ − 4178 Commands:
+ − 4179 Tab indents for Prolog; with argument, shifts rest
+ − 4180 of expression rigidly with the current line.
+ − 4181 Paragraphs are separated only by blank lines and '%%'.
+ − 4182 '%'s start comments.
+ − 4183
+ − 4184 Return at end of buffer sends line as input.
+ − 4185 Return not at end copies rest of line to end and sends it.
+ − 4186 \\[comint-kill-input] and \\[backward-kill-word] are kill commands, imitating normal Unix input editing.
+ − 4187 \\[comint-interrupt-subjob] interrupts the shell or its current subjob if any.
+ − 4188 \\[comint-stop-subjob] stops. \\[comint-quit-subjob] sends quit signal." t nil)
+ − 4189
+ − 4190 (autoload 'run-prolog "prolog" "\
+ − 4191 Run an inferior Prolog process, input and output via buffer *prolog*." t nil)
+ − 4192
+ − 4193 ;;;***
+ − 4194
+ − 4195 ;;;### (autoloads (py-shell python-mode) "python-mode" "modes/python-mode.el")
+ − 4196
+ − 4197 (eval-when-compile (condition-case nil (progn (require 'cl) (require 'imenu)) (error nil)))
+ − 4198
+ − 4199 (autoload 'python-mode "python-mode" "\
+ − 4200 Major mode for editing Python files.
+ − 4201 To submit a problem report, enter `\\[py-submit-bug-report]' from a
+ − 4202 `python-mode' buffer. Do `\\[py-describe-mode]' for detailed
+ − 4203 documentation. To see what version of `python-mode' you are running,
+ − 4204 enter `\\[py-version]'.
+ − 4205
+ − 4206 This mode knows about Python indentation, tokens, comments and
+ − 4207 continuation lines. Paragraphs are separated by blank lines only.
+ − 4208
+ − 4209 COMMANDS
+ − 4210 \\{py-mode-map}
+ − 4211 VARIABLES
+ − 4212
+ − 4213 py-indent-offset indentation increment
+ − 4214 py-block-comment-prefix comment string used by comment-region
+ − 4215 py-python-command shell command to invoke Python interpreter
+ − 4216 py-scroll-process-buffer always scroll Python process buffer
+ − 4217 py-temp-directory directory used for temp files (if needed)
+ − 4218 py-beep-if-tab-change ring the bell if tab-width is changed" t nil)
+ − 4219
+ − 4220 (autoload 'py-shell "python-mode" "\
+ − 4221 Start an interactive Python interpreter in another window.
+ − 4222 This is like Shell mode, except that Python is running in the window
+ − 4223 instead of a shell. See the `Interactive Shell' and `Shell Mode'
+ − 4224 sections of the Emacs manual for details, especially for the key
+ − 4225 bindings active in the `*Python*' buffer.
+ − 4226
+ − 4227 See the docs for variable `py-scroll-buffer' for info on scrolling
+ − 4228 behavior in the process window.
+ − 4229
+ − 4230 Warning: Don't use an interactive Python if you change sys.ps1 or
+ − 4231 sys.ps2 from their default values, or if you're running code that
+ − 4232 prints `>>> ' or `... ' at the start of a line. `python-mode' can't
+ − 4233 distinguish your output from Python's output, and assumes that `>>> '
+ − 4234 at the start of a line is a prompt from Python. Similarly, the Emacs
+ − 4235 Shell mode code assumes that both `>>> ' and `... ' at the start of a
+ − 4236 line are Python prompts. Bad things can happen if you fool either
+ − 4237 mode.
+ − 4238
+ − 4239 Warning: If you do any editing *in* the process buffer *while* the
+ − 4240 buffer is accepting output from Python, do NOT attempt to `undo' the
+ − 4241 changes. Some of the output (nowhere near the parts you changed!) may
+ − 4242 be lost if you do. This appears to be an Emacs bug, an unfortunate
+ − 4243 interaction between undo and process filters; the same problem exists in
+ − 4244 non-Python process buffers using the default (Emacs-supplied) process
+ − 4245 filter." t nil)
+ − 4246
+ − 4247 ;;;***
+ − 4248
+ − 4249 ;;;### (autoloads (rexx-mode) "rexx-mode" "modes/rexx-mode.el")
+ − 4250
+ − 4251 (autoload 'rexx-mode "rexx-mode" "\
+ − 4252 Major mode for editing REXX code.
+ − 4253 \\{rexx-mode-map}
+ − 4254
+ − 4255 Variables controlling indentation style:
+ − 4256 rexx-indent
+ − 4257 The basic indentation for do-blocks.
+ − 4258 rexx-end-indent
+ − 4259 The relative offset of the \"end\" statement. 0 places it in the
+ − 4260 same column as the statements of the block. Setting it to the same
+ − 4261 value as rexx-indent places the \"end\" under the do-line.
+ − 4262 rexx-cont-indent
+ − 4263 The indention for lines following \"then\", \"else\" and \",\"
+ − 4264 (continued) lines.
+ − 4265 rexx-tab-always-indent
+ − 4266 Non-nil means TAB in REXX mode should always reindent the current
+ − 4267 line, regardless of where in the line the point is when the TAB
+ − 4268 command is used.
+ − 4269
+ − 4270 If you have set rexx-end-indent to a nonzero value, you probably want to
+ − 4271 remap RETURN to rexx-indent-newline-indent. It makes sure that lines
+ − 4272 indents correctly when you press RETURN.
+ − 4273
+ − 4274 An extensive abbrevation table consisting of all the keywords of REXX are
+ − 4275 supplied. Expanded keywords are converted into upper case making it
+ − 4276 easier to distinguish them. To use this feature the buffer must be in
+ − 4277 abbrev-mode. (See example below.)
+ − 4278
+ − 4279 Turning on REXX mode calls the value of the variable rexx-mode-hook with
+ − 4280 no args, if that value is non-nil.
+ − 4281
+ − 4282 For example:
+ − 4283 \(setq rexx-mode-hook '(lambda ()
+ − 4284 (setq rexx-indent 4)
+ − 4285 (setq rexx-end-indent 4)
+ − 4286 (setq rexx-cont-indent 4)
+ − 4287 (local-set-key \"\\C-m\" 'rexx-indent-newline-indent)
+ − 4288 (abbrev-mode 1)
+ − 4289 ))
+ − 4290
+ − 4291 will make the END aligned with the DO/SELECT. It will indent blocks and
+ − 4292 IF-statenents four steps and make sure that the END jumps into the
+ − 4293 correct position when RETURN is pressed. Finaly it will use the abbrev
+ − 4294 table to convert all REXX keywords into upper case." t nil)
+ − 4295
+ − 4296 ;;;***
+ − 4297
+ − 4298 ;;;### (autoloads (resize-minibuffer-mode) "rsz-minibuf" "modes/rsz-minibuf.el")
+ − 4299
+ − 4300 (defvar resize-minibuffer-mode nil "\
+ − 4301 *If non-`nil', resize the minibuffer so its entire contents are visible.")
+ − 4302
+ − 4303 (defvar resize-minibuffer-window-max-height nil "\
+ − 4304 *Maximum size the minibuffer window is allowed to become.
+ − 4305 If less than 1 or not a number, the limit is the height of the frame in
+ − 4306 which the active minibuffer window resides.")
+ − 4307
+ − 4308 (defvar resize-minibuffer-window-exactly t "\
+ − 4309 *If non-`nil', make minibuffer exactly the size needed to display all its contents.
+ − 4310 Otherwise, the minibuffer window can temporarily increase in size but
+ − 4311 never get smaller while it is active.")
+ − 4312
+ − 4313 (defvar resize-minibuffer-frame nil "\
+ − 4314 *If non-`nil' and the active minibuffer is the sole window in its frame, allow changing the frame height.")
+ − 4315
+ − 4316 (defvar resize-minibuffer-frame-max-height nil "\
+ − 4317 *Maximum size the minibuffer frame is allowed to become.
+ − 4318 If less than 1 or not a number, there is no limit.")
+ − 4319
+ − 4320 (defvar resize-minibuffer-frame-exactly nil "\
+ − 4321 *If non-`nil', make minibuffer frame exactly the size needed to display all its contents.
+ − 4322 Otherwise, the minibuffer frame can temporarily increase in size but
+ − 4323 never get smaller while it is active.")
+ − 4324
+ − 4325 (autoload 'resize-minibuffer-mode "rsz-minibuf" "\
+ − 4326 Enable or disable resize-minibuffer mode.
+ − 4327 A negative prefix argument disables this mode. A positive argument or
+ − 4328 argument of 0 enables it.
+ − 4329
+ − 4330 When this minor mode is enabled, the minibuffer is dynamically resized to
+ − 4331 contain the entire region of text put in it as you type.
+ − 4332
+ − 4333 The variable `resize-minibuffer-mode' is set to t or nil depending on
+ − 4334 whether this mode is active or not.
+ − 4335
+ − 4336 The maximum height to which the minibuffer can grow is controlled by the
+ − 4337 variable `resize-minibuffer-window-max-height'.
+ − 4338
+ − 4339 The variable `resize-minibuffer-window-exactly' determines whether the
+ − 4340 minibuffer window should ever be shrunk to make it no larger than needed to
+ − 4341 display its contents.
+ − 4342
+ − 4343 When using a window system, it is possible for a minibuffer to tbe the sole
+ − 4344 window in a frame. Since that window is already its maximum size, the only
+ − 4345 way to make more text visible at once is to increase the size of the frame.
+ − 4346 The variable `resize-minibuffer-frame' controls whether this should be
+ − 4347 done. The variables `resize-minibuffer-frame-max-height' and
+ − 4348 `resize-minibuffer-frame-exactly' are analogous to their window
+ − 4349 counterparts." t nil)
+ − 4350
+ − 4351 ;;;***
+ − 4352
+ − 4353 ;;;### (autoloads (scheme-mode) "scheme" "modes/scheme.el")
+ − 4354
+ − 4355 (autoload 'scheme-mode "scheme" "\
+ − 4356 Major mode for editing Scheme code.
+ − 4357 Editing commands are similar to those of lisp-mode.
+ − 4358
+ − 4359 In addition, if an inferior Scheme process is running, some additional
+ − 4360 commands will be defined, for evaluating expressions and controlling
+ − 4361 the interpreter, and the state of the process will be displayed in the
+ − 4362 modeline of all Scheme buffers. The names of commands that interact
+ − 4363 with the Scheme process start with \"xscheme-\". For more information
+ − 4364 see the documentation for xscheme-interaction-mode.
+ − 4365
+ − 4366 Commands:
+ − 4367 Delete converts tabs to spaces as it moves back.
+ − 4368 Blank lines separate paragraphs. Semicolons start comments.
+ − 4369 \\{scheme-mode-map}
+ − 4370 Entry to this mode calls the value of scheme-mode-hook
+ − 4371 if that value is non-nil." t nil)
+ − 4372
+ − 4373 ;;;***
+ − 4374
+ − 4375 ;;;### (autoloads (scribe-mode) "scribe" "modes/scribe.el")
+ − 4376
+ − 4377 (autoload 'scribe-mode "scribe" "\
+ − 4378 Major mode for editing files of Scribe (a text formatter) source.
+ − 4379 Scribe-mode is similar text-mode, with a few extra commands added.
+ − 4380 \\{scribe-mode-map}
+ − 4381
+ − 4382 Interesting variables:
+ − 4383
+ − 4384 scribe-fancy-paragraphs
+ − 4385 Non-nil makes Scribe mode use a different style of paragraph separation.
+ − 4386
+ − 4387 scribe-electric-quote
+ − 4388 Non-nil makes insert of double quote use `` or '' depending on context.
+ − 4389
+ − 4390 scribe-electric-parenthesis
+ − 4391 Non-nil makes an open-parenthesis char (one of `([<{')
+ − 4392 automatically insert its close if typed after an @Command form." t nil)
+ − 4393
+ − 4394 ;;;***
+ − 4395
+ − 4396 ;;;### (autoloads (mail-other-frame mail-other-window mail mail-mode) "sendmail" "modes/sendmail.el")
+ − 4397
+ − 4398 (defvar mail-from-style 'angles "\
+ − 4399 *Specifies how \"From:\" fields look.
+ − 4400
+ − 4401 If `nil', they contain just the return address like:
+ − 4402 king@grassland.com
+ − 4403 If `parens', they look like:
+ − 4404 king@grassland.com (Elvis Parsley)
+ − 4405 If `angles', they look like:
+ − 4406 Elvis Parsley <king@grassland.com>")
+ − 4407
+ − 4408 (defvar mail-self-blind nil "\
+ − 4409 Non-nil means insert BCC to self in messages to be sent.
+ − 4410 This is done when the message is initialized,
+ − 4411 so you can remove or alter the BCC field to override the default.")
+ − 4412
+ − 4413 (defvar mail-interactive nil "\
+ − 4414 Non-nil means when sending a message wait for and display errors.
+ − 4415 nil means let mailer mail back a message to report errors.")
+ − 4416
+ − 4417 (defvar mail-dir nil "\
+ − 4418 *Default directory for saving messages.")
+ − 4419
+ − 4420 (defvar rmail-ignored-headers (purecopy (concat "^\\(" (mapconcat 'identity '("Sender:" "References:" "Return-Path:" "Received:" "[^: \n]*Message-ID:" "Errors-To:" "Path:" "Expires:" "Xref:" "Lines:" "Approved:" "Distribution:" "Content-Length:" "Mime-Version:" "Content-Type:" "Content-Transfer-Encoding:" "X400-Received:" "X400-Originator:" "X400-Mts-Identifier:" "X400-Content-Type:" "Content-Identifier:" "Status:" "Summary-Line:" "X-Attribution:" "Via:" "Sent-Via:" "Mail-From:" "Origin:" "Comments:" "Originator:" "NF-ID:" "NF-From:" "Posting-Version:" "Posted:" "Posted-Date:" "Date-Received:" "Relay-Version:" "Article-I\\.D\\.:" "NNTP-Version:" "NNTP-Posting-Host:" "X-Mailer:" "X-Newsreader:" "News-Software:" "X-Received:" "X-References:" "X-Envelope-To:" "X-VMS-" "Remailed-" "X-Plantation:" "X-Windows:" "X-Pgp-") "\\|") "\\)")) "\
+ − 4421 *Gubbish header fields one would rather not see.")
+ − 4422
+ − 4423 (defvar mail-yank-ignored-headers (purecopy (concat rmail-ignored-headers "\\|" "^\\(" (mapconcat 'identity '("Resent-To:" "Resent-By:" "Resent-CC:" "To:" "Subject:" "In-Reply-To:") "\\|") "\\)")) "\
+ − 4424 Delete these headers from old message when it's inserted in a reply.")
+ − 4425
+ − 4426 (defvar send-mail-function 'sendmail-send-it "\
+ − 4427 Function to call to send the current buffer as mail.
+ − 4428 The headers should be delimited by a line whose contents
+ − 4429 match the variable `mail-header-separator'.")
+ − 4430
+ − 4431 (defvar mail-header-separator (purecopy "--text follows this line--") "\
+ − 4432 *Line used to separate headers from text in messages being composed.")
+ − 4433
+ − 4434 (defvar mail-archive-file-name nil "\
+ − 4435 *Name of file to write all outgoing messages in, or nil for none.
+ − 4436 This can be an inbox file or an Rmail file.")
+ − 4437
+ − 4438 (defvar mail-default-reply-to nil "\
+ − 4439 *Address to insert as default Reply-to field of outgoing messages.
+ − 4440 If nil, it will be initialized from the REPLYTO environment variable
+ − 4441 when you first send mail.")
+ − 4442
+ − 4443 (defvar mail-alias-file nil "\
+ − 4444 *If non-nil, the name of a file to use instead of `/usr/lib/aliases'.
+ − 4445 This file defines aliases to be expanded by the mailer; this is a different
+ − 4446 feature from that of defining aliases in `.mailrc' to be expanded in Emacs.
+ − 4447 This variable has no effect unless your system uses sendmail as its mailer.")
+ − 4448
+ − 4449 (defvar mail-yank-prefix "> " "\
+ − 4450 *Prefix insert on lines of yanked message being replied to.
+ − 4451 nil means use indentation.")
+ − 4452
+ − 4453 (defvar mail-signature nil "\
+ − 4454 *Text inserted at end of mail buffer when a message is initialized.
+ − 4455 If t, it means to insert the contents of the file `mail-signature-file'.")
+ − 4456
+ − 4457 (autoload 'mail-mode "sendmail" "\
+ − 4458 Major mode for editing mail to be sent.
+ − 4459 Like Text Mode but with these additional commands:
+ − 4460 C-c C-s mail-send (send the message) C-c C-c mail-send-and-exit
+ − 4461 C-c C-f move to a header field (and create it if there isn't):
+ − 4462 C-c C-f C-t move to To: C-c C-f C-s move to Subj:
+ − 4463 C-c C-f C-b move to BCC: C-c C-f C-c move to CC:
+ − 4464 C-c C-f C-f move to FCC: C-c C-f C-r move to Reply-To:
+ − 4465 C-c C-t mail-text (move to beginning of message text).
+ − 4466 C-c C-w mail-signature (insert `mail-signature-file' file).
+ − 4467 C-c C-y mail-yank-original (insert current message, in Rmail).
+ − 4468 C-c C-q mail-fill-yanked-message (fill what was yanked).
+ − 4469 C-c C-v mail-sent-via (add a sent-via field for each To or CC)." t nil)
+ − 4470
+ − 4471 (autoload 'mail "sendmail" "\
+ − 4472 Edit a message to be sent. Prefix arg means resume editing (don't erase).
+ − 4473 When this function returns, the buffer `*mail*' is selected.
+ − 4474 The value is t if the message was newly initialized; otherwise, nil.
+ − 4475
+ − 4476 Optionally, the signature file `mail-signature-file' can be inserted at the
+ − 4477 end; see the variable `mail-signature'.
+ − 4478
+ − 4479 \\<mail-mode-map>
+ − 4480 While editing message, type \\[mail-send-and-exit] to send the message and exit.
+ − 4481
+ − 4482 Various special commands starting with C-c are available in sendmail mode
+ − 4483 to move to message header fields:
+ − 4484 \\{mail-mode-map}
+ − 4485
+ − 4486 The variable `mail-signature' controls whether the signature file
+ − 4487 `mail-signature-file' is inserted immediately.
+ − 4488
+ − 4489 If `mail-signature' is nil, use \\[mail-signature] to insert the
+ − 4490 signature in `mail-signature-file'.
+ − 4491
+ − 4492 If `mail-self-blind' is non-nil, a BCC to yourself is inserted
+ − 4493 when the message is initialized.
+ − 4494
+ − 4495 If `mail-default-reply-to' is non-nil, it should be an address (a string);
+ − 4496 a Reply-to: field with that address is inserted.
+ − 4497
+ − 4498 If `mail-archive-file-name' is non-nil, an FCC field with that file name
+ − 4499 is inserted.
+ − 4500
+ − 4501 The normal hook `mail-setup-hook' is run after the message is
+ − 4502 initialized. It can add more default fields to the message.
+ − 4503
+ − 4504 When calling from a program, the first argument if non-nil says
+ − 4505 not to erase the existing contents of the `*mail*' buffer.
+ − 4506
+ − 4507 The second through fifth arguments,
+ − 4508 TO, SUBJECT, IN-REPLY-TO and CC, specify if non-nil
+ − 4509 the initial contents of those header fields.
+ − 4510 These arguments should not have final newlines.
+ − 4511 The sixth argument REPLYBUFFER is a buffer whose contents
+ − 4512 should be yanked if the user types C-c C-y.
+ − 4513 The seventh argument ACTIONS is a list of actions to take
+ − 4514 if/when the message is sent. Each action looks like (FUNCTION . ARGS);
+ − 4515 when the message is sent, we apply FUNCTION to ARGS.
+ − 4516 This is how Rmail arranges to mark messages `answered'." t nil)
+ − 4517
+ − 4518 (autoload 'mail-other-window "sendmail" "\
+ − 4519 Like `mail' command, but display mail buffer in another window." t nil)
+ − 4520
+ − 4521 (autoload 'mail-other-frame "sendmail" "\
+ − 4522 Like `mail' command, but display mail buffer in another frame." t nil)
+ − 4523
+ − 4524 (define-key ctl-x-map "m" 'mail)
+ − 4525
+ − 4526 (define-key ctl-x-4-map "m" 'mail-other-window)
+ − 4527
+ − 4528 (define-key ctl-x-5-map "m" 'mail-other-frame)
+ − 4529
+ − 4530 (add-hook 'same-window-buffer-names "*mail*")
+ − 4531
+ − 4532 ;;;***
+ − 4533
+ − 4534 ;;;### (autoloads (sh-mode) "sh-script" "modes/sh-script.el")
+ − 4535
+ − 4536 (put 'sh-mode 'mode-class 'special)
+ − 4537
+ − 4538 (autoload 'sh-mode "sh-script" "\
+ − 4539 Major mode for editing shell scripts.
+ − 4540 This mode works for many shells, since they all have roughly the same syntax,
+ − 4541 as far as commands, arguments, variables, pipes, comments etc. are concerned.
+ − 4542 Unless the file's magic number indicates the shell, your usual shell is
+ − 4543 assumed. Since filenames rarely give a clue, they are not further analyzed.
+ − 4544
+ − 4545 This mode adapts to the variations between shells (see `sh-set-shell') by
+ − 4546 means of an inheritance based feature lookup (see `sh-feature'). This
+ − 4547 mechanism applies to all variables (including skeletons) that pertain to
+ − 4548 shell-specific features.
+ − 4549
+ − 4550 The default style of this mode is that of Rosenblatt's Korn shell book.
+ − 4551 The syntax of the statements varies with the shell being used. The
+ − 4552 following commands are available, based on the current shell's syntax:
+ − 4553
+ − 4554 \\[sh-case] case statement
+ − 4555 \\[sh-for] for loop
+ − 4556 \\[sh-function] function definition
+ − 4557 \\[sh-if] if statement
+ − 4558 \\[sh-indexed-loop] indexed loop from 1 to n
+ − 4559 \\[sh-while-getopts] while getopts loop
+ − 4560 \\[sh-repeat] repeat loop
+ − 4561 \\[sh-select] select loop
+ − 4562 \\[sh-until] until loop
+ − 4563 \\[sh-while] while loop
+ − 4564
+ − 4565 \\[backward-delete-char-untabify] Delete backward one position, even if it was a tab.
+ − 4566 \\[sh-newline-and-indent] Delete unquoted space and indent new line same as this one.
+ − 4567 \\[sh-end-of-command] Go to end of successive commands.
+ − 4568 \\[sh-beginning-of-command] Go to beginning of successive commands.
+ − 4569 \\[sh-set-shell] Set this buffer's shell, and maybe its magic number.
+ − 4570 \\[sh-execute-region] Have optional header and region be executed in a subshell.
+ − 4571
+ − 4572 \\[sh-maybe-here-document] Without prefix, following an unquoted < inserts here document.
+ − 4573 {, (, [, ', \", `
+ − 4574 Unless quoted with \\, insert the pairs {}, (), [], or '', \"\", ``.
+ − 4575
+ − 4576 If you generally program a shell different from your login shell you can
+ − 4577 set `sh-shell-file' accordingly. If your shell's file name doesn't correctly
+ − 4578 indicate what shell it is use `sh-alias-alist' to translate.
+ − 4579
+ − 4580 If your shell gives error messages with line numbers, you can use \\[executable-interpret]
+ − 4581 with your script for an edit-interpret-debug cycle." t nil)
+ − 4582
+ − 4583 (defalias 'shell-script-mode 'sh-mode)
+ − 4584
+ − 4585 ;;;***
+ − 4586
+ − 4587 ;;;### (autoloads (tcl-help-on-word inferior-tcl tcl-mode) "tcl" "modes/tcl.el")
+ − 4588
+ − 4589 (autoload 'tcl-mode "tcl" "\
+ − 4590 Major mode for editing Tcl code.
+ − 4591 Expression and list commands understand all Tcl brackets.
+ − 4592 Tab indents for Tcl code.
+ − 4593 Paragraphs are separated by blank lines only.
+ − 4594 Delete converts tabs to spaces as it moves back.
+ − 4595
+ − 4596 Variables controlling indentation style:
+ − 4597 tcl-indent-level
+ − 4598 Indentation of Tcl statements within surrounding block.
+ − 4599 tcl-continued-indent-level
+ − 4600 Indentation of continuation line relative to first line of command.
+ − 4601
+ − 4602 Variables controlling user interaction with mode (see variable
+ − 4603 documentation for details):
+ − 4604 tcl-tab-always-indent
+ − 4605 Controls action of TAB key.
+ − 4606 tcl-auto-newline
+ − 4607 Non-nil means automatically newline before and after braces, brackets,
+ − 4608 and semicolons inserted in Tcl code.
+ − 4609 tcl-electric-hash-style
+ − 4610 Controls action of `#' key.
+ − 4611 tcl-use-hairy-comment-detector
+ − 4612 If t, use more complicated, but slower, comment detector.
+ − 4613 This variable is only used in GNU Emacs 19.
+ − 4614 tcl-use-smart-word-finder
+ − 4615 If not nil, use a smarter, Tcl-specific way to find the current
+ − 4616 word when looking up help on a Tcl command.
+ − 4617
+ − 4618 Turning on Tcl mode calls the value of the variable `tcl-mode-hook'
+ − 4619 with no args, if that value is non-nil. Read the documentation for
+ − 4620 `tcl-mode-hook' to see what kinds of interesting hook functions
+ − 4621 already exist.
+ − 4622
+ − 4623 Commands:
+ − 4624 \\{tcl-mode-map}" t nil)
+ − 4625
+ − 4626 (autoload 'inferior-tcl "tcl" "\
+ − 4627 Run inferior Tcl process.
+ − 4628 Prefix arg means enter program name interactively.
+ − 4629 See documentation for function `inferior-tcl-mode' for more information." t nil)
+ − 4630
+ − 4631 (autoload 'tcl-help-on-word "tcl" "\
+ − 4632 Get help on Tcl command. Default is word at point.
+ − 4633 Prefix argument means invert sense of `tcl-use-smart-word-finder'." t nil)
+ − 4634
+ − 4635 ;;;***
+ − 4636
+ − 4637 ;;;### (autoloads (latex-mode plain-tex-mode tex-mode) "tex-mode" "modes/tex-mode.el")
+ − 4638
+ − 4639 (autoload 'tex-mode "tex-mode" "\
+ − 4640 Major mode for editing files of input for TeX, LaTeX, or SliTeX.
+ − 4641 Tries to determine (by looking at the beginning of the file) whether
+ − 4642 this file is for plain TeX, LaTeX, or SliTeX and calls plain-tex-mode,
+ − 4643 latex-mode, or slitex-mode, respectively. If it cannot be determined,
+ − 4644 such as if there are no commands in the file, the value of tex-default-mode
+ − 4645 is used." t nil)
+ − 4646
+ − 4647 (fset 'TeX-mode 'tex-mode)
+ − 4648
+ − 4649 (fset 'LaTeX-mode 'latex-mode)
+ − 4650
+ − 4651 (autoload 'plain-tex-mode "tex-mode" "\
+ − 4652 Major mode for editing files of input for plain TeX.
+ − 4653 Makes $ and } display the characters they match.
+ − 4654 Makes \" insert `` when it seems to be the beginning of a quotation,
+ − 4655 and '' when it appears to be the end; it inserts \" only after a \\.
+ − 4656
+ − 4657 Use \\[tex-region] to run TeX on the current region, plus a \"header\"
+ − 4658 copied from the top of the file (containing macro definitions, etc.),
+ − 4659 running TeX under a special subshell. \\[tex-buffer] does the whole buffer.
+ − 4660 \\[tex-file] saves the buffer and then processes the file.
+ − 4661 \\[tex-print] prints the .dvi file made by any of these.
+ − 4662 \\[tex-view] previews the .dvi file made by any of these.
+ − 4663 \\[tex-bibtex-file] runs bibtex on the file of the current buffer.
+ − 4664
+ − 4665 Use \\[validate-tex-buffer] to check buffer for paragraphs containing
+ − 4666 mismatched $'s or braces.
+ − 4667
+ − 4668 Special commands:
+ − 4669 \\{tex-mode-map}
+ − 4670
+ − 4671 Mode variables:
+ − 4672 tex-run-command
+ − 4673 Command string used by \\[tex-region] or \\[tex-buffer].
+ − 4674 tex-directory
+ − 4675 Directory in which to create temporary files for TeX jobs
+ − 4676 run by \\[tex-region] or \\[tex-buffer].
+ − 4677 tex-dvi-print-command
+ − 4678 Command string used by \\[tex-print] to print a .dvi file.
+ − 4679 tex-alt-dvi-print-command
+ − 4680 Alternative command string used by \\[tex-print] (when given a prefix
+ − 4681 argument) to print a .dvi file.
+ − 4682 tex-dvi-view-command
+ − 4683 Command string used by \\[tex-view] to preview a .dvi file.
+ − 4684 tex-show-queue-command
+ − 4685 Command string used by \\[tex-show-print-queue] to show the print
+ − 4686 queue that \\[tex-print] put your job on.
+ − 4687
+ − 4688 Entering Plain-tex mode calls the value of text-mode-hook, then the value of
+ − 4689 tex-mode-hook, and then the value of plain-tex-mode-hook. When the special
+ − 4690 subshell is initiated, the value of tex-shell-hook is called." t nil)
+ − 4691
+ − 4692 (fset 'plain-TeX-mode 'plain-tex-mode)
+ − 4693
+ − 4694 (autoload 'latex-mode "tex-mode" "\
+ − 4695 Major mode for editing files of input for LaTeX.
+ − 4696 Makes $ and } display the characters they match.
+ − 4697 Makes \" insert `` when it seems to be the beginning of a quotation,
+ − 4698 and '' when it appears to be the end; it inserts \" only after a \\.
+ − 4699
+ − 4700 Use \\[tex-region] to run LaTeX on the current region, plus the preamble
+ − 4701 copied from the top of the file (containing \\documentstyle, etc.),
+ − 4702 running LaTeX under a special subshell. \\[tex-buffer] does the whole buffer.
+ − 4703 \\[tex-file] saves the buffer and then processes the file.
+ − 4704 \\[tex-print] prints the .dvi file made by any of these.
+ − 4705 \\[tex-view] previews the .dvi file made by any of these.
+ − 4706 \\[tex-bibtex-file] runs bibtex on the file of the current buffer.
+ − 4707
+ − 4708 Use \\[validate-tex-buffer] to check buffer for paragraphs containing
+ − 4709 mismatched $'s or braces.
+ − 4710
+ − 4711 Special commands:
+ − 4712 \\{tex-mode-map}
+ − 4713
+ − 4714 Mode variables:
+ − 4715 latex-run-command
+ − 4716 Command string used by \\[tex-region] or \\[tex-buffer].
+ − 4717 tex-directory
+ − 4718 Directory in which to create temporary files for LaTeX jobs
+ − 4719 run by \\[tex-region] or \\[tex-buffer].
+ − 4720 tex-dvi-print-command
+ − 4721 Command string used by \\[tex-print] to print a .dvi file.
+ − 4722 tex-alt-dvi-print-command
+ − 4723 Alternative command string used by \\[tex-print] (when given a prefix
+ − 4724 argument) to print a .dvi file.
+ − 4725 tex-dvi-view-command
+ − 4726 Command string used by \\[tex-view] to preview a .dvi file.
+ − 4727 tex-show-queue-command
+ − 4728 Command string used by \\[tex-show-print-queue] to show the print
+ − 4729 queue that \\[tex-print] put your job on.
+ − 4730
+ − 4731 Entering Latex mode calls the value of text-mode-hook, then the value of
+ − 4732 tex-mode-hook, and then the value of latex-mode-hook. When the special
+ − 4733 subshell is initiated, the value of tex-shell-hook is called." t nil)
+ − 4734
+ − 4735 ;;;***
+ − 4736
+ − 4737 ;;;### (autoloads (texinfo-mode) "texinfo" "modes/texinfo.el")
+ − 4738
+ − 4739 (autoload 'texinfo-mode "texinfo" "\
+ − 4740 Major mode for editing Texinfo files.
+ − 4741
+ − 4742 It has these extra commands:
+ − 4743 \\{texinfo-mode-map}
+ − 4744
+ − 4745 These are files that are used as input for TeX to make printed manuals
+ − 4746 and also to be turned into Info files with \\[makeinfo-buffer] or
+ − 4747 the `makeinfo' program. These files must be written in a very restricted and
+ − 4748 modified version of TeX input format.
+ − 4749
+ − 4750 Editing commands are like text-mode except that the syntax table is
+ − 4751 set up so expression commands skip Texinfo bracket groups. To see
+ − 4752 what the Info version of a region of the Texinfo file will look like,
+ − 4753 use \\[makeinfo-region], which runs `makeinfo' on the current region.
+ − 4754
+ − 4755 You can show the structure of a Texinfo file with \\[texinfo-show-structure].
+ − 4756 This command shows the structure of a Texinfo file by listing the
+ − 4757 lines with the @-sign commands for @chapter, @section, and the like.
+ − 4758 These lines are displayed in another window called the *Occur* window.
+ − 4759 In that window, you can position the cursor over one of the lines and
+ − 4760 use \\[occur-mode-goto-occurrence], to jump to the corresponding spot
+ − 4761 in the Texinfo file.
+ − 4762
+ − 4763 In addition, Texinfo mode provides commands that insert various
+ − 4764 frequently used @-sign commands into the buffer. You can use these
+ − 4765 commands to save keystrokes. And you can insert balanced braces with
+ − 4766 \\[texinfo-insert-braces] and later use the command \\[up-list] to
+ − 4767 move forward past the closing brace.
+ − 4768
+ − 4769 Also, Texinfo mode provides functions for automatically creating or
+ − 4770 updating menus and node pointers. These functions
+ − 4771
+ − 4772 * insert the `Next', `Previous' and `Up' pointers of a node,
+ − 4773 * insert or update the menu for a section, and
+ − 4774 * create a master menu for a Texinfo source file.
+ − 4775
+ − 4776 Here are the functions:
+ − 4777
+ − 4778 texinfo-update-node \\[texinfo-update-node]
+ − 4779 texinfo-every-node-update \\[texinfo-every-node-update]
+ − 4780 texinfo-sequential-node-update
+ − 4781
+ − 4782 texinfo-make-menu \\[texinfo-make-menu]
+ − 4783 texinfo-all-menus-update \\[texinfo-all-menus-update]
+ − 4784 texinfo-master-menu
+ − 4785
+ − 4786 texinfo-indent-menu-description (column &optional region-p)
+ − 4787
+ − 4788 The `texinfo-column-for-description' variable specifies the column to
+ − 4789 which menu descriptions are indented.
+ − 4790
+ − 4791 Passed an argument (a prefix argument, if interactive), the
+ − 4792 `texinfo-update-node' and `texinfo-make-menu' functions do their jobs
+ − 4793 in the region.
+ − 4794
+ − 4795 To use the updating commands, you must structure your Texinfo file
+ − 4796 hierarchically, such that each `@node' line, with the exception of the
+ − 4797 Top node, is accompanied by some kind of section line, such as an
+ − 4798 `@chapter' or `@section' line.
+ − 4799
+ − 4800 If the file has a `top' node, it must be called `top' or `Top' and
+ − 4801 be the first node in the file.
+ − 4802
+ − 4803 Entering Texinfo mode calls the value of text-mode-hook, and then the
+ − 4804 value of texinfo-mode-hook." t nil)
+ − 4805
+ − 4806 ;;;***
+ − 4807
+ − 4808 ;;;### (autoloads (tc-recenter tc-scroll-down tc-scroll-up tc-scroll-line tc-associated-buffer tc-merge tc-dissociate tc-split tc-associate-buffer tc-two-columns) "two-column" "modes/two-column.el")
+ − 4809
+ − 4810 (defvar tc-mode-map nil "\
+ − 4811 Keymap for commands for two-column mode.")
+ − 4812
+ − 4813 (if tc-mode-map nil (setq tc-mode-map (make-sparse-keymap)) (define-key tc-mode-map "1" 'tc-merge) (define-key tc-mode-map "2" 'tc-two-columns) (define-key tc-mode-map "b" 'tc-associate-buffer) (define-key tc-mode-map "d" 'tc-dissociate) (define-key tc-mode-map "\^L" 'tc-recenter) (define-key tc-mode-map "o" 'tc-associated-buffer) (define-key tc-mode-map "s" 'tc-split) (define-key tc-mode-map "{" 'shrink-window-horizontally) (define-key tc-mode-map "}" 'enlarge-window-horizontally) (define-key tc-mode-map " " 'tc-scroll-up) (define-key tc-mode-map "" 'tc-scroll-down) (define-key tc-mode-map "
" 'tc-scroll-line))
+ − 4814
+ − 4815 (global-set-key "6" tc-mode-map)
+ − 4816
+ − 4817 (defvar tc-other nil "\
+ − 4818 Marker to the associated buffer, if non-nil.")
+ − 4819
+ − 4820 (make-variable-buffer-local 'tc-other)
+ − 4821
+ − 4822 (put 'tc-other 'permanent-local t)
+ − 4823
+ − 4824 (autoload 'tc-two-columns "two-column" "\
+ − 4825 Split current window vertically for two-column editing.
+ − 4826
+ − 4827 When called the first time, associates a buffer with the current
+ − 4828 buffer. Both buffers are put in two-column minor mode and
+ − 4829 tc-mode-hook gets called on both. These buffers remember
+ − 4830 about one another, even when renamed.
+ − 4831
+ − 4832 When called again, restores the screen layout with the current buffer
+ − 4833 first and the associated buffer to it's right.
+ − 4834
+ − 4835 If you include long lines, i.e which will span both columns (eg.
+ − 4836 source code), they should be in what will be the first column, with
+ − 4837 the associated buffer having empty lines next to them.
+ − 4838
+ − 4839 You have the following commands at your disposal:
+ − 4840
+ − 4841 \\[tc-two-columns] Rearrange screen
+ − 4842 \\[tc-associate-buffer] Reassociate buffer after changing major mode
+ − 4843 \\[tc-scroll-up] Scroll both buffers up by a screenfull
+ − 4844 \\[tc-scroll-down] Scroll both buffers down by a screenful
+ − 4845 \\[tc-scroll-line] Scroll both buffers up by one or more lines
+ − 4846 \\[tc-recenter] Recenter and realign other buffer
+ − 4847 \\[shrink-window-horizontally], \\[enlarge-window-horizontally] Shrink, enlarge current column
+ − 4848 \\[tc-associated-buffer] Switch to associated buffer
+ − 4849 \\[tc-merge] Merge both buffers
+ − 4850
+ − 4851 These keybindings can be customized in your ~/.emacs by `tc-prefix'
+ − 4852 and `tc-mode-map'.
+ − 4853
+ − 4854 The appearance of the screen can be customized by the variables
+ − 4855 `tc-window-width', `tc-beyond-fill-column',
+ − 4856 `tc-mode-line-format' and `truncate-partial-width-windows'." t nil)
+ − 4857
+ − 4858 (add-minor-mode 'tc-other " 2C" nil nil 'tc-two-columns)
+ − 4859
+ − 4860 (autoload 'tc-associate-buffer "two-column" "\
+ − 4861 Associate another buffer with this one in two-column minor mode.
+ − 4862 Can also be used to associate a just previously visited file, by
+ − 4863 accepting the proposed default buffer.
+ − 4864
+ − 4865 See \\[tc-two-columns] and `lisp/two-column.el' for further details." t nil)
+ − 4866
+ − 4867 (autoload 'tc-split "two-column" "\
+ − 4868 Unmerge a two-column text into two buffers in two-column minor mode.
+ − 4869 The text is unmerged at the cursor's column which becomes the local
+ − 4870 value of `tc-window-width'. Only lines that have the ARG same
+ − 4871 preceding characters at that column get split. The ARG preceding
+ − 4872 characters without any leading whitespace become the local value for
+ − 4873 `tc-separator'. This way lines that continue across both
+ − 4874 columns remain untouched in the first buffer.
+ − 4875
+ − 4876 This function can be used with a prototype line, to set up things as
+ − 4877 you like them. You write the first line of each column with the
+ − 4878 separator you like and then unmerge that line. E.g.:
+ − 4879
+ − 4880 First column's text sSs Second columns text
+ − 4881 \\___/\\
+ − 4882 / \\
+ − 4883 5 character Separator You type M-5 \\[tc-split] with the point here
+ − 4884
+ − 4885 See \\[tc-two-columns] and `lisp/two-column.el' for further details." t nil)
+ − 4886
+ − 4887 (autoload 'tc-dissociate "two-column" "\
+ − 4888 Turn off two-column minor mode in current and associated buffer.
+ − 4889 If the associated buffer is unmodified and empty, it is killed." t nil)
+ − 4890
+ − 4891 (autoload 'tc-merge "two-column" "\
+ − 4892 Merges the associated buffer with the current buffer.
+ − 4893 They get merged at the column, which is the value of
+ − 4894 `tc-window-width', i.e. usually at the vertical window
+ − 4895 separator. This separator gets replaced with white space. Beyond
+ − 4896 that the value of gets inserted on merged lines. The two columns are
+ − 4897 thus pasted side by side, in a single text. If the other buffer is
+ − 4898 not displayed to the left of this one, then this one becomes the left
+ − 4899 column.
+ − 4900
+ − 4901 If you want `tc-separator' on empty lines in the second column,
+ − 4902 you should put just one space in them. In the final result, you can strip
+ − 4903 off trailing spaces with \\[beginning-of-buffer] \\[replace-regexp] [ SPC TAB ] + $ RET RET" t nil)
+ − 4904
+ − 4905 (autoload 'tc-associated-buffer "two-column" "\
+ − 4906 Switch to associated buffer." t nil)
+ − 4907
+ − 4908 (autoload 'tc-scroll-line "two-column" "\
+ − 4909 Scroll current window upward by ARG lines.
+ − 4910 The associated window gets scrolled to the same line." t nil)
+ − 4911
+ − 4912 (autoload 'tc-scroll-up "two-column" "\
+ − 4913 Scroll current window upward by ARG screens.
+ − 4914 The associated window gets scrolled to the same line." t nil)
+ − 4915
+ − 4916 (autoload 'tc-scroll-down "two-column" "\
+ − 4917 Scroll current window downward by ARG screens.
+ − 4918 The associated window gets scrolled to the same line." t nil)
+ − 4919
+ − 4920 (autoload 'tc-recenter "two-column" "\
+ − 4921 Center point in window. With ARG, put point on line ARG.
+ − 4922 This counts from bottom if ARG is negative. The associated window
+ − 4923 gets scrolled to the same line." t nil)
+ − 4924
+ − 4925 ;;;***
+ − 4926
+ − 4927 ;;;### (autoloads (vhdl-mode) "vhdl-mode" "modes/vhdl-mode.el")
+ − 4928
+ − 4929 (autoload 'vhdl-mode "vhdl-mode" "\
+ − 4930 Major mode for editing VHDL code.
+ − 4931 vhdl-mode $Revision: 1.3 $
+ − 4932 To submit a problem report, enter `\\[vhdl-submit-bug-report]' from a
+ − 4933 vhdl-mode buffer. This automatically sets up a mail buffer with version
+ − 4934 information already added. You just need to add a description of the
+ − 4935 problem, including a reproducable test case and send the message.
+ − 4936
+ − 4937 Note that the details of configuring vhdl-mode will soon be moved to the
+ − 4938 accompanying texinfo manual. Until then, please read the README file
+ − 4939 that came with the vhdl-mode distribution.
+ − 4940
+ − 4941 The hook variable `vhdl-mode-hook' is run with no args, if that value is
+ − 4942 bound and has a non-nil value.
+ − 4943
+ − 4944 Key bindings:
+ − 4945 \\{vhdl-mode-map}" t nil)
+ − 4946
+ − 4947 ;;;***
+ − 4948
+ − 4949 ;;;### (autoloads (auto-view-mode view-major-mode view-mode view-minor-mode view-buffer-other-window view-file-other-window view-buffer view-file) "view-less" "modes/view-less.el")
+ − 4950
+ − 4951 (autoload 'view-file "view-less" "\
+ − 4952 Find FILE, enter view mode. With prefix arg OTHER-P, use other window." t nil)
+ − 4953
+ − 4954 (autoload 'view-buffer "view-less" "\
+ − 4955 Switch to BUF, enter view mode. With prefix arg use other window." t nil)
+ − 4956
+ − 4957 (autoload 'view-file-other-window "view-less" "\
+ − 4958 Find FILE in other window, and enter view mode." t nil)
+ − 4959
+ − 4960 (autoload 'view-buffer-other-window "view-less" "\
+ − 4961 Switch to BUFFER in another window, and enter view mode." t nil)
+ − 4962
+ − 4963 (autoload 'view-minor-mode "view-less" "\
+ − 4964 Minor mode for viewing text, with bindings like `less'.
+ − 4965 Commands are:
+ − 4966 \\<view-minor-mode-map>
+ − 4967 0..9 prefix args
+ − 4968 - prefix minus
+ − 4969 \\[scroll-up] page forward
+ − 4970 \\[scroll-down] page back
+ − 4971 \\[view-scroll-lines-up] scroll prefix-arg lines forward, default 1.
+ − 4972 \\[view-scroll-lines-down] scroll prefix-arg lines backward, default 1.
+ − 4973 \\[view-scroll-some-lines-down] scroll prefix-arg lines backward, default 10.
+ − 4974 \\[view-scroll-some-lines-up] scroll prefix-arg lines forward, default 10.
+ − 4975 \\[what-line] print line number
+ − 4976 \\[view-mode-describe] print this help message
+ − 4977 \\[view-search-forward] regexp search, uses previous string if you just hit RET
+ − 4978 \\[view-search-backward] as above but searches backward
+ − 4979 \\[view-repeat-search] repeat last search
+ − 4980 \\[view-goto-line] goto line prefix-arg, default 1
+ − 4981 \\[view-last-windowful] goto line prefix-arg, default last line
+ − 4982 \\[view-goto-percent] goto a position by percentage
+ − 4983 \\[toggle-truncate-lines] toggle truncate-lines
+ − 4984 \\[view-file] view another file
+ − 4985 \\[view-buffer] view another buffer
+ − 4986 \\[view-cleanup-backspaces] cleanup backspace constructions
+ − 4987 \\[shell-command] execute a shell command
+ − 4988 \\[shell-command-on-region] execute a shell command with the region as input
+ − 4989 \\[view-quit] exit view-mode, and bury the current buffer.
+ − 4990
+ − 4991 If invoked with the optional (prefix) arg non-nil, view-mode cleans up
+ − 4992 backspace constructions.
+ − 4993
+ − 4994 More precisely:
+ − 4995 \\{view-minor-mode-map}" t nil)
+ − 4996
+ − 4997 (autoload 'view-mode "view-less" "\
+ − 4998 View the current buffer using view-minor-mode. This exists to be 99.9%
+ − 4999 compatible with the implementations of `view-mode' in view.el and older
+ − 5000 versions of view-less.el." t nil)
+ − 5001
+ − 5002 (autoload 'view-major-mode "view-less" "\
+ − 5003 View the current buffer using view-mode, as a major mode.
+ − 5004 This function has a nonstandard name because `view-mode' is wrongly
+ − 5005 named but is like this for compatibility reasons." t nil)
+ − 5006
+ − 5007 (autoload 'auto-view-mode "view-less" "\
+ − 5008 If the file of the current buffer is not writable, call view-mode.
+ − 5009 This is meant to be added to `find-file-hooks'." nil nil)
+ − 5010
+ − 5011 ;;;***
+ − 5012
+ − 5013 ;;;### (autoloads (vrml-mode) "vrml-mode" "modes/vrml-mode.el")
+ − 5014
+ − 5015 (autoload 'vrml-mode "vrml-mode" "\
+ − 5016 Major mode for editing VRML code.
+ − 5017 Expression and list commands understand all VRML brackets.
+ − 5018 Tab indents for VRML code.
+ − 5019 Paragraphs are separated by blank lines only.
+ − 5020 Delete converts tabs to spaces as it moves back.
+ − 5021
+ − 5022 Variables controlling indentation style:
+ − 5023 vrml-indent-level
+ − 5024 Indentation of VRML statements within surrounding block.
+ − 5025
+ − 5026 Variables controlling user interaction with mode (see variable
+ − 5027 documentation for details):
+ − 5028 vrml-tab-always-indent
+ − 5029 Controls action of TAB key.
+ − 5030 vrml-auto-newline
+ − 5031 Non-nil means automatically newline before and after braces
+ − 5032 inserted in VRML code.
+ − 5033
+ − 5034 Turning on VRML mode calls the value of the variable `vrml-mode-hook'
+ − 5035 with no args, if that value is non-nil. Read the documentation for
+ − 5036 `vrml-mode-hook' to see what kinds of interesting hook functions
+ − 5037 already exist.
+ − 5038
+ − 5039 Commands:
+ − 5040 \\{vrml-mode-map}" t nil)
+ − 5041
+ − 5042 ;;;***
+ − 5043
+ − 5044 ;;;### (autoloads (xpm-mode) "xpm-mode" "modes/xpm-mode.el")
+ − 5045
+ − 5046 (autoload 'xpm-mode "xpm-mode" "\
+ − 5047 Treat the current buffer as an xpm file and colorize it.
+ − 5048
+ − 5049 Shift-button-1 lets you paint by dragging the mouse. Shift-button-1 on a
+ − 5050 color definition line will change the current painting color to that line's
+ − 5051 value.
+ − 5052
+ − 5053 Characters inserted from the keyboard will NOT be colored properly yet.
+ − 5054 Use the mouse, or do xpm-init (\\[xpm-init]) after making changes.
+ − 5055
+ − 5056 \\[xpm-add-color] Add a new color, prompting for character and value
+ − 5057 \\[xpm-show-image] show the current image at the top of the buffer
+ − 5058 \\[xpm-parse-color] parse the current line's color definition and add
+ − 5059 it to the color table. Provided as a means of changing colors.
+ − 5060 XPM minor mode bindings:
+ − 5061 \\{xpm-mode-map}" t nil)
+ − 5062
+ − 5063 ;;;***
+ − 5064
+ − 5065 ;;;### (autoloads (br-env-load br-env-browse) "br-env" "oobr/br-env.el")
+ − 5066
+ − 5067 (autoload 'br-env-browse "br-env" "\
+ − 5068 Invoke the OO-Browser on an existing or to be created Environment ENV-FILE." t nil)
+ − 5069
+ − 5070 (autoload 'br-env-load "br-env" "\
+ − 5071 Load browser Environment or spec from optional ENV-FILE or 'br-env-file'.
+ − 5072 Non-nil PROMPT means prompt user before building tables.
+ − 5073 Non-nil NO-BUILD means skip build of Environment entirely.
+ − 5074 Return t if load is successful, else nil." t nil)
+ − 5075
+ − 5076 ;;;***
+ − 5077
+ − 5078 ;;;### (autoloads (oo-browser) "br-start" "oobr/br-start.el")
+ − 5079
+ − 5080 (fset 'oobr 'oo-browser)
+ − 5081
+ − 5082 (autoload 'oo-browser "br-start" "\
+ − 5083 Prompt for an Environment and language over which to run the OO-Browser.
+ − 5084 Optional prefix argument SAME-ENV-FLAG means browse the current Environment,
+ − 5085 if any, without prompting." t nil)
+ − 5086
+ − 5087 ;;;***
+ − 5088
+ − 5089 ;;;### (autoloads (br-to-from-viewer br-add-class-file) "br" "oobr/br.el")
+ − 5090
+ − 5091 (autoload 'br-add-class-file "br" "\
+ − 5092 Add a file of classes to the current Environment.
+ − 5093 Interactively or when optional CLASS-PATH is nil, CLASS-PATH defaults to the
+ − 5094 current buffer file pathname. If optional LIB-TABLE-P is non-nil, add to
+ − 5095 Library Environment, otherwise add to System Environment. If optional
+ − 5096 SAVE-FILE is t, the Environment is then stored to the filename given by
+ − 5097 'br-env-file'. If SAVE-FILE is non-nil and not t, its string value is used
+ − 5098 as the file to which to save the Environment." t nil)
+ − 5099
+ − 5100 (autoload 'br-to-from-viewer "br" "\
+ − 5101 Move point to viewer window or back to last recorded listing window." t nil)
+ − 5102
+ − 5103 ;;;***
+ − 5104
+ − 5105 ;;;### (autoloads (c++-browse) "c++-browse" "oobr/c++-browse.el")
+ − 5106
+ − 5107 (autoload 'c++-browse "c++-browse" "\
+ − 5108 Invoke the C++ OO-Browser.
+ − 5109 This allows browsing through C++ library and system class hierarchies. With
+ − 5110 an optional non-nil prefix argument ENV-FILE, prompt for Environment file to
+ − 5111 use. Alternatively, a string value of ENV-FILE is used as the Environment
+ − 5112 file name. See also the file \"br-help\"." t nil)
+ − 5113
+ − 5114 ;;;***
+ − 5115
+ − 5116 ;;;### (autoloads (clos-browse) "clos-brows" "oobr/clos-brows.el")
+ − 5117
+ − 5118 (autoload 'clos-browse "clos-brows" "\
+ − 5119 Invoke the CLOS OO-Browser.
+ − 5120 This allows browsing through CLOS library and system class hierarchies. With
+ − 5121 an optional non-nil prefix argument ENV-FILE, prompt for Environment file
+ − 5122 to use. Alternatively, a string value of ENV-FILE is used as the
+ − 5123 Environment file name. See also the file \"br-help\"." t nil)
+ − 5124
+ − 5125 ;;;***
+ − 5126
+ − 5127 ;;;### (autoloads (eif-browse) "eif-browse" "oobr/eif-browse.el")
+ − 5128
+ − 5129 (autoload 'eif-browse "eif-browse" "\
+ − 5130 Invoke the Eiffel OO-Browser.
+ − 5131 This allows browsing through Eiffel library and system class hierarchies.
+ − 5132 With an optional prefix arg ENV-FILE equal to t, prompt for Environment file
+ − 5133 to use. Alternatively, a string value of ENV-FILE is used as the Environment
+ − 5134 file name. See also the file \"br-help\"." t nil)
+ − 5135
+ − 5136 ;;;***
+ − 5137
+ − 5138 ;;;### (autoloads (info-browse) "info-brows" "oobr/info-brows.el")
+ − 5139
+ − 5140 (autoload 'info-browse "info-brows" "\
+ − 5141 Invoke the Info OO-Browser.
+ − 5142 This allows browsing through Info library and system class hierarchies. With
+ − 5143 an optional non-nil prefix argument ENV-FILE, prompt for Environment file to
+ − 5144 use. Alternatively, a string value of ENV-FILE is used as the Environment
+ − 5145 file name. See also the file \"br-help\"." t nil)
+ − 5146
+ − 5147 ;;;***
+ − 5148
+ − 5149 ;;;### (autoloads (java-browse) "java-brows" "oobr/java-brows.el")
+ − 5150
+ − 5151 (autoload 'java-browse "java-brows" "\
+ − 5152 Invoke the Java OO-Browser.
+ − 5153 This allows browsing through Java library and system class hierarchies. With
+ − 5154 an optional non-nil prefix argument ENV-FILE, prompt for Environment file to
+ − 5155 use. Alternatively, a string value of ENV-FILE is used as the Environment
+ − 5156 file name. See also the file \"br-help\"." t nil)
+ − 5157
+ − 5158 ;;;***
+ − 5159
+ − 5160 ;;;### (autoloads (objc-browse) "objc-brows" "oobr/objc-brows.el")
+ − 5161
+ − 5162 (autoload 'objc-browse "objc-brows" "\
+ − 5163 Invoke the Objective-C OO-Browser.
+ − 5164 This allows browsing through Objective-C library and system class
+ − 5165 hierarchies. With an optional non-nil prefix argument ENV-FILE, prompt for
+ − 5166 Environment file to use. Alternatively, a string value of ENV-FILE is used
+ − 5167 as the Environment file name. See also the file \"br-help\"." t nil)
+ − 5168
+ − 5169 ;;;***
+ − 5170
+ − 5171 ;;;### (autoloads (python-browse) "python-browse" "oobr/python-browse.el")
+ − 5172
+ − 5173 (autoload 'python-browse "python-browse" "\
+ − 5174 Invoke the Python OO-Browser.
+ − 5175 This allows browsing through Python library and system class hierarchies.
+ − 5176 With an optional non-nil prefix argument ENV-FILE, prompt for Environment
+ − 5177 file to use. Alternatively, a string value of ENV-FILE is used as the
+ − 5178 Environment file name. See also the file \"br-help\"." t nil)
+ − 5179
+ − 5180 ;;;***
+ − 5181
+ − 5182 ;;;### (autoloads (smt-browse) "smt-browse" "oobr/smt-browse.el")
+ − 5183
+ − 5184 (autoload 'smt-browse "smt-browse" "\
+ − 5185 Invoke the Smalltalk OO-Browser.
+ − 5186 This allows browsing through Smalltalk library and system class hierarchies.
+ − 5187 With an optional non-nil prefix argument ENV-FILE, prompt for Environment
+ − 5188 file to use. Alternatively, a string value of ENV-FILE is used as the
+ − 5189 Environment file name. See also the file \"br-help\"." t nil)
+ − 5190
+ − 5191 ;;;***
+ − 5192
+ − 5193 ;;;### (autoloads (add-log-current-defun change-log-mode add-change-log-entry-other-window add-change-log-entry find-change-log prompt-for-change-log-name) "add-log" "packages/add-log.el")
+ − 5194
+ − 5195 (defvar change-log-default-name nil "\
+ − 5196 *Name of a change log file for \\[add-change-log-entry].")
+ − 5197
+ − 5198 (defvar add-log-current-defun-function nil "\
+ − 5199 *If non-nil, function to guess name of current function from surrounding text.
+ − 5200 \\[add-change-log-entry] calls this function (if nil, `add-log-current-defun'
+ − 5201 instead) with no arguments. It returns a string or nil if it cannot guess.")
+ − 5202
+ − 5203 (defvar add-log-full-name nil "\
+ − 5204 *Full name of user, for inclusion in ChangeLog daily headers.
+ − 5205 This defaults to the value returned by the `user-full-name' function.")
+ − 5206
+ − 5207 (defvar add-log-mailing-address nil "\
+ − 5208 *Electronic mail address of user, for inclusion in ChangeLog daily headers.
+ − 5209 This defaults to the value of `user-mail-address'.")
+ − 5210
+ − 5211 (autoload 'prompt-for-change-log-name "add-log" "\
+ − 5212 Prompt for a change log name." nil nil)
+ − 5213
+ − 5214 (autoload 'find-change-log "add-log" "\
+ − 5215 Find a change log file for \\[add-change-log-entry] and return the name.
+ − 5216
+ − 5217 Optional arg FILE-NAME specifies the file to use.
+ − 5218 If FILE-NAME is nil, use the value of `change-log-default-name'.
+ − 5219 If 'change-log-default-name' is nil, behave as though it were 'ChangeLog'
+ − 5220 \(or whatever we use on this operating system).
+ − 5221
+ − 5222 If 'change-log-default-name' contains a leading directory component, then
+ − 5223 simply find it in the current directory. Otherwise, search in the current
+ − 5224 directory and its successive parents for a file so named.
+ − 5225
+ − 5226 Once a file is found, `change-log-default-name' is set locally in the
+ − 5227 current buffer to the complete file name." nil nil)
+ − 5228
+ − 5229 (autoload 'add-change-log-entry "add-log" "\
+ − 5230 Find change log file and add an entry for today.
+ − 5231 Optional arg (interactive prefix) non-nil means prompt for user name and site.
+ − 5232 Second arg is file name of change log. If nil, uses `change-log-default-name'.
+ − 5233 Third arg OTHER-WINDOW non-nil means visit in other window.
+ − 5234 Fourth arg NEW-ENTRY non-nil means always create a new entry at the front;
+ − 5235 never append to an existing entry." t nil)
+ − 5236
+ − 5237 (autoload 'add-change-log-entry-other-window "add-log" "\
+ − 5238 Find change log file in other window and add an entry for today.
+ − 5239 Optional arg (interactive prefix) non-nil means prompt for user name and site.
+ − 5240 Second arg is file name of change log. If nil, uses `change-log-default-name'." t nil)
+ − 5241
+ − 5242 (define-key ctl-x-4-map "a" 'add-change-log-entry-other-window)
+ − 5243
+ − 5244 (autoload 'change-log-mode "add-log" "\
+ − 5245 Major mode for editing change logs; like Indented Text Mode.
+ − 5246 Prevents numeric backups and sets `left-margin' to 8 and `fill-column' to 74.
+ − 5247 New log entries are usually made with \\[add-change-log-entry] or \\[add-change-log-entry-other-window].
+ − 5248 Each entry behaves as a paragraph, and the entries for one day as a page.
+ − 5249 Runs `change-log-mode-hook'." t nil)
+ − 5250
+ − 5251 (autoload 'add-log-current-defun "add-log" "\
+ − 5252 Return name of function definition point is in, or nil.
+ − 5253
+ − 5254 Understands C, Lisp, LaTeX (\"functions\" are chapters, sections, ...),
+ − 5255 Texinfo (@node titles), Perl, and Fortran.
+ − 5256
+ − 5257 Other modes are handled by a heuristic that looks in the 10K before
+ − 5258 point for uppercase headings starting in the first column or
+ − 5259 identifiers followed by `:' or `=', see variable
+ − 5260 `add-log-current-defun-header-regexp'.
+ − 5261
+ − 5262 Has a preference of looking backwards." nil nil)
+ − 5263
+ − 5264 ;;;***
+ − 5265
+ − 5266 ;;;### (autoloads (apropos-documentation apropos-value apropos apropos-command) "apropos" "packages/apropos.el")
+ − 5267
+ − 5268 (fset 'command-apropos 'apropos-command)
+ − 5269
+ − 5270 (autoload 'apropos-command "apropos" "\
+ − 5271 Shows commands (interactively callable functions) that match REGEXP.
+ − 5272 With optional prefix ARG or if `apropos-do-all' is non-nil, also show
+ − 5273 variables." t nil)
+ − 5274
+ − 5275 (autoload 'apropos "apropos" "\
+ − 5276 Show all bound symbols whose names match REGEXP.
+ − 5277 With optional prefix ARG or if `apropos-do-all' is non-nil, also show unbound
+ − 5278 symbols and key bindings, which is a little more time-consuming.
+ − 5279 Returns list of symbols and documentation found." t nil)
+ − 5280
+ − 5281 (autoload 'apropos-value "apropos" "\
+ − 5282 Show all symbols whose value's printed image matches REGEXP.
+ − 5283 With optional prefix ARG or if `apropos-do-all' is non-nil, also looks
+ − 5284 at the function and at the names and values of properties.
+ − 5285 Returns list of symbols and values found." t nil)
+ − 5286
+ − 5287 (autoload 'apropos-documentation "apropos" "\
+ − 5288 Show symbols whose documentation contain matches for REGEXP.
+ − 5289 With optional prefix ARG or if `apropos-do-all' is non-nil, also use
+ − 5290 documentation that is not stored in the documentation file and show key
+ − 5291 bindings.
+ − 5292 Returns list of symbols and documentation found." t nil)
+ − 5293
+ − 5294 ;;;***
+ − 5295
+ − 5296 ;;;### (autoloads (define-auto-insert auto-insert) "autoinsert" "packages/autoinsert.el")
+ − 5297
+ − 5298 (autoload 'auto-insert "autoinsert" "\
+ − 5299 Insert default contents into a new file if `auto-insert' is non-nil.
+ − 5300 Matches the visited file name against the elements of `auto-insert-alist'." t nil)
+ − 5301
+ − 5302 (autoload 'define-auto-insert "autoinsert" "\
+ − 5303 Associate CONDITION with (additional) ACTION in `auto-insert-alist'.
+ − 5304 Optional AFTER means to insert action after all existing actions for CONDITION,
+ − 5305 or if CONDITION had no actions, after all other CONDITIONs." nil nil)
+ − 5306
+ − 5307 ;;;***
+ − 5308
+ − 5309 ;;;### (autoloads (mouse-avoidance-mode) "avoid" "packages/avoid.el")
+ − 5310
+ − 5311 (autoload 'mouse-avoidance-mode "avoid" "\
+ − 5312 Set cursor avoidance mode to MODE.
+ − 5313 MODE should be one of the symbols `banish', `exile', `jump', `animate',
+ − 5314 `cat-and-mouse', `proteus', or `none'.
+ − 5315
+ − 5316 If MODE is nil, toggle mouse avoidance between `none` and `banish'
+ − 5317 modes. Positive numbers and symbols other than the above are treated
+ − 5318 as equivalent to `banish'; negative numbers and `-' are equivalent to `none'.
+ − 5319
+ − 5320 Effects of the different modes:
+ − 5321 * banish: Move the mouse to the upper-right corner on any keypress.
+ − 5322 * exile: Move the mouse to the corner only if the cursor gets too close,
+ − 5323 and allow it to return once the cursor is out of the way.
+ − 5324 * jump: If the cursor gets too close to the mouse, displace the mouse
+ − 5325 a random distance & direction.
+ − 5326 * animate: As `jump', but shows steps along the way for illusion of motion.
+ − 5327 * cat-and-mouse: Same as `animate'.
+ − 5328 * proteus: As `animate', but changes the shape of the mouse pointer too.
+ − 5329
+ − 5330 Whenever the mouse is moved, the frame is also raised.
+ − 5331
+ − 5332 \(see `mouse-avoidance-threshold' for definition of \"too close\",
+ − 5333 and `mouse-avoidance-nudge-dist' and `mouse-avoidance-nudge-var' for
+ − 5334 definition of \"random distance\".)" t nil)
+ − 5335
+ − 5336 (add-minor-mode 'mouse-avoidance-mode " Avoid")
+ − 5337
+ − 5338 ;;;***
+ − 5339
+ − 5340 ;;;### (autoloads (blink-cursor-mode) "blink-cursor" "packages/blink-cursor.el")
+ − 5341
+ − 5342 (autoload 'blink-cursor-mode "blink-cursor" "\
+ − 5343 Enable or disable a blinking cursor.
+ − 5344 If TIMEOUT is nil, toggle on or off.
+ − 5345 If TIMEOUT is t, enable with the previous timeout value.
+ − 5346 If TIMEOUT is 0, disable.
+ − 5347 If TIMEOUT is greater than 0, then the cursor will blink once
+ − 5348 each TIMEOUT secs (can be a float)." t nil)
+ − 5349
+ − 5350 ;;;***
+ − 5351
+ − 5352 ;;;### (autoloads (bookmark-menu-delete bookmark-menu-rename bookmark-menu-locate bookmark-menu-jump bookmark-menu-insert bookmark-bmenu-list bookmark-load bookmark-save bookmark-write bookmark-delete bookmark-insert bookmark-rename bookmark-insert-location bookmark-relocate bookmark-jump bookmark-set) "bookmark" "packages/bookmark.el")
+ − 5353
+ − 5354 (if (symbolp (key-binding "r")) nil (progn (define-key ctl-x-map "rb" 'bookmark-jump) (define-key ctl-x-map "rm" 'bookmark-set) (define-key ctl-x-map "rl" 'bookmark-bmenu-list)))
+ − 5355
+ − 5356 (defvar bookmark-map nil "\
+ − 5357 Keymap containing bindings to bookmark functions.
+ − 5358 It is not bound to any key by default: to bind it
+ − 5359 so that you have a bookmark prefix, just use `global-set-key' and bind a
+ − 5360 key of your choice to `bookmark-map'. All interactive bookmark
+ − 5361 functions have a binding in this keymap.")
+ − 5362
+ − 5363 (define-prefix-command 'bookmark-map)
+ − 5364
+ − 5365 (define-key bookmark-map "x" 'bookmark-set)
+ − 5366
+ − 5367 (define-key bookmark-map "m" 'bookmark-set)
+ − 5368
+ − 5369 (define-key bookmark-map "j" 'bookmark-jump)
+ − 5370
+ − 5371 (define-key bookmark-map "g" 'bookmark-jump)
+ − 5372
+ − 5373 (define-key bookmark-map "i" 'bookmark-insert)
+ − 5374
+ − 5375 (define-key bookmark-map "e" 'edit-bookmarks)
+ − 5376
+ − 5377 (define-key bookmark-map "f" 'bookmark-insert-location)
+ − 5378
+ − 5379 (define-key bookmark-map "r" 'bookmark-rename)
+ − 5380
+ − 5381 (define-key bookmark-map "d" 'bookmark-delete)
+ − 5382
+ − 5383 (define-key bookmark-map "l" 'bookmark-load)
+ − 5384
+ − 5385 (define-key bookmark-map "w" 'bookmark-write)
+ − 5386
+ − 5387 (define-key bookmark-map "s" 'bookmark-save)
+ − 5388
+ − 5389 (autoload 'bookmark-set "bookmark" "\
+ − 5390 Set a bookmark named NAME inside a file.
+ − 5391 If name is nil, then the user will be prompted.
+ − 5392 With prefix arg, will not overwrite a bookmark that has the same name
+ − 5393 as NAME if such a bookmark already exists, but instead will \"push\"
+ − 5394 the new bookmark onto the bookmark alist. Thus the most recently set
+ − 5395 bookmark with name NAME would be the one in effect at any given time,
+ − 5396 but the others are still there, should you decide to delete the most
+ − 5397 recent one.
+ − 5398
+ − 5399 To yank words from the text of the buffer and use them as part of the
+ − 5400 bookmark name, type C-w while setting a bookmark. Successive C-w's
+ − 5401 yank successive words.
+ − 5402
+ − 5403 Typing C-u inserts the name of the last bookmark used in the buffer
+ − 5404 \(as an aid in using a single bookmark name to track your progress
+ − 5405 through a large file). If no bookmark was used, then C-u inserts the
+ − 5406 name of the file being visited.
+ − 5407
+ − 5408 Use \\[bookmark-delete] to remove bookmarks (you give it a name,
+ − 5409 and it removes only the first instance of a bookmark with that name from
+ − 5410 the list of bookmarks.)" t nil)
+ − 5411
+ − 5412 (autoload 'bookmark-jump "bookmark" "\
+ − 5413 Jump to bookmark BOOKMARK (a point in some file).
+ − 5414 You may have a problem using this function if the value of variable
+ − 5415 `bookmark-alist' is nil. If that happens, you need to load in some
+ − 5416 bookmarks. See help on function `bookmark-load' for more about
+ − 5417 this.
+ − 5418
+ − 5419 If the file pointed to by BOOKMARK no longer exists, you will be asked
+ − 5420 if you wish to give the bookmark a new location, and bookmark-jump
+ − 5421 will then jump to the new location, as well as recording it in place
+ − 5422 of the old one in the permanent bookmark record." t nil)
+ − 5423
+ − 5424 (autoload 'bookmark-relocate "bookmark" "\
+ − 5425 Relocate BOOKMARK -- prompts for a filename, and makes an already
+ − 5426 existing bookmark point to that file, instead of the one it used to
+ − 5427 point at. Useful when a file has been renamed after a bookmark was
+ − 5428 set in it." t nil)
+ − 5429
+ − 5430 (autoload 'bookmark-insert-location "bookmark" "\
+ − 5431 Insert the name of the file associated with BOOKMARK.
+ − 5432 Optional second arg NO-HISTORY means don't record this in the
+ − 5433 minibuffer history list `bookmark-history'." t nil)
+ − 5434
+ − 5435 (autoload 'bookmark-rename "bookmark" "\
+ − 5436 Change the name of OLD bookmark to NEW name. If called from
+ − 5437 keyboard, prompts for OLD and NEW. If called from menubar, OLD is
+ − 5438 selected from a menu, and prompts for NEW.
+ − 5439
+ − 5440 If called from Lisp, prompts for NEW if only OLD was passed as an
+ − 5441 argument. If called with two strings, then no prompting is done. You
+ − 5442 must pass at least OLD when calling from Lisp.
+ − 5443
+ − 5444 While you are entering the new name, consecutive C-w's insert
+ − 5445 consectutive words from the text of the buffer into the new bookmark
+ − 5446 name." t nil)
+ − 5447
+ − 5448 (autoload 'bookmark-insert "bookmark" "\
+ − 5449 Insert the text of the file pointed to by bookmark BOOKMARK.
+ − 5450 You may have a problem using this function if the value of variable
+ − 5451 `bookmark-alist' is nil. If that happens, you need to load in some
+ − 5452 bookmarks. See help on function `bookmark-load' for more about
+ − 5453 this." t nil)
+ − 5454
+ − 5455 (autoload 'bookmark-delete "bookmark" "\
+ − 5456 Delete BOOKMARK from the bookmark list.
+ − 5457 Removes only the first instance of a bookmark with that name. If
+ − 5458 there are one or more other bookmarks with the same name, they will
+ − 5459 not be deleted. Defaults to the \"current\" bookmark (that is, the
+ − 5460 one most recently used in this file, if any).
+ − 5461 Optional second arg BATCH means don't update the bookmark list buffer,
+ − 5462 probably because we were called from there." t nil)
+ − 5463
+ − 5464 (autoload 'bookmark-write "bookmark" "\
+ − 5465 Write bookmarks to a file (for which the user will be prompted
+ − 5466 interactively). Don't use this in Lisp programs; use bookmark-save
+ − 5467 instead." t nil)
+ − 5468
+ − 5469 (autoload 'bookmark-save "bookmark" "\
+ − 5470 Save currently defined bookmarks.
+ − 5471 Saves by default in the file defined by the variable
+ − 5472 `bookmark-default-file'. With a prefix arg, save it in file FILE
+ − 5473 \(second argument).
+ − 5474
+ − 5475 If you are calling this from Lisp, the two arguments are PREFIX-ARG
+ − 5476 and FILE, and if you just want it to write to the default file, then
+ − 5477 pass no arguments. Or pass in nil and FILE, and it will save in FILE
+ − 5478 instead. If you pass in one argument, and it is non-nil, then the
+ − 5479 user will be interactively queried for a file to save in.
+ − 5480
+ − 5481 When you want to load in the bookmarks from a file, use
+ − 5482 `bookmark-load', \\[bookmark-load]. That function will prompt you
+ − 5483 for a file, defaulting to the file defined by variable
+ − 5484 `bookmark-default-file'." t nil)
+ − 5485
+ − 5486 (autoload 'bookmark-load "bookmark" "\
+ − 5487 Load bookmarks from FILE (which must be in bookmark format).
+ − 5488 Appends loaded bookmarks to the front of the list of bookmarks. If
+ − 5489 optional second argument REVERT is non-nil, existing bookmarks are
+ − 5490 destroyed. Optional third arg NO-MSG means don't display any messages
+ − 5491 while loading.
+ − 5492
+ − 5493 If you load a file that doesn't contain a proper bookmark alist, you
+ − 5494 will corrupt Emacs's bookmark list. Generally, you should only load
+ − 5495 in files that were created with the bookmark functions in the first
+ − 5496 place. Your own personal bookmark file, `~/.emacs.bmk', is
+ − 5497 maintained automatically by Emacs; you shouldn't need to load it
+ − 5498 explicitly." t nil)
+ − 5499
+ − 5500 (autoload 'bookmark-bmenu-list "bookmark" "\
+ − 5501 Display a list of existing bookmarks.
+ − 5502 The list is displayed in a buffer named `*Bookmark List*'.
+ − 5503 The leftmost column displays a D if the bookmark is flagged for
+ − 5504 deletion, or > if it is flagged for displaying." t nil)
+ − 5505
+ − 5506 (defalias 'list-bookmarks 'bookmark-bmenu-list)
+ − 5507
+ − 5508 (defalias 'edit-bookmarks 'bookmark-bmenu-list)
+ − 5509
+ − 5510 (autoload 'bookmark-menu-insert "bookmark" "\
+ − 5511 Insert the text of the file pointed to by bookmark BOOKMARK.
+ − 5512 You may have a problem using this function if the value of variable
+ − 5513 `bookmark-alist' is nil. If that happens, you need to load in some
+ − 5514 bookmarks. See help on function `bookmark-load' for more about
+ − 5515 this.
+ − 5516
+ − 5517 Warning: this function only takes an EVENT as argument. Use the
+ − 5518 corresponding bookmark function from Lisp (the one without the
+ − 5519 \"-menu-\" in its name)." t nil)
+ − 5520
+ − 5521 (autoload 'bookmark-menu-jump "bookmark" "\
+ − 5522 Jump to bookmark BOOKMARK (a point in some file).
+ − 5523 You may have a problem using this function if the value of variable
+ − 5524 `bookmark-alist' is nil. If that happens, you need to load in some
+ − 5525 bookmarks. See help on function `bookmark-load' for more about
+ − 5526 this.
+ − 5527
+ − 5528 Warning: this function only takes an EVENT as argument. Use the
+ − 5529 corresponding bookmark function from Lisp (the one without the
+ − 5530 \"-menu-\" in its name)." t nil)
+ − 5531
+ − 5532 (autoload 'bookmark-menu-locate "bookmark" "\
+ − 5533 Insert the name of the file associated with BOOKMARK.
+ − 5534 \(This is not the same as the contents of that file).
+ − 5535
+ − 5536 Warning: this function only takes an EVENT as argument. Use the
+ − 5537 corresponding bookmark function from Lisp (the one without the
+ − 5538 \"-menu-\" in its name)." t nil)
+ − 5539
+ − 5540 (autoload 'bookmark-menu-rename "bookmark" "\
+ − 5541 Change the name of OLD-BOOKMARK to NEWNAME.
+ − 5542 If called from keyboard, prompts for OLD-BOOKMARK and NEWNAME.
+ − 5543 If called from menubar, OLD-BOOKMARK is selected from a menu, and
+ − 5544 prompts for NEWNAME.
+ − 5545 If called from Lisp, prompts for NEWNAME if only OLD-BOOKMARK was
+ − 5546 passed as an argument. If called with two strings, then no prompting
+ − 5547 is done. You must pass at least OLD-BOOKMARK when calling from Lisp.
+ − 5548
+ − 5549 While you are entering the new name, consecutive C-w's insert
+ − 5550 consectutive words from the text of the buffer into the new bookmark
+ − 5551 name.
+ − 5552
+ − 5553 Warning: this function only takes an EVENT as argument. Use the
+ − 5554 corresponding bookmark function from Lisp (the one without the
+ − 5555 \"-menu-\" in its name)." t nil)
+ − 5556
+ − 5557 (autoload 'bookmark-menu-delete "bookmark" "\
+ − 5558 Delete the bookmark named NAME from the bookmark list.
+ − 5559 Removes only the first instance of a bookmark with that name. If
+ − 5560 there are one or more other bookmarks with the same name, they will
+ − 5561 not be deleted. Defaults to the \"current\" bookmark (that is, the
+ − 5562 one most recently used in this file, if any).
+ − 5563
+ − 5564 Warning: this function only takes an EVENT as argument. Use the
+ − 5565 corresponding bookmark function from Lisp (the one without the
+ − 5566 \"-menu-\" in its name)." t nil)
+ − 5567
+ − 5568 ;;;***
+ − 5569
+ − 5570 ;;;### (autoloads nil "buff-menu" "packages/buff-menu.el")
+ − 5571
+ − 5572 (defvar list-buffers-directory nil)
+ − 5573
+ − 5574 (make-variable-buffer-local 'list-buffers-directory)
+ − 5575
+ − 5576 ;;;***
+ − 5577
+ − 5578 ;;;### (autoloads (command-history-mode list-command-history repeat-matching-complex-command) "chistory" "packages/chistory.el")
+ − 5579
+ − 5580 (autoload 'repeat-matching-complex-command "chistory" "\
+ − 5581 Edit and re-evaluate complex command with name matching PATTERN.
+ − 5582 Matching occurrences are displayed, most recent first, until you select
+ − 5583 a form for evaluation. If PATTERN is empty (or nil), every form in the
+ − 5584 command history is offered. The form is placed in the minibuffer for
+ − 5585 editing and the result is evaluated." t nil)
+ − 5586
+ − 5587 (autoload 'list-command-history "chistory" "\
+ − 5588 List history of commands typed to minibuffer.
+ − 5589 The number of commands listed is controlled by `list-command-history-max'.
+ − 5590 Calls value of `list-command-history-filter' (if non-nil) on each history
+ − 5591 element to judge if that element should be excluded from the list.
+ − 5592
+ − 5593 The buffer is left in Command History mode." t nil)
+ − 5594
+ − 5595 (autoload 'command-history-mode "chistory" "\
+ − 5596 Major mode for examining commands from `command-history'.
+ − 5597 The number of commands listed is controlled by `list-command-history-max'.
+ − 5598 The command history is filtered by `list-command-history-filter' if non-nil.
+ − 5599 Use \\<command-history-map>\\[command-history-repeat] to repeat the command on the current line.
+ − 5600
+ − 5601 Otherwise much like Emacs-Lisp Mode except that there is no self-insertion
+ − 5602 and digits provide prefix arguments. Tab does not indent.
+ − 5603 \\{command-history-map}
+ − 5604 Calls the value of `command-history-hook' if that is non-nil.
+ − 5605 The Command History listing is recomputed each time this mode is invoked." t nil)
+ − 5606
+ − 5607 ;;;***
+ − 5608
+ − 5609 ;;;### (autoloads nil "cmuscheme" "packages/cmuscheme.el")
+ − 5610
+ − 5611 (add-hook 'same-window-buffer-names "*scheme*")
+ − 5612
+ − 5613 ;;;***
+ − 5614
+ − 5615 ;;;### (autoloads (display-column-mode) "column" "packages/column.el")
+ − 5616
+ − 5617 (autoload 'display-column-mode "column" "\
+ − 5618 Toggle display column mode.
+ − 5619 With prefix arg, turn display column mode on iff arg is positive.
+ − 5620
+ − 5621 When display column mode is on, the current column and line number are
+ − 5622 displayed in the mode line." t nil)
+ − 5623
+ − 5624 ;;;***
+ − 5625
+ − 5626 ;;;### (autoloads (compare-windows) "compare-w" "packages/compare-w.el")
+ − 5627
+ − 5628 (autoload 'compare-windows "compare-w" "\
+ − 5629 Compare text in current window with text in next window.
+ − 5630 Compares the text starting at point in each window,
+ − 5631 moving over text in each one as far as they match.
+ − 5632
+ − 5633 This command pushes the mark in each window
+ − 5634 at the prior location of point in that window.
+ − 5635 If both windows display the same buffer,
+ − 5636 the mark is pushed twice in that buffer:
+ − 5637 first in the other window, then in the selected window.
+ − 5638
+ − 5639 A prefix arg means ignore changes in whitespace.
+ − 5640 The variable `compare-windows-whitespace' controls how whitespace is skipped.
+ − 5641 If `compare-ignore-case' is non-nil, changes in case are also ignored." t nil)
+ − 5642
+ − 5643 ;;;***
+ − 5644
+ − 5645 ;;;### (autoloads (first-error previous-error next-error compilation-minor-mode grep compile) "compile" "packages/compile.el")
+ − 5646
+ − 5647 (defvar compilation-mode-hook nil "\
+ − 5648 *List of hook functions run by `compilation-mode' (see `run-hooks').")
+ − 5649
+ − 5650 (defvar compilation-window-height nil "\
+ − 5651 *Number of lines in a compilation window. If nil, use Emacs default.")
+ − 5652
+ − 5653 (defvar compilation-buffer-name-function nil "\
+ − 5654 Function to compute the name of a compilation buffer.
+ − 5655 The function receives one argument, the name of the major mode of the
+ − 5656 compilation buffer. It should return a string.
+ − 5657 nil means compute the name with `(concat \"*\" (downcase major-mode) \"*\")'.")
+ − 5658
+ − 5659 (defvar compilation-finish-function nil "\
+ − 5660 *Function to call when a compilation process finishes.
+ − 5661 It is called with two arguments: the compilation buffer, and a string
+ − 5662 describing how the process finished.")
+ − 5663
+ − 5664 (defvar compilation-search-path '(nil) "\
+ − 5665 *List of directories to search for source files named in error messages.
+ − 5666 Elements should be directory names, not file names of directories.
+ − 5667 nil as an element means to try the default directory.")
+ − 5668
+ − 5669 (autoload 'compile "compile" "\
+ − 5670 Compile the program including the current buffer. Default: run `make'.
+ − 5671 Runs COMMAND, a shell command, in a separate process asynchronously
+ − 5672 with output going to the buffer `*compilation*'.
+ − 5673
+ − 5674 You can then use the command \\[next-error] to find the next error message
+ − 5675 and move to the source code that caused it.
+ − 5676
+ − 5677 Interactively, prompts for the command if `compilation-read-command' is
+ − 5678 non-nil; otherwise uses `compile-command'. With prefix arg, always prompts.
+ − 5679
+ − 5680 To run more than one compilation at once, start one and rename the
+ − 5681 `*compilation*' buffer to some other name with \\[rename-buffer].
+ − 5682 Then start the next one.
+ − 5683
+ − 5684 The name used for the buffer is actually whatever is returned by
+ − 5685 the function in `compilation-buffer-name-function', so you can set that
+ − 5686 to a function that generates a unique name." t nil)
+ − 5687
+ − 5688 (autoload 'grep "compile" "\
+ − 5689 Run grep, with user-specified args, and collect output in a buffer.
+ − 5690 While grep runs asynchronously, you can use the \\[next-error] command
+ − 5691 to find the text that grep hits refer to.
+ − 5692
+ − 5693 This command uses a special history list for its arguments, so you can
+ − 5694 easily repeat a grep command." t nil)
+ − 5695
+ − 5696 (autoload 'compilation-minor-mode "compile" "\
+ − 5697 Toggle compilation minor mode.
+ − 5698 With arg, turn compilation mode on if and only if arg is positive.
+ − 5699 See `compilation-mode'.
+ − 5700 ! \\{compilation-mode-map}" t nil)
+ − 5701
+ − 5702 (autoload 'next-error "compile" "\
+ − 5703 Visit next compilation error message and corresponding source code.
+ − 5704 This operates on the output from the \\[compile] command.
+ − 5705 If all preparsed error messages have been processed,
+ − 5706 the error message buffer is checked for new ones.
+ − 5707
+ − 5708 A prefix arg specifies how many error messages to move;
+ − 5709 negative means move back to previous error messages.
+ − 5710 Just C-u as a prefix means reparse the error message buffer
+ − 5711 and start at the first error.
+ − 5712
+ − 5713 \\[next-error] normally applies to the most recent compilation started,
+ − 5714 but as long as you are in the middle of parsing errors from one compilation
+ − 5715 output buffer, you stay with that compilation output buffer.
+ − 5716
+ − 5717 Use \\[next-error] in a compilation output buffer to switch to
+ − 5718 processing errors from that compilation.
+ − 5719
+ − 5720 See variables `compilation-parse-errors-function' and
+ − 5721 `compilation-error-regexp-alist' for customization ideas." t nil)
+ − 5722
+ − 5723 (define-key ctl-x-map "`" 'next-error)
+ − 5724
+ − 5725 (autoload 'previous-error "compile" "\
+ − 5726 Visit previous compilation error message and corresponding source code.
+ − 5727 This operates on the output from the \\[compile] command." t nil)
+ − 5728
+ − 5729 (autoload 'first-error "compile" "\
+ − 5730 Reparse the error message buffer and start at the first error
+ − 5731 Visit corresponding source code.
+ − 5732 This operates on the output from the \\[compile] command." t nil)
+ − 5733
+ − 5734 ;;;***
+ − 5735
+ − 5736 ;;;### (autoloads (dabbrev-expand dabbrev-completion) "dabbrev" "packages/dabbrev.el")
+ − 5737
+ − 5738 (define-key global-map [(meta /)] 'dabbrev-expand)
+ − 5739
+ − 5740 (define-key global-map [(meta control /)] 'dabbrev-completion)
+ − 5741
+ − 5742 (autoload 'dabbrev-completion "dabbrev" "\
+ − 5743 Completion on current word.
+ − 5744 Like \\[dabbrev-expand] but finds all expansions in the current buffer
+ − 5745 and presents suggestions for completion.
+ − 5746
+ − 5747 With a prefix argument, it searches all buffers accepted by the
+ − 5748 function pointed out by `dabbrev-friend-buffer-function' to find the
+ − 5749 completions.
+ − 5750
+ − 5751 If the prefix argument is 16 (which comes from C-u C-u),
+ − 5752 then it searches *all* buffers.
+ − 5753
+ − 5754 With no prefix argument, it reuses an old completion list
+ − 5755 if there is a suitable one already." t nil)
+ − 5756
+ − 5757 (autoload 'dabbrev-expand "dabbrev" "\
+ − 5758 Expand previous word \"dynamically\".
+ − 5759
+ − 5760 Expands to the most recent, preceding word for which this is a prefix.
+ − 5761 If no suitable preceding word is found, words following point are
+ − 5762 considered. If still no suitable word is found, then look in the
+ − 5763 buffers accepted by the function pointed out by variable
+ − 5764 `dabbrev-friend-buffer-function'.
+ − 5765
+ − 5766 A positive prefix argument, N, says to take the Nth backward *distinct*
+ − 5767 possibility. A negative argument says search forward.
+ − 5768
+ − 5769 If the cursor has not moved from the end of the previous expansion and
+ − 5770 no argument is given, replace the previously-made expansion
+ − 5771 with the next possible expansion not yet tried.
+ − 5772
+ − 5773 The variable `dabbrev-backward-only' may be used to limit the
+ − 5774 direction of search to backward if set non-nil.
+ − 5775
+ − 5776 See also `dabbrev-abbrev-char-regexp' and \\[dabbrev-completion]." t nil)
+ − 5777
+ − 5778 ;;;***
+ − 5779
+ − 5780 ;;;### (autoloads (diff-backup diff) "diff" "packages/diff.el")
+ − 5781
+ − 5782 (defvar diff-switches (purecopy "-c") "\
+ − 5783 *A string or list of strings specifying switches to be passed to diff.")
+ − 5784
+ − 5785 (autoload 'diff "diff" "\
+ − 5786 Find and display the differences between OLD and NEW files.
+ − 5787 Interactively the current buffer's file name is the default for NEW
+ − 5788 and a backup file for NEW is the default for OLD.
+ − 5789 With prefix arg, prompt for diff switches." t nil)
+ − 5790
+ − 5791 (autoload 'diff-backup "diff" "\
+ − 5792 Diff this file with its backup file or vice versa.
+ − 5793 Uses the latest backup, if there are several numerical backups.
+ − 5794 If this file is a backup, diff it with its original.
+ − 5795 The backup file is the first file given to `diff'." t nil)
+ − 5796
+ − 5797 ;;;***
+ − 5798
+ − 5799 ;;;### (autoloads (edit-faces) "edit-faces" "packages/edit-faces.el")
+ − 5800
+ − 5801 (autoload 'edit-faces "edit-faces" "\
+ − 5802 Alter face characteristics by editing a list of defined faces.
+ − 5803 Pops up a buffer containing a list of defined faces.
+ − 5804
+ − 5805 Editing commands:
+ − 5806
+ − 5807 \\{edit-faces-mode-map}" t nil)
+ − 5808
+ − 5809 ;;;***
+ − 5810
+ − 5811 ;;;### (autoloads (report-xemacs-bug) "emacsbug" "packages/emacsbug.el")
+ − 5812
+ − 5813 (autoload 'report-xemacs-bug "emacsbug" "\
+ − 5814 Report a bug in XEmacs.
+ − 5815 Prompts for bug subject. Leaves you in a mail buffer." t nil)
+ − 5816
+ − 5817 ;;;***
+ − 5818
+ − 5819 ;;;### (autoloads (emerge-merge-directories emerge-revisions-with-ancestor emerge-revisions emerge-files-with-ancestor-remote emerge-files-remote emerge-files-with-ancestor-command emerge-files-command emerge-buffers-with-ancestor emerge-buffers emerge-files-with-ancestor emerge-files) "emerge" "packages/emerge.el")
+ − 5820
+ − 5821 (autoload 'emerge-files "emerge" "\
+ − 5822 Run Emerge on two files." t nil)
+ − 5823
+ − 5824 (fset 'emerge 'emerge-files)
+ − 5825
+ − 5826 (autoload 'emerge-files-with-ancestor "emerge" "\
+ − 5827 Run Emerge on two files, giving another file as the ancestor." t nil)
+ − 5828
+ − 5829 (autoload 'emerge-buffers "emerge" "\
+ − 5830 Run Emerge on two buffers." t nil)
+ − 5831
+ − 5832 (autoload 'emerge-buffers-with-ancestor "emerge" "\
+ − 5833 Run Emerge on two buffers, giving another buffer as the ancestor." t nil)
+ − 5834
+ − 5835 (autoload 'emerge-files-command "emerge" nil nil nil)
+ − 5836
+ − 5837 (autoload 'emerge-files-with-ancestor-command "emerge" nil nil nil)
+ − 5838
+ − 5839 (autoload 'emerge-files-remote "emerge" nil nil nil)
+ − 5840
+ − 5841 (autoload 'emerge-files-with-ancestor-remote "emerge" nil nil nil)
+ − 5842
+ − 5843 (autoload 'emerge-revisions "emerge" "\
+ − 5844 Emerge two RCS revisions of a file." t nil)
+ − 5845
+ − 5846 (autoload 'emerge-revisions-with-ancestor "emerge" "\
+ − 5847 Emerge two RCS revisions of a file, with another revision as ancestor." t nil)
+ − 5848
+ − 5849 (autoload 'emerge-merge-directories "emerge" nil t nil)
+ − 5850
+ − 5851 ;;;***
+ − 5852
+ − 5853 ;;;### (autoloads (tags-apropos list-tags tags-query-replace tags-search tags-loop-continue next-file find-tag-other-window find-tag visit-tags-table) "etags" "packages/etags.el")
+ − 5854
+ − 5855 (defvar tags-build-completion-table 'ask "\
+ − 5856 *If this variable is nil, then tags completion is disabled.
+ − 5857 If this variable is t, then things which prompt for tags will do so with
+ − 5858 completion across all known tags.
+ − 5859 If this variable is the symbol `ask', then you will be asked whether each
+ − 5860 tags table should be added to the completion list as it is read in.
+ − 5861 (With the exception that for very small tags tables, you will not be asked,
+ − 5862 since they can be parsed quickly.)")
+ − 5863
+ − 5864 (defvar tags-always-exact nil "\
+ − 5865 *If this variable is non-nil, then tags always looks for exact matches.")
+ − 5866
+ − 5867 (defvar tag-table-alist nil "\
+ − 5868 *A list which determines which tags files should be active for a
+ − 5869 given buffer. This is not really an association list, in that all
+ − 5870 elements are checked. The CAR of each element of this list is a
+ − 5871 pattern against which the buffer's file name is compared; if it
+ − 5872 matches, then the CDR of the list should be the name of the tags
+ − 5873 table to use. If more than one element of this list matches the
+ − 5874 buffer's file name, then all of the associated tags tables will be
+ − 5875 used. Earlier ones will be searched first.
+ − 5876
+ − 5877 If the CAR of elements of this list are strings, then they are treated
+ − 5878 as regular-expressions against which the file is compared (like the
+ − 5879 auto-mode-alist). If they are not strings, then they are evaluated.
+ − 5880 If they evaluate to non-nil, then the current buffer is considered to
+ − 5881 match.
+ − 5882
+ − 5883 If the CDR of the elements of this list are strings, then they are
+ − 5884 assumed to name a TAGS file. If they name a directory, then the string
+ − 5885 \"TAGS\" is appended to them to get the file name. If they are not
+ − 5886 strings, then they are evaluated, and must return an appropriate string.
+ − 5887
+ − 5888 For example:
+ − 5889 (setq tag-table-alist
+ − 5890 '((\"/usr/src/public/perl/\" . \"/usr/src/public/perl/perl-3.0/\")
+ − 5891 (\"\\\\.el$\" . \"/usr/local/emacs/src/\")
+ − 5892 (\"/jbw/gnu/\" . \"/usr15/degree/stud/jbw/gnu/\")
+ − 5893 (\"\" . \"/usr/local/emacs/src/\")
+ − 5894 ))
+ − 5895
+ − 5896 This means that anything in the /usr/src/public/perl/ directory should use
+ − 5897 the TAGS file /usr/src/public/perl/perl-3.0/TAGS; and file ending in .el should
+ − 5898 use the TAGS file /usr/local/emacs/src/TAGS; and anything in or below the
+ − 5899 directory /jbw/gnu/ should use the TAGS file /usr15/degree/stud/jbw/gnu/TAGS.
+ − 5900 A file called something like \"/usr/jbw/foo.el\" would use both the TAGS files
+ − 5901 /usr/local/emacs/src/TAGS and /usr15/degree/stud/jbw/gnu/TAGS (in that order)
+ − 5902 because it matches both patterns.
+ − 5903
+ − 5904 If the buffer-local variable `buffer-tag-table' is set, then it names a tags
+ − 5905 table that is searched before all others when find-tag is executed from this
+ − 5906 buffer.
+ − 5907
+ − 5908 If there is a file called \"TAGS\" in the same directory as the file in
+ − 5909 question, then that tags file will always be used as well (after the
+ − 5910 `buffer-tag-table' but before the tables specified by this list.)
+ − 5911
+ − 5912 If the variable tags-file-name is set, then the tags file it names will apply
+ − 5913 to all buffers (for backwards compatibility.) It is searched first.
+ − 5914 ")
+ − 5915
+ − 5916 (autoload 'visit-tags-table "etags" "\
+ − 5917 Tell tags commands to use tags table file FILE first.
+ − 5918 FILE should be the name of a file created with the `etags' program.
+ − 5919 A directory name is ok too; it means file TAGS in that directory." t nil)
+ − 5920
+ − 5921 (autoload 'find-tag "etags" "\
+ − 5922 *Find tag whose name contains TAGNAME.
+ − 5923 Selects the buffer that the tag is contained in
+ − 5924 and puts point at its definition.
+ − 5925 If TAGNAME is a null string, the expression in the buffer
+ − 5926 around or before point is used as the tag name.
+ − 5927 If called interactively with a numeric argument, searches for the next tag
+ − 5928 in the tag table that matches the tagname used in the previous find-tag.
+ − 5929 If second arg OTHER-WINDOW is non-nil, uses another window to display
+ − 5930 the tag.
+ − 5931
+ − 5932 This version of this function supports multiple active tags tables,
+ − 5933 and completion.
+ − 5934
+ − 5935 Variables of note:
+ − 5936
+ − 5937 tag-table-alist controls which tables apply to which buffers
+ − 5938 tags-file-name a default tags table
+ − 5939 tags-build-completion-table controls completion behavior
+ − 5940 buffer-tag-table another way of specifying a buffer-local table
+ − 5941 make-tags-files-invisible whether tags tables should be very hidden
+ − 5942 tag-mark-stack-max how many tags-based hops to remember" t nil)
+ − 5943
+ − 5944 (autoload 'find-tag-other-window "etags" "\
+ − 5945 *Find tag whose name contains TAGNAME.
+ − 5946 Selects the buffer that the tag is contained in in another window
+ − 5947 and puts point at its definition.
+ − 5948 If TAGNAME is a null string, the expression in the buffer
+ − 5949 around or before point is used as the tag name.
+ − 5950 If second arg NEXT is non-nil (interactively, with prefix arg),
+ − 5951 searches for the next tag in the tag table
+ − 5952 that matches the tagname used in the previous find-tag.
+ − 5953
+ − 5954 This version of this function supports multiple active tags tables,
+ − 5955 and completion.
+ − 5956
+ − 5957 Variables of note:
+ − 5958
+ − 5959 tag-table-alist controls which tables apply to which buffers
+ − 5960 tags-file-name a default tags table
+ − 5961 tags-build-completion-table controls completion behavior
+ − 5962 buffer-tag-table another way of specifying a buffer-local table
+ − 5963 make-tags-files-invisible whether tags tables should be very hidden
+ − 5964 tag-mark-stack-max how many tags-based hops to remember" t nil)
+ − 5965
+ − 5966 (autoload 'next-file "etags" "\
+ − 5967 Select next file among files in current tag table(s).
+ − 5968
+ − 5969 A first argument of t (prefix arg, if interactive) initializes to the
+ − 5970 beginning of the list of files in the (first) tags table. If the argument
+ − 5971 is neither nil nor t, it is evalled to initialize the list of files.
+ − 5972
+ − 5973 Non-nil second argument NOVISIT means use a temporary buffer
+ − 5974 to save time and avoid uninteresting warnings.
+ − 5975
+ − 5976 Value is nil if the file was already visited;
+ − 5977 if the file was newly read in, the value is the filename." t nil)
+ − 5978
+ − 5979 (autoload 'tags-loop-continue "etags" "\
+ − 5980 Continue last \\[tags-search] or \\[tags-query-replace] command.
+ − 5981 Used noninteractively with non-nil argument to begin such a command (the
+ − 5982 argument is passed to `next-file', which see).
+ − 5983 Two variables control the processing we do on each file:
+ − 5984 the value of `tags-loop-scan' is a form to be executed on each file
+ − 5985 to see if it is interesting (it returns non-nil if so)
+ − 5986 and `tags-loop-operate' is a form to execute to operate on an interesting file
+ − 5987 If the latter returns non-nil, we exit; otherwise we scan the next file." t nil)
+ − 5988
+ − 5989 (autoload 'tags-search "etags" "\
+ − 5990 Search through all files listed in tags table for match for REGEXP.
+ − 5991 Stops when a match is found.
+ − 5992 To continue searching for next match, use command \\[tags-loop-continue].
+ − 5993
+ − 5994 See documentation of variable `tag-table-alist'." t nil)
+ − 5995
+ − 5996 (autoload 'tags-query-replace "etags" "\
+ − 5997 Query-replace-regexp FROM with TO through all files listed in tags table.
+ − 5998 Third arg DELIMITED (prefix arg) means replace only word-delimited matches.
+ − 5999 If you exit (\\[keyboard-quit] or ESC), you can resume the query-replace
+ − 6000 with the command \\[tags-loop-continue].
+ − 6001
+ − 6002 See documentation of variable `tag-table-alist'." t nil)
+ − 6003
+ − 6004 (autoload 'list-tags "etags" "\
+ − 6005 Display list of tags in file FILE.
+ − 6006 FILE should not contain a directory spec
+ − 6007 unless it has one in the tag table." t nil)
+ − 6008
+ − 6009 (autoload 'tags-apropos "etags" "\
+ − 6010 Display list of all tags in tag table REGEXP matches." t nil)
+ − 6011
+ − 6012 ;;;***
+ − 6013
+ − 6014 ;;;### (autoloads (turn-on-fast-lock fast-lock-mode) "fast-lock" "packages/fast-lock.el")
+ − 6015
+ − 6016 (defvar fast-lock-mode nil)
+ − 6017
+ − 6018 (autoload 'fast-lock-mode "fast-lock" "\
+ − 6019 Toggle Fast Lock mode.
+ − 6020 With arg, turn Fast Lock mode on if and only if arg is positive and the buffer
+ − 6021 is associated with a file. Enable it automatically in your `~/.emacs' by:
+ − 6022
+ − 6023 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
+ − 6024
+ − 6025 If Fast Lock mode is enabled, and the current buffer does not contain any text
+ − 6026 properties, any associated Font Lock cache is used if its timestamp matches the
+ − 6027 buffer's file, and its `font-lock-keywords' match those that you are using.
+ − 6028
+ − 6029 Font Lock caches may be saved:
+ − 6030 - When you save the file's buffer.
+ − 6031 - When you kill an unmodified file's buffer.
+ − 6032 - When you exit Emacs, for all unmodified or saved buffers.
+ − 6033 Depending on the value of `fast-lock-save-events'.
+ − 6034 See also the commands `fast-lock-read-cache' and `fast-lock-save-cache'.
+ − 6035
+ − 6036 Use \\[font-lock-fontify-buffer] to fontify the buffer if the cache is bad.
+ − 6037
+ − 6038 Various methods of control are provided for the Font Lock cache. In general,
+ − 6039 see variable `fast-lock-cache-directories' and function `fast-lock-cache-name'.
+ − 6040 For saving, see variables `fast-lock-minimum-size', `fast-lock-save-events',
+ − 6041 `fast-lock-save-others' and `fast-lock-save-faces'.
+ − 6042
+ − 6043 Use \\[fast-lock-submit-bug-report] to send bug reports or feedback." t nil)
+ − 6044
+ − 6045 (autoload 'turn-on-fast-lock "fast-lock" "\
+ − 6046 Unconditionally turn on Fast Lock mode." nil nil)
+ − 6047
+ − 6048 (if (fboundp 'add-minor-mode) (add-minor-mode 'fast-lock-mode nil))
+ − 6049
+ − 6050 ;;;***
+ − 6051
+ − 6052 ;;;### (autoloads (feedmail-send-it) "feedmail" "packages/feedmail.el")
+ − 6053
+ − 6054 (autoload 'feedmail-send-it "feedmail" nil nil nil)
+ − 6055
+ − 6056 ;;;***
+ − 6057
+ − 6058 ;;;### (autoloads (make-file-part) "file-part" "packages/file-part.el")
+ − 6059
+ − 6060 (autoload 'make-file-part "file-part" "\
+ − 6061 Make a file part on buffer BUFFER out of the region. Call it NAME.
+ − 6062 This command creates a new buffer containing the contents of the
+ − 6063 region and marks the buffer as referring to the specified buffer,
+ − 6064 called the `master buffer'. When the file-part buffer is saved,
+ − 6065 its changes are integrated back into the master buffer. When the
+ − 6066 master buffer is deleted, all file parts are deleted with it.
+ − 6067
+ − 6068 When called from a function, expects four arguments, START, END,
+ − 6069 NAME, and BUFFER, all of which are optional and default to the
+ − 6070 beginning of BUFFER, the end of BUFFER, a name generated from
+ − 6071 BUFFER's name, and the current buffer, respectively." t nil)
+ − 6072
+ − 6073 ;;;***
+ − 6074
+ − 6075 ;;;### (autoloads (font-lock-fontify-buffer turn-off-font-lock turn-on-font-lock font-lock-mode) "font-lock" "packages/font-lock.el")
+ − 6076
+ − 6077 (defvar font-lock-auto-fontify t "\
+ − 6078 *Whether font-lock should automatically fontify files as they're loaded.
+ − 6079 This will only happen if font-lock has fontifying keywords for the major
+ − 6080 mode of the file. You can get finer-grained control over auto-fontification
+ − 6081 by using this variable in combination with `font-lock-mode-enable-list' or
+ − 6082 `font-lock-mode-disable-list'.")
+ − 6083
+ − 6084 (defvar font-lock-mode-enable-list nil "\
+ − 6085 *List of modes to auto-fontify, if `font-lock-auto-fontify' is nil.")
+ − 6086
+ − 6087 (defvar font-lock-mode-disable-list nil "\
+ − 6088 *List of modes not to auto-fontify, if `font-lock-auto-fontify' is t.")
+ − 6089
+ − 6090 (defvar font-lock-use-colors '(color) "\
+ − 6091 *Specification for when Font Lock will set up color defaults.
+ − 6092 Normally this should be '(color), meaning that Font Lock will set up
+ − 6093 color defaults that are only used on color displays. Set this to nil
+ − 6094 if you don't want Font Lock to set up color defaults at all. This
+ − 6095 should be one of
+ − 6096
+ − 6097 -- a list of valid tags, meaning that the color defaults will be used
+ − 6098 when all of the tags apply. (e.g. '(color x))
+ − 6099 -- a list whose first element is 'or and whose remaining elements are
+ − 6100 lists of valid tags, meaning that the defaults will be used when
+ − 6101 any of the tag lists apply.
+ − 6102 -- nil, meaning that the defaults should not be set up at all.
+ − 6103
+ − 6104 \(If you specify face values in your init file, they will override any
+ − 6105 that Font Lock specifies, regardless of whether you specify the face
+ − 6106 values before or after loading Font Lock.)
+ − 6107
+ − 6108 See also `font-lock-use-fonts'. If you want more control over the faces
+ − 6109 used for fontification, see the documentation of `font-lock-mode' for
+ − 6110 how to do it.")
+ − 6111
+ − 6112 (defvar font-lock-use-fonts '(or (mono) (grayscale)) "\
+ − 6113 *Specification for when Font Lock will set up non-color defaults.
+ − 6114
+ − 6115 Normally this should be '(or (mono) (grayscale)), meaning that Font
+ − 6116 Lock will set up non-color defaults that are only used on either mono
+ − 6117 or grayscale displays. Set this to nil if you don't want Font Lock to
+ − 6118 set up non-color defaults at all. This should be one of
+ − 6119
+ − 6120 -- a list of valid tags, meaning that the non-color defaults will be used
+ − 6121 when all of the tags apply. (e.g. '(grayscale x))
+ − 6122 -- a list whose first element is 'or and whose remaining elements are
+ − 6123 lists of valid tags, meaning that the defaults will be used when
+ − 6124 any of the tag lists apply.
+ − 6125 -- nil, meaning that the defaults should not be set up at all.
+ − 6126
+ − 6127 \(If you specify face values in your init file, they will override any
+ − 6128 that Font Lock specifies, regardless of whether you specify the face
+ − 6129 values before or after loading Font Lock.)
+ − 6130
+ − 6131 See also `font-lock-use-colors'. If you want more control over the faces
+ − 6132 used for fontification, see the documentation of `font-lock-mode' for
+ − 6133 how to do it.")
+ − 6134
+ − 6135 (defvar font-lock-maximum-decoration nil "\
+ − 6136 *If non-nil, the maximum decoration level for fontifying.
+ − 6137 If nil, use the minimum decoration (equivalent to level 0).
+ − 6138 If t, use the maximum decoration available.
+ − 6139 If a number, use that level of decoration (or if not available the maximum).
+ − 6140 If a list, each element should be a cons pair of the form (MAJOR-MODE . LEVEL),
+ − 6141 where MAJOR-MODE is a symbol or t (meaning the default). For example:
+ − 6142 ((c++-mode . 2) (c-mode . t) (t . 1))
+ − 6143 means use level 2 decoration for buffers in `c++-mode', the maximum decoration
+ − 6144 available for buffers in `c-mode', and level 1 decoration otherwise.")
+ − 6145
+ − 6146 (define-obsolete-variable-alias 'font-lock-use-maximal-decoration 'font-lock-maximum-decoration)
+ − 6147
+ − 6148 (defvar font-lock-maximum-size (* 250 1024) "\
+ − 6149 *If non-nil, the maximum size for buffers for fontifying.
+ − 6150 Only buffers less than this can be fontified when Font Lock mode is turned on.
+ − 6151 If nil, means size is irrelevant.
+ − 6152 If a list, each element should be a cons pair of the form (MAJOR-MODE . SIZE),
+ − 6153 where MAJOR-MODE is a symbol or t (meaning the default). For example:
+ − 6154 ((c++-mode . 256000) (c-mode . 256000) (rmail-mode . 1048576))
+ − 6155 means that the maximum size is 250K for buffers in `c++-mode' or `c-mode', one
+ − 6156 megabyte for buffers in `rmail-mode', and size is irrelevant otherwise.")
+ − 6157
+ − 6158 (defvar font-lock-keywords nil "\
+ − 6159 *A list of the keywords to highlight.
+ − 6160 Each element should be of the form:
+ − 6161
+ − 6162 MATCHER
+ − 6163 (MATCHER . MATCH)
+ − 6164 (MATCHER . FACENAME)
+ − 6165 (MATCHER . HIGHLIGHT)
+ − 6166 (MATCHER HIGHLIGHT ...)
+ − 6167
+ − 6168 where HIGHLIGHT should be either MATCH-HIGHLIGHT or MATCH-ANCHORED.
+ − 6169
+ − 6170 For highlighting single items, typically only MATCH-HIGHLIGHT is required.
+ − 6171 However, if an item or (typically) items is to be hightlighted following the
+ − 6172 instance of another item (the anchor) then MATCH-ANCHORED may be required.
+ − 6173
+ − 6174 MATCH-HIGHLIGHT should be of the form:
+ − 6175
+ − 6176 (MATCH FACENAME OVERRIDE LAXMATCH)
+ − 6177
+ − 6178 Where MATCHER can be either the regexp to search for, or the function name to
+ − 6179 call to make the search (called with one argument, the limit of the search).
+ − 6180 MATCH is the subexpression of MATCHER to be highlighted. FACENAME is either
+ − 6181 a symbol naming a face, or an expression whose value is the face name to use.
+ − 6182 If you want FACENAME to be a symbol that evaluates to a face, use a form
+ − 6183 like \"(progn sym)\".
+ − 6184
+ − 6185 OVERRIDE and LAXMATCH are flags. If OVERRIDE is t, existing fontification may
+ − 6186 be overwritten. If `keep', only parts not already fontified are highlighted.
+ − 6187 If `prepend' or `append', existing fontification is merged with the new, in
+ − 6188 which the new or existing fontification, respectively, takes precedence.
+ − 6189 If LAXMATCH is non-nil, no error is signalled if there is no MATCH in MATCHER.
+ − 6190
+ − 6191 For example, an element of the form highlights (if not already highlighted):
+ − 6192
+ − 6193 \"\\\\\\=<foo\\\\\\=>\" Discrete occurrences of \"foo\" in the value of the
+ − 6194 variable `font-lock-keyword-face'.
+ − 6195 (\"fu\\\\(bar\\\\)\" . 1) Substring \"bar\" within all occurrences of \"fubar\" in
+ − 6196 the value of `font-lock-keyword-face'.
+ − 6197 (\"fubar\" . fubar-face) Occurrences of \"fubar\" in the value of `fubar-face'.
+ − 6198 (\"foo\\\\|bar\" 0 foo-bar-face t)
+ − 6199 Occurrences of either \"foo\" or \"bar\" in the value
+ − 6200 of `foo-bar-face', even if already highlighted.
+ − 6201
+ − 6202 MATCH-ANCHORED should be of the form:
+ − 6203
+ − 6204 (MATCHER PRE-MATCH-FORM POST-MATCH-FORM MATCH-HIGHLIGHT ...)
+ − 6205
+ − 6206 Where MATCHER is as for MATCH-HIGHLIGHT with one exception. The limit of the
+ − 6207 search is currently guaranteed to be (no greater than) the end of the line.
+ − 6208 PRE-MATCH-FORM and POST-MATCH-FORM are evaluated before the first, and after
+ − 6209 the last, instance MATCH-ANCHORED's MATCHER is used. Therefore they can be
+ − 6210 used to initialise before, and cleanup after, MATCHER is used. Typically,
+ − 6211 PRE-MATCH-FORM is used to move to some position relative to the original
+ − 6212 MATCHER, before starting with MATCH-ANCHORED's MATCHER. POST-MATCH-FORM might
+ − 6213 be used to move, before resuming with MATCH-ANCHORED's parent's MATCHER.
+ − 6214
+ − 6215 For example, an element of the form highlights (if not already highlighted):
+ − 6216
+ − 6217 (\"\\\\\\=<anchor\\\\\\=>\" (0 anchor-face) (\"\\\\\\=<item\\\\\\=>\" nil nil (0 item-face)))
+ − 6218
+ − 6219 Discrete occurrences of \"anchor\" in the value of `anchor-face', and subsequent
+ − 6220 discrete occurrences of \"item\" (on the same line) in the value of `item-face'.
+ − 6221 (Here PRE-MATCH-FORM and POST-MATCH-FORM are nil. Therefore \"item\" is
+ − 6222 initially searched for starting from the end of the match of \"anchor\", and
+ − 6223 searching for subsequent instance of \"anchor\" resumes from where searching
+ − 6224 for \"item\" concluded.)
+ − 6225
+ − 6226 Note that the MATCH-ANCHORED feature is experimental; in the future, we may
+ − 6227 replace it with other ways of providing this functionality.
+ − 6228
+ − 6229 These regular expressions should not match text which spans lines. While
+ − 6230 \\[font-lock-fontify-buffer] handles multi-line patterns correctly, updating
+ − 6231 when you edit the buffer does not, since it considers text one line at a time.
+ − 6232
+ − 6233 Be very careful composing regexps for this list;
+ − 6234 the wrong pattern can dramatically slow things down!")
+ − 6235
+ − 6236 (make-variable-buffer-local 'font-lock-keywords)
+ − 6237
+ − 6238 (defvar font-lock-mode nil)
+ − 6239
+ − 6240 (defvar font-lock-mode-hook nil "\
+ − 6241 Function or functions to run on entry to font-lock-mode.")
+ − 6242
+ − 6243 (autoload 'font-lock-mode "font-lock" "\
+ − 6244 Toggle Font Lock Mode.
+ − 6245 With arg, turn font-lock mode on if and only if arg is positive.
+ − 6246
+ − 6247 When Font Lock mode is enabled, text is fontified as you type it:
+ − 6248
+ − 6249 - Comments are displayed in `font-lock-comment-face';
+ − 6250 - Strings are displayed in `font-lock-string-face';
+ − 6251 - Documentation strings (in Lisp-like languages) are displayed in
+ − 6252 `font-lock-doc-string-face';
+ − 6253 - Language keywords (\"reserved words\") are displayed in
+ − 6254 `font-lock-keyword-face';
+ − 6255 - Function names in their defining form are displayed in
+ − 6256 `font-lock-function-name-face';
+ − 6257 - Variable names in their defining form are displayed in
+ − 6258 `font-lock-variable-name-face';
+ − 6259 - Type names are displayed in `font-lock-type-face';
+ − 6260 - References appearing in help files and the like are displayed
+ − 6261 in `font-lock-reference-face';
+ − 6262 - Preprocessor declarations are displayed in
+ − 6263 `font-lock-preprocessor-face';
+ − 6264
+ − 6265 and
+ − 6266
+ − 6267 - Certain other expressions are displayed in other faces according
+ − 6268 to the value of the variable `font-lock-keywords'.
+ − 6269
+ − 6270 Where modes support different levels of fontification, you can use the variable
+ − 6271 `font-lock-maximum-decoration' to specify which level you generally prefer.
+ − 6272 When you turn Font Lock mode on/off the buffer is fontified/defontified, though
+ − 6273 fontification occurs only if the buffer is less than `font-lock-maximum-size'.
+ − 6274 To fontify a buffer without turning on Font Lock mode, and regardless of buffer
+ − 6275 size, you can use \\[font-lock-fontify-buffer].
+ − 6276
+ − 6277 See the variable `font-lock-keywords' for customization." t nil)
+ − 6278
+ − 6279 (autoload 'turn-on-font-lock "font-lock" "\
+ − 6280 Unconditionally turn on Font Lock mode." nil nil)
+ − 6281
+ − 6282 (autoload 'turn-off-font-lock "font-lock" "\
+ − 6283 Unconditionally turn off Font Lock mode." nil nil)
+ − 6284
+ − 6285 (autoload 'font-lock-fontify-buffer "font-lock" "\
+ − 6286 Fontify the current buffer the way `font-lock-mode' would.
+ − 6287 See `font-lock-mode' for details.
+ − 6288
+ − 6289 This can take a while for large buffers." t nil)
+ − 6290
+ − 6291 (add-minor-mode 'font-lock-mode " Font")
+ − 6292
+ − 6293 ;;;***
+ − 6294
+ − 6295 ;;;### (autoloads (sc-mode) "generic-sc" "packages/generic-sc.el")
+ − 6296
+ − 6297 (autoload 'sc-mode "generic-sc" "\
+ − 6298 Toggle sc-mode.
+ − 6299 SYSTEM can be sccs, rcs or cvs.
+ − 6300 Cvs requires the pcl-cvs package.
+ − 6301
+ − 6302 The following commands are available
+ − 6303 \\[sc-next-operation] perform next logical source control operation on current file
+ − 6304 \\[sc-show-changes] compare the version being edited with an older one
+ − 6305 \\[sc-version-diff-file] compare two older versions of a file
+ − 6306 \\[sc-show-history] display change history of current file
+ − 6307 \\[sc-visit-previous-revision] display an older revision of current file
+ − 6308 \\[sc-revert-file] revert buffer to last checked-in version
+ − 6309 \\[sc-list-all-locked-files] show all files locked in current directory
+ − 6310 \\[sc-list-locked-files] show all files locked by you in current directory
+ − 6311 \\[sc-list-registered-files] show all files under source control in current directory
+ − 6312 \\[sc-update-directory] get fresh copies of files checked-in by others in current directory
+ − 6313 \\[sc-rename-file] rename the current file and its source control file
+ − 6314
+ − 6315
+ − 6316 While you are entering a change log message for a check in, sc-log-entry-mode
+ − 6317 will be in effect.
+ − 6318
+ − 6319 Global user options:
+ − 6320 sc-diff-command A list consisting of the command and flags
+ − 6321 to be used for generating context diffs.
+ − 6322 sc-mode-expert suppresses some conformation prompts,
+ − 6323 notably for delta aborts and file saves.
+ − 6324 sc-max-log-size specifies the maximum allowable size
+ − 6325 of a log message plus one.
+ − 6326
+ − 6327
+ − 6328 When using SCCS you have additional commands and options
+ − 6329
+ − 6330 \\[sccs-insert-headers] insert source control headers in current file
+ − 6331
+ − 6332 When you generate headers into a buffer using \\[sccs-insert-headers],
+ − 6333 the value of sc-insert-headers-hook is called before insertion. If the
+ − 6334 file is recognized a C or Lisp source, sc-insert-c-header-hook or
+ − 6335 sc-insert-lisp-header-hook is called after insertion respectively.
+ − 6336
+ − 6337 sccs-headers-wanted which %-keywords to insert when adding
+ − 6338 headers with C-c h
+ − 6339 sccs-insert-static if non-nil, keywords inserted in C files
+ − 6340 get stuffed in a static string area so that
+ − 6341 what(1) can see them in the compiled object code.
+ − 6342
+ − 6343 When using CVS you have additional commands
+ − 6344
+ − 6345 \\[sc-cvs-update-directory] update the current directory using pcl-cvs
+ − 6346 \\[sc-cvs-file-status] show the CVS status of current file
+ − 6347 " t nil)
+ − 6348
+ − 6349 ;;;***
+ − 6350
+ − 6351 ;;;### (autoloads (gnuserv-start) "gnuserv" "packages/gnuserv.el")
+ − 6352
+ − 6353 (defvar gnuserv-frame nil "\
+ − 6354 *If non-nil, the frame to be used to display all edited files.
+ − 6355 If nil, then a new frame is created for each file edited.
+ − 6356 This variable has no effect in XEmacs versions older than 19.9.")
+ − 6357
+ − 6358 (autoload 'gnuserv-start "gnuserv" "\
+ − 6359 Allow this Emacs process to be a server for client processes.
+ − 6360 This starts a server communications subprocess through which
+ − 6361 client \"editors\" (gnuclient and gnudoit) can send editing commands to
+ − 6362 this Emacs job. See the gnuserv(1) manual page for more details.
+ − 6363
+ − 6364 Prefix arg means just kill any existing server communications subprocess." t nil)
+ − 6365
+ − 6366 ;;;***
+ − 6367
+ − 6368 ;;;### (autoloads (gopher-atpoint gopher) "gopher" "packages/gopher.el")
+ − 6369
+ − 6370 (autoload 'gopher "gopher" "\
+ − 6371 Start a gopher session. With C-u, prompt for a gopher server." t nil)
+ − 6372
+ − 6373 (autoload 'gopher-atpoint "gopher" "\
+ − 6374 Try to interpret the text around point as a gopher bookmark, and dispatch
+ − 6375 to that object." t nil)
+ − 6376
+ − 6377 ;;;***
+ − 6378
+ − 6379 ;;;### (autoloads (hexlify-buffer hexl-find-file hexl-mode) "hexl" "packages/hexl.el")
+ − 6380
+ − 6381 (autoload 'hexl-mode "hexl" "\
+ − 6382 \\<hexl-mode-map>
+ − 6383 A major mode for editing binary files in hex dump format.
+ − 6384
+ − 6385 This function automatically converts a buffer into the hexl format
+ − 6386 using the function `hexlify-buffer'.
+ − 6387
+ − 6388 Each line in the buffer has an \"address\" (displayed in hexadecimal)
+ − 6389 representing the offset into the file that the characters on this line
+ − 6390 are at and 16 characters from the file (displayed as hexadecimal
+ − 6391 values grouped every 16 bits) and as their ASCII values.
+ − 6392
+ − 6393 If any of the characters (displayed as ASCII characters) are
+ − 6394 unprintable (control or meta characters) they will be replaced as
+ − 6395 periods.
+ − 6396
+ − 6397 If `hexl-mode' is invoked with an argument the buffer is assumed to be
+ − 6398 in hexl format.
+ − 6399
+ − 6400 A sample format:
+ − 6401
+ − 6402 HEX ADDR: 0001 0203 0405 0607 0809 0a0b 0c0d 0e0f ASCII-TEXT
+ − 6403 -------- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----------------
+ − 6404 00000000: 5468 6973 2069 7320 6865 786c 2d6d 6f64 This is hexl-mod
+ − 6405 00000010: 652e 2020 4561 6368 206c 696e 6520 7265 e. Each line re
+ − 6406 00000020: 7072 6573 656e 7473 2031 3620 6279 7465 presents 16 byte
+ − 6407 00000030: 7320 6173 2068 6578 6164 6563 696d 616c s as hexadecimal
+ − 6408 00000040: 2041 5343 4949 0a61 6e64 2070 7269 6e74 ASCII.and print
+ − 6409 00000050: 6162 6c65 2041 5343 4949 2063 6861 7261 able ASCII chara
+ − 6410 00000060: 6374 6572 732e 2020 416e 7920 636f 6e74 cters. Any cont
+ − 6411 00000070: 726f 6c20 6f72 206e 6f6e 2d41 5343 4949 rol or non-ASCII
+ − 6412 00000080: 2063 6861 7261 6374 6572 730a 6172 6520 characters.are
+ − 6413 00000090: 6469 7370 6c61 7965 6420 6173 2070 6572 displayed as per
+ − 6414 000000a0: 696f 6473 2069 6e20 7468 6520 7072 696e iods in the prin
+ − 6415 000000b0: 7461 626c 6520 6368 6172 6163 7465 7220 table character
+ − 6416 000000c0: 7265 6769 6f6e 2e0a region..
+ − 6417
+ − 6418 Movement is as simple as movement in a normal emacs text buffer. Most
+ − 6419 cursor movement bindings are the same (ie. Use \\[hexl-backward-char], \\[hexl-forward-char], \\[hexl-next-line], and \\[hexl-previous-line]
+ − 6420 to move the cursor left, right, down, and up).
+ − 6421
+ − 6422 Advanced cursor movement commands (ala \\[hexl-beginning-of-line], \\[hexl-end-of-line], \\[hexl-beginning-of-buffer], and \\[hexl-end-of-buffer]) are
+ − 6423 also supported.
+ − 6424
+ − 6425 There are several ways to change text in hexl mode:
+ − 6426
+ − 6427 ASCII characters (character between space (0x20) and tilde (0x7E)) are
+ − 6428 bound to self-insert so you can simply type the character and it will
+ − 6429 insert itself (actually overstrike) into the buffer.
+ − 6430
+ − 6431 \\[hexl-quoted-insert] followed by another keystroke allows you to insert the key even if
+ − 6432 it isn't bound to self-insert. An octal number can be supplied in place
+ − 6433 of another key to insert the octal number's ASCII representation.
+ − 6434
+ − 6435 \\[hexl-insert-hex-char] will insert a given hexadecimal value (if it is between 0 and 0xFF)
+ − 6436 into the buffer at the current point.
+ − 6437
+ − 6438 \\[hexl-insert-octal-char] will insert a given octal value (if it is between 0 and 0377)
+ − 6439 into the buffer at the current point.
+ − 6440
+ − 6441 \\[hexl-insert-decimal-char] will insert a given decimal value (if it is between 0 and 255)
+ − 6442 into the buffer at the current point.
+ − 6443
+ − 6444 \\[hexl-mode-exit] will exit hexl-mode.
+ − 6445
+ − 6446 Note: saving the file with any of the usual Emacs commands
+ − 6447 will actually convert it back to binary format while saving.
+ − 6448
+ − 6449 You can use \\[hexl-find-file] to visit a file in hexl-mode.
+ − 6450
+ − 6451 \\[describe-bindings] for advanced commands." t nil)
+ − 6452
+ − 6453 (autoload 'hexl-find-file "hexl" "\
+ − 6454 Edit file FILENAME in hexl-mode.
+ − 6455 Switch to a buffer visiting file FILENAME, creating one in none exists." t nil)
+ − 6456
+ − 6457 (autoload 'hexlify-buffer "hexl" "\
+ − 6458 Convert a binary buffer to hexl format.
+ − 6459 This discards the buffer's undo information." t nil)
+ − 6460
+ − 6461 ;;;***
+ − 6462
+ − 6463 ;;;### (autoloads (hypropos-popup-menu hypropos-set-variable hyper-describe-function hyper-describe-variable hyper-apropos) "hyper-apropos" "packages/hyper-apropos.el")
+ − 6464
+ − 6465 (defvar hypropos-show-brief-docs t "\
+ − 6466 *If non-nil, `hyper-apropos' will display some documentation in the
+ − 6467 \"*Hyper Apropos*\" buffer. Setting this to nil will speed up searches.")
+ − 6468
+ − 6469 (autoload 'hyper-apropos "hyper-apropos" "\
+ − 6470 Display lists of functions and variables matching REGEXP
+ − 6471 in buffer \"*Hyper Apropos*\". If optional prefix arg is given, then the value
+ − 6472 of `hypropos-programming-apropos' is toggled for this search.
+ − 6473 See also `hyper-apropos-mode'." t nil)
+ − 6474
+ − 6475 (autoload 'hyper-describe-variable "hyper-apropos" "\
+ − 6476 Hypertext drop-in replacement for `describe-variable'.
+ − 6477 See also `hyper-apropos' and `hyper-describe-function'." t nil)
+ − 6478
+ − 6479 (autoload 'hyper-describe-function "hyper-apropos" "\
+ − 6480 Hypertext replacement for `describe-function'. Unlike `describe-function'
+ − 6481 in that the symbol under the cursor is the default if it is a function.
+ − 6482 See also `hyper-apropos' and `hyper-describe-variable'." t nil)
+ − 6483
+ − 6484 (autoload 'hypropos-set-variable "hyper-apropos" "\
+ − 6485 Interactively set the variable on the current line." t nil)
+ − 6486
+ − 6487 (autoload 'hypropos-popup-menu "hyper-apropos" nil t nil)
+ − 6488
+ − 6489 ;;;***
+ − 6490
+ − 6491 ;;;### (autoloads (icomplete-minibuffer-setup icomplete-mode) "icomplete" "packages/icomplete.el")
+ − 6492
+ − 6493 (autoload 'icomplete-mode "icomplete" "\
+ − 6494 Activate incremental minibuffer completion for this emacs session,
+ − 6495 or deactivate with negative prefix arg." t nil)
+ − 6496
+ − 6497 (autoload 'icomplete-minibuffer-setup "icomplete" "\
+ − 6498 Run in minibuffer on activation to establish incremental completion.
+ − 6499 Usually run by inclusion in `minibuffer-setup-hook'." nil nil)
+ − 6500
+ − 6501 ;;;***
+ − 6502
+ − 6503 ;;;### (autoloads (Info-elisp-ref Info-emacs-key Info-goto-emacs-key-command-node Info-goto-emacs-command-node Info-emacs-command Info-search Info-visit-file Info-goto-node Info-query info) "info" "packages/info.el")
+ − 6504
+ − 6505 (autoload 'info "info" "\
+ − 6506 Enter Info, the documentation browser.
+ − 6507 Optional argument FILE specifies the file to examine;
+ − 6508 the default is the top-level directory of Info.
+ − 6509
+ − 6510 In interactive use, a prefix argument directs this command
+ − 6511 to read a file name from the minibuffer." t nil)
+ − 6512
+ − 6513 (autoload 'Info-query "info" "\
+ − 6514 Enter Info, the documentation browser. Prompt for name of Info file." t nil)
+ − 6515
+ − 6516 (autoload 'Info-goto-node "info" "\
+ − 6517 Go to info node named NAME. Give just NODENAME or (FILENAME)NODENAME.
+ − 6518 Actually, the following interpretations of NAME are tried in order:
+ − 6519 (FILENAME)NODENAME
+ − 6520 (FILENAME) (using Top node)
+ − 6521 NODENAME (in current file)
+ − 6522 TAGNAME (see below)
+ − 6523 FILENAME (using Top node)
+ − 6524 where TAGNAME is a string that appears in quotes: \"TAGNAME\", in an
+ − 6525 annotation for any node of any file. (See `a' and `x' commands.)" t nil)
+ − 6526
+ − 6527 (autoload 'Info-visit-file "info" "\
+ − 6528 Directly visit an info file." t nil)
+ − 6529
+ − 6530 (autoload 'Info-search "info" "\
+ − 6531 Search for REGEXP, starting from point, and select node it's found in." t nil)
+ − 6532
+ − 6533 (autoload 'Info-emacs-command "info" "\
+ − 6534 Look up an Emacs command in the Emacs manual in the Info system.
+ − 6535 This command is designed to be used whether you are already in Info or not." t nil)
+ − 6536
+ − 6537 (autoload 'Info-goto-emacs-command-node "info" "\
+ − 6538 Look up an Emacs command in the Emacs manual in the Info system.
+ − 6539 This command is designed to be used whether you are already in Info or not." t nil)
+ − 6540
+ − 6541 (autoload 'Info-goto-emacs-key-command-node "info" "\
+ − 6542 Look up an Emacs key sequence in the Emacs manual in the Info system.
+ − 6543 This command is designed to be used whether you are already in Info or not." t nil)
+ − 6544
+ − 6545 (autoload 'Info-emacs-key "info" "\
+ − 6546 Look up an Emacs key sequence in the Emacs manual in the Info system.
+ − 6547 This command is designed to be used whether you are already in Info or not." t nil)
+ − 6548
+ − 6549 (autoload 'Info-elisp-ref "info" "\
+ − 6550 Look up an Emacs Lisp function in the Elisp manual in the Info system.
+ − 6551 This command is designed to be used whether you are already in Info or not." t nil)
+ − 6552
+ − 6553 ;;;***
+ − 6554
+ − 6555 ;;;### (autoloads (batch-info-validate Info-validate Info-split Info-tagify) "informat" "packages/informat.el")
+ − 6556
+ − 6557 (autoload 'Info-tagify "informat" "\
+ − 6558 Create or update Info-file tag table in current buffer." t nil)
+ − 6559
+ − 6560 (autoload 'Info-split "informat" "\
+ − 6561 Split an info file into an indirect file plus bounded-size subfiles.
+ − 6562 Each subfile will be up to 50,000 characters plus one node.
+ − 6563
+ − 6564 To use this command, first visit a large Info file that has a tag
+ − 6565 table. The buffer is modified into a (small) indirect info file which
+ − 6566 should be saved in place of the original visited file.
+ − 6567
+ − 6568 The subfiles are written in the same directory the original file is
+ − 6569 in, with names generated by appending `-' and a number to the original
+ − 6570 file name. The indirect file still functions as an Info file, but it
+ − 6571 contains just the tag table and a directory of subfiles." t nil)
+ − 6572
+ − 6573 (autoload 'Info-validate "informat" "\
+ − 6574 Check current buffer for validity as an Info file.
+ − 6575 Check that every node pointer points to an existing node." t nil)
+ − 6576
+ − 6577 (autoload 'batch-info-validate "informat" "\
+ − 6578 Runs `Info-validate' on the files remaining on the command line.
+ − 6579 Must be used only with -batch, and kills Emacs on completion.
+ − 6580 Each file will be processed even if an error occurred previously.
+ − 6581 For example, invoke \"emacs -batch -f batch-info-validate $info/ ~/*.info\"" nil nil)
+ − 6582
+ − 6583 ;;;***
+ − 6584
+ − 6585 ;;;### (autoloads (ispell-message ispell-minor-mode ispell-complete-word-interior-frag ispell-complete-word ispell-continue ispell-buffer ispell-region ispell-change-dictionary ispell-kill-ispell ispell-help ispell-word) "ispell" "packages/ispell.el")
+ − 6586
+ − 6587 (defvar ispell-personal-dictionary nil "\
+ − 6588 *File name of your personal spelling dictionary, or nil.
+ − 6589 If nil, the default personal dictionary, \"~/.ispell_DICTNAME\" is used,
+ − 6590 where DICTNAME is the name of your default dictionary.")
+ − 6591
+ − 6592 (defvar ispell-dictionary-alist-1 '((nil "[A-Za-z]" "[^A-Za-z]" "[']" nil ("-B") nil) ("english" "[A-Za-z]" "[^A-Za-z]" "[']" nil ("-B") nil) ("british" "[A-Za-z]" "[^A-Za-z]" "[']" nil ("-B" "-d" "british") nil) ("deutsch" "[a-zA-Z\"]" "[^a-zA-Z\"]" "[']" t ("-C") "~tex") ("deutsch8" "[a-zA-Z,ADV\dv_|(B]" "[^a-zA-Z,ADV\dv_|(B]" "[']" t ("-C" "-d" "deutsch") "~latin1") ("nederlands" "[A-Za-z,A@(B-,AEGH(B-,AOR(B-,AVY(B-,A\`(B-,Aegh(B-,Aoqr(B-,Avy(B-,A|(B]" "[^A-Za-z,A@(B-,AEGH(B-,AOR(B-,AVY(B-,A\`(B-,Aegh(B-,Aoqr(B-,Avy(B-,A|(B]" "[']" t ("-C") nil) ("nederlands8" "[A-Za-z,A@(B-,AEGH(B-,AOR(B-,AVY(B-,A\`(B-,Aegh(B-,Aoqr(B-,Avy(B-,A|(B]" "[^A-Za-z,A@(B-,AEGH(B-,AOR(B-,AVY(B-,A\`(B-,Aegh(B-,Aoqr(B-,Avy(B-,A|(B]" "[']" t ("-C") nil)))
+ − 6593
+ − 6594 (defvar ispell-dictionary-alist-2 '(("svenska" "[A-Za-z}{|\\133\\135\\\\]" "[^A-Za-z}{|\\133\\135\\\\]" "[']" nil ("-C") nil) ("svenska8" "[A-Za-z,AedvEDv(B]" "[^A-Za-z,AedvEDv(B]" "[']" nil ("-C" "-d" "svenska") "~list") ("francais7" "[A-Za-z]" "[^A-Za-z]" "[`'^---]" t nil nil) ("francais" "[A-Za-z,A@BFGHIJKNOTY[\`bghijknoty{|(B]" "[^A-Za-z,A@BFGHIJKNOTY[\`bghijknoty{|(B]" "[---']" t nil "~list") ("francais-tex" "[A-Za-z,A@BFGHIJKNOTY[\`bghijknoty{|(B\\]" "[^A-Za-z,A@BFGHIJKNOTY[\`bghijknoty{|(B\\]" "[---'^`\"]" t nil "~tex") ("dansk" "[A-Z,AFXE(Ba-z,Afxe(B]" "[^A-Z,AFXE(Ba-z,Afxe(B]" "" nil ("-C") nil)))
+ − 6595
+ − 6596 (defvar ispell-dictionary-alist (append ispell-dictionary-alist-1 ispell-dictionary-alist-2) "\
+ − 6597 An alist of dictionaries and their associated parameters.
+ − 6598
+ − 6599 Each element of this list is also a list:
+ − 6600
+ − 6601 \(DICTIONARY-NAME CASECHARS NOT-CASECHARS OTHERCHARS MANY-OTHERCHARS-P
+ − 6602 ISPELL-ARGS EXTENDED-CHARACTER-MODE)
+ − 6603
+ − 6604 DICTIONARY-NAME is a possible value of variable `ispell-dictionary', nil
+ − 6605 means the default dictionary.
+ − 6606
+ − 6607 CASECHARS is a regular expression of valid characters that comprise a
+ − 6608 word.
+ − 6609
+ − 6610 NOT-CASECHARS is the opposite regexp of CASECHARS.
+ − 6611
+ − 6612 OTHERCHARS is a regular expression of other characters that are valid
+ − 6613 in word constructs. Otherchars cannot be adjacent to each other in a
+ − 6614 word, nor can they begin or end a word. This implies we can't check
+ − 6615 \"Stevens'\" as a correct possessive and other correct formations.
+ − 6616
+ − 6617 Hint: regexp syntax requires the hyphen to be declared first here.
+ − 6618
+ − 6619 MANY-OTHERCHARS-P is non-nil if many otherchars are to be allowed in a
+ − 6620 word instead of only one.
+ − 6621
+ − 6622 ISPELL-ARGS is a list of additional arguments passed to the ispell
+ − 6623 subprocess.
+ − 6624
+ − 6625 EXTENDED-CHARACTER-MODE should be used when dictionaries are used which
+ − 6626 have been configured in an Ispell affix file. (For example, umlauts
+ − 6627 can be encoded as \\\"a, a\\\", \"a, ...) Defaults are ~tex and ~nroff
+ − 6628 in English. This has the same effect as the command-line `-T' option.
+ − 6629 The buffer Major Mode controls Ispell's parsing in tex or nroff mode,
+ − 6630 but the dictionary can control the extended character mode.
+ − 6631 Both defaults can be overruled in a buffer-local fashion. See
+ − 6632 `ispell-parsing-keyword' for details on this.
+ − 6633
+ − 6634 Note that the CASECHARS and OTHERCHARS slots of the alist should
+ − 6635 contain the same character set as casechars and otherchars in the
+ − 6636 language.aff file (e.g., english.aff).")
+ − 6637
+ − 6638 (defvar ispell-menu-map nil "\
+ − 6639 Key map for ispell menu")
+ − 6640
+ − 6641 (defvar ispell-menu-xemacs nil "\
+ − 6642 Spelling menu for XEmacs.")
+ − 6643
+ − 6644 (defconst ispell-menu-map-needed (and (not ispell-menu-map) (string-lessp "19" emacs-version) (not (string-match "XEmacs" emacs-version))))
+ − 6645
+ − 6646 (if ispell-menu-map-needed (let ((dicts (reverse (cons (cons "default" nil) ispell-dictionary-alist))) name) (setq ispell-menu-map (make-sparse-keymap "Spell")) (while dicts (setq name (car (car dicts)) dicts (cdr dicts)) (if (stringp name) (define-key ispell-menu-map (vector (intern name)) (cons (concat "Select " (capitalize name)) (list 'lambda nil '(interactive) (list 'ispell-change-dictionary name))))))))
+ − 6647
+ − 6648 (if ispell-menu-map-needed (progn (define-key ispell-menu-map [ispell-change-dictionary] '("Change Dictionary" . ispell-change-dictionary)) (define-key ispell-menu-map [ispell-kill-ispell] '("Kill Process" . ispell-kill-ispell)) (define-key ispell-menu-map [ispell-pdict-save] '("Save Dictionary" lambda nil (interactive) (ispell-pdict-save t t))) (define-key ispell-menu-map [ispell-complete-word] '("Complete Word" . ispell-complete-word)) (define-key ispell-menu-map [ispell-complete-word-interior-frag] '("Complete Word Frag" . ispell-complete-word-interior-frag))))
+ − 6649
+ − 6650 (if ispell-menu-map-needed (progn (define-key ispell-menu-map [ispell-continue] '("Continue Check" . ispell-continue)) (define-key ispell-menu-map [ispell-word] '("Check Word" . ispell-word)) (define-key ispell-menu-map [ispell-region] '("Check Region" . ispell-region)) (define-key ispell-menu-map [ispell-buffer] '("Check Buffer" . ispell-buffer))))
+ − 6651
+ − 6652 (if ispell-menu-map-needed (progn (define-key ispell-menu-map [ispell-message] '("Check Message" . ispell-message)) (define-key ispell-menu-map [ispell-help] '("Help" lambda nil (interactive) (describe-function 'ispell-help))) (put 'ispell-region 'menu-enable 'mark-active) (fset 'ispell-menu-map (symbol-value 'ispell-menu-map))))
+ − 6653
+ − 6654 (defvar ispell-local-pdict ispell-personal-dictionary "\
+ − 6655 A buffer local variable containing the current personal dictionary.
+ − 6656 If non-nil, the value must be a string, which is a file name.
+ − 6657
+ − 6658 If you specify a personal dictionary for the current buffer which is
+ − 6659 different from the current personal dictionary, the effect is similar
+ − 6660 to calling \\[ispell-change-dictionary]. This variable is automatically
+ − 6661 set when defined in the file with either `ispell-pdict-keyword' or the
+ − 6662 local variable syntax.")
+ − 6663
+ − 6664 (define-key global-map [(meta ?\$)] 'ispell-word)
+ − 6665
+ − 6666 (autoload 'ispell-word "ispell" "\
+ − 6667 Check spelling of word under or before the cursor.
+ − 6668 If the word is not found in dictionary, display possible corrections
+ − 6669 in a window allowing you to choose one.
+ − 6670
+ − 6671 With a prefix argument (or if CONTINUE is non-nil),
+ − 6672 resume interrupted spell-checking of a buffer or region.
+ − 6673
+ − 6674 If optional argument FOLLOWING is non-nil or if `ispell-following-word'
+ − 6675 is non-nil when called interactively, then the following word
+ − 6676 \(rather than preceding) is checked when the cursor is not over a word.
+ − 6677 When the optional argument QUIETLY is non-nil or `ispell-quietly' is non-nil
+ − 6678 when called interactively, non-corrective messages are suppressed.
+ − 6679
+ − 6680 Word syntax described by `ispell-dictionary-alist' (which see).
+ − 6681
+ − 6682 This will check or reload the dictionary. Use \\[ispell-change-dictionary]
+ − 6683 or \\[ispell-region] to update the Ispell process." t nil)
+ − 6684
+ − 6685 (autoload 'ispell-help "ispell" "\
+ − 6686 Display a list of the options available when a misspelling is encountered.
+ − 6687
+ − 6688 Selections are:
+ − 6689
+ − 6690 DIGIT: Replace the word with a digit offered in the *Choices* buffer.
+ − 6691 SPC: Accept word this time.
+ − 6692 `i': Accept word and insert into private dictionary.
+ − 6693 `a': Accept word for this session.
+ − 6694 `A': Accept word and place in `buffer-local dictionary'.
+ − 6695 `r': Replace word with typed-in value. Rechecked.
+ − 6696 `R': Replace word with typed-in value. Query-replaced in buffer. Rechecked.
+ − 6697 `?': Show these commands.
+ − 6698 `x': Exit spelling buffer. Move cursor to original point.
+ − 6699 `X': Exit spelling buffer. Leaves cursor at the current point, and permits
+ − 6700 the aborted check to be completed later.
+ − 6701 `q': Quit spelling session (Kills ispell process).
+ − 6702 `l': Look up typed-in replacement in alternate dictionary. Wildcards okay.
+ − 6703 `u': Like `i', but the word is lower-cased first.
+ − 6704 `m': Like `i', but allows one to include dictionary completion information.
+ − 6705 `C-l': redraws screen
+ − 6706 `C-r': recursive edit
+ − 6707 `C-z': suspend emacs or iconify frame" nil nil)
+ − 6708
+ − 6709 (autoload 'ispell-kill-ispell "ispell" "\
+ − 6710 Kill current Ispell process (so that you may start a fresh one).
+ − 6711 With NO-ERROR, just return non-nil if there was no Ispell running." t nil)
+ − 6712
+ − 6713 (autoload 'ispell-change-dictionary "ispell" "\
+ − 6714 Change `ispell-dictionary' (q.v.) and kill old Ispell process.
+ − 6715 A new one will be started as soon as necessary.
+ − 6716
+ − 6717 By just answering RET you can find out what the current dictionary is.
+ − 6718
+ − 6719 With prefix argument, set the default directory." t nil)
+ − 6720
+ − 6721 (autoload 'ispell-region "ispell" "\
+ − 6722 Interactively check a region for spelling errors." t nil)
+ − 6723
+ − 6724 (autoload 'ispell-buffer "ispell" "\
+ − 6725 Check the current buffer for spelling errors interactively." t nil)
+ − 6726
+ − 6727 (autoload 'ispell-continue "ispell" nil t nil)
+ − 6728
+ − 6729 (autoload 'ispell-complete-word "ispell" "\
+ − 6730 Look up word before or under point in dictionary (see lookup-words command)
+ − 6731 and try to complete it. If optional INTERIOR-FRAG is non-nil then the word
+ − 6732 may be a character sequence inside of a word.
+ − 6733
+ − 6734 Standard ispell choices are then available." t nil)
+ − 6735
+ − 6736 (autoload 'ispell-complete-word-interior-frag "ispell" "\
+ − 6737 Completes word matching character sequence inside a word." t nil)
+ − 6738
+ − 6739 (autoload 'ispell-minor-mode "ispell" "\
+ − 6740 Toggle Ispell minor mode.
+ − 6741 With prefix arg, turn Ispell minor mode on iff arg is positive.
+ − 6742
+ − 6743 In Ispell minor mode, pressing SPC or RET
+ − 6744 warns you if the previous word is incorrectly spelled." t nil)
+ − 6745
+ − 6746 (autoload 'ispell-message "ispell" "\
+ − 6747 Check the spelling of a mail message or news post.
+ − 6748 Don't check spelling of message headers except the Subject field.
+ − 6749 Don't check included messages.
+ − 6750
+ − 6751 To abort spell checking of a message region and send the message anyway,
+ − 6752 use the `x' or `q' command. (Any subsequent regions will be checked.)
+ − 6753 The `X' command aborts the message send so that you can edit the buffer.
+ − 6754
+ − 6755 To spell-check whenever a message is sent, include the appropriate lines
+ − 6756 in your .emacs file:
+ − 6757 (add-hook 'message-send-hook 'ispell-message)
+ − 6758 (add-hook 'mail-send-hook 'ispell-message)
+ − 6759 (add-hook 'mh-before-send-letter-hook 'ispell-message)
+ − 6760
+ − 6761 You can bind this to the key C-c i in GNUS or mail by adding to
+ − 6762 `news-reply-mode-hook' or `mail-mode-hook' the following lambda expression:
+ − 6763 (function (lambda () (local-set-key \"\\C-ci\" 'ispell-message)))" t nil)
+ − 6764
+ − 6765 ;;;***
+ − 6766
+ − 6767 ;;;### (autoloads (jka-compr-install toggle-auto-compression jka-compr-load) "jka-compr" "packages/jka-compr.el")
+ − 6768
+ − 6769 (autoload 'jka-compr-load "jka-compr" "\
+ − 6770 Documented as original." nil nil)
+ − 6771
+ − 6772 (autoload 'toggle-auto-compression "jka-compr" "\
+ − 6773 Toggle automatic file compression and uncompression.
+ − 6774 With prefix argument ARG, turn auto compression on if positive, else off.
+ − 6775 Returns the new status of auto compression (non-nil means on).
+ − 6776 If the argument MESSAGE is non-nil, it means to print a message
+ − 6777 saying whether the mode is now on or off." t nil)
+ − 6778
+ − 6779 (autoload 'jka-compr-install "jka-compr" "\
+ − 6780 Install jka-compr.
+ − 6781 This adds entries to `file-name-handler-alist' and `auto-mode-alist'
+ − 6782 and `inhibit-first-line-modes-suffixes'." nil nil)
+ − 6783
+ − 6784 ;;;***
+ − 6785
+ − 6786 ;;;### (autoloads (turn-on-lazy-lock lazy-lock-mode) "lazy-lock" "packages/lazy-lock.el")
+ − 6787
+ − 6788 (defvar lazy-lock-mode nil)
+ − 6789
+ − 6790 (autoload 'lazy-lock-mode "lazy-lock" "\
+ − 6791 Toggle Lazy Lock mode.
+ − 6792 With arg, turn Lazy Lock mode on if and only if arg is positive and the buffer
+ − 6793 is at least `lazy-lock-minimum-size' characters long.
+ − 6794
+ − 6795 When Lazy Lock mode is enabled, fontification is demand-driven and stealthy:
+ − 6796
+ − 6797 - Fontification occurs in visible parts of buffers when necessary.
+ − 6798 Occurs if there is no input after pausing for `lazy-lock-continuity-time'.
+ − 6799
+ − 6800 - Fontification occurs in invisible parts when Emacs has been idle.
+ − 6801 Occurs if there is no input after pausing for `lazy-lock-stealth-time'.
+ − 6802
+ − 6803 If `lazy-lock-hide-invisible' is non-nil, text is not displayed until it is
+ − 6804 fontified, otherwise it is displayed in `lazy-lock-invisible-foreground'.
+ − 6805
+ − 6806 See also variables `lazy-lock-walk-windows' and `lazy-lock-ignore-commands' for
+ − 6807 window (scroll) fontification, and `lazy-lock-stealth-lines',
+ − 6808 `lazy-lock-stealth-nice' and `lazy-lock-stealth-verbose' for stealth
+ − 6809 fontification.
+ − 6810
+ − 6811 Use \\[lazy-lock-submit-bug-report] to send bug reports or feedback." t nil)
+ − 6812
+ − 6813 (autoload 'turn-on-lazy-lock "lazy-lock" "\
+ − 6814 Unconditionally turn on Lazy Lock mode." nil nil)
+ − 6815
+ − 6816 (add-minor-mode 'lazy-lock-mode " Lazy")
+ − 6817
+ − 6818 ;;;***
+ − 6819
+ − 6820 ;;;### (autoloads (ledit-from-lisp-mode ledit-mode) "ledit" "packages/ledit.el")
+ − 6821
+ − 6822 (defconst ledit-save-files t "\
+ − 6823 *Non-nil means Ledit should save files before transferring to Lisp.")
+ − 6824
+ − 6825 (defconst ledit-go-to-lisp-string "%?lisp" "\
+ − 6826 *Shell commands to execute to resume Lisp job.")
+ − 6827
+ − 6828 (defconst ledit-go-to-liszt-string "%?liszt" "\
+ − 6829 *Shell commands to execute to resume Lisp compiler job.")
+ − 6830
+ − 6831 (autoload 'ledit-mode "ledit" "\
+ − 6832 \\<ledit-mode-map>Major mode for editing text and stuffing it to a Lisp job.
+ − 6833 Like Lisp mode, plus these special commands:
+ − 6834 \\[ledit-save-defun] -- record defun at or after point
+ − 6835 for later transmission to Lisp job.
+ − 6836 \\[ledit-save-region] -- record region for later transmission to Lisp job.
+ − 6837 \\[ledit-go-to-lisp] -- transfer to Lisp job and transmit saved text.
+ − 6838 \\[ledit-go-to-liszt] -- transfer to Liszt (Lisp compiler) job
+ − 6839 and transmit saved text.
+ − 6840 \\{ledit-mode-map}
+ − 6841 To make Lisp mode automatically change to Ledit mode,
+ − 6842 do (setq lisp-mode-hook 'ledit-from-lisp-mode)" t nil)
+ − 6843
+ − 6844 (autoload 'ledit-from-lisp-mode "ledit" nil nil nil)
+ − 6845
+ − 6846 ;;;***
+ − 6847
+ − 6848 ;;;### (autoloads (print-region lpr-region print-buffer lpr-buffer) "lpr" "packages/lpr.el")
+ − 6849
+ − 6850 (defvar lpr-switches nil "\
+ − 6851 *List of strings to pass as extra options for the printer program.
+ − 6852 See `lpr-command'.")
+ − 6853
+ − 6854 (defvar lpr-command (if (memq system-type '(usg-unix-v dgux hpux irix)) "lp" "lpr") "\
+ − 6855 *Name of program for printing a file.")
+ − 6856
+ − 6857 (autoload 'lpr-buffer "lpr" "\
+ − 6858 Print buffer contents as with Unix command `lpr'.
+ − 6859 `lpr-switches' is a list of extra switches (strings) to pass to lpr." t nil)
+ − 6860
+ − 6861 (autoload 'print-buffer "lpr" "\
+ − 6862 Print buffer contents as with Unix command `lpr -p'.
+ − 6863 `lpr-switches' is a list of extra switches (strings) to pass to lpr." t nil)
+ − 6864
+ − 6865 (autoload 'lpr-region "lpr" "\
+ − 6866 Print region contents as with Unix command `lpr'.
+ − 6867 `lpr-switches' is a list of extra switches (strings) to pass to lpr." t nil)
+ − 6868
+ − 6869 (autoload 'print-region "lpr" "\
+ − 6870 Print region contents as with Unix command `lpr -p'.
+ − 6871 `lpr-switches' is a list of extra switches (strings) to pass to lpr." t nil)
+ − 6872
+ − 6873 ;;;***
+ − 6874
+ − 6875 ;;;### (autoloads (make-command-summary) "makesum" "packages/makesum.el")
+ − 6876
+ − 6877 (autoload 'make-command-summary "makesum" "\
+ − 6878 Make a summary of current key bindings in the buffer *Summary*.
+ − 6879 Previous contents of that buffer are killed first." t nil)
+ − 6880
+ − 6881 ;;;***
+ − 6882
+ − 6883 ;;;### (autoloads (manual-entry) "man" "packages/man.el")
+ − 6884
+ − 6885 (autoload 'manual-entry "man" "\
+ − 6886 Display the Unix manual entry (or entries) for TOPIC.
+ − 6887 If prefix arg is given, modify the search according to the value:
+ − 6888 2 = complement default exact matching of the TOPIC name;
+ − 6889 exact matching default is specified by `Manual-match-topic-exactly'
+ − 6890 3 = force a search of the unformatted man directories
+ − 6891 4 = both 2 and 3
+ − 6892 The manual entries are searched according to the variable
+ − 6893 Manual-directory-list, which should be a list of directories. If
+ − 6894 Manual-directory-list is nil, \\[Manual-directory-list-init] is
+ − 6895 invoked to create this list from the MANPATH environment variable.
+ − 6896 See the variable Manual-topic-buffer which controls how the buffer
+ − 6897 is named. See also the variables Manual-match-topic-exactly,
+ − 6898 Manual-query-multiple-pages, and Manual-buffer-view-mode." t nil)
+ − 6899
+ − 6900 ;;;***
+ − 6901
+ − 6902 ;;;### (autoloads (metamail-region metamail-buffer metamail-interpret-body metamail-interpret-header) "metamail" "packages/metamail.el")
+ − 6903
+ − 6904 (autoload 'metamail-interpret-header "metamail" "\
+ − 6905 Interpret a header part of a MIME message in current buffer.
+ − 6906 Its body part is not interpreted at all." t nil)
+ − 6907
+ − 6908 (autoload 'metamail-interpret-body "metamail" "\
+ − 6909 Interpret a body part of a MIME message in current buffer.
+ − 6910 Optional argument VIEWMODE specifies the value of the
+ − 6911 EMACS_VIEW_MODE environment variable (defaulted to 1).
+ − 6912 Optional argument NODISPLAY non-nil means buffer is not
+ − 6913 redisplayed as output is inserted.
+ − 6914 Its header part is not interpreted at all." t nil)
+ − 6915
+ − 6916 (autoload 'metamail-buffer "metamail" "\
+ − 6917 Process current buffer through `metamail'.
+ − 6918 Optional argument VIEWMODE specifies the value of the
+ − 6919 EMACS_VIEW_MODE environment variable (defaulted to 1).
+ − 6920 Optional argument BUFFER specifies a buffer to be filled (nil
+ − 6921 means current).
+ − 6922 Optional argument NODISPLAY non-nil means buffer is not
+ − 6923 redisplayed as output is inserted." t nil)
+ − 6924
+ − 6925 (autoload 'metamail-region "metamail" "\
+ − 6926 Process current region through 'metamail'.
+ − 6927 Optional argument VIEWMODE specifies the value of the
+ − 6928 EMACS_VIEW_MODE environment variable (defaulted to 1).
+ − 6929 Optional argument BUFFER specifies a buffer to be filled (nil
+ − 6930 means current).
+ − 6931 Optional argument NODISPLAY non-nil means buffer is not
+ − 6932 redisplayed as output is inserted." t nil)
+ − 6933
+ − 6934 ;;;***
+ − 6935
+ − 6936 ;;;### (autoloads (blink-paren paren-set-mode) "paren" "packages/paren.el")
+ − 6937
+ − 6938 (defvar paren-mode nil "\
+ − 6939 *Sets the style of parenthesis highlighting.
+ − 6940 Valid values are nil, `blink-paren', `paren', and `sexp'.
+ − 6941 nil no parenthesis highlighting.
+ − 6942 blink-paren causes the matching paren to blink.
+ − 6943 paren causes the matching paren to be highlighted but not to blink.
+ − 6944 sexp whole expression enclosed by the local paren at its mate.
+ − 6945 nested (not yet implemented) use variable shading to see the
+ − 6946 nesting of an expression. Also groks regular expressions
+ − 6947 and shell quoting.
+ − 6948
+ − 6949 This variable is global by default, but you can make it buffer-local and
+ − 6950 highlight parentheses differrently in different major modes.")
+ − 6951
+ − 6952 (autoload 'paren-set-mode "paren" "\
+ − 6953 Cycles through possible values for `paren-mode', force off with negative arg.
+ − 6954 When called from lisp, a symbolic value for `paren-mode' can be pased directly.
+ − 6955 See also `paren-mode' and `paren-highlight'." t nil)
+ − 6956
+ − 6957 (make-obsolete 'blink-paren 'paren-set-mode)
+ − 6958
+ − 6959 (autoload 'blink-paren "paren" "\
+ − 6960 Obsolete. Use `paren-set-mode' instead." t nil)
+ − 6961
+ − 6962 ;;;***
+ − 6963
+ − 6964 ;;;### (autoloads (pending-delete pending-delete-off pending-delete-on) "pending-del" "packages/pending-del.el")
+ − 6965
+ − 6966 (autoload 'pending-delete-on "pending-del" "\
+ − 6967 Turn on pending delete.
+ − 6968 When it is ON, typed text replaces the selection if the selection is active.
+ − 6969 When it is OFF, typed text is just inserted at point." t nil)
+ − 6970
+ − 6971 (autoload 'pending-delete-off "pending-del" "\
+ − 6972 Turn off pending delete.
+ − 6973 When it is ON, typed text replaces the selection if the selection is active.
+ − 6974 When it is OFF, typed text is just inserted at point." t nil)
+ − 6975
+ − 6976 (autoload 'pending-delete "pending-del" "\
+ − 6977 Toggle automatic deletion of the selected region.
+ − 6978 With a positive argument, turns it on.
+ − 6979 With a non-positive argument, turns it off.
+ − 6980 When active, typed text replaces the selection." t nil)
+ − 6981
+ − 6982 ;;;***
+ − 6983
+ − 6984 ;;;### (autoloads (ps-despool ps-spool-region-with-faces ps-spool-region ps-spool-buffer-with-faces ps-spool-buffer ps-print-region-with-faces ps-print-region ps-print-buffer-with-faces ps-print-buffer) "ps-print" "packages/ps-print.el")
+ − 6985
+ − 6986 (defvar ps-paper-type 'ps-letter "\
+ − 6987 *Specifies the size of paper to format for. Should be one of
+ − 6988 `ps-letter', `ps-legal', or `ps-a4'.")
+ − 6989
+ − 6990 (defvar ps-print-color-p (and (or (fboundp 'x-color-values) (fboundp 'color-instance-rgb-components)) (fboundp 'float)) "\
+ − 6991 *If non-nil, print the buffer's text in color.")
+ − 6992
+ − 6993 (autoload 'ps-print-buffer "ps-print" "\
+ − 6994 Generate and print a PostScript image of the buffer.
+ − 6995
+ − 6996 When called with a numeric prefix argument (C-u), prompts the user for
+ − 6997 the name of a file to save the PostScript image in, instead of sending
+ − 6998 it to the printer.
+ − 6999
+ − 7000 More specifically, the FILENAME argument is treated as follows: if it
+ − 7001 is nil, send the image to the printer. If FILENAME is a string, save
+ − 7002 the PostScript image in a file with that name. If FILENAME is a
+ − 7003 number, prompt the user for the name of the file to save in." t nil)
+ − 7004
+ − 7005 (autoload 'ps-print-buffer-with-faces "ps-print" "\
+ − 7006 Generate and print a PostScript image of the buffer.
+ − 7007 Like `ps-print-buffer', but includes font, color, and underline
+ − 7008 information in the generated image. This command works only if you
+ − 7009 are using a window system, so it has a way to determine color values." t nil)
+ − 7010
+ − 7011 (autoload 'ps-print-region "ps-print" "\
+ − 7012 Generate and print a PostScript image of the region.
+ − 7013 Like `ps-print-buffer', but prints just the current region." t nil)
+ − 7014
+ − 7015 (autoload 'ps-print-region-with-faces "ps-print" "\
+ − 7016 Generate and print a PostScript image of the region.
+ − 7017 Like `ps-print-region', but includes font, color, and underline
+ − 7018 information in the generated image. This command works only if you
+ − 7019 are using a window system, so it has a way to determine color values." t nil)
+ − 7020
+ − 7021 (autoload 'ps-spool-buffer "ps-print" "\
+ − 7022 Generate and spool a PostScript image of the buffer.
+ − 7023 Like `ps-print-buffer' except that the PostScript image is saved in a
+ − 7024 local buffer to be sent to the printer later.
+ − 7025
+ − 7026 Use the command `ps-despool' to send the spooled images to the printer." t nil)
+ − 7027
+ − 7028 (autoload 'ps-spool-buffer-with-faces "ps-print" "\
+ − 7029 Generate and spool a PostScript image of the buffer.
+ − 7030 Like `ps-spool-buffer', but includes font, color, and underline
+ − 7031 information in the generated image. This command works only if you
+ − 7032 are using a window system, so it has a way to determine color values.
+ − 7033
+ − 7034 Use the command `ps-despool' to send the spooled images to the printer." t nil)
+ − 7035
+ − 7036 (autoload 'ps-spool-region "ps-print" "\
+ − 7037 Generate a PostScript image of the region and spool locally.
+ − 7038 Like `ps-spool-buffer', but spools just the current region.
+ − 7039
+ − 7040 Use the command `ps-despool' to send the spooled images to the printer." t nil)
+ − 7041
+ − 7042 (autoload 'ps-spool-region-with-faces "ps-print" "\
+ − 7043 Generate a PostScript image of the region and spool locally.
+ − 7044 Like `ps-spool-region', but includes font, color, and underline
+ − 7045 information in the generated image. This command works only if you
+ − 7046 are using a window system, so it has a way to determine color values.
+ − 7047
+ − 7048 Use the command `ps-despool' to send the spooled images to the printer." t nil)
+ − 7049
+ − 7050 (autoload 'ps-despool "ps-print" "\
+ − 7051 Send the spooled PostScript to the printer.
+ − 7052
+ − 7053 When called with a numeric prefix argument (C-u), prompt the user for
+ − 7054 the name of a file to save the spooled PostScript in, instead of sending
+ − 7055 it to the printer.
+ − 7056
+ − 7057 More specifically, the FILENAME argument is treated as follows: if it
+ − 7058 is nil, send the image to the printer. If FILENAME is a string, save
+ − 7059 the PostScript image in a file with that name. If FILENAME is a
+ − 7060 number, prompt the user for the name of the file to save in." t nil)
+ − 7061
+ − 7062 ;;;***
+ − 7063
+ − 7064 ;;;### (autoloads (remote-compile) "rcompile" "packages/rcompile.el")
+ − 7065
+ − 7066 (autoload 'remote-compile "rcompile" "\
+ − 7067 Compile the current buffer's directory on HOST. Log in as USER.
+ − 7068 See \\[compile]." t nil)
+ − 7069
+ − 7070 ;;;***
+ − 7071
+ − 7072 ;;;### (autoloads (resume-suspend-hook) "resume" "packages/resume.el")
+ − 7073
+ − 7074 (autoload 'resume-suspend-hook "resume" "\
+ − 7075 Clear out the file used for transmitting args when Emacs resumes." nil nil)
+ − 7076
+ − 7077 ;;;***
+ − 7078
+ − 7079 ;;;### (autoloads nil "server" "packages/server.el")
+ − 7080
+ − 7081 (make-obsolete 'server-start 'gnuserv-start)
+ − 7082
+ − 7083 ;;;***
+ − 7084
+ − 7085 ;;;### (autoloads (install-shell-fonts) "shell-font" "packages/shell-font.el")
+ − 7086
+ − 7087 (autoload 'install-shell-fonts "shell-font" "\
+ − 7088 Decorate the current interaction buffer with fonts.
+ − 7089 This uses the faces called `shell-prompt', `shell-input' and `shell-output';
+ − 7090 you can alter the graphical attributes of those with the normal
+ − 7091 face-manipulation functions." nil nil)
+ − 7092
+ − 7093 ;;;***
+ − 7094
+ − 7095 ;;;### (autoloads (spell-string spell-region spell-word spell-buffer) "spell" "packages/spell.el")
+ − 7096
+ − 7097 (put 'spell-filter 'risky-local-variable t)
+ − 7098
+ − 7099 (autoload 'spell-buffer "spell" "\
+ − 7100 Check spelling of every word in the buffer.
+ − 7101 For each incorrect word, you are asked for the correct spelling
+ − 7102 and then put into a query-replace to fix some or all occurrences.
+ − 7103 If you do not want to change a word, just give the same word
+ − 7104 as its \"correct\" spelling; then the query replace is skipped." t nil)
+ − 7105
+ − 7106 (autoload 'spell-word "spell" "\
+ − 7107 Check spelling of word at or before point.
+ − 7108 If it is not correct, ask user for the correct spelling
+ − 7109 and `query-replace' the entire buffer to substitute it." t nil)
+ − 7110
+ − 7111 (autoload 'spell-region "spell" "\
+ − 7112 Like `spell-buffer' but applies only to region.
+ − 7113 Used in a program, applies from START to END.
+ − 7114 DESCRIPTION is an optional string naming the unit being checked:
+ − 7115 for example, \"word\"." t nil)
+ − 7116
+ − 7117 (autoload 'spell-string "spell" "\
+ − 7118 Check spelling of string supplied as argument." t nil)
+ − 7119
+ − 7120 ;;;***
+ − 7121
+ − 7122 ;;;### (autoloads (tar-mode) "tar-mode" "packages/tar-mode.el")
+ − 7123
+ − 7124 (autoload 'tar-mode "tar-mode" "\
+ − 7125 Major mode for viewing a tar file as a dired-like listing of its contents.
+ − 7126 You can move around using the usual cursor motion commands.
+ − 7127 Letters no longer insert themselves.
+ − 7128 Type 'e' to pull a file out of the tar file and into its own buffer.
+ − 7129 Type 'c' to copy an entry from the tar file into another file on disk.
+ − 7130
+ − 7131 If you edit a sub-file of this archive (as with the 'e' command) and
+ − 7132 save it with Control-X Control-S, the contents of that buffer will be
+ − 7133 saved back into the tar-file buffer; in this way you can edit a file
+ − 7134 inside of a tar archive without extracting it and re-archiving it.
+ − 7135
+ − 7136 See also: variables tar-update-datestamp and tar-anal-blocksize.
+ − 7137 \\{tar-mode-map}" nil nil)
+ − 7138
+ − 7139 ;;;***
+ − 7140
+ − 7141 ;;;### (autoloads (terminal-emulator) "terminal" "packages/terminal.el")
+ − 7142
+ − 7143 (autoload 'terminal-emulator "terminal" "\
+ − 7144 Under a display-terminal emulator in BUFFER, run PROGRAM on arguments ARGS.
+ − 7145 ARGS is a list of argument-strings. Remaining arguments are WIDTH and HEIGHT.
+ − 7146 BUFFER's contents are made an image of the display generated by that program,
+ − 7147 and any input typed when BUFFER is the current Emacs buffer is sent to that
+ − 7148 program an keyboard input.
+ − 7149
+ − 7150 Interactively, BUFFER defaults to \"*terminal*\" and PROGRAM and ARGS
+ − 7151 are parsed from an input-string using your usual shell.
+ − 7152 WIDTH and HEIGHT are determined from the size of the current window
+ − 7153 -- WIDTH will be one less than the window's width, HEIGHT will be its height.
+ − 7154
+ − 7155 To switch buffers and leave the emulator, or to give commands
+ − 7156 to the emulator itself (as opposed to the program running under it),
+ − 7157 type Control-^. The following character is an emulator command.
+ − 7158 Type Control-^ twice to send it to the subprogram.
+ − 7159 This escape character may be changed using the variable `terminal-escape-char'.
+ − 7160
+ − 7161 `Meta' characters may not currently be sent through the terminal emulator.
+ − 7162
+ − 7163 Here is a list of some of the variables which control the behaviour
+ − 7164 of the emulator -- see their documentation for more information:
+ − 7165 terminal-escape-char, terminal-scrolling, terminal-more-processing,
+ − 7166 terminal-redisplay-interval.
+ − 7167
+ − 7168 This function calls the value of terminal-mode-hook if that exists
+ − 7169 and is non-nil after the terminal buffer has been set up and the
+ − 7170 subprocess started.
+ − 7171
+ − 7172 Presently with `termcap' only; if somebody sends us code to make this
+ − 7173 work with `terminfo' we will try to use it." t nil)
+ − 7174
+ − 7175 ;;;***
+ − 7176
+ − 7177 ;;;### (autoloads (batch-texinfo-format texinfo-format-region texinfo-format-buffer) "texinfmt" "packages/texinfmt.el")
+ − 7178
+ − 7179 (autoload 'texinfo-format-buffer "texinfmt" "\
+ − 7180 Process the current buffer as texinfo code, into an Info file.
+ − 7181 The Info file output is generated in a buffer visiting the Info file
+ − 7182 names specified in the @setfilename command.
+ − 7183
+ − 7184 Non-nil argument (prefix, if interactive) means don't make tag table
+ − 7185 and don't split the file if large. You can use Info-tagify and
+ − 7186 Info-split to do these manually." t nil)
+ − 7187
+ − 7188 (autoload 'texinfo-format-region "texinfmt" "\
+ − 7189 Convert the current region of the Texinfo file to Info format.
+ − 7190 This lets you see what that part of the file will look like in Info.
+ − 7191 The command is bound to \\[texinfo-format-region]. The text that is
+ − 7192 converted to Info is stored in a temporary buffer." t nil)
+ − 7193
+ − 7194 (autoload 'batch-texinfo-format "texinfmt" "\
+ − 7195 Runs texinfo-format-buffer on the files remaining on the command line.
+ − 7196 Must be used only with -batch, and kills emacs on completion.
+ − 7197 Each file will be processed even if an error occurred previously.
+ − 7198 For example, invoke
+ − 7199 \"emacs -batch -funcall batch-texinfo-format $docs/ ~/*.texinfo\"." nil nil)
+ − 7200
+ − 7201 ;;;***
+ − 7202
+ − 7203 ;;;### (autoloads (texinfo-sequential-node-update texinfo-every-node-update texinfo-update-node) "texnfo-upd" "packages/texnfo-upd.el")
+ − 7204
+ − 7205 (autoload 'texinfo-update-node "texnfo-upd" "\
+ − 7206 Without any prefix argument, update the node in which point is located.
+ − 7207 Non-nil argument (prefix, if interactive) means update the nodes in the
+ − 7208 marked region.
+ − 7209
+ − 7210 The functions for creating or updating nodes and menus, and their
+ − 7211 keybindings, are:
+ − 7212
+ − 7213 texinfo-update-node (&optional region-p) \\[texinfo-update-node]
+ − 7214 texinfo-every-node-update () \\[texinfo-every-node-update]
+ − 7215 texinfo-sequential-node-update (&optional region-p)
+ − 7216
+ − 7217 texinfo-make-menu (&optional region-p) \\[texinfo-make-menu]
+ − 7218 texinfo-all-menus-update () \\[texinfo-all-menus-update]
+ − 7219 texinfo-master-menu ()
+ − 7220
+ − 7221 texinfo-indent-menu-description (column &optional region-p)
+ − 7222
+ − 7223 The `texinfo-column-for-description' variable specifies the column to
+ − 7224 which menu descriptions are indented. Its default value is 32." t nil)
+ − 7225
+ − 7226 (autoload 'texinfo-every-node-update "texnfo-upd" "\
+ − 7227 Update every node in a Texinfo file." t nil)
+ − 7228
+ − 7229 (autoload 'texinfo-sequential-node-update "texnfo-upd" "\
+ − 7230 Update one node (or many) in a Texinfo file with sequential pointers.
+ − 7231
+ − 7232 This function causes the `Next' or `Previous' pointer to point to the
+ − 7233 immediately preceding or following node, even if it is at a higher or
+ − 7234 lower hierarchical level in the document. Continually pressing `n' or
+ − 7235 `p' takes you straight through the file.
+ − 7236
+ − 7237 Without any prefix argument, update the node in which point is located.
+ − 7238 Non-nil argument (prefix, if interactive) means update the nodes in the
+ − 7239 marked region.
+ − 7240
+ − 7241 This command makes it awkward to navigate among sections and
+ − 7242 subsections; it should be used only for those documents that are meant
+ − 7243 to be read like a novel rather than a reference, and for which the
+ − 7244 Info `g*' command is inadequate." t nil)
+ − 7245
+ − 7246 ;;;***
+ − 7247
+ − 7248 ;;;### (autoloads (time-stamp-toggle-active time-stamp) "time-stamp" "packages/time-stamp.el")
+ − 7249
+ − 7250 (autoload 'time-stamp "time-stamp" "\
+ − 7251 Update the time stamp string in the buffer.
+ − 7252 If you put a time stamp template anywhere in the first 8 lines of a file,
+ − 7253 it can be updated every time you save the file. See the top of
+ − 7254 `time-stamp.el' for a sample. The template looks like one of the following:
+ − 7255 Time-stamp: <>
+ − 7256 Time-stamp: \" \"
+ − 7257 The time stamp is written between the brackets or quotes, resulting in
+ − 7258 Time-stamp: <95/01/18 10:20:51 gildea>
+ − 7259 Only does its thing if the variable time-stamp-active is non-nil.
+ − 7260 Typically used on write-file-hooks for automatic time-stamping.
+ − 7261 The format of the time stamp is determined by the variable time-stamp-format.
+ − 7262 The variables time-stamp-line-limit, time-stamp-start, and time-stamp-end
+ − 7263 control finding the template." t nil)
+ − 7264
+ − 7265 (autoload 'time-stamp-toggle-active "time-stamp" "\
+ − 7266 Toggle time-stamp-active, setting whether \\[time-stamp] updates a buffer.
+ − 7267 With arg, turn time stamping on if and only if arg is positive." t nil)
+ − 7268
+ − 7269 ;;;***
+ − 7270
+ − 7271 ;;;### (autoloads (display-time) "time" "packages/time.el")
+ − 7272
+ − 7273 (defvar display-time-day-and-date nil "\
+ − 7274 *Non-nil means \\[display-time] should display day and date as well as time.")
+ − 7275
+ − 7276 (autoload 'display-time "time" "\
+ − 7277 Display current time, load level, and mail flag in mode line of each buffer.
+ − 7278 Updates automatically every minute.
+ − 7279 If `display-time-day-and-date' is non-nil, the current day and date
+ − 7280 are displayed as well.
+ − 7281 After each update, `display-time-hook' is run with `run-hooks'.
+ − 7282 If `display-time-echo-area' is non-nil, the time is displayed in the
+ − 7283 echo area instead of in the mode-line." t nil)
+ − 7284
+ − 7285 ;;;***
+ − 7286
+ − 7287 ;;;### (autoloads (ununderline-and-unoverstrike-region overstrike-region unoverstrike-region ununderline-region underline-region) "underline" "packages/underline.el")
+ − 7288
+ − 7289 (autoload 'underline-region "underline" "\
+ − 7290 Underline all nonblank characters in the region.
+ − 7291 Works by overstriking underscores.
+ − 7292 Called from program, takes two arguments START and END
+ − 7293 which specify the range to operate on." t nil)
+ − 7294
+ − 7295 (autoload 'ununderline-region "underline" "\
+ − 7296 Remove all underlining (overstruck underscores) in the region.
+ − 7297 Called from program, takes two arguments START and END
+ − 7298 which specify the range to operate on." t nil)
+ − 7299
+ − 7300 (autoload 'unoverstrike-region "underline" "\
+ − 7301 Remove all overstriking (character-backspace-character) in the region.
+ − 7302 Called from program, takes two arguments START and END which specify the
+ − 7303 range to operate on." t nil)
+ − 7304
+ − 7305 (autoload 'overstrike-region "underline" "\
+ − 7306 Overstrike (character-backspace-character) all nonblank characters in
+ − 7307 the region. Called from program, takes two arguments START and END which
+ − 7308 specify the range to operate on." t nil)
+ − 7309
+ − 7310 (autoload 'ununderline-and-unoverstrike-region "underline" "\
+ − 7311 Remove underlining and overstriking in the region. Called from a program,
+ − 7312 takes two arguments START and END which specify the range to operate on." t nil)
+ − 7313
+ − 7314 ;;;***
+ − 7315
+ − 7316 ;;;### (autoloads (ask-to-update-copyright update-copyright) "upd-copyr" "packages/upd-copyr.el")
+ − 7317
+ − 7318 (defvar copyright-do-not-disturb "Free Software Foundation, Inc." "\
+ − 7319 *If non-nil, the existing copyright holder is checked against this regexp.
+ − 7320 If it does not match, then a new copyright line is added with the copyright
+ − 7321 holder set to the value of `copyright-whoami'.")
+ − 7322
+ − 7323 (defvar copyright-whoami nil "\
+ − 7324 *A string containing the name of the owner of new copyright notices.")
+ − 7325
+ − 7326 (defvar copyright-notice-file nil "\
+ − 7327 *If non-nil, replace copying notices with this file.")
+ − 7328
+ − 7329 (autoload 'update-copyright "upd-copyr" "\
+ − 7330 Update the copyright notice at the beginning of the buffer
+ − 7331 to indicate the current year. If optional arg REPLACE is given
+ − 7332 \(interactively, with prefix arg) replace the years in the notice
+ − 7333 rather than adding the current year after them.
+ − 7334 If `copyright-notice-file' is set, the copying permissions following the
+ − 7335 copyright are replaced as well.
+ − 7336
+ − 7337 If optional third argument ASK is non-nil, the user is prompted for whether
+ − 7338 or not to update the copyright. If optional fourth argument ASK-YEAR is
+ − 7339 non-nil, the user is prompted for whether or not to replace the year rather
+ − 7340 than adding to it." t nil)
+ − 7341
+ − 7342 (autoload 'ask-to-update-copyright "upd-copyr" "\
+ − 7343 If the current buffer contains a copyright notice that is out of date,
+ − 7344 ask the user if it should be updated with `update-copyright' (which see).
+ − 7345 Put this on write-file-hooks." nil nil)
+ − 7346
+ − 7347 ;;;***
+ − 7348
+ − 7349 ;;;### (autoloads (vc-update-change-log vc-rename-this-file vc-rename-file vc-cancel-version vc-revert-buffer vc-print-log vc-retrieve-snapshot vc-create-snapshot vc-directory vc-insert-headers vc-version-other-window vc-version-diff vc-diff vc-register vc-next-action vc-file-status) "vc" "packages/vc.el")
+ − 7350
+ − 7351 (defvar vc-checkin-hook nil "\
+ − 7352 *List of functions called after a checkin is done. See `run-hooks'.")
+ − 7353
+ − 7354 (autoload 'vc-file-status "vc" "\
+ − 7355 Display the current status of the file being visited.
+ − 7356 Currently, this is only defined for CVS. The information provided in the
+ − 7357 modeline is generally sufficient for RCS and SCCS." t nil)
+ − 7358
+ − 7359 (autoload 'vc-next-action "vc" "\
+ − 7360 Do the next logical checkin or checkout operation on the current file.
+ − 7361
+ − 7362 For RCS and SCCS files:
+ − 7363 If the file is not already registered, this registers it for version
+ − 7364 control and then retrieves a writable, locked copy for editing.
+ − 7365 If the file is registered and not locked by anyone, this checks out
+ − 7366 a writable and locked file ready for editing.
+ − 7367 If the file is checked out and locked by the calling user, this
+ − 7368 first checks to see if the file has changed since checkout. If not,
+ − 7369 it performs a revert.
+ − 7370 If the file has been changed, this pops up a buffer for entry
+ − 7371 of a log message; when the message has been entered, it checks in the
+ − 7372 resulting changes along with the log message as change commentary. If
+ − 7373 the variable `vc-keep-workfiles' is non-nil (which is its default), a
+ − 7374 read-only copy of the changed file is left in place afterwards.
+ − 7375 If the file is registered and locked by someone else, you are given
+ − 7376 the option to steal the lock.
+ − 7377
+ − 7378 For CVS files:
+ − 7379 If the file is not already registered, this registers it for version
+ − 7380 control. This does a \"cvs add\", but no \"cvs commit\".
+ − 7381 If the file is added but not committed, it is committed.
+ − 7382 If the file has not been changed, neither in your working area or
+ − 7383 in the repository, a message is printed and nothing is done.
+ − 7384 If your working file is changed, but the repository file is
+ − 7385 unchanged, this pops up a buffer for entry of a log message; when the
+ − 7386 message has been entered, it checks in the resulting changes along
+ − 7387 with the logmessage as change commentary. A writable file is retained.
+ − 7388 If the repository file is changed, you are asked if you want to
+ − 7389 merge in the changes into your working copy.
+ − 7390
+ − 7391 The following is true regardless of which version control system you
+ − 7392 are using:
+ − 7393
+ − 7394 If you call this from within a VC dired buffer with no files marked,
+ − 7395 it will operate on the file in the current line.
+ − 7396 If you call this from within a VC dired buffer, and one or more
+ − 7397 files are marked, it will accept a log message and then operate on
+ − 7398 each one. The log message will be used as a comment for any register
+ − 7399 or checkin operations, but ignored when doing checkouts. Attempted
+ − 7400 lock steals will raise an error.
+ − 7401
+ − 7402 For checkin, a prefix argument lets you specify the version number to use." t nil)
+ − 7403
+ − 7404 (autoload 'vc-register "vc" "\
+ − 7405 Register the current file into your version-control system." t nil)
+ − 7406
+ − 7407 (autoload 'vc-diff "vc" "\
+ − 7408 Display diffs between file versions.
+ − 7409 Normally this compares the current file and buffer with the most recent
+ − 7410 checked in version of that file. This uses no arguments.
+ − 7411 With a prefix argument, it reads the file name to use
+ − 7412 and two version designators specifying which versions to compare." t nil)
+ − 7413
+ − 7414 (autoload 'vc-version-diff "vc" "\
+ − 7415 For FILE, report diffs between two stored versions REL1 and REL2 of it.
+ − 7416 If FILE is a directory, generate diffs between versions for all registered
+ − 7417 files in or below it." t nil)
+ − 7418
+ − 7419 (autoload 'vc-version-other-window "vc" "\
+ − 7420 Visit version REV of the current buffer in another window.
+ − 7421 If the current buffer is named `F', the version is named `F.~REV~'.
+ − 7422 If `F.~REV~' already exists, it is used instead of being re-created." t nil)
+ − 7423
+ − 7424 (autoload 'vc-insert-headers "vc" "\
+ − 7425 Insert headers in a file for use with your version-control system.
+ − 7426 Headers desired are inserted at the start of the buffer, and are pulled from
+ − 7427 the variable `vc-header-alist'." t nil)
+ − 7428
+ − 7429 (autoload 'vc-directory "vc" "\
+ − 7430 Show version-control status of all files in the directory DIR.
+ − 7431 If the second argument VERBOSE is non-nil, show all files;
+ − 7432 otherwise show only files that current locked in the version control system.
+ − 7433 Interactively, supply a prefix arg to make VERBOSE non-nil.
+ − 7434
+ − 7435 If the optional third argument NESTED is non-nil,
+ − 7436 scan the entire tree of subdirectories of the current directory." t nil)
+ − 7437
+ − 7438 (autoload 'vc-create-snapshot "vc" "\
+ − 7439 Make a snapshot called NAME.
+ − 7440 The snapshot is made from all registered files at or below the current
+ − 7441 directory. For each file, the version level of its latest
+ − 7442 version becomes part of the named configuration." t nil)
+ − 7443
+ − 7444 (autoload 'vc-retrieve-snapshot "vc" "\
+ − 7445 Retrieve the snapshot called NAME.
+ − 7446 This function fails if any files are locked at or below the current directory
+ − 7447 Otherwise, all registered files are checked out (unlocked) at their version
+ − 7448 levels in the snapshot." t nil)
+ − 7449
+ − 7450 (autoload 'vc-print-log "vc" "\
+ − 7451 List the change log of the current buffer in a window." t nil)
+ − 7452
+ − 7453 (autoload 'vc-revert-buffer "vc" "\
+ − 7454 Revert the current buffer's file back to the latest checked-in version.
+ − 7455 This asks for confirmation if the buffer contents are not identical
+ − 7456 to that version.
+ − 7457 If the back-end is CVS, this will give you the most recent revision of
+ − 7458 the file on the branch you are editing." t nil)
+ − 7459
+ − 7460 (autoload 'vc-cancel-version "vc" "\
+ − 7461 Get rid of most recently checked in version of this file.
+ − 7462 A prefix argument means do not revert the buffer afterwards." t nil)
+ − 7463
+ − 7464 (autoload 'vc-rename-file "vc" "\
+ − 7465 Rename file OLD to NEW, and rename its master file likewise." t nil)
+ − 7466
+ − 7467 (autoload 'vc-rename-this-file "vc" nil t nil)
+ − 7468
+ − 7469 (autoload 'vc-update-change-log "vc" "\
+ − 7470 Find change log file and add entries from recent RCS logs.
+ − 7471 The mark is left at the end of the text prepended to the change log.
+ − 7472 With prefix arg of C-u, only find log entries for the current buffer's file.
+ − 7473 With any numeric prefix arg, find log entries for all files currently visited.
+ − 7474 Otherwise, find log entries for all registered files in the default directory.
+ − 7475 From a program, any arguments are passed to the `rcs2log' script." t nil)
+ − 7476
+ − 7477 ;;;***
+ − 7478
+ − 7479 ;;;### (autoloads (webster-spell webster-endings webster) "webster" "packages/webster.el")
+ − 7480
+ − 7481 (autoload 'webster "webster" "\
+ − 7482 Look up a word in the Webster's dictionary.
+ − 7483 Open a network login connection to a webster host if necessary.
+ − 7484 Communication with host is recorded in a buffer *webster*." t nil)
+ − 7485
+ − 7486 (autoload 'webster-endings "webster" "\
+ − 7487 Look up endings for a word in the Webster's dictionary.
+ − 7488 Open a network login connection to a webster host if necessary.
+ − 7489 Communication with host is recorded in a buffer *webster*." t nil)
+ − 7490
+ − 7491 (autoload 'webster-spell "webster" "\
+ − 7492 Look spelling for a word in the Webster's dictionary.
+ − 7493 Open a network login connection to a webster host if necessary.
+ − 7494 Communication with host is recorded in a buffer *webster*." t nil)
+ − 7495
+ − 7496 ;;;***
+ − 7497
+ − 7498 ;;;### (autoloads (run-scheme) "xscheme" "packages/xscheme.el")
+ − 7499
+ − 7500 (defvar scheme-program-name "scheme" "\
+ − 7501 *Program invoked by the `run-scheme' command.")
+ − 7502
+ − 7503 (defvar scheme-band-name nil "\
+ − 7504 *Band loaded by the `run-scheme' command.")
+ − 7505
+ − 7506 (defvar scheme-program-arguments nil "\
+ − 7507 *Arguments passed to the Scheme program by the `run-scheme' command.")
+ − 7508
+ − 7509 (autoload 'run-scheme "xscheme" "\
+ − 7510 Run an inferior Scheme process.
+ − 7511 Output goes to the buffer `*scheme*'.
+ − 7512 With argument, asks for a command line." t nil)
+ − 7513
+ − 7514 ;;;***
+ − 7515
+ − 7516 ;;;### (autoloads (pcl-cvs-fontify) "pcl-cvs-xemacs" "pcl-cvs/pcl-cvs-xemacs.el")
+ − 7517
+ − 7518 (autoload 'pcl-cvs-fontify "pcl-cvs-xemacs" nil nil nil)
+ − 7519
+ − 7520 ;;;***
+ − 7521
+ − 7522 ;;;### (autoloads (cvs-update-other-window cvs-update) "pcl-cvs" "pcl-cvs/pcl-cvs.el")
+ − 7523
+ − 7524 (autoload 'cvs-update "pcl-cvs" "\
+ − 7525 Run a 'cvs update' in the current working directory. Feed the
+ − 7526 output to a *cvs* buffer and run cvs-mode on it.
+ − 7527 If optional prefix argument LOCAL is non-nil, 'cvs update -l' is run." t nil)
+ − 7528
+ − 7529 (autoload 'cvs-update-other-window "pcl-cvs" "\
+ − 7530 Run a 'cvs update' in the current working directory. Feed the
+ − 7531 output to a *cvs* buffer, display it in the other window, and run
+ − 7532 cvs-mode on it.
+ − 7533
+ − 7534 If optional prefix argument LOCAL is non-nil, 'cvs update -l' is run." t nil)
+ − 7535
+ − 7536 ;;;***
+ − 7537
+ − 7538 ;;;### (autoloads (about-xemacs) "about" "prim/about.el")
+ − 7539
+ − 7540 (autoload 'about-xemacs "about" nil t nil)
+ − 7541
+ − 7542 ;;;***
+ − 7543
+ − 7544 ;;;### (autoloads (all-hail-emacs all-hail-xemacs praise-be-unto-emacs praise-be-unto-xemacs) "advocacy" "prim/advocacy.el")
+ − 7545
+ − 7546 (defvar xemacs-praise-sound-file "sounds/im_so_happy.au" "\
+ − 7547 The name of an audio file containing something to play
+ − 7548 when praising XEmacs")
+ − 7549
+ − 7550 (defvar xemacs-praise-message "All Hail XEmacs!\n" "\
+ − 7551 What to praise XEmacs with")
+ − 7552
+ − 7553 (autoload 'praise-be-unto-xemacs "advocacy" "\
+ − 7554 All Hail XEmacs!" t nil)
+ − 7555
+ − 7556 (autoload 'praise-be-unto-emacs "advocacy" nil t nil)
+ − 7557
+ − 7558 (autoload 'all-hail-xemacs "advocacy" "\
+ − 7559 All Hail XEmacs!" t nil)
+ − 7560
+ − 7561 (autoload 'all-hail-emacs "advocacy" nil t nil)
+ − 7562
+ − 7563 ;;;***
+ − 7564
+ − 7565 ;;;### (autoloads (describe-buffer-case-table) "case-table" "prim/case-table.el")
+ − 7566
+ − 7567 (autoload 'describe-buffer-case-table "case-table" "\
+ − 7568 Describe the case table of the current buffer." t nil)
+ − 7569
+ − 7570 ;;;***
+ − 7571
+ − 7572 ;;;### (autoloads (cancel-debug-on-entry debug-on-entry debug) "debug" "prim/debug.el")
+ − 7573
+ − 7574 (autoload 'debug "debug" "\
+ − 7575 Enter debugger. To return, type \\<debugger-mode-map>`\\[debugger-continue]'.
+ − 7576 Arguments are mainly for use when this is called from the internals
+ − 7577 of the evaluator.
+ − 7578
+ − 7579 You may call with no args, or you may pass nil as the first arg and
+ − 7580 any other args you like. In that case, the list of args after the
+ − 7581 first will be printed into the backtrace buffer." t nil)
+ − 7582
+ − 7583 (autoload 'debug-on-entry "debug" "\
+ − 7584 Request FUNCTION to invoke debugger each time it is called.
+ − 7585 If you tell the debugger to continue, FUNCTION's execution proceeds.
+ − 7586 This works by modifying the definition of FUNCTION,
+ − 7587 which must be written in Lisp, not predefined.
+ − 7588 Use \\[cancel-debug-on-entry] to cancel the effect of this command.
+ − 7589 Redefining FUNCTION also cancels it." t nil)
+ − 7590
+ − 7591 (autoload 'cancel-debug-on-entry "debug" "\
+ − 7592 Undo effect of \\[debug-on-entry] on FUNCTION.
+ − 7593 If argument is nil or an empty string, cancel for all functions." t nil)
+ − 7594
+ − 7595 ;;;***
+ − 7596
+ − 7597 ;;;### (autoloads (standard-display-european standard-display-underline standard-display-graphic standard-display-g1 standard-display-ascii standard-display-default standard-display-8bit make-display-table describe-current-display-table) "disp-table" "prim/disp-table.el")
+ − 7598
+ − 7599 (autoload 'describe-current-display-table "disp-table" "\
+ − 7600 Describe the display table in use in the selected window and buffer." t nil)
+ − 7601
+ − 7602 (autoload 'make-display-table "disp-table" "\
+ − 7603 Return a new, empty display table." nil nil)
+ − 7604
+ − 7605 (autoload 'standard-display-8bit "disp-table" "\
+ − 7606 Display characters in the range L to H literally." nil nil)
+ − 7607
+ − 7608 (autoload 'standard-display-default "disp-table" "\
+ − 7609 Display characters in the range L to H using the default notation." nil nil)
+ − 7610
+ − 7611 (autoload 'standard-display-ascii "disp-table" "\
+ − 7612 Display character C using printable string S." nil nil)
+ − 7613
+ − 7614 (autoload 'standard-display-g1 "disp-table" "\
+ − 7615 Display character C as character SC in the g1 character set.
+ − 7616 This function assumes that your terminal uses the SO/SI characters;
+ − 7617 it is meaningless for an X frame." nil nil)
+ − 7618
+ − 7619 (autoload 'standard-display-graphic "disp-table" "\
+ − 7620 Display character C as character GC in graphics character set.
+ − 7621 This function assumes VT100-compatible escapes; it is meaningless for an
+ − 7622 X frame." nil nil)
+ − 7623
+ − 7624 (autoload 'standard-display-underline "disp-table" "\
+ − 7625 Display character C as character UC plus underlining." nil nil)
+ − 7626
+ − 7627 (autoload 'standard-display-european "disp-table" "\
+ − 7628 Toggle display of European characters encoded with ISO 8859.
+ − 7629 When enabled, characters in the range of 160 to 255 display not
+ − 7630 as octal escapes, but as accented characters.
+ − 7631 With prefix argument, enable European character display iff arg is positive." t nil)
+ − 7632
+ − 7633 ;;;***
+ − 7634
+ − 7635 ;;;### (autoloads (setenv) "env" "prim/env.el")
+ − 7636
+ − 7637 (autoload 'setenv "env" "\
+ − 7638 Set the value of the environment variable named VARIABLE to VALUE.
+ − 7639 VARIABLE should be a string. VALUE is optional; if not provided or is
+ − 7640 `nil', the environment variable VARIABLE will be removed.
+ − 7641
+ − 7642 Interactively, a prefix argument means to unset the variable.
+ − 7643 Interactively, the current value (if any) of the variable
+ − 7644 appears at the front of the history list when you type in the new value.
+ − 7645
+ − 7646 This function works by modifying `process-environment'." t nil)
+ − 7647
+ − 7648 ;;;***
+ − 7649
+ − 7650 ;;;### (autoloads nil "itimer" "prim/itimer.el")
+ − 7651
+ − 7652 ;;;***
+ − 7653
+ − 7654 ;;;### (autoloads nil "loaddefs" "prim/loaddefs.el")
+ − 7655
+ − 7656 ;;;***
+ − 7657
+ − 7658 ;;;### (autoloads (apply-macro-to-region-lines kbd-macro-query insert-kbd-macro name-last-kbd-macro) "macros" "prim/macros.el")
+ − 7659
+ − 7660 (autoload 'name-last-kbd-macro "macros" "\
+ − 7661 Assign a name to the last keyboard macro defined.
+ − 7662 Argument SYMBOL is the name to define.
+ − 7663 The symbol's function definition becomes the keyboard macro string.
+ − 7664 Such a \"function\" cannot be called from Lisp, but it is a valid
+ − 7665 editor command." t nil)
+ − 7666
+ − 7667 (autoload 'insert-kbd-macro "macros" "\
+ − 7668 Insert in buffer the definition of kbd macro NAME, as Lisp code.
+ − 7669 Optional second argument KEYS means also record the keys it is on
+ − 7670 \(this is the prefix argument, when calling interactively).
+ − 7671
+ − 7672 This Lisp code will, when executed, define the kbd macro with the
+ − 7673 same definition it has now. If you say to record the keys,
+ − 7674 the Lisp code will also rebind those keys to the macro.
+ − 7675 Only global key bindings are recorded since executing this Lisp code
+ − 7676 always makes global bindings.
+ − 7677
+ − 7678 To save a kbd macro, visit a file of Lisp code such as your `~/.emacs',
+ − 7679 use this command, and then save the file." t nil)
+ − 7680
+ − 7681 (autoload 'kbd-macro-query "macros" "\
+ − 7682 Query user during kbd macro execution.
+ − 7683 With prefix argument, enters recursive edit,
+ − 7684 reading keyboard commands even within a kbd macro.
+ − 7685 You can give different commands each time the macro executes.
+ − 7686 Without prefix argument, asks whether to continue running the macro.
+ − 7687 Your options are: \\<query-replace-map>
+ − 7688 \\[act] Finish this iteration normally and continue with the next.
+ − 7689 \\[skip] Skip the rest of this iteration, and start the next.
+ − 7690 \\[exit] Stop the macro entirely right now.
+ − 7691 \\[recenter] Redisplay the frame, then ask again.
+ − 7692 \\[edit] Enter recursive edit; ask again when you exit from that." t nil)
+ − 7693
+ − 7694 (autoload 'apply-macro-to-region-lines "macros" "\
+ − 7695 For each complete line between point and mark, move to the beginning
+ − 7696 of the line, and run the last keyboard macro.
+ − 7697
+ − 7698 When called from lisp, this function takes two arguments TOP and
+ − 7699 BOTTOM, describing the current region. TOP must be before BOTTOM.
+ − 7700 The optional third argument MACRO specifies a keyboard macro to
+ − 7701 execute.
+ − 7702
+ − 7703 This is useful for quoting or unquoting included text, adding and
+ − 7704 removing comments, or producing tables where the entries are regular.
+ − 7705
+ − 7706 For example, in Usenet articles, sections of text quoted from another
+ − 7707 author are indented, or have each line start with `>'. To quote a
+ − 7708 section of text, define a keyboard macro which inserts `>', put point
+ − 7709 and mark at opposite ends of the quoted section, and use
+ − 7710 `\\[apply-macro-to-region-lines]' to mark the entire section.
+ − 7711
+ − 7712 Suppose you wanted to build a keyword table in C where each entry
+ − 7713 looked like this:
+ − 7714
+ − 7715 { \"foo\", foo_data, foo_function },
+ − 7716 { \"bar\", bar_data, bar_function },
+ − 7717 { \"baz\", baz_data, baz_function },
+ − 7718
+ − 7719 You could enter the names in this format:
+ − 7720
+ − 7721 foo
+ − 7722 bar
+ − 7723 baz
+ − 7724
+ − 7725 and write a macro to massage a word into a table entry:
+ − 7726
+ − 7727 \\C-x (
+ − 7728 \\M-d { \"\\C-y\", \\C-y_data, \\C-y_function },
+ − 7729 \\C-x )
+ − 7730
+ − 7731 and then select the region of un-tablified names and use
+ − 7732 `\\[apply-macro-to-region-lines]' to build the table from the names.
+ − 7733 " t nil)
+ − 7734
+ − 7735 ;;;***
+ − 7736
+ − 7737 ;;;### (autoloads (disable-command enable-command disabled-command-hook) "novice" "prim/novice.el")
+ − 7738
+ − 7739 (autoload 'disabled-command-hook "novice" nil nil nil)
+ − 7740
+ − 7741 (autoload 'enable-command "novice" "\
+ − 7742 Allow COMMAND to be executed without special confirmation from now on.
+ − 7743 The user's .emacs file is altered so that this will apply
+ − 7744 to future sessions." t nil)
+ − 7745
+ − 7746 (autoload 'disable-command "novice" "\
+ − 7747 Require special confirmation to execute COMMAND from now on.
+ − 7748 The user's .emacs file is altered so that this will apply
+ − 7749 to future sessions." t nil)
+ − 7750
+ − 7751 ;;;***
+ − 7752
+ − 7753 ;;;### (autoloads (edit-options list-options) "options" "prim/options.el")
+ − 7754
+ − 7755 (autoload 'list-options "options" "\
+ − 7756 Display a list of XEmacs user options, with values and documentation." t nil)
+ − 7757
+ − 7758 (autoload 'edit-options "options" "\
+ − 7759 Edit a list of XEmacs user option values.
+ − 7760 Selects a buffer containing such a list,
+ − 7761 in which there are commands to set the option values.
+ − 7762 Type \\[describe-mode] in that buffer for a list of commands." t nil)
+ − 7763
+ − 7764 ;;;***
+ − 7765
+ − 7766 ;;;### (autoloads (clear-rectangle string-rectangle open-rectangle insert-rectangle yank-rectangle kill-rectangle extract-rectangle delete-extract-rectangle delete-rectangle) "rect" "prim/rect.el")
+ − 7767
+ − 7768 (autoload 'delete-rectangle "rect" "\
+ − 7769 Delete (don't save) text in rectangle with point and mark as corners.
+ − 7770 The same range of columns is deleted in each line starting with the line
+ − 7771 where the region begins and ending with the line where the region ends." t nil)
+ − 7772
+ − 7773 (autoload 'delete-extract-rectangle "rect" "\
+ − 7774 Delete contents of rectangle and return it as a list of strings.
+ − 7775 Arguments START and END are the corners of the rectangle.
+ − 7776 The value is list of strings, one for each line of the rectangle." nil nil)
+ − 7777
+ − 7778 (autoload 'extract-rectangle "rect" "\
+ − 7779 Return contents of rectangle with corners at START and END.
+ − 7780 Value is list of strings, one for each line of the rectangle." nil nil)
+ − 7781
+ − 7782 (defvar killed-rectangle nil "\
+ − 7783 Rectangle for yank-rectangle to insert.")
+ − 7784
+ − 7785 (autoload 'kill-rectangle "rect" "\
+ − 7786 Delete rectangle with corners at point and mark; save as last killed one.
+ − 7787 Calling from program, supply two args START and END, buffer positions.
+ − 7788 But in programs you might prefer to use `delete-extract-rectangle'." t nil)
+ − 7789
+ − 7790 (autoload 'yank-rectangle "rect" "\
+ − 7791 Yank the last killed rectangle with upper left corner at point." t nil)
+ − 7792
+ − 7793 (autoload 'insert-rectangle "rect" "\
+ − 7794 Insert text of RECTANGLE with upper left corner at point.
+ − 7795 RECTANGLE's first line is inserted at point, its second
+ − 7796 line is inserted at a point vertically under point, etc.
+ − 7797 RECTANGLE should be a list of strings.
+ − 7798 After this command, the mark is at the upper left corner
+ − 7799 and point is at the lower right corner." nil nil)
+ − 7800
+ − 7801 (autoload 'open-rectangle "rect" "\
+ − 7802 Blank out rectangle with corners at point and mark, shifting text right.
+ − 7803 The text previously in the region is not overwritten by the blanks,
+ − 7804 but instead winds up to the right of the rectangle." t nil)
+ − 7805
+ − 7806 (autoload 'string-rectangle "rect" "\
+ − 7807 Insert STRING on each line of the region-rectangle, shifting text right.
+ − 7808 The left edge of the rectangle specifies the column for insertion.
+ − 7809 This command does not delete or overwrite any existing text.
+ − 7810
+ − 7811 Called from a program, takes three args; START, END and STRING." t nil)
+ − 7812
+ − 7813 (autoload 'clear-rectangle "rect" "\
+ − 7814 Blank out rectangle with corners at point and mark.
+ − 7815 The text previously in the region is overwritten by the blanks.
+ − 7816 When called from a program, requires two args which specify the corners." t nil)
+ − 7817
+ − 7818 ;;;***
+ − 7819
+ − 7820 ;;;### (autoloads (reposition-window) "reposition" "prim/reposition.el")
+ − 7821
+ − 7822 (autoload 'reposition-window "reposition" "\
+ − 7823 Make the current definition and/or comment visible.
+ − 7824 Further invocations move it to the top of the window or toggle the
+ − 7825 visibility of comments that precede it.
+ − 7826 Point is left unchanged unless prefix ARG is supplied.
+ − 7827 If the definition is fully onscreen, it is moved to the top of the
+ − 7828 window. If it is partly offscreen, the window is scrolled to get the
+ − 7829 definition (or as much as will fit) onscreen, unless point is in a comment
+ − 7830 which is also partly offscreen, in which case the scrolling attempts to get
+ − 7831 as much of the comment onscreen as possible.
+ − 7832 Initially `reposition-window' attempts to make both the definition and
+ − 7833 preceding comments visible. Further invocations toggle the visibility of
+ − 7834 the comment lines.
+ − 7835 If ARG is non-nil, point may move in order to make the whole defun
+ − 7836 visible (if only part could otherwise be made so), to make the defun line
+ − 7837 visible (if point is in code and it could not be made so, or if only
+ − 7838 comments, including the first comment line, are visible), or to make the
+ − 7839 first comment line visible (if point is in a comment)." t nil)
+ − 7840
+ − 7841 ;;;***
+ − 7842
+ − 7843 ;;;### (autoloads (reverse-region sort-columns sort-regexp-fields sort-fields sort-float-fields sort-numeric-fields sort-pages sort-paragraphs sort-lines sort-subr) "sort" "prim/sort.el")
+ − 7844
+ − 7845 (autoload 'sort-subr "sort" "\
+ − 7846 General text sorting routine to divide buffer into records and sort them.
+ − 7847 Arguments are REVERSE NEXTRECFUN ENDRECFUN &optional STARTKEYFUN ENDKEYFUN.
+ − 7848
+ − 7849 We divide the accessible portion of the buffer into disjoint pieces
+ − 7850 called sort records. A portion of each sort record (perhaps all of
+ − 7851 it) is designated as the sort key. The records are rearranged in the
+ − 7852 buffer in order by their sort keys. The records may or may not be
+ − 7853 contiguous.
+ − 7854
+ − 7855 Usually the records are rearranged in order of ascending sort key.
+ − 7856 If REVERSE is non-nil, they are rearranged in order of descending sort key.
+ − 7857 The variable `sort-fold-case' determines whether alphabetic case affects
+ − 7858 the sort order.
+ − 7859
+ − 7860 The next four arguments are functions to be called to move point
+ − 7861 across a sort record. They will be called many times from within sort-subr.
+ − 7862
+ − 7863 NEXTRECFUN is called with point at the end of the previous record.
+ − 7864 It moves point to the start of the next record.
+ − 7865 It should move point to the end of the buffer if there are no more records.
+ − 7866 The first record is assumed to start at the position of point when sort-subr
+ − 7867 is called.
+ − 7868
+ − 7869 ENDRECFUN is called with point within the record.
+ − 7870 It should move point to the end of the record.
+ − 7871
+ − 7872 STARTKEYFUN moves from the start of the record to the start of the key.
+ − 7873 It may return either a non-nil value to be used as the key, or
+ − 7874 else the key is the substring between the values of point after
+ − 7875 STARTKEYFUN and ENDKEYFUN are called. If STARTKEYFUN is nil, the key
+ − 7876 starts at the beginning of the record.
+ − 7877
+ − 7878 ENDKEYFUN moves from the start of the sort key to the end of the sort key.
+ − 7879 ENDKEYFUN may be nil if STARTKEYFUN returns a value or if it would be the
+ − 7880 same as ENDRECFUN." nil nil)
+ − 7881
+ − 7882 (autoload 'sort-lines "sort" "\
+ − 7883 Sort lines in region alphabetically; argument means descending order.
+ − 7884 Called from a program, there are three arguments:
+ − 7885 REVERSE (non-nil means reverse order), BEG and END (region to sort).
+ − 7886 The variable `sort-fold-case' determines whether alphabetic case affects
+ − 7887 the sort order." t nil)
+ − 7888
+ − 7889 (autoload 'sort-paragraphs "sort" "\
+ − 7890 Sort paragraphs in region alphabetically; argument means descending order.
+ − 7891 Called from a program, there are three arguments:
+ − 7892 REVERSE (non-nil means reverse order), BEG and END (region to sort).
+ − 7893 The variable `sort-fold-case' determines whether alphabetic case affects
+ − 7894 the sort order." t nil)
+ − 7895
+ − 7896 (autoload 'sort-pages "sort" "\
+ − 7897 Sort pages in region alphabetically; argument means descending order.
+ − 7898 Called from a program, there are three arguments:
+ − 7899 REVERSE (non-nil means reverse order), BEG and END (region to sort).
+ − 7900 The variable `sort-fold-case' determines whether alphabetic case affects
+ − 7901 the sort order." t nil)
+ − 7902
+ − 7903 (autoload 'sort-numeric-fields "sort" "\
+ − 7904 Sort lines in region numerically by the ARGth field of each line.
+ − 7905 Fields are separated by whitespace and numbered from 1 up.
+ − 7906 Specified field must contain a number in each line of the region.
+ − 7907 With a negative arg, sorts by the ARGth field counted from the right.
+ − 7908 Called from a program, there are three arguments:
+ − 7909 FIELD, BEG and END. BEG and END specify region to sort.
+ − 7910 The variable `sort-fold-case' determines whether alphabetic case affects
+ − 7911 the sort order.
+ − 7912 If you want to sort floating-point numbers, try `sort-float-fields'." t nil)
+ − 7913
+ − 7914 (autoload 'sort-float-fields "sort" "\
+ − 7915 Sort lines in region numerically by the ARGth field of each line.
+ − 7916 Fields are separated by whitespace and numbered from 1 up. Specified field
+ − 7917 must contain a floating point number in each line of the region. With a
+ − 7918 negative arg, sorts by the ARGth field counted from the right. Called from a
+ − 7919 program, there are three arguments: FIELD, BEG and END. BEG and END specify
+ − 7920 region to sort." t nil)
+ − 7921
+ − 7922 (autoload 'sort-fields "sort" "\
+ − 7923 Sort lines in region lexicographically by the ARGth field of each line.
+ − 7924 Fields are separated by whitespace and numbered from 1 up.
+ − 7925 With a negative arg, sorts by the ARGth field counted from the right.
+ − 7926 Called from a program, there are three arguments:
+ − 7927 FIELD, BEG and END. BEG and END specify region to sort." t nil)
+ − 7928
+ − 7929 (autoload 'sort-regexp-fields "sort" "\
+ − 7930 Sort the region lexicographically as specified by RECORD-REGEXP and KEY.
+ − 7931 RECORD-REGEXP specifies the textual units which should be sorted.
+ − 7932 For example, to sort lines RECORD-REGEXP would be \"^.*$\"
+ − 7933 KEY specifies the part of each record (ie each match for RECORD-REGEXP)
+ − 7934 is to be used for sorting.
+ − 7935 If it is \"\\\\digit\" then the digit'th \"\\\\(...\\\\)\" match field from
+ − 7936 RECORD-REGEXP is used.
+ − 7937 If it is \"\\\\&\" then the whole record is used.
+ − 7938 Otherwise, it is a regular-expression for which to search within the record.
+ − 7939 If a match for KEY is not found within a record then that record is ignored.
+ − 7940
+ − 7941 With a negative prefix arg sorts in reverse order.
+ − 7942
+ − 7943 The variable `sort-fold-case' determines whether alphabetic case affects
+ − 7944 the sort order.
+ − 7945
+ − 7946 For example: to sort lines in the region by the first word on each line
+ − 7947 starting with the letter \"f\",
+ − 7948 RECORD-REGEXP would be \"^.*$\" and KEY would be \"\\\\=\\<f\\\\w*\\\\>\"" t nil)
+ − 7949
+ − 7950 (autoload 'sort-columns "sort" "\
+ − 7951 Sort lines in region alphabetically by a certain range of columns.
+ − 7952 For the purpose of this command, the region includes
+ − 7953 the entire line that point is in and the entire line the mark is in.
+ − 7954 The column positions of point and mark bound the range of columns to sort on.
+ − 7955 A prefix argument means sort into reverse order.
+ − 7956 The variable `sort-fold-case' determines whether alphabetic case affects
+ − 7957 the sort order.
+ − 7958
+ − 7959 Note that `sort-columns' rejects text that contains tabs,
+ − 7960 because tabs could be split across the specified columns
+ − 7961 and it doesn't know how to handle that. Also, when possible,
+ − 7962 it uses the `sort' utility program, which doesn't understand tabs.
+ − 7963 Use \\[untabify] to convert tabs to spaces before sorting." t nil)
+ − 7964
+ − 7965 (autoload 'reverse-region "sort" "\
+ − 7966 Reverse the order of lines in a region.
+ − 7967 From a program takes two point or marker arguments, BEG and END." t nil)
+ − 7968
+ − 7969 ;;;***
+ − 7970
+ − 7971 ;;;### (autoloads (load-default-sounds load-sound-file) "sound" "prim/sound.el")
+ − 7972
+ − 7973 (or sound-alist (setq sound-alist '((ready nil) (warp nil))))
+ − 7974
+ − 7975 (autoload 'load-sound-file "sound" "\
+ − 7976 Read in an audio-file and add it to the sound-alist.
+ − 7977
+ − 7978 You can only play sound files if you are running on display 0 of the console
+ − 7979 of a Sun SparcStation, SGI machine, or HP9000s700, or running a NetAudio
+ − 7980 server. The sound file must be in the Sun/NeXT U-LAW format." t nil)
+ − 7981
+ − 7982 (autoload 'load-default-sounds "sound" "\
+ − 7983 Load and install some sound files as beep-types.
+ − 7984 This only works if you're on display 0 of a Sun SparcStation, SGI machine,
+ − 7985 or HP9000s700, or running a NetAudio server." t nil)
+ − 7986
+ − 7987 ;;;***
+ − 7988
+ − 7989 ;;;### (autoloads (tabify untabify) "tabify" "prim/tabify.el")
+ − 7990
+ − 7991 (autoload 'untabify "tabify" "\
+ − 7992 Convert all tabs in region to multiple spaces, preserving columns.
+ − 7993 Called non-interactively, the region is specified by arguments
+ − 7994 START and END, rather than by the position of point and mark.
+ − 7995 The variable `tab-width' controls the spacing of tab stops." t nil)
+ − 7996
+ − 7997 (autoload 'tabify "tabify" "\
+ − 7998 Convert multiple spaces in region to tabs when possible.
+ − 7999 A group of spaces is partially replaced by tabs
+ − 8000 when this can be done without changing the column they end at.
+ − 8001 Called non-interactively, the region is specified by arguments
+ − 8002 START and END, rather than by the position of point and mark.
+ − 8003 The variable `tab-width' controls the spacing of tab stops." t nil)
+ − 8004
+ − 8005 ;;;***
+ − 8006
+ − 8007 ;;;### (autoloads (ask-user-about-supersession-threat ask-user-about-lock) "userlock" "prim/userlock.el")
+ − 8008
+ − 8009 (autoload 'ask-user-about-lock "userlock" "\
+ − 8010 Ask user what to do when he wants to edit FILE but it is locked by USER.
+ − 8011 This function has a choice of three things to do:
+ − 8012 do (signal 'file-locked (list FILE USER))
+ − 8013 to refrain from editing the file
+ − 8014 return t (grab the lock on the file)
+ − 8015 return nil (edit the file even though it is locked).
+ − 8016 You can rewrite it to use any criterion you like to choose which one to do." nil nil)
+ − 8017
+ − 8018 (autoload 'ask-user-about-supersession-threat "userlock" "\
+ − 8019 Ask a user who is about to modify an obsolete buffer what to do.
+ − 8020 This function has two choices: it can return, in which case the modification
+ − 8021 of the buffer will proceed, or it can (signal 'file-supersession (file)),
+ − 8022 in which case the proposed buffer modification will not be made.
+ − 8023
+ − 8024 You can rewrite this to use any criterion you like to choose which one to do.
+ − 8025 The buffer in question is current when this function is called." nil nil)
+ − 8026
+ − 8027 ;;;***
+ − 8028
+ − 8029 ;;;### (autoloads (style-format) "psgml-fs" "psgml/psgml-fs.el")
+ − 8030
+ − 8031 (autoload 'style-format "psgml-fs" nil t nil)
+ − 8032
+ − 8033 ;;;***
+ − 8034
+ − 8035 ;;;### (autoloads nil "psgml-html" "psgml/psgml-html.el")
+ − 8036
+ − 8037 (autoload 'html-mode "psgml-html" "\
+ − 8038 HTML mode." t)
+ − 8039
+ − 8040 (autoload 'html3-mode "psgml-html" "\
+ − 8041 HTML3 mode." t)
+ − 8042
+ − 8043 ;;;***
+ − 8044
+ − 8045 ;;;### (autoloads (sgml-mode) "psgml" "psgml/psgml.el")
+ − 8046
+ − 8047 (autoload 'sgml-mode "psgml" "\
+ − 8048 Major mode for editing SGML.\\<sgml-mode-map>
+ − 8049 Makes > display the matching <. Makes / display matching /.
+ − 8050 Use \\[sgml-validate] to validate your document with an SGML parser.
+ − 8051
+ − 8052 You can find information with:
+ − 8053 \\[sgml-show-context] Show the nesting of elements at cursor position.
+ − 8054 \\[sgml-list-valid-tags] Show the tags valid at cursor position.
+ − 8055
+ − 8056 Insert tags with completion of contextually valid tags with \\[sgml-insert-tag].
+ − 8057 End the current element with \\[sgml-insert-end-tag]. Insert an element (i.e.
+ − 8058 both start and end tag) with \\[sgml-insert-element]. Or tag a region with
+ − 8059 \\[sgml-tag-region].
+ − 8060
+ − 8061 To tag a region with the mouse, use transient mark mode or secondary selection.
+ − 8062
+ − 8063 Structure editing:
+ − 8064 \\[sgml-backward-element] Moves backwards over the previous element.
+ − 8065 \\[sgml-forward-element] Moves forward over the nex element.
+ − 8066 \\[sgml-down-element] Move forward and down one level in the element structure.
+ − 8067 \\[sgml-backward-up-element] Move backward out of this element level.
+ − 8068 \\[sgml-beginning-of-element] Move to after the start tag of the current element.
+ − 8069 \\[sgml-end-of-element] Move to before the end tag of the current element.
+ − 8070 \\[sgml-kill-element] Kill the element following the cursor.
+ − 8071
+ − 8072 Finding interesting positions
+ − 8073 \\[sgml-next-data-field] Move forward to next point where data is allowed.
+ − 8074 \\[sgml-next-trouble-spot] Move forward to next point where something is
+ − 8075 amiss with the structure.
+ − 8076
+ − 8077 Folding and unfolding
+ − 8078 \\[sgml-fold-element] Fold the lines comprising the current element, leaving
+ − 8079 the first line visible.
+ − 8080 \\[sgml-fold-subelement] Fold the elements in the content of the current element.
+ − 8081 Leaving the first line of every element visible.
+ − 8082 \\[sgml-unfold-line] Show hidden lines in current line.
+ − 8083
+ − 8084 User options:
+ − 8085
+ − 8086 sgml-omittag Set this to reflect OMITTAG in the SGML declaration.
+ − 8087 sgml-shortag Set this to reflect SHORTTAG in the SGML declaration.
+ − 8088 sgml-auto-insert-required-elements If non-nil, automatically insert required
+ − 8089 elements in the content of an inserted element.
+ − 8090 sgml-balanced-tag-edit If non-nil, always insert start-end tag pairs.
+ − 8091 sgml-omittag-transparent If non-nil, will show legal tags inside elements
+ − 8092 with omitable start tags and legal tags beyond omitable end tags.
+ − 8093 sgml-leave-point-after-insert If non-nil, the point will remain after
+ − 8094 inserted tag(s).
+ − 8095 sgml-warn-about-undefined-elements If non-nil, print a warning when a tag
+ − 8096 for a undefined element is found.
+ − 8097 sgml-max-menu-size Max number of entries in Tags and Entities menus before
+ − 8098 they are split into several panes.
+ − 8099 sgml-always-quote-attributes If non-nil, quote all attribute values
+ − 8100 inserted after finishing edit attributes.
+ − 8101 sgml-minimize-attributes Determines minimization of attributes inserted by
+ − 8102 edit-attributes.
+ − 8103 sgml-normalize-trims If non-nil, sgml-normalize will trim off white space
+ − 8104 from end of element when adding end tag.
+ − 8105 sgml-indent-step How much to increament indent for every element level.
+ − 8106 sgml-indent-data If non-nil, indent in data/mixed context also.
+ − 8107 sgml-set-face If non-nil, psgml will set the face of parsed markup.
+ − 8108 sgml-markup-faces The faces used when the above variable is non-nil.
+ − 8109 sgml-system-path List of directorys used to look for system identifiers.
+ − 8110 sgml-public-map Mapping from public identifiers to file names.
+ − 8111 sgml-offer-save If non-nil, ask about saving modified buffers before
+ − 8112 \\[sgml-validate] is run.
+ − 8113
+ − 8114 All bindings:
+ − 8115 \\{sgml-mode-map}
+ − 8116 " t nil)
+ − 8117
+ − 8118 ;;;***
+ − 8119
+ − 8120 ;;;### (autoloads (rmail-input rmail-mode rmail) "rmail" "rmail/rmail.el")
+ − 8121
+ − 8122 (defvar rmail-dont-reply-to-names nil "\
+ − 8123 *A regexp specifying names to prune of reply to messages.
+ − 8124 A value of nil means exclude your own name only.")
+ − 8125
+ − 8126 (defvar rmail-default-dont-reply-to-names "info-" "\
+ − 8127 A regular expression specifying part of the value of the default value of
+ − 8128 the variable `rmail-dont-reply-to-names', for when the user does not set
+ − 8129 `rmail-dont-reply-to-names' explicitly. (The other part of the default
+ − 8130 value is the user's name.)
+ − 8131 It is useful to set this variable in the site customization file.")
+ − 8132
+ − 8133 (defvar rmail-delete-after-output nil "\
+ − 8134 *Non-nil means automatically delete a message that is copied to a file.")
+ − 8135
+ − 8136 (defvar rmail-primary-inbox-list nil "\
+ − 8137 *List of files which are inboxes for user's primary mail file `~/RMAIL'.
+ − 8138 `nil' means the default, which is (\"/usr/spool/mail/$USER\")
+ − 8139 \(the name varies depending on the operating system,
+ − 8140 and the value of the environment variable MAIL overrides it).")
+ − 8141
+ − 8142 (defvar rmail-mail-new-frame nil "\
+ − 8143 *Non-nil means Rmail makes a new frame for composing outgoing mail.")
+ − 8144
+ − 8145 (defvar rmail-retry-setup-hook nil "\
+ − 8146 Hook that `rmail-retry-failure' uses in place of `mail-setup-hook'.")
+ − 8147
+ − 8148 (defvar rmail-last-file nil)
+ − 8149
+ − 8150 (autoload 'rmail "rmail" "\
+ − 8151 Read and edit incoming mail.
+ − 8152 Moves messages into file named by `rmail-file-name' (a babyl format file)
+ − 8153 and edits that file in RMAIL Mode.
+ − 8154 Type \\[describe-mode] once editing that file, for a list of RMAIL commands.
+ − 8155
+ − 8156 May be called with filename as argument; then performs rmail editing on
+ − 8157 that file, but does not copy any new mail into the file." t nil)
+ − 8158
+ − 8159 (autoload 'rmail-mode "rmail" "\
+ − 8160 Rmail Mode is used by \\<rmail-mode-map>\\[rmail] for editing Rmail files.
+ − 8161 All normal editing commands are turned off.
+ − 8162 Instead, these commands are available:
+ − 8163
+ − 8164 \\[rmail-beginning-of-message] Move point to front of this message (same as \\[beginning-of-buffer]).
+ − 8165 \\[scroll-up] Scroll to next screen of this message.
+ − 8166 \\[scroll-down] Scroll to previous screen of this message.
+ − 8167 \\[rmail-next-undeleted-message] Move to Next non-deleted message.
+ − 8168 \\[rmail-previous-undeleted-message] Move to Previous non-deleted message.
+ − 8169 \\[rmail-next-message] Move to Next message whether deleted or not.
+ − 8170 \\[rmail-previous-message] Move to Previous message whether deleted or not.
+ − 8171 \\[rmail-first-message] Move to the first message in Rmail file.
+ − 8172 \\[rmail-last-message] Move to the last message in Rmail file.
+ − 8173 \\[rmail-show-message] Jump to message specified by numeric position in file.
+ − 8174 \\[rmail-search] Search for string and show message it is found in.
+ − 8175 \\[rmail-delete-forward] Delete this message, move to next nondeleted.
+ − 8176 \\[rmail-delete-backward] Delete this message, move to previous nondeleted.
+ − 8177 \\[rmail-undelete-previous-message] Undelete message. Tries current message, then earlier messages
+ − 8178 till a deleted message is found.
+ − 8179 \\[rmail-edit-current-message] Edit the current message. \\[rmail-cease-edit] to return to Rmail.
+ − 8180 \\[rmail-expunge] Expunge deleted messages.
+ − 8181 \\[rmail-expunge-and-save] Expunge and save the file.
+ − 8182 \\[rmail-quit] Quit Rmail: expunge, save, then switch to another buffer.
+ − 8183 \\[save-buffer] Save without expunging.
+ − 8184 \\[rmail-get-new-mail] Move new mail from system spool directory into this file.
+ − 8185 \\[rmail-mail] Mail a message (same as \\[mail-other-window]).
+ − 8186 \\[rmail-continue] Continue composing outgoing message started before.
+ − 8187 \\[rmail-reply] Reply to this message. Like \\[rmail-mail] but initializes some fields.
+ − 8188 \\[rmail-retry-failure] Send this message again. Used on a mailer failure message.
+ − 8189 \\[rmail-forward] Forward this message to another user.
+ − 8190 \\[rmail-output-to-rmail-file] Output this message to an Rmail file (append it).
+ − 8191 \\[rmail-output] Output this message to a Unix-format mail file (append it).
+ − 8192 \\[rmail-input] Input Rmail file. Run Rmail on that file.
+ − 8193 \\[rmail-add-label] Add label to message. It will be displayed in the mode line.
+ − 8194 \\[rmail-kill-label] Kill label. Remove a label from current message.
+ − 8195 \\[rmail-next-labeled-message] Move to Next message with specified label
+ − 8196 (label defaults to last one specified).
+ − 8197 Standard labels: filed, unseen, answered, forwarded, deleted.
+ − 8198 Any other label is present only if you add it with \\[rmail-add-label].
+ − 8199 \\[rmail-previous-labeled-message] Move to Previous message with specified label
+ − 8200 \\[rmail-summary] Show headers buffer, with a one line summary of each message.
+ − 8201 \\[rmail-summary-by-labels] Summarize only messages with particular label(s).
+ − 8202 \\[rmail-summary-by-recipients] Summarize only messages with particular recipient(s).
+ − 8203 \\[rmail-summary-by-regexp] Summarize only messages with particular regexp(s).
+ − 8204 \\[rmail-summary-by-topic] Summarize only messages with subject line regexp(s).
+ − 8205 \\[rmail-toggle-header] Toggle display of complete header." t nil)
+ − 8206
+ − 8207 (autoload 'rmail-input "rmail" "\
+ − 8208 Run Rmail on file FILENAME." t nil)
+ − 8209
+ − 8210 ;;;***
+ − 8211
+ − 8212 ;;;### (autoloads (rmail-file-p) "rmailout" "rmail/rmailout.el")
+ − 8213
+ − 8214 (autoload 'rmail-file-p "rmailout" nil nil nil)
+ − 8215
+ − 8216 ;;;***
+ − 8217
+ − 8218 ;;;### (autoloads (unrmail batch-unrmail) "unrmail" "rmail/unrmail.el")
+ − 8219
+ − 8220 (autoload 'batch-unrmail "unrmail" "\
+ − 8221 Convert Rmail files to mailbox files.
+ − 8222 Specify the input Rmail file names as command line arguments.
+ − 8223 For each Rmail file, the corresponding output file name
+ − 8224 is made by adding `.mail' at the end.
+ − 8225 For example, invoke `emacs -batch -f batch-unrmail RMAIL'." nil nil)
+ − 8226
+ − 8227 (autoload 'unrmail "unrmail" "\
+ − 8228 Convert Rmail file FILE to mailbox-format file TO-FILE." t nil)
+ − 8229
+ − 8230 ;;;***
+ − 8231
+ − 8232 ;;;### (autoloads (mime/editor-mode) "tm-edit" "tm/tm-edit.el")
+ − 8233
+ − 8234 (autoload 'mime/editor-mode "tm-edit" "\
+ − 8235 MIME minor mode for editing the tagged MIME message.
+ − 8236
+ − 8237 In this mode, basically, the message is composed in the tagged MIME
+ − 8238 format. The message tag looks like:
+ − 8239
+ − 8240 --[[text/plain; charset=ISO-2022-JP][7bit]]
+ − 8241
+ − 8242 The tag specifies the MIME content type, subtype, optional parameters
+ − 8243 and transfer encoding of the message following the tag. Messages
+ − 8244 without any tag are treated as `text/plain' by default. Charset and
+ − 8245 transfer encoding are automatically defined unless explicitly
+ − 8246 specified. Binary messages such as audio and image are usually hidden.
+ − 8247 The messages in the tagged MIME format are automatically translated
+ − 8248 into a MIME compliant message when exiting this mode.
+ − 8249
+ − 8250 Available charsets depend on Emacs version being used. The following
+ − 8251 lists the available charsets of each emacs.
+ − 8252
+ − 8253 EMACS 18: US-ASCII is only available.
+ − 8254 NEmacs: US-ASCII and ISO-2022-JP are available.
+ − 8255 EMACS 19: US-ASCII and ISO-8859-1 (or other charset) are available.
+ − 8256 XEmacs 19: US-ASCII and ISO-8859-1 (or other charset) are available.
+ − 8257 Mule: US-ASCII, ISO-8859-* (except for ISO-8859-5), KOI8-R,
+ − 8258 ISO-2022-JP, ISO-2022-JP-2, ISO-2022-KR, BIG5 and
+ − 8259 ISO-2022-INT-1 are available.
+ − 8260
+ − 8261 ISO-2022-JP-2 and ISO-2022-INT-1 charsets used in mule is expected to
+ − 8262 be used to represent multilingual text in intermixed manner. Any
+ − 8263 languages that has no registered charset are represented as either
+ − 8264 ISO-2022-JP-2 or ISO-2022-INT-1 in mule.
+ − 8265
+ − 8266 If you want to use non-ISO-8859-1 charset in EMACS 19 or XEmacs 19,
+ − 8267 please set variable `default-mime-charset'. This variable must be
+ − 8268 symbol of which name is a MIME charset.
+ − 8269
+ − 8270 If you want to add more charsets in mule, please set variable
+ − 8271 `charsets-mime-charset-alist'. This variable must be alist of which
+ − 8272 key is list of leading-char/charset and value is symbol of MIME
+ − 8273 charset. (leading-char is a term of MULE 1.* and 2.*. charset is a
+ − 8274 term of XEmacs/mule, mule merged EMACS and MULE 3.*) If name of
+ − 8275 coding-system is different as MIME charset, please set variable
+ − 8276 `mime-charset-coding-system-alist'. This variable must be alist of
+ − 8277 which key is MIME charset and value is coding-system.
+ − 8278
+ − 8279 Following commands are available in addition to major mode commands:
+ − 8280
+ − 8281 [make single part]
+ − 8282 \\[mime-editor/insert-text] insert a text message.
+ − 8283 \\[mime-editor/insert-file] insert a (binary) file.
+ − 8284 \\[mime-editor/insert-external] insert a reference to external body.
+ − 8285 \\[mime-editor/insert-voice] insert a voice message.
+ − 8286 \\[mime-editor/insert-message] insert a mail or news message.
+ − 8287 \\[mime-editor/insert-mail] insert a mail message.
+ − 8288 \\[mime-editor/insert-signature] insert a signature file at end.
+ − 8289 \\[mime-editor/insert-key] insert PGP public key.
+ − 8290 \\[mime-editor/insert-tag] insert a new MIME tag.
+ − 8291
+ − 8292 [make enclosure (maybe multipart)]
+ − 8293 \\[mime-editor/enclose-alternative-region] enclose as multipart/alternative.
+ − 8294 \\[mime-editor/enclose-parallel-region] enclose as multipart/parallel.
+ − 8295 \\[mime-editor/enclose-mixed-region] enclose as multipart/mixed.
+ − 8296 \\[mime-editor/enclose-digest-region] enclose as multipart/digest.
+ − 8297 \\[mime-editor/enclose-signed-region] enclose as PGP signed.
+ − 8298 \\[mime-editor/enclose-encrypted-region] enclose as PGP encrypted.
+ − 8299 \\[mime-editor/enclose-quote-region] enclose as verbose mode (to avoid to expand tags)
+ − 8300
+ − 8301 [other commands]
+ − 8302 \\[mime-editor/set-transfer-level-7bit] set transfer-level as 7.
+ − 8303 \\[mime-editor/set-transfer-level-8bit] set transfer-level as 8.
+ − 8304 \\[mime-editor/set-split] set message splitting mode.
+ − 8305 \\[mime-editor/set-sign] set PGP-sign mode.
+ − 8306 \\[mime-editor/set-encrypt] set PGP-encryption mode.
+ − 8307 \\[mime-editor/preview-message] preview editing MIME message.
+ − 8308 \\[mime-editor/exit] exit and translate into a MIME compliant message.
+ − 8309 \\[mime-editor/help] show this help.
+ − 8310 \\[mime-editor/maybe-translate] exit and translate if in MIME mode, then split.
+ − 8311
+ − 8312 Additional commands are available in some major modes:
+ − 8313 C-c C-c exit, translate and run the original command.
+ − 8314 C-c C-s exit, translate and run the original command.
+ − 8315
+ − 8316 The following is a message example written in the tagged MIME format.
+ − 8317 TABs at the beginning of the line are not a part of the message:
+ − 8318
+ − 8319 This is a conventional plain text. It should be translated
+ − 8320 into text/plain.
+ − 8321 --[[text/plain]]
+ − 8322 This is also a plain text. But, it is explicitly specified as
+ − 8323 is.
+ − 8324 --[[text/plain; charset=ISO-2022-JP]]
+ − 8325 ...Japanese text here....
+ − 8326 --[[text/richtext]]
+ − 8327 <center>This is a richtext.</center>
+ − 8328 --[[image/gif][base64]]^M...image encoded in base64 here...
+ − 8329 --[[audio/basic][base64]]^M...audio encoded in base64 here...
+ − 8330
+ − 8331 User customizable variables (not documented all of them):
+ − 8332 mime-prefix
+ − 8333 Specifies a key prefix for MIME minor mode commands.
+ − 8334
+ − 8335 mime-ignore-preceding-spaces
+ − 8336 Preceding white spaces in a message body are ignored if non-nil.
+ − 8337
+ − 8338 mime-ignore-trailing-spaces
+ − 8339 Trailing white spaces in a message body are ignored if non-nil.
+ − 8340
+ − 8341 mime-auto-hide-body
+ − 8342 Hide a non-textual body message encoded in base64 after insertion
+ − 8343 if non-nil.
+ − 8344
+ − 8345 mime-editor/transfer-level
+ − 8346 A number of network transfer level. It should be bigger than 7.
+ − 8347 If you are in 8bit-through environment, please set 8.
+ − 8348
+ − 8349 mime-editor/voice-recorder
+ − 8350 Specifies a function to record a voice message and encode it.
+ − 8351 The function `mime-editor/voice-recorder-for-sun' is for Sun
+ − 8352 SparcStations.
+ − 8353
+ − 8354 mime/editor-mode-hook
+ − 8355 Turning on MIME mode calls the value of mime/editor-mode-hook, if
+ − 8356 it is non-nil.
+ − 8357
+ − 8358 mime-editor/translate-hook
+ − 8359 The value of mime-editor/translate-hook is called just before translating
+ − 8360 the tagged MIME format into a MIME compliant message if it is
+ − 8361 non-nil. If the hook call the function mime-editor/insert-signature,
+ − 8362 the signature file will be inserted automatically.
+ − 8363
+ − 8364 mime-editor/exit-hook
+ − 8365 Turning off MIME mode calls the value of mime-editor/exit-hook, if it is
+ − 8366 non-nil." t nil)
+ − 8367
+ − 8368 (defalias 'edit-mime 'mime/editor-mode)
+ − 8369
+ − 8370 ;;;***
+ − 8371
+ − 8372 ;;;### (autoloads (url-retrieve url-cache-expired url-popup-info url-get-url-at-point url-buffer-visiting url-normalize-url url-file-attributes) "url" "url/url.el")
+ − 8373
+ − 8374 (autoload 'url-file-attributes "url" "\
+ − 8375 Return a list of attributes of URL.
+ − 8376 Value is nil if specified file cannot be opened.
+ − 8377 Otherwise, list elements are:
+ − 8378 0. t for directory, string (name linked to) for symbolic link, or nil.
+ − 8379 1. Number of links to file.
+ − 8380 2. File uid.
+ − 8381 3. File gid.
+ − 8382 4. Last access time, as a list of two integers.
+ − 8383 First integer has high-order 16 bits of time, second has low 16 bits.
+ − 8384 5. Last modification time, likewise.
+ − 8385 6. Last status change time, likewise.
+ − 8386 7. Size in bytes. (-1, if number is out of range).
+ − 8387 8. File modes, as a string of ten letters or dashes as in ls -l.
+ − 8388 If URL is on an http server, this will return the content-type if possible.
+ − 8389 9. t iff file's gid would change if file were deleted and recreated.
+ − 8390 10. inode number.
+ − 8391 11. Device number.
+ − 8392
+ − 8393 If file does not exist, returns nil." nil nil)
+ − 8394
+ − 8395 (autoload 'url-normalize-url "url" "\
+ − 8396 Return a 'normalized' version of URL. This strips out default port
+ − 8397 numbers, etc." nil nil)
+ − 8398
+ − 8399 (autoload 'url-buffer-visiting "url" "\
+ − 8400 Return the name of a buffer (if any) that is visiting URL." nil nil)
+ − 8401
+ − 8402 (autoload 'url-get-url-at-point "url" "\
+ − 8403 Get the URL closest to point, but don't change your
+ − 8404 position. Has a preference for looking backward when not
+ − 8405 directly on a symbol." nil nil)
+ − 8406
+ − 8407 (autoload 'url-popup-info "url" "\
+ − 8408 Retrieve the HTTP/1.0 headers and display them in a temp buffer." nil nil)
+ − 8409
+ − 8410 (autoload 'url-cache-expired "url" "\
+ − 8411 Return t iff a cached file has expired." nil nil)
+ − 8412
+ − 8413 (autoload 'url-retrieve "url" "\
+ − 8414 Retrieve a document over the World Wide Web.
+ − 8415 The document should be specified by its fully specified
+ − 8416 Uniform Resource Locator. No parsing is done, just return the
+ − 8417 document as the server sent it. The document is left in the
+ − 8418 buffer specified by url-working-buffer. url-working-buffer is killed
+ − 8419 immediately before starting the transfer, so that no buffer-local
+ − 8420 variables interfere with the retrieval. HTTP/1.0 redirection will
+ − 8421 be honored before this function exits." nil nil)
+ − 8422
+ − 8423 ;;;***
+ − 8424
+ − 8425 ;;;### (autoloads (defadvice ad-add-advice) "advice" "utils/advice.el")
+ − 8426
+ − 8427 (defvar ad-redefinition-action 'warn "\
+ − 8428 *Defines what to do with redefinitions during Advice de/activation.
+ − 8429 Redefinition occurs if a previously activated function that already has an
+ − 8430 original definition associated with it gets redefined and then de/activated.
+ − 8431 In such a case we can either accept the current definition as the new
+ − 8432 original definition, discard the current definition and replace it with the
+ − 8433 old original, or keep it and raise an error. The values `accept', `discard',
+ − 8434 `error' or `warn' govern what will be done. `warn' is just like `accept' but
+ − 8435 it additionally prints a warning message. All other values will be
+ − 8436 interpreted as `error'.")
+ − 8437
+ − 8438 (defvar ad-default-compilation-action 'maybe "\
+ − 8439 *Defines whether to compile advised definitions during activation.
+ − 8440 A value of `always' will result in unconditional compilation, `never' will
+ − 8441 always avoid compilation, `maybe' will compile if the byte-compiler is already
+ − 8442 loaded, and `like-original' will compile if the original definition of the
+ − 8443 advised function is compiled or a built-in function. Every other value will
+ − 8444 be interpreted as `maybe'. This variable will only be considered if the
+ − 8445 COMPILE argument of `ad-activate' was supplied as nil.")
+ − 8446
+ − 8447 (autoload 'ad-add-advice "advice" "\
+ − 8448 Adds a piece of ADVICE to FUNCTION's list of advices in CLASS.
+ − 8449 If FUNCTION already has one or more pieces of advice of the specified
+ − 8450 CLASS then POSITION determines where the new piece will go. The value
+ − 8451 of POSITION can either be `first', `last' or a number where 0 corresponds
+ − 8452 to `first'. Numbers outside the range will be mapped to the closest
+ − 8453 extreme position. If there was already a piece of ADVICE with the same
+ − 8454 name, then the position argument will be ignored and the old advice
+ − 8455 will be overwritten with the new one.
+ − 8456 If the FUNCTION was not advised already, then its advice info will be
+ − 8457 initialized. Redefining a piece of advice whose name is part of the cache-id
+ − 8458 will clear the cache." nil nil)
+ − 8459
+ − 8460 (autoload 'defadvice "advice" "\
+ − 8461 Defines a piece of advice for FUNCTION (a symbol).
+ − 8462 The syntax of `defadvice' is as follows:
+ − 8463
+ − 8464 (defadvice FUNCTION (CLASS NAME [POSITION] [ARGLIST] FLAG...)
+ − 8465 [DOCSTRING] [INTERACTIVE-FORM]
+ − 8466 BODY... )
+ − 8467
+ − 8468 FUNCTION ::= Name of the function to be advised.
+ − 8469 CLASS ::= `before' | `around' | `after' | `activation' | `deactivation'.
+ − 8470 NAME ::= Non-nil symbol that names this piece of advice.
+ − 8471 POSITION ::= `first' | `last' | NUMBER. Optional, defaults to `first',
+ − 8472 see also `ad-add-advice'.
+ − 8473 ARGLIST ::= An optional argument list to be used for the advised function
+ − 8474 instead of the argument list of the original. The first one found in
+ − 8475 before/around/after-advices will be used.
+ − 8476 FLAG ::= `protect'|`disable'|`activate'|`compile'|`preactivate'|`freeze'.
+ − 8477 All flags can be specified with unambiguous initial substrings.
+ − 8478 DOCSTRING ::= Optional documentation for this piece of advice.
+ − 8479 INTERACTIVE-FORM ::= Optional interactive form to be used for the advised
+ − 8480 function. The first one found in before/around/after-advices will be used.
+ − 8481 BODY ::= Any s-expression.
+ − 8482
+ − 8483 Semantics of the various flags:
+ − 8484 `protect': The piece of advice will be protected against non-local exits in
+ − 8485 any code that precedes it. If any around-advice of a function is protected
+ − 8486 then automatically all around-advices will be protected (the complete onion).
+ − 8487
+ − 8488 `activate': All advice of FUNCTION will be activated immediately if
+ − 8489 FUNCTION has been properly defined prior to this application of `defadvice'.
+ − 8490
+ − 8491 `compile': In conjunction with `activate' specifies that the resulting
+ − 8492 advised function should be compiled.
+ − 8493
+ − 8494 `disable': The defined advice will be disabled, hence, it will not be used
+ − 8495 during activation until somebody enables it.
+ − 8496
+ − 8497 `preactivate': Preactivates the advised FUNCTION at macro-expansion/compile
+ − 8498 time. This generates a compiled advised definition according to the current
+ − 8499 advice state that will be used during activation if appropriate. Only use
+ − 8500 this if the `defadvice' gets actually compiled.
+ − 8501
+ − 8502 `freeze': Expands the `defadvice' into a redefining `defun/defmacro' according
+ − 8503 to this particular single advice. No other advice information will be saved.
+ − 8504 Frozen advices cannot be undone, they behave like a hard redefinition of
+ − 8505 the advised function. `freeze' implies `activate' and `preactivate'. The
+ − 8506 documentation of the advised function can be dumped onto the `DOC' file
+ − 8507 during preloading.
+ − 8508
+ − 8509 Look at the file `advice.el' for comprehensive documentation." nil 'macro)
+ − 8510
+ − 8511 ;;;***
+ − 8512
+ − 8513 ;;;### (autoloads (all-annotations annotation-list annotations-at annotations-in-region annotation-at annotationp delete-annotation make-annotation) "annotations" "utils/annotations.el")
+ − 8514
+ − 8515 (defvar make-annotation-hook nil "\
+ − 8516 *Function or functions to run immediately after creating an annotation.")
+ − 8517
+ − 8518 (defvar before-delete-annotation-hook nil "\
+ − 8519 *Function or functions to run immediately before deleting an annotation.")
+ − 8520
+ − 8521 (defvar after-delete-annotation-hook nil "\
+ − 8522 *Function or functions to run immediately after deleting an annotation.")
+ − 8523
+ − 8524 (autoload 'make-annotation "annotations" "\
+ − 8525 Create a marginal annotation, displayed using GLYPH, at position POS.
+ − 8526 GLYPH may be either a glyph object or a string. Use layout policy
+ − 8527 LAYOUT and place the annotation in buffer BUFFER. If POS is nil, point is
+ − 8528 used. If LAYOUT is nil, `whitespace' is used. If BUFFER is nil, the
+ − 8529 current buffer is used. If WITH-EVENT is non-nil, then when an annotation
+ − 8530 is activated, the triggering event is passed as the second arg to the
+ − 8531 annotation function. If D-GLYPH is non-nil then it is used as the glyph
+ − 8532 that will be displayed when button1 is down. If RIGHTP is non-nil then
+ − 8533 the glyph will be displayed on the right side of the buffer instead of the
+ − 8534 left." nil nil)
+ − 8535
+ − 8536 (autoload 'delete-annotation "annotations" "\
+ − 8537 Remove ANNOTATION from its buffer. This does not modify the buffer text." nil nil)
+ − 8538
+ − 8539 (autoload 'annotationp "annotations" "\
+ − 8540 T if OBJECT is an annotation." nil nil)
+ − 8541
+ − 8542 (autoload 'annotation-at "annotations" "\
+ − 8543 Return the first annotation at POS in BUFFER.
+ − 8544 BUFFER defaults to the current buffer. POS defaults to point in BUFFER." nil nil)
+ − 8545
+ − 8546 (autoload 'annotations-in-region "annotations" "\
+ − 8547 Return all annotations in BUFFER between START and END inclusively." nil nil)
+ − 8548
+ − 8549 (autoload 'annotations-at "annotations" "\
+ − 8550 Return a list of all annotations at POS in BUFFER.
+ − 8551 If BUFFER is nil, the current buffer is used. If POS is nil, point is used." nil nil)
+ − 8552
+ − 8553 (autoload 'annotation-list "annotations" "\
+ − 8554 Return a list of all annotations in BUFFER.
+ − 8555 If BUFFER is nil, the current buffer is used." nil nil)
+ − 8556
+ − 8557 (autoload 'all-annotations "annotations" "\
+ − 8558 Return a list of all annotations in existence." nil nil)
+ − 8559
+ − 8560 ;;;***
+ − 8561
+ − 8562 ;;;### (autoloads (batch-update-autoloads update-autoloads-from-directory update-autoloads-here update-file-autoloads generate-file-autoloads) "autoload" "utils/autoload.el")
+ − 8563
+ − 8564 (autoload 'generate-file-autoloads "autoload" "\
+ − 8565 Insert at point a loaddefs autoload section for FILE.
+ − 8566 autoloads are generated for defuns and defmacros in FILE
+ − 8567 marked by `generate-autoload-cookie' (which see).
+ − 8568 If FILE is being visited in a buffer, the contents of the buffer
+ − 8569 are used." t nil)
+ − 8570
+ − 8571 (autoload 'update-file-autoloads "autoload" "\
+ − 8572 Update the autoloads for FILE in `generated-autoload-file'
+ − 8573 \(which FILE might bind in its local variables)." t nil)
+ − 8574
+ − 8575 (autoload 'update-autoloads-here "autoload" "\
+ − 8576 Update sections of the current buffer generated by `update-file-autoloads'." t nil)
+ − 8577
+ − 8578 (autoload 'update-autoloads-from-directory "autoload" "\
+ − 8579 Update `generated-autoload-file' with all the current autoloads from DIR.
+ − 8580 This runs `update-file-autoloads' on each .el file in DIR.
+ − 8581 Obsolete autoload entries for files that no longer exist are deleted." t nil)
+ − 8582
+ − 8583 (autoload 'batch-update-autoloads "autoload" "\
+ − 8584 Update the autoloads for the files or directories on the command line.
+ − 8585 Runs `update-file-autoloads' on files and `update-directory-autoloads'
+ − 8586 on directories. Must be used only with -batch, and kills Emacs on completion.
+ − 8587 Each file will be processed even if an error occurred previously.
+ − 8588 For example, invoke `xemacs -batch -f batch-update-autoloads *.el'." nil nil)
+ − 8589
+ − 8590 ;;;***
+ − 8591
+ − 8592 ;;;### (autoloads (browse-url-lynx-emacs browse-url-lynx-xterm browse-url-w3 browse-url-iximosaic browse-url-grail browse-url-mosaic browse-url-netscape) "browse-url" "utils/browse-url.el")
+ − 8593
+ − 8594 (defvar browse-url-browser-function 'browse-url-w3 "\
+ − 8595 *Function to display the current buffer in a WWW browser.
+ − 8596 Used by the `browse-url-at-point', `browse-url-at-mouse', and
+ − 8597 `browse-url-of-file' commands.")
+ − 8598
+ − 8599 (autoload 'browse-url-netscape "browse-url" "\
+ − 8600 Ask the Netscape WWW browser to load URL.
+ − 8601
+ − 8602 Default to the URL around or before point. The strings in variable
+ − 8603 `browse-url-netscape-arguments' are also passed to Netscape.
+ − 8604
+ − 8605 When called interactively, if variable `browse-url-new-window-p' is
+ − 8606 non-nil, load the document in a new Netscape window, otherwise use a
+ − 8607 random existing one. A non-nil interactive prefix argument reverses
+ − 8608 the effect of browse-url-new-window-p.
+ − 8609
+ − 8610 When called non-interactively, optional second argument NEW-WINDOW is
+ − 8611 used instead of browse-url-new-window-p." t nil)
+ − 8612
+ − 8613 (autoload 'browse-url-mosaic "browse-url" "\
+ − 8614 Ask the XMosaic WWW browser to load URL.
+ − 8615 Default to the URL around or before point." t nil)
+ − 8616
+ − 8617 (autoload 'browse-url-grail "browse-url" "\
+ − 8618 Ask the Grail WWW browser to load URL.
+ − 8619 Default to the URL around or before point. Runs the program in the
+ − 8620 variable `browse-url-grail'." t nil)
+ − 8621
+ − 8622 (autoload 'browse-url-iximosaic "browse-url" "\
+ − 8623 Ask the IXIMosaic WWW browser to load URL.
+ − 8624 Default to the URL around or before point." t nil)
+ − 8625
+ − 8626 (autoload 'browse-url-w3 "browse-url" "\
+ − 8627 Ask the w3 WWW browser to load URL.
+ − 8628 Default to the URL around or before point." t nil)
+ − 8629
+ − 8630 (autoload 'browse-url-lynx-xterm "browse-url" "\
+ − 8631 Ask the Lynx WWW browser to load URL.
+ − 8632 Default to the URL around or before point. A new Lynx process is run
+ − 8633 in an Xterm window." t nil)
+ − 8634
+ − 8635 (autoload 'browse-url-lynx-emacs "browse-url" "\
+ − 8636 Ask the Lynx WWW browser to load URL.
+ − 8637 Default to the URL around or before point. Run a new Lynx process in
+ − 8638 an Emacs buffer." t nil)
+ − 8639
+ − 8640 ;;;***
+ − 8641
+ − 8642 ;;;### (autoloads (docref-setup) "docref" "utils/docref.el")
+ − 8643
+ − 8644 (autoload 'docref-setup "docref" "\
+ − 8645 Process docref cross-references in the current buffer.
+ − 8646 See also \\(f@docref-subst)." t nil)
+ − 8647
+ − 8648 ;;;***
+ − 8649
+ − 8650 ;;;### (autoloads (easy-menu-define) "easymenu" "utils/easymenu.el")
+ − 8651
+ − 8652 (autoload 'easy-menu-define "easymenu" "\
+ − 8653 Define a menu bar submenu in maps MAPS, according to MENU.
+ − 8654 The arguments SYMBOL and DOC are ignored; they are present for
+ − 8655 compatibility only. SYMBOL is not evaluated. In other Emacs versions
+ − 8656 these arguments may be used as a variable to hold the menu data, and a
+ − 8657 doc string for that variable.
+ − 8658
+ − 8659 The first element of MENU must be a string. It is the menu bar item name.
+ − 8660 The rest of the elements are menu items.
+ − 8661
+ − 8662 A menu item is usually a vector of three elements: [NAME CALLBACK ENABLE]
+ − 8663
+ − 8664 NAME is a string--the menu item name.
+ − 8665
+ − 8666 CALLBACK is a command to run when the item is chosen,
+ − 8667 or a list to evaluate when the item is chosen.
+ − 8668
+ − 8669 ENABLE is an expression; the item is enabled for selection
+ − 8670 whenever this expression's value is non-nil.
+ − 8671
+ − 8672 Alternatively, a menu item may have the form:
+ − 8673
+ − 8674 [ NAME CALLBACK [ KEYWORD ARG ] ... ]
+ − 8675
+ − 8676 Where KEYWORD is one of the symbol defined below.
+ − 8677
+ − 8678 :keys KEYS
+ − 8679
+ − 8680 KEYS is a string; a complex keyboard equivalent to this menu item.
+ − 8681
+ − 8682 :active ENABLE
+ − 8683
+ − 8684 ENABLE is an expression; the item is enabled for selection
+ − 8685 whenever this expression's value is non-nil.
+ − 8686
+ − 8687 :suffix NAME
+ − 8688
+ − 8689 NAME is a string; the name of an argument to CALLBACK.
+ − 8690
+ − 8691 :style STYLE
+ − 8692
+ − 8693 STYLE is a symbol describing the type of menu item. The following are
+ − 8694 defined:
+ − 8695
+ − 8696 toggle: A checkbox.
+ − 8697 Currently just prepend the name with the string \"Toggle \".
+ − 8698 radio: A radio button.
+ − 8699 nil: An ordinary menu item.
+ − 8700
+ − 8701 :selected SELECTED
+ − 8702
+ − 8703 SELECTED is an expression; the checkbox or radio button is selected
+ − 8704 whenever this expression's value is non-nil.
+ − 8705 Currently just disable radio buttons, no effect on checkboxes.
+ − 8706
+ − 8707 A menu item can be a string. Then that string appears in the menu as
+ − 8708 unselectable text. A string consisting solely of hyphens is displayed
+ − 8709 as a solid horizontal line.
+ − 8710
+ − 8711 A menu item can be a list. It is treated as a submenu.
+ − 8712 The first element should be the submenu name. That's used as the
+ − 8713 menu item in the top-level menu. The cdr of the submenu list
+ − 8714 is a list of menu items, as above." nil 'macro)
+ − 8715
+ − 8716 ;;;***
+ − 8717
+ − 8718 ;;;### (autoloads (elp-submit-bug-report elp-results elp-instrument-package elp-instrument-list elp-restore-function elp-instrument-function) "elp" "utils/elp.el")
+ − 8719
+ − 8720 (autoload 'elp-instrument-function "elp" "\
+ − 8721 Instrument FUNSYM for profiling.
+ − 8722 FUNSYM must be a symbol of a defined function." t nil)
+ − 8723
+ − 8724 (autoload 'elp-restore-function "elp" "\
+ − 8725 Restore an instrumented function to its original definition.
+ − 8726 Argument FUNSYM is the symbol of a defined function." t nil)
+ − 8727
+ − 8728 (autoload 'elp-instrument-list "elp" "\
+ − 8729 Instrument for profiling, all functions in `elp-function-list'.
+ − 8730 Use optional LIST if provided instead." t nil)
+ − 8731
+ − 8732 (autoload 'elp-instrument-package "elp" "\
+ − 8733 Instrument for profiling, all functions which start with PREFIX.
+ − 8734 For example, to instrument all ELP functions, do the following:
+ − 8735
+ − 8736 \\[elp-instrument-package] RET elp- RET" t nil)
+ − 8737
+ − 8738 (autoload 'elp-results "elp" "\
+ − 8739 Display current profiling results.
+ − 8740 If `elp-reset-after-results' is non-nil, then current profiling
+ − 8741 information for all instrumented functions are reset after results are
+ − 8742 displayed." t nil)
+ − 8743
+ − 8744 (autoload 'elp-submit-bug-report "elp" "\
+ − 8745 Submit via mail, a bug report on elp." t nil)
+ − 8746
+ − 8747 ;;;***
+ − 8748
+ − 8749 ;;;### (autoloads (list-colors-display facemenu-read-color list-text-properties-at facemenu-remove-special facemenu-remove-props facemenu-set-read-only facemenu-set-intangible facemenu-set-invisible facemenu-make-much-smaller facemenu-make-much-larger facemenu-make-smaller facemenu-make-larger facemenu-set-size-default facemenu-set-face-from-menu facemenu-set-background facemenu-set-foreground facemenu-set-face) "facemenu" "utils/facemenu.el")
+ − 8750
+ − 8751 (defvar facemenu-menu nil "\
+ − 8752 Facemenu top-level menu keymap.")
+ − 8753
+ − 8754 (defvar facemenu-keymap (let ((map (make-sparse-keymap "Set face"))) (define-key map ?o 'facemenu-set-face) map) "\
+ − 8755 Keymap for face-changing commands.
+ − 8756 `Facemenu-update' fills in the keymap according to the bindings
+ − 8757 requested in `facemenu-keybindings'.")
+ − 8758
+ − 8759 (autoload 'facemenu-set-face "facemenu" "\
+ − 8760 Add FACE to the region or next character typed.
+ − 8761 It will be added to the top of the face list; any faces lower on the list that
+ − 8762 will not show through at all will be removed.
+ − 8763
+ − 8764 Interactively, the face to be used is read with the minibuffer.
+ − 8765
+ − 8766 If the region is active and there is no prefix argument,
+ − 8767 this command sets the region to the requested face.
+ − 8768
+ − 8769 Otherwise, this command specifies the face for the next character
+ − 8770 inserted. Moving point or switching buffers before
+ − 8771 typing a character to insert cancels the specification." t nil)
+ − 8772
+ − 8773 (autoload 'facemenu-set-foreground "facemenu" "\
+ − 8774 Set the foreground color of the region or next character typed.
+ − 8775 The color is prompted for. A face named `fg:color' is used (or created).
+ − 8776 If the region is active, it will be set to the requested face. If
+ − 8777 it is inactive (even if mark-even-if-inactive is set) the next
+ − 8778 character that is typed (via `self-insert-command') will be set to
+ − 8779 the selected face. Moving point or switching buffers before
+ − 8780 typing a character cancels the request." t nil)
+ − 8781
+ − 8782 (autoload 'facemenu-set-background "facemenu" "\
+ − 8783 Set the background color of the region or next character typed.
+ − 8784 The color is prompted for. A face named `bg:color' is used (or created).
+ − 8785 If the region is active, it will be set to the requested face. If
+ − 8786 it is inactive (even if mark-even-if-inactive is set) the next
+ − 8787 character that is typed (via `self-insert-command') will be set to
+ − 8788 the selected face. Moving point or switching buffers before
+ − 8789 typing a character cancels the request." t nil)
+ − 8790
+ − 8791 (autoload 'facemenu-set-face-from-menu "facemenu" "\
+ − 8792 Set the face of the region or next character typed.
+ − 8793 This function is designed to be called from a menu; the face to use
+ − 8794 is the menu item's name.
+ − 8795
+ − 8796 If the region is active and there is no prefix argument,
+ − 8797 this command sets the region to the requested face.
+ − 8798
+ − 8799 Otherwise, this command specifies the face for the next character
+ − 8800 inserted. Moving point or switching buffers before
+ − 8801 typing a character to insert cancels the specification." nil nil)
+ − 8802
+ − 8803 (autoload 'facemenu-set-size-default "facemenu" nil t nil)
+ − 8804
+ − 8805 (autoload 'facemenu-make-larger "facemenu" nil t nil)
+ − 8806
+ − 8807 (autoload 'facemenu-make-smaller "facemenu" nil t nil)
+ − 8808
+ − 8809 (autoload 'facemenu-make-much-larger "facemenu" nil t nil)
+ − 8810
+ − 8811 (autoload 'facemenu-make-much-smaller "facemenu" nil t nil)
+ − 8812
+ − 8813 (autoload 'facemenu-set-invisible "facemenu" "\
+ − 8814 Make the region invisible.
+ − 8815 This sets the `invisible' text property; it can be undone with
+ − 8816 `facemenu-remove-special'." t nil)
+ − 8817
+ − 8818 (autoload 'facemenu-set-intangible "facemenu" "\
+ − 8819 Make the region intangible: disallow moving into it.
+ − 8820 This sets the `intangible' text property; it can be undone with
+ − 8821 `facemenu-remove-special'." t nil)
+ − 8822
+ − 8823 (autoload 'facemenu-set-read-only "facemenu" "\
+ − 8824 Make the region unmodifiable.
+ − 8825 This sets the `read-only' text property; it can be undone with
+ − 8826 `facemenu-remove-special'." t nil)
+ − 8827
+ − 8828 (autoload 'facemenu-remove-props "facemenu" "\
+ − 8829 Remove all text properties that facemenu added to region." t nil)
+ − 8830
+ − 8831 (autoload 'facemenu-remove-special "facemenu" "\
+ − 8832 Remove all the \"special\" text properties from the region.
+ − 8833 These special properties include `invisible', `intangible' and `read-only'." t nil)
+ − 8834
+ − 8835 (autoload 'list-text-properties-at "facemenu" "\
+ − 8836 Pop up a buffer listing text-properties at LOCATION." t nil)
+ − 8837
+ − 8838 (autoload 'facemenu-read-color "facemenu" "\
+ − 8839 Read a color using the minibuffer." nil nil)
+ − 8840
+ − 8841 (autoload 'list-colors-display "facemenu" "\
+ − 8842 Display names of defined colors, and show what they look like.
+ − 8843 If the optional argument LIST is non-nil, it should be a list of
+ − 8844 colors to display. Otherwise, this command computes a list
+ − 8845 of colors that the current display can handle." t nil)
+ − 8846
+ − 8847 ;;;***
+ − 8848
+ − 8849 ;;;### (autoloads (enable-flow-control-on enable-flow-control) "flow-ctrl" "utils/flow-ctrl.el")
+ − 8850
+ − 8851 (autoload 'enable-flow-control "flow-ctrl" "\
+ − 8852 Toggle flow control handling.
+ − 8853 When handling is enabled, user can type C-s as C-\\, and C-q as C-^.
+ − 8854 With arg, enable flow control mode if arg is positive, otherwise disable." t nil)
+ − 8855
+ − 8856 (autoload 'enable-flow-control-on "flow-ctrl" "\
+ − 8857 Enable flow control if using one of a specified set of terminal types.
+ − 8858 Use `(enable-flow-control-on \"vt100\" \"h19\")' to enable flow control
+ − 8859 on VT-100 and H19 terminals. When flow control is enabled,
+ − 8860 you must type C-\\ to get the effect of a C-s, and type C-^
+ − 8861 to get the effect of a C-q.
+ − 8862
+ − 8863 This function has no effect unless the current device is a tty.
+ − 8864
+ − 8865 The tty terminal type is determined from the TERM environment variable.
+ − 8866 Trailing hyphens and everything following is stripped, so a TERM
+ − 8867 value of \"vt100-nam\" is treated the same as \"vt100\"." nil nil)
+ − 8868
+ − 8869 ;;;***
+ − 8870
+ − 8871 ;;;### (autoloads (forms-find-file-other-window forms-find-file forms-mode) "forms" "utils/forms.el")
+ − 8872
+ − 8873 (autoload 'forms-mode "forms" "\
+ − 8874 Major mode to visit files in a field-structured manner using a form.
+ − 8875
+ − 8876 Commands: Equivalent keys in read-only mode:
+ − 8877 TAB forms-next-field TAB
+ − 8878 \\C-c TAB forms-next-field
+ − 8879 \\C-c < forms-first-record <
+ − 8880 \\C-c > forms-last-record >
+ − 8881 \\C-c ? describe-mode ?
+ − 8882 \\C-c \\C-k forms-delete-record
+ − 8883 \\C-c \\C-q forms-toggle-read-only q
+ − 8884 \\C-c \\C-o forms-insert-record
+ − 8885 \\C-c \\C-l forms-jump-record l
+ − 8886 \\C-c \\C-n forms-next-record n
+ − 8887 \\C-c \\C-p forms-prev-record p
+ − 8888 \\C-c \\C-r forms-search-backward r
+ − 8889 \\C-c \\C-s forms-search-forward s
+ − 8890 \\C-c \\C-x forms-exit x
+ − 8891 " t nil)
+ − 8892
+ − 8893 (autoload 'forms-find-file "forms" "\
+ − 8894 Visit a file in Forms mode." t nil)
+ − 8895
+ − 8896 (autoload 'forms-find-file-other-window "forms" "\
+ − 8897 Visit a file in Forms mode in other window." t nil)
+ − 8898
+ − 8899 ;;;***
+ − 8900
+ − 8901 ;;;### (autoloads (highlight-headers-follow-url highlight-headers-follow-url-mosaic highlight-headers-follow-url-netscape highlight-headers) "highlight-headers" "utils/highlight-headers.el")
+ − 8902
+ − 8903 (autoload 'highlight-headers "highlight-headers" "\
+ − 8904 Highlight message headers between start and end.
+ − 8905 Faces used:
+ − 8906 message-headers the part before the colon
+ − 8907 message-header-contents the part after the colon
+ − 8908 message-highlighted-header-contents contents of \"special\" headers
+ − 8909 message-cited-text quoted text from other messages
+ − 8910
+ − 8911 Variables used:
+ − 8912
+ − 8913 highlight-headers-regexp what makes a \"special\" header
+ − 8914 highlight-headers-citation-regexp matches lines of quoted text
+ − 8915 highlight-headers-citation-header-regexp matches headers for quoted text
+ − 8916
+ − 8917 If HACK-SIG is true,then we search backward from END for something that
+ − 8918 looks like the beginning of a signature block, and don't consider that a
+ − 8919 part of the message (this is because signatures are often incorrectly
+ − 8920 interpreted as cited text.)" nil nil)
+ − 8921
+ − 8922 (autoload 'highlight-headers-follow-url-netscape "highlight-headers" nil nil nil)
+ − 8923
+ − 8924 (autoload 'highlight-headers-follow-url-mosaic "highlight-headers" nil nil nil)
+ − 8925
+ − 8926 (autoload 'highlight-headers-follow-url "highlight-headers" nil t nil)
+ − 8927
+ − 8928 ;;;***
+ − 8929
+ − 8930 ;;;### (autoloads (id-select-double-click-hook id-select-and-kill-thing id-select-and-copy-thing id-select-goto-matching-tag id-select-thing-with-mouse id-select-thing) "id-select" "utils/id-select.el")
+ − 8931
+ − 8932 (autoload 'id-select-thing "id-select" "\
+ − 8933 Mark the region selected by the syntax of the thing at point.
+ − 8934 If invoked repeatedly, selects bigger and bigger things.
+ − 8935 If `id-select-display-type' is non-nil, the type of selection is displayed in
+ − 8936 the minibuffer." t nil)
+ − 8937
+ − 8938 (autoload 'id-select-thing-with-mouse "id-select" "\
+ − 8939 Select a region based on the syntax of the character from a mouse click.
+ − 8940 If the click occurs at the same point as the last click, select
+ − 8941 the next larger syntactic structure. If `id-select-display-type' is non-nil,
+ − 8942 the type of selection is displayed in the minibuffer." t nil)
+ − 8943
+ − 8944 (autoload 'id-select-goto-matching-tag "id-select" "\
+ − 8945 If in a major mode listed in `id-select-markup-modes,' moves point to the start of the tag paired with the closest tag that point is within or precedes.
+ − 8946 Returns t if point is moved, else nil.
+ − 8947 Signals an error if no tag is found following point or if the closing tag
+ − 8948 does not have a `>' terminator character." t nil)
+ − 8949
+ − 8950 (autoload 'id-select-and-copy-thing "id-select" "\
+ − 8951 Copy the region surrounding the syntactical unit at point." t nil)
+ − 8952
+ − 8953 (autoload 'id-select-and-kill-thing "id-select" "\
+ − 8954 Kill the region surrounding the syntactical unit at point." t nil)
+ − 8955
+ − 8956 (autoload 'id-select-double-click-hook "id-select" "\
+ − 8957 Select a region based on the syntax of the character wherever the mouse is double-clicked.
+ − 8958 If the double-click occurs at the same point as the last double-click, select
+ − 8959 the next larger syntactic structure. If `id-select-display-type' is non-nil,
+ − 8960 the type of selection is displayed in the minibuffer." nil nil)
+ − 8961
+ − 8962 ;;;***
+ − 8963
+ − 8964 ;;;### (autoloads (unload-feature) "loadhist" "utils/loadhist.el")
+ − 8965
+ − 8966 (autoload 'unload-feature "loadhist" "\
+ − 8967 Unload the library that provided FEATURE, restoring all its autoloads.
+ − 8968 If the feature is required by any other loaded code, and optional FORCE
+ − 8969 is nil, raise an error." t nil)
+ − 8970
+ − 8971 ;;;***
+ − 8972
+ − 8973 ;;;### (autoloads (what-domain mail-extract-address-components) "mail-extr" "utils/mail-extr.el")
+ − 8974
+ − 8975 (autoload 'mail-extract-address-components "mail-extr" "\
+ − 8976 Given an RFC-822 ADDRESS, extract full name and canonical address.
+ − 8977 Returns a list of the form (FULL-NAME CANONICAL-ADDRESS).
+ − 8978 If no name can be extracted, FULL-NAME will be nil.
+ − 8979 ADDRESS may be a string or a buffer. If it is a buffer, the visible
+ − 8980 (narrowed) portion of the buffer will be interpreted as the address.
+ − 8981 (This feature exists so that the clever caller might be able to avoid
+ − 8982 consing a string.)
+ − 8983 If ADDRESS contains more than one RFC-822 address, only the first is
+ − 8984 returned. Some day this function may be extended to extract multiple
+ − 8985 addresses, or perhaps return the position at which parsing stopped." nil nil)
+ − 8986
+ − 8987 (autoload 'what-domain "mail-extr" "\
+ − 8988 Prompts for a mail domain, and prints the country it corresponds to
+ − 8989 in the minibuffer." t nil)
+ − 8990
+ − 8991 ;;;***
+ − 8992
+ − 8993 ;;;### (autoloads (mail-fetch-field mail-file-babyl-p) "mail-utils" "utils/mail-utils.el")
+ − 8994
+ − 8995 (defvar mail-use-rfc822 nil "\
+ − 8996 *If non-nil, use a full, hairy RFC822 parser on mail addresses.
+ − 8997 Otherwise, (the default) use a smaller, somewhat faster, and
+ − 8998 often correct parser.")
+ − 8999
+ − 9000 (autoload 'mail-file-babyl-p "mail-utils" nil nil nil)
+ − 9001
+ − 9002 (autoload 'mail-fetch-field "mail-utils" "\
+ − 9003 Return the value of the header field FIELD-NAME.
+ − 9004 The buffer is expected to be narrowed to just the headers of the message.
+ − 9005 If second arg LAST is non-nil, use the last such field if there are several.
+ − 9006 If third arg ALL is non-nil, concatenate all such fields with commas between." nil nil)
+ − 9007
+ − 9008 ;;;***
+ − 9009
+ − 9010 ;;;### (autoloads (read-passwd) "passwd" "utils/passwd.el")
+ − 9011
+ − 9012 (autoload 'read-passwd "passwd" "\
+ − 9013 Prompts for a password in the minibuffer, and returns it as a string.
+ − 9014 If PROMPT may be a prompt string or an alist of elements
+ − 9015 '(prompt . default).
+ − 9016 If optional arg CONFIRM is true, then ask the user to type the password
+ − 9017 again to confirm that they typed it correctly.
+ − 9018 If optional arg DEFAULT is provided, then it is a string to insert as
+ − 9019 the default choice (it is not, of course, displayed.)
+ − 9020
+ − 9021 If running under X, the keyboard will be grabbed (with XGrabKeyboard())
+ − 9022 to reduce the possibility that evesdropping is occuring.
+ − 9023
+ − 9024 When reading a password, all keys self-insert, except for:
+ − 9025 \\<read-passwd-map>
+ − 9026 \\[read-passwd-erase-line] Erase the entire line.
+ − 9027 \\[quoted-insert] Insert the next character literally.
+ − 9028 \\[delete-backward-char] Delete the previous character.
+ − 9029 \\[exit-minibuffer] Accept what you have typed.
+ − 9030 \\[keyboard-quit] Abort the command.
+ − 9031
+ − 9032 The returned value is always a newly-created string. No additional copies
+ − 9033 of the password remain after this function has returned.
+ − 9034
+ − 9035 NOTE: unless great care is taken, the typed password will exist in plaintext
+ − 9036 form in the running image for an arbitrarily long time. Priveleged users may
+ − 9037 be able to extract it from memory. If emacs crashes, it may appear in the
+ − 9038 resultant core file.
+ − 9039
+ − 9040 Some steps you can take to prevent the password from being copied around:
+ − 9041
+ − 9042 - as soon as you are done with the returned string, destroy it with
+ − 9043 (fillarray string 0). The same goes for any default passwords
+ − 9044 or password histories.
+ − 9045
+ − 9046 - do not copy the string, as with concat or substring - if you do, be
+ − 9047 sure to keep track of and destroy all copies.
+ − 9048
+ − 9049 - do not insert the password into a buffer - if you do, be sure to
+ − 9050 overwrite the buffer text before killing it, as with the functions
+ − 9051 `passwd-erase-buffer' or `passwd-kill-buffer'. Note that deleting
+ − 9052 the text from the buffer does NOT necessarily remove the text from
+ − 9053 memory.
+ − 9054
+ − 9055 - be careful of the undo history - if you insert the password into a
+ − 9056 buffer which has undo recording turned on, the password will be
+ − 9057 copied onto the undo list, and thus recoverable.
+ − 9058
+ − 9059 - do not pass it as an argument to a shell command - anyone will be
+ − 9060 able to see it if they run `ps' at the right time.
+ − 9061
+ − 9062 Note that the password will be temporarily recoverable with the `view-lossage'
+ − 9063 command. This data will not be overwritten until another hundred or so
+ − 9064 characters are typed. There's not currently a way around this." nil nil)
+ − 9065
+ − 9066 ;;;***
+ − 9067
+ − 9068 ;;;### (autoloads (pp-eval-last-sexp pp-eval-expression pp) "pp" "utils/pp.el")
+ − 9069
+ − 9070 (defalias 'pprint 'pp)
+ − 9071
+ − 9072 (autoload 'pp "pp" "\
+ − 9073 Output the pretty-printed representation of OBJECT, any Lisp object.
+ − 9074 Quoting characters are printed when needed to make output that `read'
+ − 9075 can handle, whenever this is possible.
+ − 9076 Output stream is STREAM, or value of `standard-output' (which see)." nil nil)
+ − 9077
+ − 9078 (autoload 'pp-eval-expression "pp" "\
+ − 9079 Evaluate EXPRESSION and pretty-print value into a new display buffer.
+ − 9080 If the pretty-printed value fits on one line, the message line is used
+ − 9081 instead. Value is also consed on to front of variable values 's
+ − 9082 value." t nil)
+ − 9083
+ − 9084 (autoload 'pp-eval-last-sexp "pp" "\
+ − 9085 Run `pp-eval-expression' on sexp before point (which see).
+ − 9086 With argument, pretty-print output into current buffer.
+ − 9087 Ignores leading comment characters." t nil)
+ − 9088
+ − 9089 ;;;***
+ − 9090
+ − 9091 ;;;### (autoloads (prettyexpand-all-sexp prettyexpand-sexp macroexpand-all-sexp macroexpand-sexp pp-plist pp-variable pp-function) "pretty-print" "utils/pretty-print.el")
+ − 9092
+ − 9093 (autoload 'pp-function "pretty-print" "\
+ − 9094 Pretty print the function definition of SYMBOL in a seperate buffer" t nil)
+ − 9095
+ − 9096 (autoload 'pp-variable "pretty-print" "\
+ − 9097 Pretty print the variable value of SYMBOL in a seperate buffer" t nil)
+ − 9098
+ − 9099 (autoload 'pp-plist "pretty-print" "\
+ − 9100 Pretty print the property list of SYMBOL in a seperate buffer" t nil)
+ − 9101
+ − 9102 (autoload 'macroexpand-sexp "pretty-print" "\
+ − 9103 Macro expand the sexpression following point. Pretty print expansion in a
+ − 9104 temporary buffer. With prefix argument, replace the original
+ − 9105 sexpression by its expansion in the current buffer." t nil)
+ − 9106
+ − 9107 (autoload 'macroexpand-all-sexp "pretty-print" "\
+ − 9108 Macro expand recursively the sexpression following point. Pretty print
+ − 9109 expansion in a temporary buffer. With prefix argument, replace the
+ − 9110 original sexpression by its expansion in the current buffer." t nil)
+ − 9111
+ − 9112 (autoload 'prettyexpand-sexp "pretty-print" "\
+ − 9113 Macro expand the sexpression following point. Pretty print expansion
+ − 9114 in a temporary buffer. With prefix argument, replace the original
+ − 9115 sexpression by its expansion in the current buffer.
+ − 9116 However, calls to macros specified in the variable
+ − 9117 `pp-shadow-expansion-list' are not expanded, in order to make the code
+ − 9118 look nicer." t nil)
+ − 9119
+ − 9120 (autoload 'prettyexpand-all-sexp "pretty-print" "\
+ − 9121 Macro expand recursively the sexpression following point. Pretty print
+ − 9122 expansion in a temporary buffer. With prefix argument, replace the
+ − 9123 original sexpression by its expansion in the current buffer.
+ − 9124 However, calls to macros specified in the variable
+ − 9125 `pp-shadow-expansion-list' are not expanded, in order to make the code
+ − 9126 look nicer." t nil)
+ − 9127
+ − 9128 ;;;***
+ − 9129
+ − 9130 ;;;### (autoloads (reporter-submit-bug-report) "reporter" "utils/reporter.el")
+ − 9131
+ − 9132 (autoload 'reporter-submit-bug-report "reporter" nil nil nil)
+ − 9133
+ − 9134 ;;;***
+ − 9135
+ − 9136 ;;;### (autoloads (make-ring ringp) "ring" "utils/ring.el")
+ − 9137
+ − 9138 (autoload 'ringp "ring" "\
+ − 9139 Returns t if X is a ring; nil otherwise." nil nil)
+ − 9140
+ − 9141 (define-obsolete-function-alias 'ring-p 'ringp)
+ − 9142
+ − 9143 (autoload 'make-ring "ring" "\
+ − 9144 Make a ring that can contain SIZE elements." nil nil)
+ − 9145
+ − 9146 ;;;***
+ − 9147
+ − 9148 ;;;### (autoloads (skeleton-pair-insert-maybe skeleton-insert skeleton-proxy skeleton-proxy-new define-skeleton) "skeleton" "utils/skeleton.el")
+ − 9149
+ − 9150 (defvar skeleton-filter 'identity "\
+ − 9151 Function for transforming a skeleton proxy's aliases' variable value.")
+ − 9152
+ − 9153 (autoload 'define-skeleton "skeleton" "\
+ − 9154 Define a user-configurable COMMAND that enters a statement skeleton.
+ − 9155 DOCUMENTATION is that of the command, while the variable of the same name,
+ − 9156 which contains the skeleton, has a documentation to that effect.
+ − 9157 INTERACTOR and ELEMENT ... are as defined under `skeleton-insert'." nil 'macro)
+ − 9158
+ − 9159 (autoload 'skeleton-proxy-new "skeleton" "\
+ − 9160 Insert skeleton defined by variable of same name (see `skeleton-insert').
+ − 9161 Prefix ARG allows wrapping around words or regions (see `skeleton-insert').
+ − 9162 If no ARG was given, but the region is visible, ARG defaults to -1 depending
+ − 9163 on `skeleton-autowrap'. An ARG of M-0 will prevent this just for once.
+ − 9164 This command can also be an abbrev expansion (3rd and 4th columns in
+ − 9165 \\[edit-abbrevs] buffer: \"\" command-name).
+ − 9166
+ − 9167 When called as a function, optional first argument STR may also be a string
+ − 9168 which will be the value of `str' whereas the skeleton's interactor is then
+ − 9169 ignored." t nil)
+ − 9170
+ − 9171 (autoload 'skeleton-proxy "skeleton" "\
+ − 9172 Insert skeleton defined by variable of same name (see `skeleton-insert').
+ − 9173 Prefix ARG allows wrapping around words or regions (see `skeleton-insert').
+ − 9174 If no ARG was given, but the region is visible, ARG defaults to -1 depending
+ − 9175 on `skeleton-autowrap'. An ARG of M-0 will prevent this just for once.
+ − 9176 This command can also be an abbrev expansion (3rd and 4th columns in
+ − 9177 \\[edit-abbrevs] buffer: \"\" command-name).
+ − 9178
+ − 9179 When called as a function, optional first argument STR may also be a string
+ − 9180 which will be the value of `str' whereas the skeleton's interactor is then
+ − 9181 ignored." t nil)
+ − 9182
+ − 9183 (autoload 'skeleton-insert "skeleton" "\
+ − 9184 Insert the complex statement skeleton SKELETON describes very concisely.
+ − 9185
+ − 9186 With optional third REGIONS wrap first interesting point (`_') in skeleton
+ − 9187 around next REGIONS words, if REGIONS is positive. If REGIONS is negative,
+ − 9188 wrap REGIONS preceding interregions into first REGIONS interesting positions
+ − 9189 \(successive `_'s) in skeleton. An interregion is the stretch of text between
+ − 9190 two contiguous marked points. If you marked A B C [] (where [] is the cursor)
+ − 9191 in alphabetical order, the 3 interregions are simply the last 3 regions. But
+ − 9192 if you marked B A [] C, the interregions are B-A, A-[], []-C.
+ − 9193
+ − 9194 Optional fourth STR is the value for the variable `str' within the skeleton.
+ − 9195 When this is non-`nil' the interactor gets ignored, and this should be a valid
+ − 9196 skeleton element.
+ − 9197
+ − 9198 SKELETON is made up as (INTERACTOR ELEMENT ...). INTERACTOR may be nil if
+ − 9199 not needed, a prompt-string or an expression for complex read functions.
+ − 9200
+ − 9201 If ELEMENT is a string or a character it gets inserted (see also
+ − 9202 `skeleton-transformation'). Other possibilities are:
+ − 9203
+ − 9204 \\n go to next line and indent according to mode
+ − 9205 _ interesting point, interregion here, point after termination
+ − 9206 > indent line (or interregion if > _) according to major mode
+ − 9207 & do next ELEMENT if previous moved point
+ − 9208 | do next ELEMENT if previous didn't move point
+ − 9209 -num delete num preceding characters (see `skeleton-untabify')
+ − 9210 resume: skipped, continue here if quit is signaled
+ − 9211 nil skipped
+ − 9212
+ − 9213 Further elements can be defined via `skeleton-further-elements'. ELEMENT may
+ − 9214 itself be a SKELETON with an INTERACTOR. The user is prompted repeatedly for
+ − 9215 different inputs. The SKELETON is processed as often as the user enters a
+ − 9216 non-empty string. \\[keyboard-quit] terminates skeleton insertion, but
+ − 9217 continues after `resume:' and positions at `_' if any. If INTERACTOR in such
+ − 9218 a subskeleton is a prompt-string which contains a \".. %s ..\" it is
+ − 9219 formatted with `skeleton-subprompt'. Such an INTERACTOR may also a list of
+ − 9220 strings with the subskeleton being repeated once for each string.
+ − 9221
+ − 9222 Quoted Lisp expressions are evaluated evaluated for their side-effect.
+ − 9223 Other Lisp expressions are evaluated and the value treated as above.
+ − 9224 Note that expressions may not return `t' since this implies an
+ − 9225 endless loop. Modes can define other symbols by locally setting them
+ − 9226 to any valid skeleton element. The following local variables are
+ − 9227 available:
+ − 9228
+ − 9229 str first time: read a string according to INTERACTOR
+ − 9230 then: insert previously read string once more
+ − 9231 help help-form during interaction with the user or `nil'
+ − 9232 input initial input (string or cons with index) while reading str
+ − 9233 v1, v2 local variables for memorizing anything you want
+ − 9234
+ − 9235 When done with skeleton, but before going back to `_'-point call
+ − 9236 `skeleton-end-hook' if that is non-`nil'." nil nil)
+ − 9237
+ − 9238 (autoload 'skeleton-pair-insert-maybe "skeleton" "\
+ − 9239 Insert the character you type ARG times.
+ − 9240
+ − 9241 With no ARG, if `skeleton-pair' is non-nil, pairing can occur. If the region
+ − 9242 is visible the pair is wrapped around it depending on `skeleton-autowrap'.
+ − 9243 Else, if `skeleton-pair-on-word' is non-nil or we are not before or inside a
+ − 9244 word, and if `skeleton-pair-filter' returns nil, pairing is performed.
+ − 9245
+ − 9246 If a match is found in `skeleton-pair-alist', that is inserted, else
+ − 9247 the defaults are used. These are (), [], {}, <> and `' for the
+ − 9248 symmetrical ones, and the same character twice for the others." t nil)
+ − 9249
+ − 9250 ;;;***
+ − 9251
+ − 9252 ;;;### (autoloads (tq-create) "tq" "utils/tq.el")
+ − 9253
+ − 9254 (autoload 'tq-create "tq" "\
+ − 9255 Create and return a transaction queue communicating with PROCESS.
+ − 9256 PROCESS should be a subprocess capable of sending and receiving
+ − 9257 streams of bytes. It may be a local process, or it may be connected
+ − 9258 to a tcp server on another machine." nil nil)
+ − 9259
+ − 9260 ;;;***
+ − 9261
+ − 9262 ;;;### (autoloads (trace-function-background trace-function) "trace" "utils/trace.el")
+ − 9263
+ − 9264 (defvar trace-buffer "*trace-output*" "\
+ − 9265 *Trace output will by default go to that buffer.")
+ − 9266
+ − 9267 (autoload 'trace-function "trace" "\
+ − 9268 Traces FUNCTION with trace output going to BUFFER.
+ − 9269 For every call of FUNCTION Lisp-style trace messages that display argument
+ − 9270 and return values will be inserted into BUFFER. This function generates the
+ − 9271 trace advice for FUNCTION and activates it together with any other advice
+ − 9272 there might be!! The trace BUFFER will popup whenever FUNCTION is called.
+ − 9273 Do not use this to trace functions that switch buffers or do any other
+ − 9274 display oriented stuff, use `trace-function-background' instead." t nil)
+ − 9275
+ − 9276 (autoload 'trace-function-background "trace" "\
+ − 9277 Traces FUNCTION with trace output going quietly to BUFFER.
+ − 9278 For every call of FUNCTION Lisp-style trace messages that display argument
+ − 9279 and return values will be inserted into BUFFER. This function generates the
+ − 9280 trace advice for FUNCTION and activates it together with any other advice
+ − 9281 there might be!! Trace output will quietly go to BUFFER without changing
+ − 9282 the window or buffer configuration at all." t nil)
+ − 9283
+ − 9284 ;;;***
+ − 9285
+ − 9286 ;;;### (autoloads (y-or-n-p-with-timeout yes-or-no-p-with-timeout with-timeout with-timeout-internal) "with-timeout" "utils/with-timeout.el")
+ − 9287
+ − 9288 (autoload 'with-timeout-internal "with-timeout" nil nil nil)
+ − 9289
+ − 9290 (autoload 'with-timeout "with-timeout" "\
+ − 9291 Usage: (with-timeout (seconds &rest timeout-forms) &rest body)
+ − 9292 This is just like progn, but if the given number of seconds expires before
+ − 9293 the body returns, then timeout-forms are evaluated and returned instead.
+ − 9294 The body won't be interrupted in the middle of a computation: the check for
+ − 9295 the timer expiration only occurs when body does a redisplay, or prompts the
+ − 9296 user for input, or calls accept-process-output." nil 'macro)
+ − 9297
+ − 9298 (autoload 'yes-or-no-p-with-timeout "with-timeout" "\
+ − 9299 Just like yes-or-no-p, but will time out after TIMEOUT seconds
+ − 9300 if the user has not yes answered, returning DEFAULT-VALUE." nil nil)
+ − 9301
+ − 9302 (autoload 'y-or-n-p-with-timeout "with-timeout" "\
+ − 9303 Just like y-or-n-p, but will time out after TIMEOUT seconds
+ − 9304 if the user has not yes answered, returning DEFAULT-VALUE." nil nil)
+ − 9305
+ − 9306 ;;;***
+ − 9307
+ − 9308 ;;;### (autoloads (xbm-button-create) "xbm-button" "utils/xbm-button.el")
+ − 9309
+ − 9310 (autoload 'xbm-button-create "xbm-button" "\
+ − 9311 Returns a list of XBM image instantiators for a button displaying TEXT.
+ − 9312 The list is of the form
+ − 9313 (UP DOWN DISABLED)
+ − 9314 where UP, DOWN, and DISABLED are the up, down and disabled image
+ − 9315 instantiators for the button.
+ − 9316
+ − 9317 BORDER-THICKNESS specifies how many pixels should be used for the
+ − 9318 borders on the edges of the buttons. It should be a positive integer,
+ − 9319 or 0 to mean no border." nil nil)
+ − 9320
+ − 9321 ;;;***
+ − 9322
+ − 9323 ;;;### (autoloads (xpm-button-create) "xpm-button" "utils/xpm-button.el")
+ − 9324
+ − 9325 (autoload 'xpm-button-create "xpm-button" "\
+ − 9326 Returns a list of XPM image instantiators for a button displaying TEXT.
+ − 9327 The list is of the form
+ − 9328 (UP DOWN DISABLED)
+ − 9329 where UP, DOWN, and DISABLED are the up, down and disabled image
+ − 9330 instantiators for the button.
+ − 9331
+ − 9332 SHADOW-THICKNESS specifies how many pixels should be used for the
+ − 9333 shadows on the edges of the buttons. It should be a positive integer,
+ − 9334 or 0 to mean no shadows on the edges.
+ − 9335 FG-COLOR is the color used to display the text. It should be a string.
+ − 9336 BG-COLOR is the background color the text will be displayed upon.
+ − 9337 It should be a string." nil nil)
+ − 9338
+ − 9339 ;;;***
+ − 9340
+ − 9341 ;;;### (autoloads (viper-mode) "viper" "viper/viper.el")
+ − 9342
+ − 9343 (autoload 'viper-mode "viper" "\
+ − 9344 Turn on Viper emulation of Vi." t nil)
+ − 9345
+ − 9346 (defalias 'vip-mode 'viper-mode)
+ − 9347
+ − 9348 ;;;***
+ − 9349
+ − 9350 ;;;### (autoloads (vm-easy-menu-create-keymaps vm-easy-menu-define) "vm-easymenu" "vm/vm-easymenu.el")
+ − 9351
+ − 9352 (autoload 'vm-easy-menu-define "vm-easymenu" "\
+ − 9353 Define a menu bar submenu in maps MAPS, according to MENU.
+ − 9354 The menu keymap is stored in symbol SYMBOL, both as its value
+ − 9355 and as its function definition. DOC is used as the doc string for SYMBOL.
+ − 9356
+ − 9357 The first element of MENU must be a string. It is the menu bar item name.
+ − 9358 The rest of the elements are menu items.
+ − 9359
+ − 9360 A menu item is usually a vector of three elements: [NAME CALLBACK ENABLE]
+ − 9361
+ − 9362 NAME is a string--the menu item name.
+ − 9363
+ − 9364 CALLBACK is a command to run when the item is chosen,
+ − 9365 or a list to evaluate when the item is chosen.
+ − 9366
+ − 9367 ENABLE is an expression; the item is enabled for selection
+ − 9368 whenever this expression's value is non-nil.
+ − 9369
+ − 9370 Alternatively, a menu item may have the form:
+ − 9371
+ − 9372 [ NAME CALLBACK [ KEYWORD ARG ] ... ]
+ − 9373
+ − 9374 Where KEYWORD is one of the symbol defined below.
+ − 9375
+ − 9376 :keys KEYS
+ − 9377
+ − 9378 KEYS is a string; a complex keyboard equivalent to this menu item.
+ − 9379 This is normally not needed because keyboard equivalents are usually
+ − 9380 computed automatically.
+ − 9381
+ − 9382 :active ENABLE
+ − 9383
+ − 9384 ENABLE is an expression; the item is enabled for selection
+ − 9385 whenever this expression's value is non-nil.
+ − 9386
+ − 9387 :suffix NAME
+ − 9388
+ − 9389 NAME is a string; the name of an argument to CALLBACK.
+ − 9390
+ − 9391 :style
+ − 9392
+ − 9393 STYLE is a symbol describing the type of menu item. The following are
+ − 9394 defined:
+ − 9395
+ − 9396 toggle: A checkbox.
+ − 9397 Currently just prepend the name with the string \"Toggle \".
+ − 9398 radio: A radio button.
+ − 9399 nil: An ordinary menu item.
+ − 9400
+ − 9401 :selected SELECTED
+ − 9402
+ − 9403 SELECTED is an expression; the checkbox or radio button is selected
+ − 9404 whenever this expression's value is non-nil.
+ − 9405 Currently just disable radio buttons, no effect on checkboxes.
+ − 9406
+ − 9407 A menu item can be a string. Then that string appears in the menu as
+ − 9408 unselectable text. A string consisting solely of hyphens is displayed
+ − 9409 as a solid horizontal line.
+ − 9410
+ − 9411 A menu item can be a list. It is treated as a submenu.
+ − 9412 The first element should be the submenu name. That's used as the
+ − 9413 menu item in the top-level menu. The cdr of the submenu list
+ − 9414 is a list of menu items, as above." nil 'macro)
+ − 9415
+ − 9416 (autoload 'vm-easy-menu-create-keymaps "vm-easymenu" nil nil nil)
+ − 9417
+ − 9418 ;;;***
+ − 9419
+ − 9420 ;;;### (autoloads (w3-use-hotlist) "w3-hot" "w3/w3-hot.el")
+ − 9421
+ − 9422 (autoload 'w3-use-hotlist "w3-hot" "\
+ − 9423 Possibly go to a link in your W3/Mosaic hotlist.
+ − 9424 This is part of the emacs World Wide Web browser. It will prompt for
+ − 9425 one of the items in your 'hotlist'. A hotlist is a list of often
+ − 9426 visited or interesting items you have found on the World Wide Web." t nil)
+ − 9427
+ − 9428 ;;;***
+ − 9429
+ − 9430 ;;;### (autoloads (w3-follow-link w3-follow-link-other-frame w3-do-setup w3 w3-preview-this-buffer w3-batch-fetch w3-follow-url-at-point w3-follow-url-at-point-other-frame w3-maybe-follow-link w3-maybe-follow-link-mouse w3-fetch w3-fetch-other-frame w3-find-file w3-open-local) "w3" "w3/w3.el")
+ − 9431
+ − 9432 (autoload 'w3-open-local "w3" "\
+ − 9433 Find a local file, and interpret it as a hypertext document.
+ − 9434 It will prompt for an existing file or directory, and retrieve it as a
+ − 9435 hypertext document. If it is a directory, and url-use-hypertext-dired
+ − 9436 is non-nil, then an HTML directory listing is created on the fly.
+ − 9437 Otherwise, dired-mode is used to visit the buffer." t nil)
+ − 9438
+ − 9439 (autoload 'w3-find-file "w3" "\
+ − 9440 Find a local file, and interpret it as a hypertext document.
+ − 9441 It will prompt for an existing file or directory, and retrieve it as a
+ − 9442 hypertext document. If it is a directory, and url-use-hypertext-dired
+ − 9443 is non-nil, then an HTML directory listing is created on the fly.
+ − 9444 Otherwise, dired-mode is used to visit the buffer." t nil)
+ − 9445
+ − 9446 (autoload 'w3-fetch-other-frame "w3" "\
+ − 9447 Attempt to follow the hypertext reference under point in a new frame.
+ − 9448 With prefix-arg P, ignore viewers and dump the link straight
+ − 9449 to disk." t nil)
+ − 9450
+ − 9451 (autoload 'w3-fetch "w3" "\
+ − 9452 Retrieve a document over the World Wide Web.
+ − 9453 The World Wide Web is a global hypertext system started by CERN in
+ − 9454 Switzerland in 1991.
+ − 9455
+ − 9456 The document should be specified by its fully specified
+ − 9457 Uniform Resource Locator. The document will be parsed, printed, or
+ − 9458 passed to an external viewer as appropriate. Variable
+ − 9459 `mm-mime-info' specifies viewers for particular file types." t nil)
+ − 9460
+ − 9461 (autoload 'w3-maybe-follow-link-mouse "w3" "\
+ − 9462 Maybe follow a hypertext link under point.
+ − 9463 If there is no link under point, this will try using
+ − 9464 url-get-url-at-point" t nil)
+ − 9465
+ − 9466 (autoload 'w3-maybe-follow-link "w3" "\
+ − 9467 Maybe follow a hypertext link under point.
+ − 9468 If there is no link under point, this will try using
+ − 9469 url-get-url-at-point" t nil)
+ − 9470
+ − 9471 (autoload 'w3-follow-url-at-point-other-frame "w3" "\
+ − 9472 Follow the URL under PT, defaults to link under (point)" t nil)
+ − 9473
+ − 9474 (autoload 'w3-follow-url-at-point "w3" "\
+ − 9475 Follow the URL under PT, defaults to link under (point)" t nil)
+ − 9476
+ − 9477 (autoload 'w3-batch-fetch "w3" "\
+ − 9478 Fetch all the URLs on the command line and save them to files in
+ − 9479 the current directory. The first argument after the -f w3-batch-fetch
+ − 9480 on the command line should be a string specifying how to save the
+ − 9481 information retrieved. If it is \"html\", then the page will be
+ − 9482 unformatted when it is written to disk. If it is \"text\", then the
+ − 9483 page will be formatted before it is written to disk. If it is
+ − 9484 \"binary\" it will not mess with the file extensions, and just save
+ − 9485 the data in raw binary format. If none of those, the default is
+ − 9486 \"text\", and the first argument is treated as a normal URL." nil nil)
+ − 9487
+ − 9488 (autoload 'w3-preview-this-buffer "w3" "\
+ − 9489 See what this buffer will look like when its formatted as HTML.
+ − 9490 HTML is the HyperText Markup Language used by the World Wide Web to
+ − 9491 specify formatting for text. More information on HTML can be found at
+ − 9492 ftp.w3.org:/pub/www/doc." t nil)
+ − 9493
+ − 9494 (autoload 'w3 "w3" "\
+ − 9495 Retrieve the default World Wide Web home page.
+ − 9496 The World Wide Web is a global hypertext system started by CERN in
+ − 9497 Switzerland in 1991.
+ − 9498
+ − 9499 The home page is specified by the variable w3-default-homepage. The
+ − 9500 document should be specified by its fully specified Uniform Resource
+ − 9501 Locator. The document will be parsed as HTML (if appropriate) and
+ − 9502 displayed in a new buffer." t nil)
+ − 9503
+ − 9504 (autoload 'w3-do-setup "w3" "\
+ − 9505 Do setup - this is to avoid conflict with user settings when W3 is
+ − 9506 dumped with emacs." nil nil)
+ − 9507
+ − 9508 (autoload 'w3-follow-link-other-frame "w3" "\
+ − 9509 Attempt to follow the hypertext reference under point in a new frame.
+ − 9510 With prefix-arg P, ignore viewers and dump the link straight
+ − 9511 to disk." nil nil)
+ − 9512
+ − 9513 (autoload 'w3-follow-link "w3" "\
+ − 9514 Attempt to follow the hypertext reference under point.
+ − 9515 With prefix-arg P, ignore viewers and dump the link straight
+ − 9516 to disk." t nil)
+ − 9517
+ − 9518 ;;;***
+ − 9519
+ − 9520 ;;;### (autoloads (font-menu-weight-constructor font-menu-size-constructor font-menu-family-constructor reset-device-font-menus) "x-font-menu" "x11/x-font-menu.el")
+ − 9521
+ − 9522 (defvar font-menu-ignore-scaled-fonts t "\
+ − 9523 *If non-nil, then the font menu will try to show only bitmap fonts.")
+ − 9524
+ − 9525 (defvar font-menu-this-frame-only-p nil "\
+ − 9526 *If non-nil, then changing the default font from the font menu will only
+ − 9527 affect one frame instead of all frames.")
+ − 9528
+ − 9529 (fset 'install-font-menus 'reset-device-font-menus)
+ − 9530
+ − 9531 (autoload 'reset-device-font-menus "x-font-menu" "\
+ − 9532 Generates the `Font', `Size', and `Weight' submenus for the Options menu.
+ − 9533 This is run the first time that a font-menu is needed for each device.
+ − 9534 If you don't like the lazy invocation of this function, you can add it to
+ − 9535 `create-device-hook' and that will make the font menus respond more quickly
+ − 9536 when they are selected for the first time. If you add fonts to your system,
+ − 9537 or if you change your font path, you can call this to re-initialize the menus." nil nil)
+ − 9538
+ − 9539 (autoload 'font-menu-family-constructor "x-font-menu" nil nil nil)
+ − 9540
+ − 9541 (autoload 'font-menu-size-constructor "x-font-menu" nil nil nil)
+ − 9542
+ − 9543 (autoload 'font-menu-weight-constructor "x-font-menu" nil nil nil)
+ − 9544
+ − 9545 ;;;***
